Import sources from 2011-03-30 iso image - sys/man

169 files changed, 27859 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/sys/man/1/0intro b/sys/man/1/0intro
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..873fc2b87
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/0intro
@@ -0,0 +1,397 @@
+.TH INTRO 1
+.SH NAME
+intro \- introduction to Plan 9
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Plan 9 is a distributed computing environment assembled from
+separate machines acting as terminals,
+CPU servers, and file servers.
+A user works at a terminal, running a window system on a raster display.
+Some windows are connected to CPU servers; the intent is that heavy computing
+should be done in those windows but it is also possible to compute on the terminal.
+A separate file server provides file storage for terminals and
+CPU servers alike.
+.SS Name Spaces
+In Plan 9, almost all objects look like files.
+The object retrieved by a given name is determined by a mapping called the
+.IR "name space" .
+A quick tour of the standard name space is in
+.IR namespace (4).
+Every program running in Plan 9 belongs to a
+.I process group
+(see
+.I rfork
+in
+.IR fork (2)),
+and the name space for each process group can be independently
+customized.
+.PP
+A name space is hierarchically structured.
+A full file name (also called a
+.IR "full path name" )
+has the form
+.IP
+.RI / e1 / e2 /.../ en
+.PP
+This represents an object in a tree of files: the tree has a root,
+represented by the first
+.LR / ;
+the root has a child file named
+.IR e1 ,
+which in turn has child
+.IR e2 ,
+and so on; the descendent
+.I en
+is the object represented by the path name.
+.PP
+There are a number of Plan 9
+.I services
+available, each of which provides a tree of files.
+A name space is built by
+.I binding
+services (or subtrees of services) to names in the name-space-so-far.
+Typically, a user's home file server is bound to the root of the name space,
+and other services are bound to conventionally named subdirectories.
+For example, there is a service resident in the operating system for accessing
+hardware devices and that is bound to
+.B /dev
+by convention.
+Kernel services have names (outside the name space) that are a
+.L #
+sign followed by a single letter;
+for example,
+.B #c
+is conventionally bound to
+.BR /dev .
+.PP
+Plan 9 has
+.IR "union directories" :
+directories made of several directories all bound to the
+same name.
+The directories making up a union directory are ordered in a list.
+When the bindings are made
+(see
+.IR bind (1)),
+flags specify whether a newly bound member goes at the head or the tail of the list
+or completely replaces the list.
+To look up a name in a union directory, each member directory is searched
+in list order until the name is found.
+A bind
+flag specifies whether file creation is allowed in a member directory:
+a file created in the union directory goes in
+the first member directory in list order that allows creation, if any.
+.PP
+The glue that holds Plan 9 together is a network protocol called
+.IR 9P ,
+described in section 5 of this manual.
+All Plan 9 servers read and respond to 9P requests to navigate through
+a file tree and to perform operations such as reading and writing
+files within the tree.
+.SS Booting
+When a terminal is powered on or reset,
+it must be told the name of a file server to boot from,
+the operating system kernel to boot,
+and a user name and password.
+How this dialog proceeds is environment- and machine-dependent.
+Once it is complete,
+the terminal loads a Plan 9 kernel,
+which sets some environment variables (see
+.IR env (3))
+and builds an initial name space.
+See
+.IR namespace (4),
+.IR boot (8),
+and
+.IR init (8)
+for details, but some important aspects of the initial name space are:
+.IP \(bu
+The environment variable
+.B $cputype
+is set to the name of the kernel's CPU's architecture: one of
+.BR alpha ,
+.BR mips ,
+.BR sparc ,
+.B power
+(Power PC),
+.BR 386
+(386, 486, Pentium, ...)
+etc.
+The environment variable
+.B $objtype
+is initially the same as
+.BR $cputype .
+.IP \(bu
+The environment variable
+.B $terminal
+is set to a description of the machine running the kernel,
+such as
+.BR "generic pc" .
+Sometimes the middle word of
+.B $terminal
+encodes the file from which the kernel is booted;
+e.g.
+.B "alpha apc axp
+is bootstrapped from
+.BR /alpha/bapc .
+.IP \(bu
+The environment variable
+.B $service
+is set to
+.BR terminal .
+(Other ways of accessing Plan 9 may set
+.B $service
+to one of
+.BR cpu ,
+.BR con ,
+or
+.BR rx .)
+.IP \(bu
+The environment variable
+.B $user
+is set to the name of the user who booted the terminal.
+The environment variable
+.B $home
+is set to that user's home directory.
+.IP \(bu
+.B /$cputype/bin
+and
+.B /rc/bin
+are unioned into
+.BR /bin .
+.PD
+.PP
+After booting, the terminal runs the command interpreter,
+.IR rc (1),
+on
+.B /usr/$user/lib/profile
+after moving to the user's home directory.
+.PP
+Here is a typical profile:
+.IP
+.EX
+bind -a $home/bin/rc /bin
+bind -a $home/bin/$cputype /bin
+bind -c $home/tmp /tmp
+font = /lib/font/bit/pelm/euro.9.font
+upas/fs
+switch($service){
+case terminal
+	plumber
+	prompt=('term% ' '	')
+	exec rio -f $font
+case cpu
+	bind /mnt/term/dev/cons /dev/cons
+	bind /mnt/term/dev/consctl /dev/consctl
+	bind -a /mnt/term/mnt/wsys /dev
+	prompt=('cpu% ' '	')
+	news
+case con
+	prompt=('cpu% ' '	')
+	news
+}
+.EE
+.PD
+.PP
+The first three lines replace
+.B /tmp
+with a
+.B tmp
+in the user's home directory
+and union personal
+.B bin
+directories with
+.BR /bin ,
+to be searched after the standard
+.B bin
+directories.
+The next starts the mail file system; see
+.IR mail (1).
+Then different things happen, depending on the
+.B $service
+environment variable,
+such as running the window system
+.IR rio (1)
+on a terminal.
+.PP
+To do heavy work such as compiling, the
+.IR cpu (1)
+command connects a window to a CPU server;
+the same environment variables are set (to different values)
+and the same profile is run.
+The initial directory is the current directory in the terminal window
+where
+.I cpu
+was typed.
+The value of
+.B $service
+will be
+.BR cpu ,
+so the second arm of the profile switch is executed.
+The root of the terminal's name space is accessible through
+.BR /mnt/term ,
+so the
+.I bind
+is a way of making the window system's graphics interface (see
+.IR draw (3))
+available to programs running on the CPU server.
+The
+.IR news (1)
+command reports current Plan 9 affairs.
+.PP
+The third possible service type,
+.BR con ,
+is set when the CPU server is called from a non-Plan-9 machine,
+such as through
+.I telnet
+(see
+.IR con (1)).
+.SS Using Plan 9
+The user commands of Plan 9 are reminiscent of those in Research Unix, version 10.
+There are a number of differences, however.
+.PP
+The standard shell is
+.IR rc (1),
+not the Bourne shell.
+The most noticeable differences appear only when programming and macro processing.
+.PP
+The character-delete character is backspace, and the line-kill character is
+control-U; these cannot be changed.
+.PP
+DEL is the interrupt character: typing it sends an interrupt to processes running in that window.
+See
+.IR keyboard (6)
+for instructions on typing characters like DEL on the various keyboards.
+.PP
+If a program dies with something like an address error, it enters a `Broken'
+state.  It lingers, available for debugging with
+.IR db (1)
+or
+.IR acid (1).
+.I Broke
+(see
+.IR kill (1))
+cleans up broken processes.
+.PP
+The standard editor is one of
+.IR acme (1)
+or
+.IR sam (1).
+There is a variant of
+.I sam
+that permits running the file-manipulating part of
+.I sam
+on a non-Plan-9 system:
+.IP
+.EX
+sam -r tcp!kremvax
+.EE
+.PP
+For historical reasons,
+.I sam
+uses a tab stop setting of 8 spaces, while the other editors and window systems use 4 spaces.
+These defaults can be overridden by setting the value of the environment variable
+.B $tabstop
+to the desired number of spaces per tab.
+.PP
+Machine names may be prefixed by the network name,
+here
+.BR tcp ;
+and
+.B net
+for the system default.
+.PP
+Login connections and remote execution on non-Plan-9 machines are usually
+done by saying, for example,
+.IP
+.EX
+con kremvax
+.EE
+.PP
+or
+.IP
+.EX
+rx deepthought chess
+.EE
+.PP
+(see
+.IR con (1)).
+.PP
+.I 9fs 
+connects to file systems of remote systems
+(see
+.IR srv (4)).
+For example,
+.IP
+.EX
+9fs kremvax
+.EE
+.PP
+sets things up so that the root of
+.BR kremvax 's
+file tree is visible locally in
+.BR /n/kremvax .
+.PP
+.IR Faces (1)
+gives graphical notification of arriving mail.
+.PP
+The Plan 9 file server has an integrated backup facility.
+The command
+.IP
+.EX
+9fs dump
+.EE
+.PP
+binds to
+.B /n/dump
+a tree containing the daily backups on the file server.
+The dump tree has years as top level file names, and month-day
+as next level file names.
+For example,
+.B /n/dump/2000/0120
+is the root of the file system as it appeared at dump time on
+January 20, 2000.
+If more than one dump is taken on the same day, dumps after
+the first have an extra digit.
+To recover the version of this file as it was on June 15, 1999,
+.IP
+.EX
+cp /n/dump/1999/0615/sys/man/1/0intro .
+.EE
+.PP
+or use
+.IR yesterday (1).
+.SH SEE ALSO
+This section for general publicly accessible commands.
+.br
+Section (2) for library functions, including system calls.
+.br
+Section (3) for kernel devices (accessed via
+.IR bind (1)).
+.br
+Section (4) for file services (accessed via
+.IR mount ).
+.br
+Section (5) for the Plan 9 file protocol.
+.br
+Section (6) for file formats.
+.br
+Section (7) for databases and database access programs.
+.br
+Section (8) for things related to administering Plan 9.
+.br
+.B /sys/doc
+for copies of papers referenced in this manual.
+.PP
+The back of this volume has a permuted index to aid searches.
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+Upon termination each program returns a string called the
+.IR "exit status" .
+It was either supplied by a call to
+.IR exits (2)
+or was written to the command's
+.BI /proc/ pid /note
+file
+(see
+.IR proc (3)),
+causing an abnormal termination.
+The empty string is customary for successful execution;
+a non-empty string gives a clue to the failure of the command.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/2a b/sys/man/1/2a
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..75a92d17b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/2a
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+.TH 2A 1 
+.SH NAME
+0a, 1a, 2a, 5a, 6a, 7a, 8a, ka, qa, va \- assemblers
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B 2a
+[
+.I option ...
+]
+[
+.I name ...
+]
+.br
+etc.
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These programs
+assemble the named files into object files
+for the corresponding architectures; see
+.IR 2c (1)
+for the correspondence between an architecture and the character
+.RB ( 1 ,
+.RB 2 ,
+etc.) that specifies it.
+The assemblers handle the most common C preprocessor directives and the associated
+command-line options
+.BR -D
+and
+.BR -I .
+Other options are:
+.TP
+.BI -o " obj"
+Place output in file
+.I obj
+(allowed only if there is just one input file).
+Default is to take the last element of the input path name,
+strip any trailing
+.BR .s ,
+and append
+.RI . O ,
+where
+.I O
+is first letter of the assembler's name.
+.SH FILES
+The directory
+.B /sys/include
+is searched for include files after
+machine-dependent files in
+.BR /$objtype/include .
+.SH SOURCE
+.BR /sys/src/cmd/2a ,
+etc.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR 2c (1),
+.IR 2l (1).
+.PP
+Rob Pike, ``A manual for the Plan 9 assembler''
+.SH BUGS
+The list of assemblers given above is only partial,
+not all architectures are supported on all systems,
+some have been retired and some
+are provided by third parties.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/2c b/sys/man/1/2c
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..cb663e306
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/2c
@@ -0,0 +1,497 @@
+.TH 2C 1
+.SH NAME
+0c, 1c, 2c, 5c, 6c, 7c, 8c, kc, qc, vc \- C compilers
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B 2c
+[
+.I option ...
+]
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.br
+etc.
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These commands compile the named C
+.I files
+into object files for the corresponding architecture.
+If there are multiple C
+.IR files ,
+the compilers will attempt to keep
+.B $NPROC
+compilations running concurrently.
+Associated with each compiler is a string
+.IR objtype ,
+for example
+.TF "6c amd64 "
+.PD
+.TP
+.B "0c spim
+little-endian MIPS 3000 family
+.TP
+.B "1c 68000
+Motorola MC68000
+.TP
+.B "2c 68020
+Motorola MC68020
+.TP
+.B "5c arm
+little-endian ARM
+.TP
+.B "6c amd64
+AMD64 and compatibles (e.g., Intel EM64T)
+.TP
+.B "7c alpha
+Digital Alpha APX
+.TP
+.B "8c 386
+Intel i386, i486, Pentium, etc.
+.TP
+.B "kc sparc
+Sun SPARC
+.TP
+.B "qc power
+Power PC
+.TP
+.B "vc mips
+big-endian MIPS 3000 family
+.PP
+The compilers handle most preprocessing directives themselves; a complete
+preprocessor is available in
+.IR cpp (1),
+which must be run separately.
+.PP
+Let the first letter of the compiler name be
+.IR O =
+.BR 0 ,
+.BR 1 ,
+.BR 2 ,
+.BR 5 ,
+.BR 6 ,
+.BR 7 ,
+.BR 8 ,
+.BR k ,
+.BR q ,
+or
+.BR v .
+The output object files end in
+.RI . O .
+The letter is also the prefix of related programs:
+.IB O a
+is the assembler,
+.IB O l
+is the loader.
+Plan 9 conventionally sets the
+.B $objtype
+environment variable to the
+.I objtype
+string appropriate to the current machine's type.
+Plan 9 also conventionally has
+.RI / objtype
+directories, which contain among other things:
+.BR include ,
+for machine-dependent include files;
+.BR lib ,
+for public object code libraries;
+.BR bin ,
+for public programs;
+and
+.BR mkfile ,
+for preconditioning
+.IR mk (1).
+.PP
+The compiler options are:
+.TF Dname
+.PD
+.TP
+.BI -o " obj"
+Place output in file
+.I obj
+(allowed only if there is just one input file).
+Default is to take the last element of the input file name,
+strip any trailing
+.BR .c ,
+and append
+.RI . O .
+.TP
+.B -w
+Print warning messages about unused variables, etc.
+.TP
+.B -B
+Accept functions without a new-style
+ANSI C function prototype.
+By default, the compilers reject functions
+used without a defined prototype,
+although ANSI C permits them.
+.TP
+.BI -D\*S name=def
+.br
+.ns
+.TP
+.BI -D \*Sname
+Define the
+.I name
+to the preprocessor,
+as if by
+.LR #define .
+If no definition is given, the name is defined as
+.LR 1 .
+.TP
+.BI -F
+Enable type-checking of calls to
+.IR print (2)
+and other formatted print routines.  See the discussion
+of extensions, below.
+.TP
+.BI -I \*Sdir
+An
+.L #include
+file whose name does not begin with
+slash
+or is enclosed in double quotes
+is always
+sought first in the directory
+of the
+.I file
+argument.  If this fails,
+the
+.I -.
+flag is given or the name is enclosed in
+.BR <> ,
+it is then sought
+in directories named in
+.B -I
+options,
+then in
+.BR /sys/include ,
+and finally in
+.BR /$objtype/include .
+.TP
+.B -.
+Suppress the automatic searching for include files in
+the directory of the file argument.
+.TP
+.B -N
+Suppress automatic registerization and optimization.
+.TP
+.B -S
+Print an assembly language version of the object code
+on standard output as well as generating the
+.RI . O
+file.
+.TP
+.B -T
+Pass type signatures on all external and global entities.
+The signature is based on the C
+.B signof
+operator.
+See
+.IR dynld (2).
+.TP
+.B -V
+By default, the compilers are non-standardly lax about type equality between
+.B void*
+values and other pointers; this flag requires ANSI C conformance.
+.TP
+.B -p
+Invoke a standard ANSI C preprocessor before compiling.
+.TP
+.B -a
+Instead of compiling, print on standard output acid functions (see
+.IR acid (1))
+for examining structures declared in the source files.
+.TP
+.B -aa
+Like
+.B -a
+except suppress information about structures
+declared in included header files.
+.TP
+.B -n
+When used with
+.B -a
+or
+.BR -aa ,
+places acid functions in
+.IB file .acid
+for input
+.IB file .c ,
+and not on standard output.
+.PP
+The compilers support several extensions to ANSI C:
+.TF \|
+.PD
+.TP
+\-
+A structure or union may contain unnamed substructures and subunions.
+The fields of the substructures or
+subunions can then be used as if they were members of the parent
+structure or union (the resolution of a name conflict is unspecified).
+When a pointer to the outer structure or union is used in a context
+that is only legal for the unnamed substructure, the compiler promotes
+the type and adjusts the pointer value to point at the substructure.
+If the unnamed structure or union is of a type with a tag name specified by a
+.B typedef
+statement,
+the unnamed structure or union can be explicitly referenced
+by <struct variable>.<tagname>.
+.TP
+\-
+A structure value can be formed with an expression such as
+.EX
+    (struct S){v1, v2, v3}
+.EE
+where the list elements are values for the fields of struct
+.BR S .
+.TP
+\-
+Array initializers can specify the indices of the array in square
+brackets, as
+.EX
+    int a[] = { [3] 1, [10] 5 };
+.EE
+which initializes the third and tenth elements of the eleven-element array
+.BR a .
+.TP
+\-
+Structure initializers can specify the structure element by using the name
+following a period, as
+.EX
+    struct { int x; int y; } s = { .y 1, .x 5 };
+.EE
+which initializes elements
+.B y
+and then
+.B x
+of the structure
+.BR s .
+These forms also accept the new ANSI C notation, which includes an equal sign:
+.EX
+    int a[] = { [3] = 1, [10] = 5 };
+    struct { int x; int y; } s = { .y = 1, .x = 5 };
+.EE
+.TP
+\-
+A global variable can be dedicated to a register
+by declaring it
+.B "extern register"
+in
+.I all
+modules and libraries.
+.TP
+\-
+A
+.B #pragma
+of the form
+.EX
+    #pragma lib "libbio.a"
+.EE
+records that the program needs to be loaded with file
+.BR /$objtype/lib/libbio.a ;
+such lines, typically placed in library header files, obviate the
+.B -l
+option of the loaders.  To help identify files in non-standard directories,
+within the file names in the
+.B #pragmas
+the string
+.B $M
+represents the name of the architecture
+(e.g.,
+.BR mips )
+and
+.B $O
+represents its identifying character
+(e.g.,
+.BR v ).
+.TP
+\-
+A
+.B #pragma
+of the form
+.EX
+    #pragma varargck argpos error 2
+.EE
+tells the compiler that the second argument to
+.B error
+is a
+.BR print -like
+format string (see
+.IR print (2))
+that identifies the handling of subsequent arguments.
+The
+.B #pragma
+.EX
+    #pragma varargck type "s" char*
+.EE
+says that the format verb
+.B s
+processes an argument of type
+.BR char *.
+The
+.B #pragma
+.EX
+    #pragma varargck flag 'c'
+.EE
+says that
+.B c
+is a flag character.
+These
+.B #pragmas
+are used, if the
+.B -F
+option is enabled, to type-check calls to
+.B print
+and other such routines.
+.TP
+\-
+A
+.B #pragma
+with any of the following forms:
+.EX
+    #pragma incomplete \fItype\fP
+    #pragma incomplete struct \fItag\fP
+    #pragma incomplete union \fItag\fP
+.EE
+where
+.I type
+is a
+.BR typedef 'd
+name for a structure or union type, and
+.I tag
+is a structure or union tag,
+tells the compiler that
+the corresponding type
+should have its signature calculated as an incomplete type
+even if it is subsequently fully defined.
+This allows the type signature mechanism to work in the presence
+of opaque types declared in header files, with their full definitions
+visible only to the code which manipulates them.
+With some imported software it might be necessary to turn off the
+signature generation completely for a large body of code (typically
+at the start and end of a particular include file).
+If
+.I type
+is the word
+.BR _off_ ,
+signature generation is turned off; if
+.I type
+is the word
+.BR _on_ ,
+the compiler will generate signatures.
+.TP
+\-
+The C++ comment
+.RB ( //
+to end of line)
+is accepted as well as the normal
+convention of
+.B /*
+.BR */ .
+.TP
+\-
+The compilers accept
+.B long
+.B long
+variables as a 64-bit type.
+The standard header typedefs this to
+.BR vlong .
+Arithmetic on
+.B  vlong
+values is usually emulated by a run-time library,
+though in at least
+.IR 8c ,
+only division and modulus use the run-time library
+and the other operators generate in-line code
+(and
+.I uvlong-expression
+.I divison-or-modulus
+.BI "(1<<" constant )
+will turn into in-line bit operations,
+as is done for shorter
+.I unsigned
+expressions).
+.SH EXAMPLE
+For the 68020, produce a program
+.B prog
+from C files
+.BR main.c
+and
+.BR sub.c :
+.IP
+.EX
+2c -FVw main.c sub.c
+2l -o prog main.2 sub.2
+.EE
+.SH FILES
+.TF /$objtype/include
+.TP
+.B /sys/include
+system area for machine-independent
+.B #include
+directives.
+.TP
+.B /$objtype/include
+system area for machine-dependent
+.B #include
+directives.
+.SH SOURCE
+.TF /sys/src/cmd/2c,\ etc.
+.TP
+.B /sys/src/cmd/cc
+machine-independent part
+.TP
+.BR /sys/src/cmd/2c ,\ etc.
+machine-dependent part
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR 2a (1),
+.IR 2l (1),
+.IR cpp (1),
+.IR mk (1),
+.IR nm (1),
+.IR pcc (1),
+.IR db (1),
+.IR acid (1)
+.\" .IR ansitize (1)
+.PP
+Rob Pike,
+``How to Use the Plan 9 C Compiler''
+.SH BUGS
+The list of compilers given above is only partial,
+not all architectures are supported on all systems,
+some have been retired and some
+are provided by third parties.
+.PP
+The default preprocessor only handles
+.LR #define ,
+.LR #include ,
+.LR #undef ,
+.LR #ifdef ,
+.LR #line ,
+and
+.LR #ifndef .
+For a full ANSI preprocessor, use
+the
+.B p
+option.
+.PP
+The default search order for include files
+differs to that of
+.IR cpp (1).
+.PP
+Some features of C99, the 1999 ANSI C standard,
+are implemented.
+.PP
+.B switch
+expressions may not be either signedness of
+.B vlong
+on 32-bit architectures
+.RI ( 8c
+at least).
+.PP
+The implementation of
+.B vlong
+assignment can use a static location
+and this can be disturbed by interrupts
+(e.g., notes)
+.RI ( 8c
+at least).
diff --git a/sys/man/1/2l b/sys/man/1/2l
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..f89b0e521
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/2l
@@ -0,0 +1,220 @@
+.TH 2L 1 
+.SH NAME
+0l, 1l, 2l, 5l, 6l, 7l, 8l, kl, ql, vl \- loaders
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B 2l
+[
+.I option ...
+]
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.br
+etc.
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These commands
+load the named
+.I files
+into executable files for the corresponding architectures; see
+.IR 2c (1)
+for the correspondence between an architecture and the character
+.RB ( 1 ,
+.RB 2 ,
+etc.) that specifies it.
+The files should be object files or libraries (archives of object files)
+for the appropriate architecture.
+Also, a name like
+.BI -l ext
+represents the library
+.BI lib ext .a
+in
+.BR /$objtype/lib ,
+where
+.I objtype
+is one of
+.BR 68000 ,
+etc. as listed in
+.IR 2c (1).
+The libraries must have tables of contents
+(see
+.IR ar (1)).
+.PP
+In practice, 
+.B -l
+options are rarely necessary as the header files for
+the libraries cause their archives to be included automatically in the load
+(see
+.IR 2c (1)).
+For example, any program that includes header file
+.B libc.h
+causes the loader
+to search the C library
+.BR /$objtype/lib/libc.a .
+Also, the loader creates an undefined symbol
+.B _main
+(or
+.B _mainp
+if profiling is enabled) to force loading of the
+startup linkage from the C library.
+.PP
+The order of search to resolve undefined symbols is to load all files and libraries
+mentioned explicitly on the command line, and then to resolve remaining symbols
+by searching in topological order
+libraries mentioned in header files included by files already loaded.
+When scanning such libraries, the algorithm is to scan each library repeatedly until
+no new undefined symbols are picked up, then to start on the next library.  Thus if library
+.I A
+needs
+.I B
+which needs
+.I A
+again, it may be necessary to mention
+.I A
+explicitly so it will be read a second time.
+.PP
+The loader options are:
+.TP 0.75i
+.B -l
+(As a bare option.)
+Suppress the default loading of the startup linkage and libraries
+specified by header files.
+.TP
+.BI -o " out"
+Place output in file
+.IR out .
+Default is
+.IB O .out\f1,
+where
+.I O
+is the first letter of the loader name.
+.TP
+.B -p
+Insert profiling code into the executable output; no special action is needed
+during compilation or assembly.
+.TP
+.B -e
+Insert (\fLe\fPmbedded) tracing code into the executable output; no special action is needed
+during compilation or assembly.
+The added code calls
+.L _tracein
+at function entries
+and
+.L _traceout
+at function exits.
+.TP
+.B -s
+Strip the symbol tables from the output file.
+.TP
+.B -a
+Print the object code in assembly language, with addresses.
+.TP
+.B -v
+Print debugging output that annotates the activities of the load.
+.TP
+.BI -M
+.RI ( Kl
+only) Generate instructions rather than calls to emulation routines
+for multiply and divide.
+.TP
+.BI -E symbol
+The entry point for the binary is
+.I symbol
+(default
+.BR _main ;
+.B _mainp
+under
+.BR -p ).
+.TP
+.BI -x " [ file ]"
+Produce an export table in the executable.
+The optional
+.I file
+restricts the exported symbols to those listed in the file.
+See
+.IR dynld (2).
+.TP
+.BI -u " [ file ]"
+Produce an export table, import table
+and a dynamic load section in the executable.
+The optional
+.I file
+restricts the imported symbols to those listed in the file.
+See
+.IR dynld (2).
+.TP
+.B -t
+(\c
+.I 5l
+and
+.I vl
+only)
+Move strings into the text segment.
+.TP
+.BI -H n
+Executable header is type
+.IR n .
+The meaning of the types is architecture-dependent; typically
+type 1 is Plan 9 boot format and type 2 is the
+regular Plan 9 format, the default.  These are reversed on the MIPS.
+The Next boot format is 3.  Type 4 in
+.I vl
+creates a MIPS executable for an SGI Unix system.
+.TP
+.BI -T t
+The text segment starts at address
+.IR t .
+.TP
+.BI -D d
+The data segment starts at address
+.IR d .
+.TP
+.BI -R r
+The text segment is rounded to a multiple of
+.I r
+(if
+.I r
+is nonzero).
+.PP
+The numbers in the above options can begin with
+.L 0x
+or
+.L 0
+to change the default base from decimal to hexadecimal or octal.
+The defaults for the values depend on the compiler and the
+header type.
+.PP
+The loaded image has several symbols inserted by the loader:
+.B etext
+is the address of the end of the text segment;
+.B bdata
+is the address of the beginning of the data segment;
+.B edata
+is the address of the end of the data segment;
+and
+.B end
+is the address of the end of the bss segment, and of the program.
+.SH FILES
+.TF /$objtype/lib
+.TP
+.B /$objtype/lib
+for
+.BI -l lib
+arguments.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/2l
+etc.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR 2c (1),
+.IR 2a (1),
+.IR ar (1),
+.IR nm (1),
+.IR db (1),
+.IR prof (1)
+.PP
+Rob Pike,
+``How to Use the Plan 9 C Compiler''
+.SH BUGS
+The list of loaders given above is only partial,
+not all architectures are supported on all systems,
+some have been retired and some
+are provided by third parties.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/INDEX b/sys/man/1/INDEX
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..c62d577b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/INDEX
@@ -0,0 +1,329 @@
+0intro 0intro
+intro 0intro
+0a 2a
+1a 2a
+2a 2a
+5a 2a
+6a 2a
+7a 2a
+8a 2a
+ka 2a
+qa 2a
+va 2a
+0c 2c
+1c 2c
+2c 2c
+5c 2c
+6c 2c
+7c 2c
+8c 2c
+kc 2c
+qc 2c
+vc 2c
+0l 2l
+1l 2l
+2l 2l
+5l 2l
+6l 2l
+7l 2l
+8l 2l
+kl 2l
+ql 2l
+vl 2l
+abaco abaco
+readweb abaco
+acid acid
+trump acid
+truss acid
+acme acme
+awd acme
+win acme
+ap ap
+ar ar
+ascii ascii
+unicode ascii
+awk awk
+basename basename
+bc bc
+bind bind
+mount bind
+unmount bind
+bitsyload bitsyload
+keyboard bitsyload
+light bitsyload
+params bitsyload
+pencal bitsyload
+prompter bitsyload
+bundle bundle
+cal cal
+calendar calendar
+cat cat
+read cat
+cb cb
+chgrp chgrp
+chmod chmod
+cleanname cleanname
+cmp cmp
+col col
+colors colors
+getmap colors
+comm comm
+con con
+hayes con
+rx con
+telnet con
+xmr con
+xms con
+cp cp
+fcp cp
+mv cp
+cpp cpp
+cpu cpu
+crop crop
+iconv crop
+clock date
+date date
+db db
+dc dc
+dd dd
+delkey delkey
+delatex deroff
+deroff deroff
+diff diff
+doc2ps doc2txt
+doc2txt doc2txt
+msexceltables doc2txt
+mswordstrings doc2txt
+olefs doc2txt
+wdoc2txt doc2txt
+xls2txt doc2txt
+doctype doctype
+du du
+echo echo
+ecp ecp
+ed ed
+emacs emacs
+eqn eqn
+at expect
+drain expect
+expect expect
+pass expect
+faces faces
+seemail faces
+vwhois faces
+factor factor
+primes factor
+fedex fedex
+ups fedex
+usps fedex
+file file
+deliver filter
+filter filter
+list filter
+token filter
+vf filter
+fmt fmt
+htmlfmt fmt
+fortune fortune
+freq freq
+4s games
+5s games
+games games
+juggle games
+life games
+mahjongg games
+memo games
+sokoban games
+sudoku games
+grap grap
+graph graph
+grep grep
+gs gs
+gview gview
+bunzip2 gzip
+bzip2 gzip
+compress gzip
+gunzip gzip
+gzip gzip
+uncompress gzip
+unzip gzip
+zip gzip
+hget hget
+history history
+hoc hoc
+htmlroff htmlroff
+idiff idiff
+join join
+bmp jpg
+gif jpg
+ico jpg
+jpg jpg
+png jpg
+ppm jpg
+togif jpg
+toico jpg
+topng jpg
+toppm jpg
+v210 jpg
+yuv jpg
+kbmap kbmap
+broke kill
+kill kill
+slay kill
+ktrace ktrace
+kmem leak
+leak leak
+umem leak
+lens lens
+lex lex
+lock lock
+look look
+lp lp
+lc ls
+ls ls
+go.fishing mail
+mail mail
+lookman man
+man man
+sig man
+marshal marshal
+mc mc
+membername mk
+mk mk
+mkdir mkdir
+ml mlmgr
+mlmgr mlmgr
+mlowner mlmgr
+mp3dec mp3dec
+mp3enc mp3enc
+html2ms ms2html
+ms2html ms2html
+mtime mtime
+mug mug
+nedmail nedmail
+netstat netstat
+news news
+nm nm
+ns ns
+p p
+page page
+netkey passwd
+passwd passwd
+patch patch
+pcc pcc
+pic pic
+tpic pic
+pipefile pipefile
+plot plot
+plumb plumb
+pr pr
+kprof prof
+prof prof
+tprof prof
+proof proof
+ps ps
+psu ps
+pdf2ps ps2pdf
+ps2pdf ps2pdf
+pump pump
+pbd pwd
+pwd pwd
+. rc
+cd rc
+eval rc
+exec rc
+exit rc
+flag rc
+rc rc
+rfork rc
+shift rc
+wait rc
+whatis rc
+~ rc
+changes replica
+pull replica
+push replica
+replica replica
+scan replica
+resample resample
+label rio
+rio rio
+window rio
+wloc rio
+rm rm
+conswdir rwd
+rwd rwd
+B sam
+sam sam
+sam.save sam
+samterm sam
+aescbc secstore
+ipso secstore
+secstore secstore
+sed sed
+seq seq
+size size
+sleep sleep
+sort sort
+spell spell
+sprog spell
+spin spin
+split split
+src src
+scp ssh
+ssh ssh
+sshnet ssh
+sshserve ssh
+start stop
+stop stop
+strings strings
+strip strip
+md5sum sum
+sha1sum sum
+sum sum
+syscall syscall
+tail tail
+dircp tar
+tar tar
+tbl tbl
+tcs tcs
+tee tee
+iwhois tel
+tel tel
+test test
+thesaurus thesaurus
+time time
+touch touch
+tr tr
+trace trace
+dpost troff
+nroff troff
+troff troff
+troff2html troff2html
+tweak tweak
+uniq uniq
+units units
+uptime uptime
+unvac vac
+vac vac
+copy venti
+read venti
+venti venti
+write venti
+5i vi
+ki vi
+qi vi
+vi vi
+vnc vnc
+vncs vnc
+vncv vnc
+vt vt
+wc wc
+weather weather
+who who
+whois who
+winwatch winwatch
+xd xd
+yacc yacc
+diffy yesterday
+yesterday yesterday
diff --git a/sys/man/1/INDEX.html b/sys/man/1/INDEX.html
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..84c4100a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/INDEX.html
@@ -0,0 +1,665 @@
+<HEAD>
+<TITLE>plan 9 man section 1</TITLE>
+</HEAD>
+<BODY>
+<B>[<A HREF="/sys/man/index.html">manual index</A>]</B>
+<H2>Plan 9 from Bell Labs - Section 1 - Commands</H2>
+<HR>
+<DL>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/0intro">0intro</A>
+-  introduction to Plan 9
+<DD><TT> intro</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/2a">2a</A>
+-  assemblers
+<DD><TT> 0a, 1a, 2a, 5a, 6a, 7a, 8a, ka, qa, va</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/2c">2c</A>
+-  C compilers
+<DD><TT> 0c, 1c, 2c, 5c, 6c, 7c, 8c, kc, qc, vc</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/2l">2l</A>
+-  loaders
+<DD><TT> 0l, 1l, 2l, 5l, 6l, 7l, 8l, kl, ql, vl</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/abaco">abaco</A>
+-  browse the World-Wide Web
+<DD><TT> abaco, readweb</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/acid">acid</A>
+-  debugger
+<DD><TT> acid, truss, trump</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/acme">acme</A>
+-  interactive text windows
+<DD><TT> acme, win, awd</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/ar">ar</A>
+-  archive and library maintainer
+<DD><TT> ar</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/ascii">ascii</A>
+-  interpret ASCII, Unicode characters
+<DD><TT> ascii, unicode</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/awk">awk</A>
+-  pattern-directed scanning and processing language
+<DD><TT> awk</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/basename">basename</A>
+-  strip file name affixes
+<DD><TT> basename</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/bc">bc</A>
+-  arbitrary-precision arithmetic language
+<DD><TT> bc</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/bind">bind</A>
+-  change name space
+<DD><TT> bind, mount, unmount</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/bitsyload">bitsyload</A>
+-  bitsy-specific utilities
+<DD><TT> bitsyload, light, pencal, keyboard, params, prompter</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/bundle">bundle</A>
+-  collect files for distribution
+<DD><TT> bundle</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/cal">cal</A>
+-  print calendar
+<DD><TT> cal</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/calendar">calendar</A>
+-  print upcoming events
+<DD><TT> calendar</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/cat">cat</A>
+-  catenate files
+<DD><TT> cat, read</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/cb">cb</A>
+-  C program beautifier
+<DD><TT> cb</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/chgrp">chgrp</A>
+-  change file group
+<DD><TT> chgrp</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/chmod">chmod</A>
+-  change mode
+<DD><TT> chmod</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/cleanname">cleanname</A>
+-  clean a path name
+<DD><TT> cleanname</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/cmp">cmp</A>
+-  compare two files
+<DD><TT> cmp</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/col">col</A>
+-  column alignment
+<DD><TT> col</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/colors">colors</A>
+-  display color map
+<DD><TT> getmap, colors</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/comm">comm</A>
+-  select or reject lines common to two sorted files
+<DD><TT> comm</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/con">con</A>
+-  remote login, execution, and XMODEM file transfer
+<DD><TT> con, telnet, rx, hayes, xms, xmr</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/cp">cp</A>
+-  copy, move files
+<DD><TT> cp, fcp, mv</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/cpp">cpp</A>
+-  C language preprocessor
+<DD><TT> cpp</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/cpu">cpu</A>
+-  connection to CPU server
+<DD><TT> cpu</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/crop">crop</A>
+-  frame, crop, and convert image
+<DD><TT> crop, iconv</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/date">date</A>
+-  date and time
+<DD><TT> date, clock</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/db">db</A>
+-  debugger
+<DD><TT> db</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/dc">dc</A>
+-  desk calculator
+<DD><TT> dc</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/dd">dd</A>
+-  convert and copy a file
+<DD><TT> dd</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/delkey">delkey</A>
+-  delete keys from factotum
+<DD><TT> delkey</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/deroff">deroff</A>
+-  remove formatting requests
+<DD><TT> deroff, delatex</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/diff">diff</A>
+-  differential file comparator
+<DD><TT> diff</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/doc2txt">doc2txt</A>
+-  extract printable text from Microsoft documents
+<DD><TT> doc2txt, doc2ps, wdoc2txt, xls2txt, olefs, mswordstrings, msexceltables</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/doctype">doctype</A>
+-  intuit command line for formatting a document
+<DD><TT> doctype</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/du">du</A>
+-  disk usage
+<DD><TT> du</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/echo">echo</A>
+-  print arguments
+<DD><TT> echo</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/ecp">ecp</A>
+-  fast copy, handling errors
+<DD><TT> ecp</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/ed">ed</A>
+-  text editor
+<DD><TT> ed</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/emacs">emacs</A>
+-  editor macros
+<DD><TT> emacs</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/eqn">eqn</A>
+-  typeset mathematics
+<DD><TT> eqn</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/expect">expect</A>
+-  dialer scripting tools
+<DD><TT> at, drain, expect, pass</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/faces">faces</A>
+-  mailbox interface
+<DD><TT> faces, seemail, vwhois</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/factor">factor</A>
+-  factor a number, generate large primes
+<DD><TT> factor, primes</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/fedex">fedex</A>
+-  track shipments
+<DD><TT> fedex, ups, usps</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/file">file</A>
+-  determine file type
+<DD><TT> file</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/filter">filter</A>
+-  filtering mail
+<DD><TT> filter, list, deliver, token, vf</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/fmt">fmt</A>
+-  simple text formatters
+<DD><TT> fmt, htmlfmt</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/fortune">fortune</A>
+-  sample lines from a file
+<DD><TT> fortune</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/freq">freq</A>
+-  print histogram of character frequencies
+<DD><TT> freq</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/grap">grap</A>
+-  pic preprocessor for drawing graphs
+<DD><TT> grap</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/graph">graph</A>
+-  draw a graph
+<DD><TT> graph</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/grep">grep</A>
+-  search a file for a pattern
+<DD><TT> grep</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/gs">gs</A>
+-  Aladdin Ghostscript (PostScript and PDF language interpreter)
+<DD><TT> gs</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/gview">gview</A>
+-  interactive graph viewer
+<DD><TT> gview</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/gzip">gzip</A>
+-  compress and expand data
+<DD><TT> gzip, gunzip, bzip2, bunzip2, compress, uncompress, zip, unzip</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/hget">hget</A>
+-  retrieve a web page corresponding to a url
+<DD><TT> hget</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/history">history</A>
+-  print file names from the dump
+<DD><TT> history</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/hoc">hoc</A>
+-  interactive floating point language
+<DD><TT> hoc</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/htmlroff">htmlroff</A>
+-  HTML formatting and typesetting
+<DD><TT> htmlroff</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/idiff">idiff</A>
+-  interactive diff
+<DD><TT> idiff</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/join">join</A>
+-  relational database operator
+<DD><TT> join</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/jpg">jpg</A>
+-  view and convert pictures
+<DD><TT> jpg, gif, png, ppm, bmp, v210, yuv, ico, togif, toppm, topng, toico</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/kbmap">kbmap</A>
+-  show a list of available keyboard maps and switch between them.
+<DD><TT> kbmap</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/kill">kill</A>
+-  print commands to kill processes
+<DD><TT> kill, slay, broke</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/ktrace">ktrace</A>
+-  interpret kernel stack dumps
+<DD><TT> ktrace</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/leak">leak</A>
+-  help find memory leaks
+<DD><TT> leak, kmem, umem</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/lens">lens</A>
+-  interactive screen magnifier
+<DD><TT> lens</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/lex">lex</A>
+-  generator of lexical analysis programs
+<DD><TT> lex</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/lock">lock</A>
+-  run a command under lock
+<DD><TT> lock</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/look">look</A>
+-  find lines in a sorted list
+<DD><TT> look</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/lp">lp</A>
+-  printer output
+<DD><TT> lp</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/ls">ls</A>
+-  list contents of directory
+<DD><TT> ls, lc</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/mail">mail</A>
+-  mail and mailboxes
+<DD><TT> mail, go.fishing</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/man">man</A>
+-  print or find pages of this manual
+<DD><TT> man, lookman, sig</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/marshal">marshal</A>
+-  formatting and sending mail
+<DD><TT> marshal</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/mc">mc</A>
+-  multicolumn print
+<DD><TT> mc</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/mk">mk</A>
+-  maintain (make) related files
+<DD><TT> mk, membername</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/mkdir">mkdir</A>
+-  make a directory
+<DD><TT> mkdir</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/mlmgr">mlmgr</A>
+-  unmoderated mailing lists
+<DD><TT> ml, mlmgr, mlowner</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/mp3dec">mp3dec</A>
+-  decode audio MPEG files (layers 1, 2 and 3)
+<DD><TT> mp3dec</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/mp3enc">mp3enc</A>
+-  create mp3 audio files
+<DD><TT> mp3enc</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/ms2html">ms2html</A>
+-  convert between troff's ms macros and html
+<DD><TT> ms2html, html2ms</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/mtime">mtime</A>
+-  print file modification time
+<DD><TT> mtime</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/mug">mug</A>
+-  convert an image to a face icon
+<DD><TT> mug</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/nedmail">nedmail</A>
+-  reading mail
+<DD><TT> nedmail</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/netstat">netstat</A>
+-  summarize network connections
+<DD><TT> netstat</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/news">news</A>
+-  print news items
+<DD><TT> news</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/nm">nm</A>
+-  name list (symbol table)
+<DD><TT> nm</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/ns">ns</A>
+-  display name space
+<DD><TT> ns</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/p">p</A>
+-  paginate
+<DD><TT> p</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/page">page</A>
+-  view FAX, image, graphic, PostScript, PDF, and typesetter output files
+<DD><TT> page</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/passwd">passwd</A>
+-  change or verify user password
+<DD><TT> passwd, netkey</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/patch">patch</A>
+-  simple patch creation and tracking system
+<DD><TT> patch</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/pcc">pcc</A>
+-  APE C compiler driver
+<DD><TT> pcc</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/pic">pic</A>
+-  troff and tex preprocessors for drawing pictures
+<DD><TT> pic, tpic</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/pipefile">pipefile</A>
+-  attach filter to file in name space
+<DD><TT> pipefile</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/plot">plot</A>
+-  graphics filter
+<DD><TT> plot</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/plumb">plumb</A>
+-  send message to plumber
+<DD><TT> plumb</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/pr">pr</A>
+-  print file
+<DD><TT> pr</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/prof">prof</A>
+-  display profiling data
+<DD><TT> prof, tprof, kprof</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/proof">proof</A>
+-  troff output interpreter
+<DD><TT> proof</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/ps">ps</A>
+-  process status
+<DD><TT> ps, psu</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/ps2pdf">ps2pdf</A>
+-  convert between PostScript and PDF
+<DD><TT> ps2pdf, pdf2ps</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/pump">pump</A>
+-  copy asynchronously via a large circular buffer
+<DD><TT> pump</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/pwd">pwd</A>
+-  working directory
+<DD><TT> pwd, pbd</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/rc">rc</A>
+-  command language
+<DD><TT> rc, cd, eval, exec, exit, flag, rfork, shift, wait, whatis, ., ~</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/replica">replica</A>
+-  client-server replica management
+<DD><TT> changes, pull, push, scan</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/resample">resample</A>
+-  resample a picture
+<DD><TT> resample</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/rio">rio</A>
+-  window system
+<DD><TT> rio, label, window, wloc</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/rm">rm</A>
+-  remove files
+<DD><TT> rm</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/rwd">rwd</A>
+-  maintain remote working directory
+<DD><TT> rwd, conswdir</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/sam">sam</A>
+-  screen editor with structural regular expressions
+<DD><TT> sam, B, sam.save, samterm</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/secstore">secstore</A>
+-  secstore commands
+<DD><TT> aescbc, ipso, secstore</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/sed">sed</A>
+-  stream editor
+<DD><TT> sed</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/seq">seq</A>
+-  print sequences of numbers
+<DD><TT> seq</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/size">size</A>
+-  print size of executable files
+<DD><TT> size</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/sleep">sleep</A>
+-  suspend execution for an interval
+<DD><TT> sleep</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/sort">sort</A>
+-  sort and/or merge files
+<DD><TT> sort</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/spell">spell</A>
+-  find spelling errors
+<DD><TT> spell, sprog</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/spin">spin</A>
+-  verification tool for models of concurrent systems
+<DD><TT> spin</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/split">split</A>
+-  split a file into pieces
+<DD><TT> split</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/src">src</A>
+-  find source code for executable
+<DD><TT> src</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/ssh">ssh</A>
+-  secure login and file copy from/to Unix or Plan 9
+<DD><TT> ssh, sshnet, scp, sshserve</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/stop">stop</A>
+-  print commands to stop and start processes
+<DD><TT> stop, start</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/strings">strings</A>
+-  extract printable strings
+<DD><TT> strings</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/strip">strip</A>
+-  remove symbols from binary files
+<DD><TT> strip</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/sum">sum</A>
+-  sum and count blocks in a file
+<DD><TT> sum, md5sum, sha1sum</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/syscall">syscall</A>
+-  test a system call
+<DD><TT> syscall</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/tail">tail</A>
+-  deliver the last part of a file
+<DD><TT> tail</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/tar">tar</A>
+-  archiver
+<DD><TT> tar, dircp</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/tbl">tbl</A>
+-  format tables for nroff or troff
+<DD><TT> tbl</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/tcs">tcs</A>
+-  translate character sets
+<DD><TT> tcs</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/tee">tee</A>
+-  pipe fitting
+<DD><TT> tee</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/tel">tel</A>
+-  look in phone book
+<DD><TT> tel, iwhois</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/test">test</A>
+-  set status according to condition
+<DD><TT> test</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/thesaurus">thesaurus</A>
+-  search online thesaurus
+<DD><TT> thesaurus</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/time">time</A>
+-  time a command
+<DD><TT> time</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/touch">touch</A>
+-  set modification date of a file
+<DD><TT> touch</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/tr">tr</A>
+-  translate characters
+<DD><TT> tr</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/trace">trace</A>
+-  show (real-time) process behavior
+<DD><TT> trace</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/troff">troff</A>
+-  text formatting and typesetting
+<DD><TT> troff, nroff, dpost</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/troff2html">troff2html</A>
+-  convert troff output into HTML
+<DD><TT> troff2html</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/tweak">tweak</A>
+-  edit image files, subfont files, face files, etc.
+<DD><TT> tweak</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/uniq">uniq</A>
+-  report repeated lines in a file
+<DD><TT> uniq</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/units">units</A>
+-  conversion program
+<DD><TT> units</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/uptime">uptime</A>
+-  show how long the system has been running
+<DD><TT> uptime</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/vac">vac</A>
+-  create, extract a vac archive on Venti
+<DD><TT> vac, unvac</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/venti">venti</A>
+-  simple Venti clients
+<DD><TT> read, write, copy</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/vi">vi</A>
+-  instruction simulators
+<DD><TT> 5i, ki, vi, qi</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/vnc">vnc</A>
+-  remote frame buffer server and viewer for Virtual Network Computing (VNC)
+<DD><TT> vncs, vncv</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/vt">vt</A>
+-  emulate a VT-100 or VT-220 terminal
+<DD><TT> vt</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/wc">wc</A>
+-  word count
+<DD><TT> wc</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/weather">weather</A>
+-  print weather report
+<DD><TT> weather</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/who">who</A>
+-  who is using the machine
+<DD><TT> who, whois</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/winwatch">winwatch</A>
+-  monitor rio windows
+<DD><TT> winwatch</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/xd">xd</A>
+-  hex, octal, decimal, or ASCII dump
+<DD><TT> xd</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/yacc">yacc</A>
+-  yet another compiler-compiler
+<DD><TT> yacc</TT>
+</DT>
+<DT><A HREF="/magic/man2html/1/yesterday">yesterday</A>
+-  print file names from the dump
+<DD><TT> yesterday, diffy</TT>
+</DT>
+</DL>
diff --git a/sys/man/1/abaco b/sys/man/1/abaco
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..9a0182f21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/abaco
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+.TH ABACO 1
+.SH NAME
+abaco, readweb \- browse the World-Wide Web
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B abaco
+[
+.B -p
+] [
+.B -c
+.I ncols
+] [
+.B -m
+.I mtpt
+] [
+.B -t
+.I charset
+] [
+.I url
+]
+.PP
+.B readweb
+[
+.I url
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Abaco
+is a lightweight web browser with the appearance of
+.IR acme (1)
+with
+.I ncols
+columns (one by default).
+Given a
+.IR url ,
+it will start by displaying that page.
+Clicking mouse button 3 on a link
+opens it in a new
+.I abaco
+window.
+.B -t
+selects an alternate character set;
+.B -m
+an alternate mount point for
+.IR webfs .
+Normally the standard error of subshells is closed,
+but
+.B -p
+prevents this.
+.PP
+.I Readweb
+imports the outside network, if necessary,
+starts
+.I webfs
+and
+.I webcookies
+and finally
+.IR abaco .
+.\" .SH EXAMPLES
+.SH FILES
+.TP 15
+.B /mnt/web
+default
+.I webfs
+mount point
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/abaco
+.br
+.B /rc/bin/readweb
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR vnc (1),
+.IR webcookies (4),
+.IR webfs (4),
+.SH BUGS
+.I Abaco
+is a work in progress;
+many features of giant web browsers are absent.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/acid b/sys/man/1/acid
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..bfe671e54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/acid
@@ -0,0 +1,492 @@
+.TH ACID 1
+.SH NAME
+acid, truss, trump \- debugger
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B acid
+[
+.B -kqw
+]
+[
+.BI -l " library
+] [
+.B -m
+.I machine
+] [
+.I pid
+]
+[
+.I textfile
+]
+.PP
+.B acid
+.B -l
+.B truss
+.I textfile
+.PP
+.B acid
+.B -l
+.B trump
+[
+.I pid
+]
+[
+.I textfile
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Acid
+is a programmable symbolic debugger.
+It can inspect one or more processes that share an address space.
+A program to be debugged may be specified by the process id of
+a running or defunct process,
+or by the name of the program's text file 
+.RB ( 8.out
+by default).
+At the prompt,
+.I acid
+will store function definitions or print the value of expressions.
+Options are
+.TP .9i
+.B -w
+Allow the textfile to be modified.
+.TP
+.B -q
+Print variable renamings at startup.
+.TP
+.BI -l " library
+Load from 
+.I library
+at startup; see below.
+.TP
+.BI -m " machine
+Assume instructions are for the given CPU type
+(one of
+.BR alpha ,
+.BR 386 ,
+etc., as listed in
+.IR 2c (1),
+or
+.B sunsparc
+or
+.B mipsco
+for the  manufacturer-defined instruction notation for those processors)
+instead of using the magic number to select
+the CPU type.
+.TP
+.BI -k
+Debug the kernel state for the process, rather than the user state.
+.PP
+At startup,
+.I acid
+obtains standard function definitions from the library file
+.BR /sys/lib/acid/port ,
+architecture-dependent functions from
+.BR /sys/lib/acid/$objtype ,
+user-specified functions from
+.BR $home/lib/acid ,
+and further functions from 
+.B -l
+files.
+Definitions in any file may override previously defined functions.
+If the function
+.IR acidinit ()
+is defined, it will be invoked after all libraries have been loaded.
+See
+.IR 2c (1)
+for information about creating
+.I acid
+functions for examining data structures.
+.SS Language
+Symbols of the program being debugged become integer 
+variables whose values are addresses.
+Contents of addresses are obtained by indirection.
+Local variables are qualified by
+function name, for example
+.BR main:argv .
+When program symbols conflict with
+.I acid
+words, distinguishing 
+.B $
+signs are prefixed.
+Such renamings are reported at startup if the option
+.B -q
+is enabled.
+.PP
+Variable types
+.RI ( "integer, float, list, string" )
+and formats are inferred from assignments.
+Truth values false/true are attributed to zero/nonzero
+integers or floats and to empty/nonempty lists or strings.
+Lists are sequences of expressions surrounded by
+.BR {\^} 
+and separated by commas.
+.PP
+Expressions are much as in C,
+but yield both a value and a format.
+Casts to complex types are allowed.
+Lists admit the following operators, with
+subscripts counted from 0.
+.IP
+.BI head " list
+.br
+.BI tail " list
+.br
+.BI append " list", " element
+.br
+.BI delete " list", " subscript
+.PP
+Format codes are the same as in
+.IR db (1).
+Formats may be attached to (unary) expressions with
+.BR \e ,
+e.g.
+.BR (32*7)\eD .
+There are two indirection operators,
+.B *
+to address a core image,
+.B @
+to address a text file.
+The type and format of the result are determined by the format of the operand,
+whose type must be integer.
+.PP
+Statements are
+.IP
+.BI if " expr " then " statement " "\fR[ \fPelse\fI statement \fR]
+.br
+.BI while " expr " do " statement
+.br
+.BI loop " expr" , " expr " do " statement
+.br
+.BI defn " name" ( args ") {" " statement \fP}
+.br
+.BI defn " name"
+.br
+.IB name ( args )
+.br
+.BI builtin " name" ( args )
+.br
+.BI local " name
+.br
+.BI return " expr
+.br
+.BR whatis " [ \fI name \fP]
+.PP
+The statement
+.B defn
+.I name
+clears the definition for
+.IR name .
+A
+.B defn
+may override a built-in function;
+prefixing a function call with
+.B builtin
+ignores any overriding
+.BR defn ,
+forcing the use of the built-in function.
+.PP
+Here is a partial list of functions; see the manual for a complete list.
+.TF asm(address)
+.TP
+.B stk()
+Print a stack trace for current process.
+.TP
+.B lstk()
+Print a stack trace with values of local variables.
+.TP
+.B gpr()
+Print general registers.
+Registers can also be accessed by name, for example
+.BR *R0 .
+.TP
+.B spr()
+Print special registers such as program counter and stack pointer.
+.TP
+.B fpr()
+Print floating-point registers.
+.TP
+.B regs()
+Same as
+.BR spr();gpr() .
+.TP
+.BI fmt( expr , format )
+Expression 
+.I expr
+with format given by the character value of expression
+.IR format .
+.TP
+.BI src( address )
+Print 10 lines of source around the program address.
+.TP
+.BI Bsrc( address )
+Get the source line for the program address
+into a window of a running
+.IR sam (1)
+and select it.
+.TP
+.BI line( address )
+Print source line nearest to the program address.
+.TP
+.B source()
+List current source directories.
+.TP
+.BI addsrcdir( string )
+Add a source directory to the list.
+.TP
+.BI filepc( where )
+Convert a string of the form 
+.IB sourcefile : linenumber
+to a machine address.
+.TP
+.BI pcfile( address )
+Convert a machine address to a source file name.
+.TP
+.BI pcline( address )
+Convert a machine address to a source line number.
+.TP
+.BI bptab()
+List breakpoints set in the current process.
+.TP
+.BI bpset( address )
+Set a breakpoint in the current process at the given address.
+.TP
+.BI bpdel( address )
+Delete a breakpoint from the current process.
+.TP
+.B cont()
+Continue execution of current process and wait for it to stop.
+.TP
+.B step()
+Execute a single machine instruction in the current process.
+.TP
+.B func()
+Step repeatedly until after a function return.
+.TP
+.BI stopped( pid )
+This replaceable function is called automatically when the given process
+stops.
+It normally prints the program counter and returns to the prompt.
+.TP
+.BI asm( address )
+Disassemble 30 machine instructions beginning at the given address.
+.TP
+.BI mem( address , string )
+Print a block of memory
+interpreted according to a string of format codes.
+.TP
+.BI dump( address , n , string\fP)
+Like
+.BR mem (),
+repeated for 
+.I n
+consecutive blocks.
+.TP
+.BI print( expr , ... )
+Print the values of the expressions.
+.TP
+.BI newproc( arguments )
+Start a new process with arguments given as a string
+and halt at the first instruction.
+.TP
+.B new()
+Like 
+.IR newproc (),
+but take arguments (except
+.BR argv[0] )
+from string variable
+.BR progargs .
+.TP
+.B win()
+Like 
+.IR new (),
+but run the process in a separate window.
+.TP
+.BI start( pid )
+Start a stopped process.
+.TP
+.BI kill( pid )
+Kill the given process.
+.TP
+.BI setproc( pid )
+Make the given process current.
+.TP
+.BI rc( string )
+Escape to the shell,
+.IR rc (1),
+to execute the command string.
+.SS Libraries
+There are a number of
+.I acid
+`libraries' that provide higher-level debugging facilities.  Two notable
+examples are
+.I truss
+and
+.IR trump ,
+which use
+.I acid
+to trace system calls
+.RI ( truss )
+and memory allocation
+.RI ( trump ).
+Both require starting
+.I acid
+on the program, either by attaching to a running process or by
+executing
+.B new()
+on a binary (perhaps after setting
+.BR progargs ),
+stopping the process, and then running
+.B truss()
+or
+.B trump()
+to execute the program under the scaffolding.
+The output will be a trace of the system calls
+.RI ( truss )
+or memory allocation and free calls
+.RI ( trump )
+executed by the program.
+When finished tracing, stop the process and execute
+.B untruss()
+or
+.B untrump()
+followed by
+.B cont()
+to resume execution.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Start to debug
+.BR /bin/ls ;
+set some breakpoints; run up to the first one:
+.IP
+.EX
+% acid /bin/ls
+/bin/ls: mips plan 9 executable
+/sys/lib/acid/port
+/sys/lib/acid/mips
+acid: new()
+70094: system call	_main	ADD	$-0x14,R29
+70094: breakpoint	main+0x4	MOVW	R31,0x0(R29)
+acid: pid
+70094
+acid: argv0 = **main:argv\es
+acid: whatis argv0
+integer variable format s
+acid: *argv0
+/bin/ls
+acid: bpset(ls)
+acid: cont()
+70094: breakpoint  ls	ADD	$-0x16c8,R29
+acid: 
+.EE
+.PP
+Display elements of a linked list of structures:
+.IP
+.EX
+complex Str { 'D' 0 val; 'X' 4 next; };
+complex Str s;
+s = *headstr;
+while s != 0 do{
+	print(s.val, "\en");
+	s = s.next;
+}
+.EE
+.PP
+Note the use of the
+.B .
+operator instead of
+.BR -> .
+.PP
+Display an array of bytes declared in C as
+.BR "char array[]" .
+.IP
+.EX
+*(array\es)
+.EE
+.PP
+This example gives
+.B array
+string format, then prints the string beginning at the address (in
+.I acid
+notation)
+.BR *array .
+.PP
+Trace the system calls executed by
+.IR ls (1):
+.IP
+.EX
+% acid -l truss /bin/ls
+/bin/ls:386 plan 9 executable
+
+/sys/lib/acid/port
+/sys/lib/acid/kernel
+/sys/lib/acid/truss
+/sys/lib/acid/386
+acid: progargs = "-l lib/profile"
+acid: new()
+acid: truss()
+open("#c/pid", 0)
+	return value: 3
+pread(3, 0x7fffeeac, 20, -1)
+	return value: 12
+	data: "        166 "
+\&...
+stat("lib/profile", 0x0000f8cc, 113)
+	return value: 65
+open("/env/timezone", 0)
+	return value: 3
+pread(3, 0x7fffd7c4, 1680, -1)
+	return value: 1518
+	data: "EST -18000 EDT -14400
+   9943200   25664400   41392800   57718800   73447200   89168400
+ 104896800  ..."
+close(3)
+	return value: 0
+pwrite(1, "--rw-rw-r-- M 9 rob rob 2519 Mar 22 10:29 lib/profile
+", 54, -1)
+--rw-rw-r-- M 9 rob rob 2519 Mar 22 10:29 lib/profile
+	return value: 54
+\&...
+166: breakpoint	_exits+0x5	INTB	$0x40
+acid: cont()
+.EE
+.SH FILES
+.B /proc/*/text
+.br
+.B /proc/*/mem
+.br
+.B /proc/*/ctl
+.br
+.B /proc/*/note
+.br
+.B /sys/lib/acid/$objtype
+.br
+.B /sys/lib/acid/port
+.br
+.B /sys/lib/acid/kernel
+.br
+.B /sys/lib/acid/trump
+.br
+.B /sys/lib/acid/truss
+.br
+.B $home/lib/acid
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/acid
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR 2a (1),
+.IR 2c (1),
+.IR 2l (1),
+.IR mk (1),
+.IR db (1)
+.br
+Phil Winterbottom,
+``Acid Manual''.
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+At termination, kill commands are proposed
+for processes that are still active.
+.SH BUGS
+There is no way to redirect the standard input and standard output
+of a new process.
+.br
+Source line selection near the beginning of a file may pick
+an adjacent file.
+.br
+With the extant stepping commands, one cannot step through instructions
+outside the text segment and it is hard to debug across process forks.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/acme b/sys/man/1/acme
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..f01ee38fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/acme
@@ -0,0 +1,727 @@
+.TH ACME 1
+.SH NAME
+acme, win, awd \- interactive text windows
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B acme
+[
+.B -ab
+]
+[
+.B -c
+.I ncol
+]
+[
+.B -f
+.I varfont
+]
+[
+.B -F
+.I fixfont
+]
+[
+.B -l
+.I loadfile
+|
+.I file
+\&... ]
+.LP
+.B win
+[
+.I command
+]
+.LP
+.B awd
+[
+.I label
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Acme
+manages windows of text that may be edited interactively or by external programs.
+The interactive interface uses the keyboard and mouse; external programs
+use a set of files served by
+.IR acme ;
+these are discussed in
+.IR acme (4).
+.PP
+Any named
+.I files
+are read into
+.I acme
+windows before
+.I acme
+accepts input.
+With the
+.B -l
+option, the state of the entire system is loaded
+from
+.IR loadfile ,
+which should have been created by a
+.B Dump
+command (q.v.),
+and subsequent
+.I file
+names are ignored.
+Plain files display as text; directories display as columnated lists of the
+names of their components, as in
+.B "ls -p directory|mc
+except that the names of subdirectories have a slash appended.
+.PP
+The
+.B -f
+.RB ( -F )
+option sets the main font, usually variable-pitch (alternate, usually fixed-pitch);
+the default is
+.B /lib/font/bit/lucidasans/euro.8.font
+.RB ( \&.../lucm/unicode.9.font ).
+Tab intervals are set to the width of 4 (or the value of
+.BR $tabstop )
+numeral zeros in the appropriate font.
+.PP
+.SS Windows
+.I Acme
+windows are in two parts: a one-line
+.I tag
+above a multi-line
+.IR body .
+The body typically contains an image of a file, as in
+.IR sam (1),
+or the output of a
+program, as in an
+.IR rio (1)
+window.
+The tag contains a number of
+blank-separated words, followed by a vertical bar character, followed by anything.
+The first word is the name of the window, typically the name of the associated
+file or directory, and the other words are commands available in that window.
+Any text may be added after the bar; examples are strings to search for or
+commands to execute in that window.
+Changes to the text left of the bar will be ignored,
+unless the result is to change the name of the
+window.
+.PP
+If a window holds a directory, the name (first word of the tag) will end with
+a slash.
+.SS Scrolling
+Each window has a scroll bar to the left of the body.
+The scroll bar behaves much as in
+.IR sam (1)
+or
+.IR rio (1)
+except that scrolling occurs when the button is pressed, rather than released,
+and continues
+as long as the mouse button is held down in the scroll bar.
+For example, to scroll slowly through a file,
+hold button 3 down near the top of the scroll bar.  Moving the mouse
+down the scroll bar speeds up the rate of scrolling.
+.SS Layout
+.I Acme
+windows are arranged in columns.  By default, it creates two columns when starting;
+this can be overridden with the
+.B -c
+option.
+Placement is automatic but may be adjusted
+using the
+.I layout box
+in the upper left corner of each window and column.
+Pressing and holding any mouse button in the box drags
+the associated window or column.
+For windows, just
+clicking in the layout box grows the window in place: button 1
+grows it a little, button 2 grows it as much as it can, still leaving all other
+tags in that column visible, and button 3 takes over the column completely,
+temporarily hiding other windows in the column.
+(They will return
+.I en masse
+if any of them needs attention.)
+The layout box in a window is normally white; when it is black in the center,
+it records that the file is `dirty':
+.I acme
+believes it is modified from its original
+contents.
+.PP
+Tags exist at the top of each column and across the whole display.
+.I Acme
+pre-loads them with useful commands.
+Also, the tag across the top maintains a list of executing long-running commands.
+.SS Typing
+The behavior of typed text is similar to that in
+.IR rio (1)
+except that the characters are delivered to the tag or body under the mouse; there is no
+`click to type'.
+(The experimental option
+.B -b
+causes typing to go to the most recently clicked-at or made window.)
+The usual backspacing conventions apply.
+As in
+.IR sam (1)
+but not
+.IR rio ,
+the ESC key selects the text typed since the last mouse action,
+a feature particularly useful when executing commands.
+A side effect is that typing ESC with text already selected is identical
+to a
+.B Cut
+command
+.RI ( q.v. ).
+.PP
+Most text, including the names of windows, may be edited uniformly.
+The only exception is that the command names to the
+left of the bar in a tag are maintained automatically; changes to them are repaired
+by
+.IR acme .
+.PP
+When a window is in autoindent mode
+(see the
+.B Indent
+command below) and a newline character is typed,
+acme copies leading white space on the current line to the new line.
+The option
+.B -a
+causes each window to start in 
+autoindent mode.
+.SS "Directory context
+Each window's tag names a directory: explicitly if the window
+holds a directory; implicitly if it holds a regular file
+(e.g. the directory
+.B /adm
+if the window holds
+.BR /adm/users ).
+This directory provides a
+.I context
+for interpreting file names in that window.
+For example, the string
+.B users
+in a window labeled
+.B /adm/
+or
+.B /adm/keys
+will be interpreted as the file name
+.BR /adm/users .
+The directory is defined purely textually, so it can be a non-existent
+directory or a real directory associated with a non-existent file
+(e.g.
+.BR /adm/not-a-file ).
+File names beginning with a slash
+are assumed to be absolute file names.
+.SS Errors
+Windows whose names begin with
+.B -
+or
+.B +
+conventionally hold diagnostics and other data
+not directly associated with files.
+A window labeled
+.B +Errors
+receives all diagnostics produced by
+.I acme
+itself.
+Diagnostics from commands run by
+.I acme
+appear in a window named
+.IB directory /+Errors
+where
+.I directory
+is identified by the context of the command.
+These error windows are created when needed.
+.SS "Mouse button 1
+Mouse button 1 selects text just as in
+.IR sam (1)
+or
+.IR rio (1) ,
+including the usual double-clicking conventions.
+.SS "Mouse button 2
+By an
+action similar to selecting text with button 1,
+button 2 indicates text to execute as a command.
+If the indicated text has multiple white-space-separated words,
+the first is the command name and the second and subsequent
+are its arguments.
+If button 2 is `clicked'\(emindicates a null string\(em\c
+.I acme
+.I expands
+the indicated text to find a command to run:
+if the click is within button-1-selected text,
+.I acme
+takes that selection as the command;
+otherwise it takes the largest string of valid file name characters containing the click.
+Valid file name characters are alphanumerics and
+.B _
+.B .
+.B -
+.B +
+.BR / .
+This behavior is similar to double-clicking with button 1 but,
+because a null command is meaningless, only a single click is required.
+.PP
+Some commands, all by convention starting with a capital letter, are
+.I built-ins
+that are executed directly by
+.IR acme :
+.TP
+.B Cut
+Delete most recently selected text and place in snarf buffer.
+.TP
+.B Del
+Delete window.  If window is dirty, instead print a warning; a second
+.B Del
+will succeed.
+.TP
+.B Delcol
+Delete column and all its windows, after checking that windows are not dirty.
+.TP
+.B Delete
+Delete window without checking for dirtiness.
+.TP
+.B Dump
+Write the state of
+.I acme
+to the file name, if specified, or
+.B $home/acme.dump
+by default.
+.TP
+.B Edit
+Treat the argument as a text editing command in the style of
+.IR sam (1).
+The full
+.B Sam
+language is implemented except for the commands
+.BR k ,
+.BR n ,
+.BR q ,
+and
+.BR ! .
+The
+.B =
+command is slightly different: it includes the file name and
+gives only the line address unless the command is explicitly
+.BR =# .
+The `current window' for the command is the body of the window in which the
+.B Edit
+command is executed.
+Usually the
+.B Edit
+command would be typed in a tag; longer commands may be prepared in a
+scratch window and executed, with
+.B Edit
+itself in the current window, using the 2-1 chord described below.
+.TP
+.B Exit
+Exit
+.I acme
+after checking that windows are not dirty.
+.TP
+.B Font
+With no arguments, change the font of the associated window from fixed-spaced to
+proportional-spaced or
+.I vice
+.IR versa .
+Given a file name argument, change the font of the window to that stored in the named file.
+If the file name argument is prefixed by
+.B var
+.RB ( fix ),
+also set the default proportional-spaced (fixed-spaced) font for future use to that font.
+Other existing windows are unaffected.
+.TP
+.B Get
+Load file into window, replacing previous contents (after checking for dirtiness as in
+.BR Del ).
+With no argument, use the existing file name of the window.
+Given an argument, use that file but do not change the window's file name.
+.TP
+.B ID
+Print window ID number
+.RI ( q.v. ).
+.TP
+.B Incl
+When opening `include' files
+(those enclosed in
+.BR <> )
+with button 3,
+.I acme
+searches in directories
+.B /$objtype/include
+and
+.BR /sys/include .
+.B Incl
+adds its arguments to a supplementary list of include directories, analogous to
+the
+.B -I
+option to the compilers.
+This list is per-window and is inherited when windows are created by actions in that window, so
+.I Incl
+is most usefully applied to a directory containing relevant source.
+With no arguments,
+.I Incl
+prints the supplementary list.
+This command is largely superseded by plumbing
+(see
+.IR plumb (6)).
+.TP
+.B Indent
+Set the autoindent mode according to the argument:
+.B on
+and
+.B off
+set the mode for the current window;
+.B ON
+and
+.B OFF
+set the mode for all existing and future windows.
+.TP
+.B Kill
+Send a
+.B kill
+note to
+.IR acme -initiated
+commands named as arguments.
+.TP
+.B Load
+Restore the state of
+.I acme
+from a file (default
+.BR $home/acme.dump )
+created by the
+.B Dump
+command.
+.TP
+.B Local
+When prefixed to a command
+run the
+command in the same file name space and environment variable group as
+.IR acme .
+The environment of the command
+is restricted but is sufficient to run
+.IR bind (1),
+.IR 9fs
+(see
+.IR srv (4)),
+.IR import (4),
+etc.,
+and to set environment variables such as
+.BR $objtype .
+.TP
+.B Look
+Search in body for occurrence of literal text indicated by the argument or,
+if none is given, by the selected text in the body.
+.TP
+.B New
+Make new window.  With arguments, load the named files into windows.
+.TP
+.B Newcol
+Make new column.
+.TP
+.B Paste
+Replace most recently selected text with contents of snarf buffer.
+.TP
+.B Put
+Write window to the named file.
+With no argument, write to the file named in the tag of the window.
+.TP
+.B Putall
+Write all dirty windows whose names indicate existing regular files.
+.TP
+.B Redo
+Complement of
+.BR Undo .
+.TP
+.B Send
+Append selected text or snarf buffer to end of body; used mainly with
+.IR win .
+.TP
+.B Snarf
+Place selected text in snarf buffer.
+.TP
+.B Sort
+Arrange the windows in the column from top to bottom in lexicographical
+order based on their names.
+.TP
+.B Tab
+Set the width of tab stops for this window to the value of the argument, in units of widths of the zero
+character.
+With no arguments, it prints the current value.
+.TP
+.B Undo
+Undo last textual change or set of changes.
+.TP
+.B Zerox
+Create a copy of the window containing most recently selected text.
+.TP
+.B <|>
+If a regular shell command is preceded by a
+.BR < ,
+.BR | ,
+or
+.B >
+character, the selected text in the body of the window is affected by the
+I/O from the command.
+The
+.B <
+character causes the selection to be replaced by the standard output
+of the command;
+.B >
+causes the selection to be sent as standard input to the command; and
+.B |
+does both at once, `piping' the selection through the command and
+replacing it with the output.
+.PP
+A common place to store text for commands is in the tag; in fact
+.I acme
+maintains a set of commands appropriate to the state of the window
+to the left of the bar in the tag.
+.PP
+If the text indicated with button 2 is not a recognized built-in, it is executed as
+a shell command.  For example, indicating
+.B date
+with button 2 runs
+.IR date (1).
+The standard
+and error outputs of commands are sent to the error window associated with
+the directory from which the command was run, which will be created if
+necessary.
+For example, in a window
+.B /adm/users
+executing
+.B pwd
+will produce the output
+.B /adm
+in a (possibly newly-created) window labeled
+.BR /adm/+Errors ;
+in a window containing
+.B /sys/src/cmd/sam/sam.c
+executing
+.B mk
+will run
+.IR mk (1)
+in
+.BR /sys/src/cmd/sam ,
+producing output in a window labeled
+.BR /sys/src/cmd/sam/+Errors .
+The environment of such commands contains the variable
+.B $%
+with value set to the filename of the window in which the command is run,
+and
+.B $winid
+set to the window's id number
+(see
+.IR acme (4)).
+.SS "Mouse button 3
+Pointing at text with button 3 instructs
+.I acme
+to locate or acquire the file, string, etc. described by the indicated text and
+its context.
+This description follows the actions taken when
+button 3 is released after sweeping out some text.
+In the description,
+.I text
+refers to the text of the original sweep or, if it was null, the result of
+applying the same expansion rules that apply to button 2 actions.
+.PP
+If the text names an existing window,
+.I acme
+moves the mouse cursor to the selected text in the body of that window.
+If the text names an existing file with no associated window,
+.I acme
+loads the file into a new window and moves the mouse there.
+If the text is a file name contained in angle brackets,
+.I acme
+loads the indicated include file from the directory appropriate to the
+suffix of the file name of the window holding the text.
+(The
+.B Incl
+command adds directories to the standard list.)
+.PP
+If the text begins with a colon, it is taken to be an address, in
+the style of
+.IR sam (1),
+within the body of the window containing the text.
+The address is evaluated, the resulting text highlighted, and the mouse moved to it.
+Thus, in
+.IR acme ,
+one must type
+.B :/regexp
+or
+.B :127
+not just
+.B /regexp
+or
+.BR 127 .
+(There is an easier way to locate literal text; see below.)
+.PP
+If the text is a file name followed by a colon and an address,
+.I acme
+loads the file and evaluates the address.  For example, clicking button 3 anywhere
+in the text
+.B file.c:27
+will open
+.BR file.c ,
+select line
+27, and put the mouse at the beginning of the line.  The rules about Error
+files, directories, and so on all combine to make this an efficient way to
+investigate errors from compilers, etc.
+.PP
+If the text is not an address or file, it is taken to
+be literal text, which is then searched for in the body of the window
+in which button 3 was clicked.  If a match is found, it is selected and the mouse is
+moved there.  Thus, to search for occurrences of a word in a file,
+just click button 3 on the word.  Because of the rule of using the
+selection as the button 3 action, subsequent clicks will find subsequent
+occurrences without moving the mouse.
+.PP
+In all these actions, the mouse motion is not done if the text is a null string
+within a non-null selected string in the tag, so that (for example) complex regular expressions
+may be selected and applied repeatedly to the
+body by just clicking button 3 over them.
+.SS "Chords of mouse buttons
+Several operations are bound to multiple-button actions.
+After selecting text, with button 1 still down, pressing button 2
+executes
+.B Cut
+and button 3 executes
+.BR Paste .
+After clicking one button, the other undoes
+the first; thus (while holding down button 1) 2 followed by 3 is a
+.B Snarf
+that leaves the file undirtied;
+3 followed by 2 is a no-op.
+These actions also apply to text selected by double-clicking because
+the double-click expansion is made when the second
+click starts, not when it ends.
+.PP
+Commands may be given extra arguments by a mouse chord with buttons 2 and 1.
+While holding down button 2 on text to be executed as a command, clicking button 1
+appends the text last pointed to by button 1 as a distinct final argument.
+For example, to search for literal
+.B text
+one may execute
+.B Look text
+with button 2 or instead point at
+.B text
+with button 1 in any window, release button 1,
+then execute
+.BR Look ,
+clicking button 1 while 2 is held down.
+.PP
+When an external command (e.g.
+.IR echo (1))
+is executed this way, the extra argument is passed as expected and an
+environment variable
+.B $acmeaddr
+is created that holds, in the form interpreted by button 3,
+the fully-qualified address of the extra argument.
+.SS "Support programs
+.I Win
+creates a new
+.I acme
+window and runs a
+.I command
+(default
+.BR /bin/rc )
+in it, turning the window into something analogous to an
+.IR rio (1)
+window.
+Executing text in a
+.I win
+window with button
+2 is similar to using
+.BR Send .
+.PP
+.I Awd
+loads the tag line of its window with the directory in which it's running, suffixed
+.BI - label
+(default
+.BR rc );
+it is
+intended to be executed by a
+.B cd
+function for use in
+.I win
+windows.  An example definition is
+.EX
+	fn cd { builtin cd $1 && awd $sysname }
+.EE
+.SS "Applications and guide files
+In the directory
+.B /acme
+live several subdirectories, each corresponding to a program or
+set of related programs that employ
+.I acme's
+user interface.
+Each subdirectory includes source, binaries, and a
+.B readme
+file for further information.
+It also includes a
+.BR guide ,
+a text file holding sample commands to invoke the programs.
+The idea is to find an example in the guide that best matches
+the job at hand, edit it to suit, and execute it.
+.PP
+Whenever a command is executed by
+.IR acme ,
+the default search path includes the directory of the window containing
+the command and its subdirectory
+.BR $cputype .
+The program directories in
+.B /acme
+contain appropriately labeled subdirectories of binaries,
+so commands named
+in the guide files will be found automatically when run.
+Also,
+.I acme
+binds the directories
+.B /acme/bin
+and
+.B /acme/bin/$cputype
+to the beginning of
+.B /bin
+when it starts; this is where
+.IR acme -specific
+programs such as
+.I win
+and
+.I awd
+reside.
+.SH FILES
+.TF $home/acme.dump
+.TP
+.B $home/acme.dump
+default file for
+.B Dump
+and
+.BR Load ;
+also where state is written if
+.I acme
+dies or is killed unexpectedly, e.g. by deleting its window.
+.TP
+.B /acme/*/guide
+template files for applications
+.TP
+.B /acme/*/readme
+informal documentation for applications
+.TP
+.B /acme/*/src
+source for applications
+.TP
+.B /acme/*/mips
+MIPS-specific binaries for applications
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/acme
+.br
+.B /acme/bin/source/win
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/awd.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR acme (4)
+.br
+Rob Pike,
+.I
+Acme: A User Interface for Programmers.
+.SH BUGS
+With the
+.B -l
+option or
+.B Load
+command,
+the recreation of windows under control of external programs
+such as
+.I win
+is just to rerun the command; information may be lost.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/ap b/sys/man/1/ap
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..1b717f35f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/ap
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+.TH AP 1
+.SH NAME
+ap \- fetch Associated Press news articles
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B ap
+[
+.BI article-name
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I ap
+fetches Associated Press news articles from http://www.newsday.com.
+Without any arguments it provides a two column list of article keys and descriptions.
+When invoked with an article key it fetches that article.
+.PP
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /rc/bin/ap
diff --git a/sys/man/1/ar b/sys/man/1/ar
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..4e2e91b48
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/ar
@@ -0,0 +1,182 @@
+.TH AR 1
+.SH NAME
+ar \- archive and library maintainer
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B ar
+.I key
+[
+.I posname
+]
+.I afile
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Ar
+maintains groups of files
+combined into a single archive file,
+.IR afile .
+The main use of
+.I ar
+is to create and update library files for the loaders
+.IR 2l (1),
+etc.
+It can be used, though, for any similar purpose.
+.PP
+.I Key
+is one character from the set
+.BR drqtpmx ,
+optionally concatenated with
+one or more of
+.BR vuaibclo .
+The
+.I files
+are constituents of the archive
+.IR afile .
+The meanings of the
+.I key
+characters are:
+.TP
+.B d
+Delete 
+.I files 
+from the archive file.
+.TP
+.B r
+Replace
+.I files 
+in the archive file, or add them if missing.
+Optional modifiers are
+.RS
+.PD0
+.TP
+.B u
+Replace only files with
+modified dates later than that of
+the archive.
+.TP
+.B a
+Place new files after
+.I posname
+in the archive rather than at the end.
+.TP
+.BR b " or " i
+Place new files before
+.I posname
+in the archive.
+.RE
+.PD
+.TP
+.B q
+Quick.  Append
+.I files 
+to the end of the archive without checking for duplicates.
+Avoids quadratic behavior in
+.LR "for (i in *.v) ar r lib.a $i" .
+.TP
+.B t
+List a table of contents of the archive.
+If names are given, only those files are listed.
+.TP
+.B p
+Print the named files in the archive.
+.TP
+.B m
+Move the named files to the end or elsewhere,
+specified as with 
+.LR r .
+.TP
+.B o
+Preserve the access and modification times of files
+extracted with the
+.B x
+command.
+.TP
+.B x
+Extract the named files.
+If no names are given, all files in the archive are
+extracted.
+In neither case does
+.B x
+alter the archive file.
+.TP
+.B v
+Verbose.
+Give a file-by-file
+description of the making of a
+new archive file from the old archive and the constituent files.
+With
+.BR p ,
+precede each file with a name.
+With
+.BR t ,
+give a long listing of all information about the files,
+somewhat like a listing by
+.IR ls (1),
+showing
+.br
+.ns
+.IP
+.B
+	mode uid/gid size date name
+.\" .TP
+.\" .B c
+.\" Create.
+.\" Normally
+.\" .I ar
+.\" will create a new archive when
+.\" .I afile
+.\" does not exist, and give a warning.
+.\" Option 
+.\" .B c
+.\" discards any old contents and suppresses the warning.
+.TP
+.B l
+Local.
+Normally
+.I ar
+places its temporary files in the directory
+.BR /tmp .
+This option causes them to be placed in the local directory.
+.PP
+When a
+.BR d ,
+.BR r ,
+or
+.BR m
+.I key
+is specified and all members of the archive are valid object files for
+the same architecture,
+.I ar
+inserts a table of contents, required by the loaders, at
+the front of the library.
+The table of contents is
+rebuilt whenever the archive is modified, except
+when the
+.B q
+.I key
+is specified or when the table of contents is
+explicitly moved or deleted.
+.SH EXAMPLE
+.TP
+.L
+ar cr lib.a *.v
+Replace the contents of library
+.L lib.a
+with the object files in the current directory.
+.SH FILES
+.TF /tmp/vxxxx
+.TP
+.B /tmp/v*
+temporaries
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/ar.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR 2l (1), 
+.IR ar (6)
+.SH BUGS
+If the same file is mentioned twice in an argument list,
+it may be put in the archive twice.
+.br
+This command predates Plan 9 and makes some invalid assumptions,
+for instance that user id's are numeric.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/ascii b/sys/man/1/ascii
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..de5cd77cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/ascii
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+.TH ASCII 1 
+.SH NAME
+ascii, unicode \- interpret ASCII, Unicode characters
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B ascii
+[
+.B -8cnt
+]
+[
+.B -dox
+|
+.B -b
+.I n
+]
+[
+.I text
+]
+.PP
+.B unicode
+.IB hexmin - hexmax
+.PP
+.B unicode
+[
+.B -t
+]
+.I hex
+[
+\&...
+]
+.PP
+.B unicode
+[
+.B -n
+]
+.I characters
+.PP
+.B look
+.I hex
+.B /lib/unicode
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Ascii
+prints the
+.SM ASCII 
+values corresponding to characters and
+.I vice
+.IR versa ;
+under the
+.B -8
+option, the
+.SM ISO
+Latin-1 extensions (codes 0200-0377) are included.
+The values are interpreted in a settable numeric base;
+.B -o
+specifies octal,
+.B -d
+decimal,
+.B -x
+hexadecimal (the default), and
+.BI -b n
+base
+.IR n .
+.PP
+With no arguments,
+.I ascii
+prints a table of the character set in the specified base.
+Characters of
+.I text
+are converted to their
+.SM ASCII 
+values, one per line. If, however, the first
+.I text
+argument is a valid number in the specified base, conversion
+goes the opposite way.
+Control characters are printed as two- or three-character mnemonics.
+Other options are:
+.TP
+.B -n
+Force numeric output.
+.TP
+.B -c
+Force character output.
+.TP
+.B -t
+Convert from numbers to running text; do not interpret
+control characters or insert newlines.
+.PP
+.I Unicode
+is similar; it converts between
+.SM UTF
+and character values from the Unicode Standard (see
+.IR utf (6)).
+If given a range of hexadecimal numbers,
+.I unicode
+prints a table of the specified Unicode characters \(em their values and
+.SM UTF
+representations.
+Otherwise it translates from
+.SM UTF
+to numeric value or vice versa,
+depending on the appearance of the supplied text;
+the
+.B -n
+option forces numeric output to avoid ambiguity with numeric characters.
+If converting to
+.SM UTF ,
+the characters are printed one per line unless the
+.B -t
+flag is set, in which case the output is a single string
+containing only the specified characters.
+Unlike
+.IR ascii ,
+.I unicode
+treats no characters specially.
+.PP
+The output of
+.I ascii
+and
+.I unicode
+may be unhelpful if the characters printed are not available in the current font.
+.PP
+The file
+.B /lib/unicode
+contains a
+table of characters and descriptions, sorted in hexadecimal order,
+suitable for
+.IR look (1)
+on the lower case
+.I hex
+values of characters.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.TP
+.B "ascii -d"
+Print the
+.SM ASCII 
+table base 10.
+.TP
+.B "unicode p"
+Print the hex value of `p'.
+.TP
+.B "unicode 2200-22f1"
+Print a table of miscellaneous mathematical symbols.
+.TP
+.B "look 039 /lib/unicode"
+See the start of the Greek alphabet's encoding in the Unicode Standard.
+.SH FILES
+.TF \fL/lib/unicode
+.TP
+.B /lib/unicode
+table of characters and descriptions.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/ascii.c
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/unicode.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR look (1),
+.IR tcs (1),
+.IR utf (6),
+.IR font (6)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/awk b/sys/man/1/awk
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..d79b963c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/awk
@@ -0,0 +1,560 @@
+.TH AWK 1
+.SH NAME
+awk \- pattern-directed scanning and processing language
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B awk
+[
+.B -F
+.I fs
+]
+[
+.B -d
+]
+[
+.BI -mf
+.I n
+]
+[
+.B -mr
+.I n
+]
+[
+.B -safe
+]
+[
+.B -v
+.I var=value
+]
+[
+.B -f
+.I progfile
+|
+.I prog
+]
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Awk
+scans each input
+.I file
+for lines that match any of a set of patterns specified literally in
+.I prog
+or in one or more files
+specified as
+.B -f
+.IR progfile .
+With each pattern
+there can be an associated action that will be performed
+when a line of a
+.I file
+matches the pattern.
+Each line is matched against the
+pattern portion of every pattern-action statement;
+the associated action is performed for each matched pattern.
+The file name 
+.L -
+means the standard input.
+Any
+.IR file
+of the form
+.I var=value
+is treated as an assignment, not a file name,
+and is executed at the time it would have been opened if it were a file name.
+The option
+.B -v
+followed by
+.I var=value
+is an assignment to be done before the program
+is executed;
+any number of
+.B -v
+options may be present.
+.B -F
+.IR fs
+option defines the input field separator to be the regular expression
+.IR fs .
+.PP
+An input line is normally made up of fields separated by white space,
+or by regular expression
+.BR FS .
+The fields are denoted
+.BR $1 ,
+.BR $2 ,
+\&..., while
+.B $0
+refers to the entire line.
+If
+.BR FS
+is null, the input line is split into one field per character.
+.PP
+To compensate for inadequate implementation of storage management,
+the 
+.B -mr
+option can be used to set the maximum size of the input record,
+and the
+.B -mf
+option to set the maximum number of fields.
+.PP
+The
+.B -safe
+option causes
+.I awk
+to run in 
+``safe mode,''
+in which it is not allowed to 
+run shell commands or open files
+and the environment is not made available
+in the 
+.B ENVIRON
+variable.
+.PP
+A pattern-action statement has the form
+.IP
+.IB pattern " { " action " }
+.PP
+A missing 
+.BI { " action " }
+means print the line;
+a missing pattern always matches.
+Pattern-action statements are separated by newlines or semicolons.
+.PP
+An action is a sequence of statements.
+A statement can be one of the following:
+.PP
+.EX
+.ta \w'\fLdelete array[expression]'u
+if(\fI expression \fP)\fI statement \fP\fR[ \fPelse\fI statement \fP\fR]\fP
+while(\fI expression \fP)\fI statement\fP
+for(\fI expression \fP;\fI expression \fP;\fI expression \fP)\fI statement\fP
+for(\fI var \fPin\fI array \fP)\fI statement\fP
+do\fI statement \fPwhile(\fI expression \fP)
+break
+continue
+{\fR [\fP\fI statement ... \fP\fR] \fP}
+\fIexpression\fP	#\fR commonly\fP\fI var = expression\fP
+print\fR [ \fP\fIexpression-list \fP\fR] \fP\fR[ \fP>\fI expression \fP\fR]\fP
+printf\fI format \fP\fR[ \fP,\fI expression-list \fP\fR] \fP\fR[ \fP>\fI expression \fP\fR]\fP
+return\fR [ \fP\fIexpression \fP\fR]\fP
+next	#\fR skip remaining patterns on this input line\fP
+nextfile	#\fR skip rest of this file, open next, start at top\fP
+delete\fI array\fP[\fI expression \fP]	#\fR delete an array element\fP
+delete\fI array\fP	#\fR delete all elements of array\fP
+exit\fR [ \fP\fIexpression \fP\fR]\fP	#\fR exit immediately; status is \fP\fIexpression\fP
+.EE
+.DT
+.PP
+Statements are terminated by
+semicolons, newlines or right braces.
+An empty
+.I expression-list
+stands for
+.BR $0 .
+String constants are quoted \&\fL"\ "\fR,
+with the usual C escapes recognized within.
+Expressions take on string or numeric values as appropriate,
+and are built using the operators
+.B + \- * / % ^
+(exponentiation), and concatenation (indicated by white space).
+The operators
+.B
+! ++ \-\- += \-= *= /= %= ^= > >= < <= == != ?:
+are also available in expressions.
+Variables may be scalars, array elements
+(denoted
+.IB x  [ i ] )
+or fields.
+Variables are initialized to the null string.
+Array subscripts may be any string,
+not necessarily numeric;
+this allows for a form of associative memory.
+Multiple subscripts such as
+.B [i,j,k]
+are permitted; the constituents are concatenated,
+separated by the value of
+.BR SUBSEP .
+.PP
+The
+.B print
+statement prints its arguments on the standard output
+(or on a file if
+.BI > file
+or
+.BI >> file
+is present or on a pipe if
+.BI | cmd
+is present), separated by the current output field separator,
+and terminated by the output record separator.
+.I file
+and
+.I cmd
+may be literal names or parenthesized expressions;
+identical string values in different statements denote
+the same open file.
+The
+.B printf
+statement formats its expression list according to the format
+(see
+.IR fprintf (2)) .
+The built-in function
+.BI close( expr )
+closes the file or pipe
+.IR expr .
+The built-in function
+.BI fflush( expr )
+flushes any buffered output for the file or pipe
+.IR expr .
+If
+.IR expr
+is omitted or is a null string, all open files are flushed.
+.PP
+The mathematical functions
+.BR exp ,
+.BR log ,
+.BR sqrt ,
+.BR sin ,
+.BR cos ,
+and
+.BR atan2 
+are built in.
+Other built-in functions:
+.TF length
+.TP
+.B length
+If its argument is a string, the string's length is returned.
+If its argument is an array, the number of subscripts in the array is returned.
+If no argument, the length of
+.B $0
+is returned.
+.TP
+.B rand
+random number on (0,1)
+.TP
+.B srand
+sets seed for
+.B rand
+and returns the previous seed.
+.TP
+.B int
+truncates to an integer value
+.TP
+.B utf
+converts its numerical argument, a character number, to a
+.SM UTF
+string
+.TP
+.BI substr( s , " m" , " n\fL)
+the
+.IR n -character
+substring of
+.I s
+that begins at position
+.IR m 
+counted from 1.
+.TP
+.BI index( s , " t" )
+the position in
+.I s
+where the string
+.I t
+occurs, or 0 if it does not.
+.TP
+.BI match( s , " r" )
+the position in
+.I s
+where the regular expression
+.I r
+occurs, or 0 if it does not.
+The variables
+.B RSTART
+and
+.B RLENGTH
+are set to the position and length of the matched string.
+.TP
+.BI split( s , " a" , " fs\fL)
+splits the string
+.I s
+into array elements
+.IB a [1]\f1,
+.IB a [2]\f1,
+\&...,
+.IB a [ n ]\f1,
+and returns
+.IR n .
+The separation is done with the regular expression
+.I fs
+or with the field separator
+.B FS
+if
+.I fs
+is not given.
+An empty string as field separator splits the string
+into one array element per character.
+.TP
+.BI sub( r , " t" , " s\fL)
+substitutes
+.I t
+for the first occurrence of the regular expression
+.I r
+in the string
+.IR s .
+If
+.I s
+is not given,
+.B $0
+is used.
+.TP
+.B gsub
+same as
+.B sub
+except that all occurrences of the regular expression
+are replaced;
+.B sub
+and
+.B gsub
+return the number of replacements.
+.TP
+.BI sprintf( fmt , " expr" , " ...\fL)
+the string resulting from formatting
+.I expr ...
+according to the
+.I printf
+format
+.I fmt
+.TP
+.BI system( cmd )
+executes
+.I cmd
+and returns its exit status
+.TP
+.BI tolower( str )
+returns a copy of
+.I str
+with all upper-case characters translated to their
+corresponding lower-case equivalents.
+.TP
+.BI toupper( str )
+returns a copy of
+.I str
+with all lower-case characters translated to their
+corresponding upper-case equivalents.
+.PD
+.PP
+The ``function''
+.B getline
+sets
+.B $0
+to the next input record from the current input file;
+.B getline
+.BI < file
+sets
+.B $0
+to the next record from
+.IR file .
+.B getline
+.I x
+sets variable
+.I x
+instead.
+Finally,
+.IB cmd " | getline
+pipes the output of
+.I cmd
+into
+.BR getline ;
+each call of
+.B getline
+returns the next line of output from
+.IR cmd .
+In all cases,
+.B getline
+returns 1 for a successful input,
+0 for end of file, and \-1 for an error.
+.PP
+Patterns are arbitrary Boolean combinations
+(with
+.BR "! || &&" )
+of regular expressions and
+relational expressions.
+Regular expressions are as in
+.IR regexp (6).
+Isolated regular expressions
+in a pattern apply to the entire line.
+Regular expressions may also occur in
+relational expressions, using the operators
+.BR ~
+and
+.BR !~ .
+.BI / re /
+is a constant regular expression;
+any string (constant or variable) may be used
+as a regular expression, except in the position of an isolated regular expression
+in a pattern.
+.PP
+A pattern may consist of two patterns separated by a comma;
+in this case, the action is performed for all lines
+from an occurrence of the first pattern
+though an occurrence of the second.
+.PP
+A relational expression is one of the following:
+.IP
+.I expression matchop regular-expression
+.br
+.I expression relop expression
+.br
+.IB expression " in " array-name
+.br
+.BI ( expr , expr,... ") in " array-name
+.PP
+where a
+.I relop
+is any of the six relational operators in C,
+and a
+.I matchop
+is either
+.B ~
+(matches)
+or
+.B !~
+(does not match).
+A conditional is an arithmetic expression,
+a relational expression,
+or a Boolean combination
+of these.
+.PP
+The special patterns
+.B BEGIN
+and
+.B END
+may be used to capture control before the first input line is read
+and after the last.
+.B BEGIN
+and
+.B END
+do not combine with other patterns.
+.PP
+Variable names with special meanings:
+.TF FILENAME
+.TP
+.B CONVFMT
+conversion format used when converting numbers
+(default
+.BR "%.6g" )
+.TP
+.B FS
+regular expression used to separate fields; also settable
+by option
+.BI \-F fs\f1.
+.TP
+.BR NF
+number of fields in the current record
+.TP
+.B NR
+ordinal number of the current record
+.TP
+.B FNR
+ordinal number of the current record in the current file
+.TP
+.B FILENAME
+the name of the current input file
+.TP
+.B RS
+input record separator (default newline)
+.TP
+.B OFS
+output field separator (default blank)
+.TP
+.B ORS
+output record separator (default newline)
+.TP
+.B OFMT
+output format for numbers (default
+.BR "%.6g" )
+.TP
+.B SUBSEP
+separates multiple subscripts (default 034)
+.TP
+.B ARGC
+argument count, assignable
+.TP
+.B ARGV
+argument array, assignable;
+non-null members are taken as file names
+.TP
+.B ENVIRON
+array of environment variables; subscripts are names.
+.PD
+.PP
+Functions may be defined (at the position of a pattern-action statement) thus:
+.IP
+.L
+function foo(a, b, c) { ...; return x }
+.PP
+Parameters are passed by value if scalar and by reference if array name;
+functions may be called recursively.
+Parameters are local to the function; all other variables are global.
+Thus local variables may be created by providing excess parameters in
+the function definition.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.TP
+.L
+length($0) > 72
+Print lines longer than 72 characters.
+.TP
+.L
+{ print $2, $1 }
+Print first two fields in opposite order.
+.PP
+.EX
+BEGIN { FS = ",[ \et]*|[ \et]+" }
+      { print $2, $1 }
+.EE
+.ns
+.IP
+Same, with input fields separated by comma and/or blanks and tabs.
+.PP
+.EX
+	{ s += $1 }
+END	{ print "sum is", s, " average is", s/NR }
+.EE
+.ns
+.IP
+Add up first column, print sum and average.
+.TP
+.L
+/start/, /stop/
+Print all lines between start/stop pairs.
+.PP
+.EX
+BEGIN	{	# Simulate echo(1)
+	for (i = 1; i < ARGC; i++) printf "%s ", ARGV[i]
+	printf "\en"
+	exit }
+.EE
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/awk
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR sed (1),
+.IR regexp (6),
+.br
+A. V. Aho, B. W. Kernighan, P. J. Weinberger,
+.I
+The AWK Programming Language,
+Addison-Wesley, 1988.  ISBN 0-201-07981-X
+.SH BUGS
+There are no explicit conversions between numbers and strings.
+To force an expression to be treated as a number add 0 to it;
+to force it to be treated as a string concatenate
+\&\fL""\fP to it.
+.br
+The scope rules for variables in functions are a botch;
+the syntax is worse.
+.br
+UTF is not always dealt with correctly,
+though
+.I awk
+does make an attempt to do so.
+The
+.I split
+function with an empty string as final argument now copes
+with UTF in the string being split.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/basename b/sys/man/1/basename
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..c72638f13
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/basename
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+.TH BASENAME 1 
+.SH NAME
+basename \- strip file name affixes
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B basename
+[
+.B -d
+]
+.I string
+[
+.I suffix
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+.I Basename
+deletes any prefix ending in slash
+.RB ( / )
+and the
+.IR suffix ,
+if present in
+.IR string ,
+from
+.IR string ,
+and prints the result on the standard output.
+.PP
+The
+.B -d
+option instead prints the directory component,
+that is,
+.I string
+up to but not including the final slash.
+If the string contains no slash,
+a period and newline are printed.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/basename.c
diff --git a/sys/man/1/bc b/sys/man/1/bc
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..87c2b1148
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/bc
@@ -0,0 +1,290 @@
+.TH BC 1 
+.SH NAME
+bc \- arbitrary-precision arithmetic language
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B bc
+[
+.B -cdls
+]
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Bc
+is an interactive processor for a language that resembles
+C but provides arithmetic on numbers of arbitrary length with up
+to 100 digits right of the decimal point.
+It takes input from any files given, then reads
+the standard input.
+.PP
+The
+.B -d
+option enables debugging output.
+The
+.B -l
+option stands for the name
+of an arbitrary precision math library.
+The
+.B -s
+option suppresses the automatic display
+of calculation results; all output is via the
+.B print
+command.
+.PP
+The following syntax for 
+.I bc
+programs is like that of C;
+.I L
+means letter
+.BR a - z ,
+.I E
+means expression,
+.I S
+means statement.
+.TF length(E)
+.TP
+Lexical
+.RS
+.HP
+comments are enclosed in
+.B /* */
+.HP
+newlines end statements
+.RE
+.TP
+Names
+.IP
+simple variables:
+.I L
+.br
+array elements:
+.IB L [ E ]
+.br
+The words
+.BR ibase ,
+.BR obase ,
+and
+.B scale
+.TP
+Other operands
+.IP
+arbitrarily long numbers with optional sign and decimal point.
+.RS
+.TP
+.BI ( E )
+.TP
+.BI sqrt( E )
+.TP
+.BI length( E )
+number of significant decimal digits
+.TP
+.BI scale( E )
+number of digits right of decimal point
+.TP
+.IB L ( E , ... ,\fIE\fP)
+function call
+.RE
+.TP
+Operators
+.RS
+.HP
+.B "+  -  *  /  %  ^\ "
+.RB ( %
+is remainder;
+.B ^
+is power)
+.HP
+.B "++  --\ "
+.TP
+.B "==  <=  >=  !=  <  >"
+.TP
+.B "=  +=  -=  *=  /=  %=  ^="
+.RE
+.TP
+Statements
+.RS
+.br
+.I E
+.br
+.B {
+.I S
+.B ;
+\&...
+.B ;
+.I S
+.B }
+.br
+.B "print"
+.I E
+.br
+.B "if ("
+.I E
+.B )
+.I S
+.br
+.B "while ("
+.I E
+.B )
+.I S
+.br
+.B "for ("
+.I E
+.B ;
+.I E
+.B ;
+.I E
+.B ")"
+.I  S
+.br
+null statement
+.br
+.B break
+.br
+.B quit
+.br
+\fL"\fRtext\fL"\fR
+.RE
+.TP
+Function definitions
+.RS
+.br
+.B define
+.I L
+.B (
+.I L
+.B ,
+\&...
+.B ,
+.I L
+.B ){
+.PD0
+.br
+.B auto
+.I L
+.B ,
+\&...
+.B ,
+.I L
+.br
+.I S
+.B ;
+\&...
+.B ;
+.I  S
+.br
+.B return
+.I E
+.LP
+.B }
+.RE
+.TP
+Functions in 
+.B -l
+math library
+.RS
+.TP
+.BI s( x )
+sine
+.TP
+.BI c( x )
+cosine
+.TP
+.BI e( x )
+exponential
+.TP
+.BI l( x )
+log
+.TP
+.BI a( x )
+arctangent
+.TP
+.BI j( "n, x" )
+Bessel function
+.RE
+.PP
+.DT
+All function arguments are passed by value.
+.PD
+.PP
+The value of an expression at the top level is printed
+unless the main operator is an assignment or the
+.B -s
+command line argument is given.
+Text in quotes, which may include newlines, is always printed.
+Either semicolons or newlines may separate statements.
+Assignment to
+.B scale
+influences the number of digits to be retained on arithmetic
+operations in the manner of
+.IR dc (1).
+Assignments to
+.B ibase
+or
+.B obase
+set the input and output number radix respectively.
+.PP
+The same letter may be used as an array, a function,
+and a simple variable simultaneously.
+All variables are global to the program.
+Automatic variables are pushed down during function calls.
+In a declaration of an array as a function argument
+or automatic variable
+empty square brackets must follow the array name.
+.PP
+.I Bc
+is actually a preprocessor for
+.IR dc (1),
+which it invokes automatically, unless the
+.B -c
+(compile only)
+option is present.
+In this case the
+.I dc
+input is sent to the standard output instead.
+.SH EXAMPLE
+Define a function to compute an approximate value of
+the exponential.
+Use it to print 10 values.
+(The exponential function in the library gives better answers.)
+.PP
+.EX
+scale = 20
+define e(x) {
+	auto a, b, c, i, s
+	a = 1
+	b = 1
+	s = 1
+	for(i=1; 1; i++) {
+		a *= x
+		b *= i
+		c = a/b
+		if(c == 0) return s
+		s += c
+	}
+}
+for(i=1; i<=10; i++) print e(i)
+.EE
+.SH FILES
+.B /sys/lib/bclib
+mathematical library
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/bc.y
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR dc (1), 
+.IR hoc (1)
+.SH BUGS
+No
+.LR && ,
+.LR || ,
+or
+.L !
+operators.
+.PP
+A
+.L for
+statement must have all three
+.LR E s.
+.PP
+A
+.L quit
+is interpreted when read, not when executed.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/bind b/sys/man/1/bind
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..7994f7192
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/bind
@@ -0,0 +1,215 @@
+.TH BIND 1
+.SH NAME
+bind, mount, unmount \- change name space
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B bind
+[
+.I option ...
+]
+.I new old
+.PP
+.B mount
+[
+.I option ...
+]
+.I servename old
+[
+.I spec
+]
+.PP
+.B unmount
+[
+.I new
+]
+.I old
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Bind
+and
+.I mount
+modify the file name space of the current process
+and other processes in the same name space group
+(see
+.IR fork (2)).
+For both calls,
+.I old
+is the name of an existing file or directory in the
+current name space where the modification is to be made.
+.PP
+For
+.IR bind ,
+.I new
+is the name of another (or possibly the same)
+existing file or directory in
+the current name space.
+After a successful
+.IR bind ,
+the file name
+.I old
+is an alias for the object originally named by
+.IR new ;
+if the modification doesn't hide it,
+.I new
+will also still refer to its original file.
+The evaluation of
+.I new
+(see
+.IR intro (2))
+happens at the time of the
+.IR bind ,
+not when the binding is later used.
+.PP
+The
+.I servename
+argument to
+.I mount
+is the name of a file that, when opened, yields an
+existing connection to a file server.
+Almost always,
+.I servename
+will be a file in
+.B /srv
+(see
+.IR srv (3)).
+In the discussion below,
+.I new
+refers to the file named by the
+.I new
+argument to
+.I bind
+or the root directory of the service
+available in
+.I servename
+after a
+.IR mount .
+Either both
+.I old
+and
+.I new
+files must be directories,
+or both must not be directories.
+.PP
+Options control aspects of the modification to the name space:
+.TP 10
+(none)
+Replace the
+.I old
+file by the new one.
+Henceforth, an evaluation of
+.I old
+will be translated to the new file.
+If they are directories (for
+.IR mount ,
+this condition is true by definition),
+.I old
+becomes a
+.I "union directory"
+consisting of one directory (the new file).
+.TP
+.B -b
+Both files must be directories.
+Add the new directory to the beginning
+of the union directory represented by the old file.
+.TP
+.B -a
+Both files must be directories.
+Add the new directory to the end
+of the union directory represented by the old file.
+.TP
+.B -c
+This can be used in addition to any of the above to permit
+creation in a union directory.
+When a new file is created in a union directory,
+it is placed in the first element of the union that has been bound or mounted with the
+.B -c
+flag.
+If that directory does not have write permission, the create fails.
+.TP
+.B -C
+(Only in
+.IR mount .)
+By default, file contents are always retrieved from the server.
+With this option, the kernel may instead use a local cache to satisfy
+.IR read (5)
+requests for files accessible through this mount point.
+The currency of cached data for a file is verified at each
+.IR open (5)
+of the file from this client machine.
+.TP
+.B -q
+Exit silently if the
+.B bind
+or
+.B mount
+operation fails.
+.PD
+.PP
+.I Mount
+takes two additional options.
+The first,
+.B -k
+.IR keypattern ,
+constrains the set of 
+.IR factotum (4)
+keys used for an authenticated mount.
+The second,
+.BR -n ,
+causes
+.I mount
+to skip authentication entirely.
+.PP
+The
+.I spec
+argument to
+.I mount
+is passed in the
+.IR attach (5)
+message to the server, and selects among different
+file trees served by the server.
+.PP
+The
+.IR srv (3)
+service registry device, normally bound to
+.BR /srv ,
+is a convenient rendezvous point for services that can be mounted.
+After bootstrap, the file
+.B /srv/boot
+contains the communications port to the file system from which
+the system was loaded.
+.PP
+The effects of
+.I bind
+and
+.I mount
+can be undone with the
+.I unmount
+command.
+If two arguments are given to
+.IR unmount ,
+the effect is to undo a
+.I bind
+or
+.I mount
+with the same arguments.
+If only one argument is given,
+everything bound to or mounted upon
+.I old
+is unmounted.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+To compile a program with the C library from July 16, 1992:
+.IP
+.EX
+mount /srv/boot /n/dump dump
+bind /n/dump/1992/0716/mips/lib/libc.a /mips/lib/libc.a
+mk
+.EE
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/bind.c
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/mount.c
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/unmount.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR bind (2),
+.IR open (2),
+.IR srv (3),
+.IR srv (4)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/bitsyload b/sys/man/1/bitsyload
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..e9c464614
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/bitsyload
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+.TH BITSYLOAD 1
+.SH NAME
+bitsyload, light, pencal, keyboard, params, prompter \- bitsy-specific utilities
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.PP
+.B bitsy/bitsyload
+.B k|r
+[
+.I file
+]
+.PP
+.B bitsy/light
+[
+.I intensity
+]
+.PP
+.B bitsy/params
+[
+.B \-f
+]
+.PP
+.B bitsy/pencal
+.PP
+.B bitsy/keyboard
+[
+.B \-n
+]
+.PP
+.B bitsy/prompter
+[
+.B \-n
+]
+.I file
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+.I Bitsyload
+erases a section of flash memory on the Bitsy (iPAQ 3650 or 3830)
+and copies new
+information into it, using the format required by the Compaq
+boot loader.  The required first argument is the destination, either
+.B k
+for
+.B /dev/flash/kernel
+or
+.B r
+for
+.BR /dev/flash/ramdisk .
+The optional second argument is the name of the file
+to load.  The default kernel file is
+.B /sys/src/9/bitsy/9bitsy
+and the default ramdisk file is
+.BR /sys/src/9/bitsy/ramdisk .
+.PP
+.I Light
+sets the intensity of the display backlight.
+The
+values for
+.I intensity
+are:
+.IP on
+set intensity to maximum, the default
+.IP off
+turn off backlight
+.IP \fIn\fP
+sets the intensity to
+.IR n ,
+where
+.I n
+is a value between 0 and 128.  Intensity 0 doesn't
+turn off the backlight, it just sets it to the dimmest
+value.
+.PP
+.I Pencal
+calibrates the display with the touch screen on a Bitsy.
+It loops prompting the user with crosses whose center that the user
+must touch with the stylus.  After a consistent set of touches,
+it writes the calibration both to the kernel and to standard out.
+It is normally called by the bitsy's
+.BR /bin/cpurc .
+.PP
+.I Params
+copies the contents of the file
+.BR /dev/tmpparams ,
+into the flash partition,
+.BR /dev/flash/params ,
+or if the
+.B -f
+flag it set copies in the opposite direction.
+.PP
+.I Keyboard
+creates a virtual on-screen keyboard and, unless the
+.B -n
+option is specified, a scribble area.
+A user inputs characters by tapping the keys or
+by drawing characters in the
+scribble area (see
+.IR scribble (2)).
+It is usually run as the keyboard command for
+.IR rio (1)
+using
+.BR rio 's
+.B -k
+option.
+.PP
+.I Prompter
+is a small editor used to configure parameters when a Bitsy boots.
+It displays the file and starts up a keyboard and scribble pad for
+input.
+Clicking with the stylus in the text selects where input characters will go.
+Pressing Button 5 (top left side of the Bitsy) or typing the
+.B Esc
+key on the keyboard causes
+.I prompter
+to write back the updated file and exit;
+.B Del
+causes
+.I prompter
+to exit without writing the file.
+The
+.B -n
+flag suppresses the scribble area.
+.SH EXAMPLE
+.PP
+.IR Prompter ,
+.IR params ,
+and
+.I calibrate
+are used in only one place, the Bitsy's
+.BR /rc/bin/cpurc :
+.sp
+.EX
+# set variables
+ramfs
+bitsy/params -f
+if(! grep -s '^calibrate=' /tmp/tmpparams)
+	bitsy/pencal >>/tmp/tmpparams
+if not {
+	eval `{grep '^calibrate=' /tmp/tmpparams}
+	echo calibrate $calibrate > '#m/mousectl'
+}
+bitsy/prompter /tmp/tmpparams
+bitsy/params
+. /tmp/tmpparams
+.EE
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/bitsy
diff --git a/sys/man/1/bundle b/sys/man/1/bundle
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..272d32530
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/bundle
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+.TH BUNDLE 1
+.SH NAME
+bundle \- collect files for distribution
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B bundle
+.I file ...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Bundle
+writes on its standard output a shell script for
+.IR rc (1)
+or a Bourne shell
+which, when executed,
+will recreate the original
+.IR files .
+Its main use is for distributing small numbers of text files by
+.IR mail (1).
+.PP
+Although less refined than standard archives from
+.IR ar (1)
+or
+.IR tar (1),
+a
+.IR bundle
+file
+is self-documenting and complete; little preparation is required on
+the receiving machine.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.TP
+.L
+bundle mkfile *.[ch] | mail kremvax!boris
+Send a makefile to Boris together with related
+.L .c
+and
+.L .h
+files.
+Upon receiving the mail, Boris may save the file sans postmark,
+say in
+.BR gift/horse ,
+then do
+.TP
+.L
+cd gift; rc horse; mk
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /rc/bin/bundle
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR ar (1), 
+.IR tar (1), 
+.IR mail (1)
+.SH BUGS
+.I Bundle
+will not create directories and is unsatisfactory for non-text files.
+.PP
+Beware of gift horses.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/cal b/sys/man/1/cal
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..a821f1e5c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/cal
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+.TH CAL 1
+.SH NAME
+cal \- print calendar
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B cal
+[
+.I month
+]
+[
+.I year
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Cal
+prints a calendar.
+.I Month
+is either a number from 1 to 12,
+a lower case month name,
+or a lower case three-letter prefix of a month name.
+.I Year
+can be between 1
+and 9999.
+If either
+.I month
+or
+.I year
+is omitted, the current month or year is used.
+If only one argument is given, and it is a number larger than 12,
+a calendar for all twelve months of the given year is produced;
+otherwise a calendar for just one month is printed.
+The calendar
+produced is that for England and her colonies.
+.PP
+Try
+.EX
+	cal sep 1752
+.EE
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/cal.c
+.SH BUGS
+The year is always considered to start in January even though this
+is historically naive.
+.PP
+Beware that
+.L "cal 90"
+refers to the early Christian era,
+not the 20th century.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/calendar b/sys/man/1/calendar
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..c671dedf9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/calendar
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+.TH CALENDAR 1
+.SH NAME
+calendar \- print upcoming events
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B calendar
+[
+.B -dy
+]
+[
+.B -p
+.I days
+]
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Calendar
+reads the named files, default
+.BR /usr/$user/lib/calendar ,
+and writes to standard output any lines
+containing today's or tomorrow's date.
+Examples of recognized date formats are 
+"4/11",
+"April 11",
+"Apr 11",
+"11 April",
+and
+"11 Apr".
+A special form may be used to represent weekly and
+monthly events:
+"Every Tuesday"
+"The third Wednesday"
+All comparisons are case insensitive.
+.PP
+If the
+.B -y
+flag is given, an attempt is made to match on year too.  In this case,
+dates of the forms listed above will be accepted if they are followed
+by the current year (or last two digits thereof) or not a year —
+digits not followed by white space or non-digits.
+.PP
+If the
+.B -p
+flag is given, its argument is the number of days ahead to match
+dates.  This flag is not repeatable, and it performs no special
+processing at the end of the week.
+.PP
+The
+.B -d
+flag enables debugging output.
+.PP
+On Friday and Saturday, events through Monday are printed.
+.PP
+To have your calendar mailed to you every day, use
+.IR cron (8).
+.SH FILES
+.TF /usr/$user/lib/calendar
+.TP
+.B /usr/$user/lib/calendar
+personal calendar
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/calendar.c
diff --git a/sys/man/1/cat b/sys/man/1/cat
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..837feb7ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/cat
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+.TH CAT 1
+.SH NAME
+cat, read \- catenate files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B cat
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.br
+.B read
+[
+.B -m
+] [
+.B -n
+.I nline
+] [
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Cat
+reads each
+.I file
+in sequence and writes it on the standard output.
+Thus
+.IP
+.L
+cat file
+.LP
+prints a file and
+.IP
+.L
+cat file1 file2 >file3
+.LP
+concatenates the first two files and places the result
+on the third.
+.PP
+If no
+.I file
+is given,
+.I cat 
+reads from the standard input.
+Output is buffered in blocks matching the input.
+.PP
+.I Read
+copies to standard output exactly one line from the named
+.IR file ,
+default standard input.
+It is useful in interactive
+.IR rc (1)
+scripts.
+.PP
+The
+.B -m
+flag causes it to continue reading and writing multiple lines until end of file;
+.B -n
+causes it to read no more than
+.I nline
+lines.
+.PP
+.I Read
+always executes a single
+.B write
+for each line of input, which can be helpful when
+preparing input to programs that expect line-at-a-time data.
+It never reads any more data from the input than it prints to the output.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/cat.c
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/read.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR cp (1)
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.I Read
+exits with status
+.B eof
+on end of file or, in the
+.B -n
+case, if it doesn't read
+.I nlines
+lines.
+.SH BUGS
+Beware of
+.L "cat a b >a"
+and
+.LR "cat a b >b" ,
+which
+destroy input files before reading them.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/cb b/sys/man/1/cb
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..b5eed691e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/cb
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+.TH CB 1
+.SH NAME
+cb \- C program beautifier
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B cb
+[
+.B -js
+]
+[
+.B -l
+.I length
+]
+[
+.I file
+\&...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Cb
+reads syntactically correct C programs from
+from its input or the given files, and writes them to its stdout
+with a more visually pleasing spacing and indentation.
+.I Cb
+understands no C++ syntax bar newline-terminated comments;
+and by default all user new-lines are preserved in the output.
+.PP
+The options are:
+.TP
+.B -j
+Join split lines.
+.TP 
+.B -s
+Print code in the so-called K&R style used in
+.IR "The C Programming Language" .
+.TP 
+.B -l length
+Split lines that are longer than
+.IR length .
+.PD
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/cb
+.SH BUGS
+.I Cb
+does not reformat structure initializers.
+.br
+Punctuation hidden in macros can cause
+indentation errors.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/chgrp b/sys/man/1/chgrp
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..f1924773f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/chgrp
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+.TH CHGRP 1 
+.SH NAME
+chgrp \- change file group
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B chgrp
+[
+.B -ou
+]
+.I group file ...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The group of
+each named file
+is changed to
+.IR group ,
+which should be a name known to the server holding the file.
+.PP
+A file's group can be changed by the file's owner, if the
+owner is a member of the new group,
+or by the leader of both
+the file's current group and the new group.
+.PP
+The
+.B -o
+and
+.B -u
+option are synonyms; they specify that the
+.I owner
+is to be set, rather than the group.
+They are ineffectual unless the file server is in the bootstrap
+state that permits changing file ownership.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/chgrp.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR ls (1),
+.IR chmod (1),
+.IR stat (2)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/chmod b/sys/man/1/chmod
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..a5c80b677
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/chmod
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+.TH CHMOD 1 
+.SH NAME
+chmod \- change mode
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B chmod
+.I mode file ...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The mode of
+each named file
+is changed
+according to
+.IR mode,
+which may be an octal number or a symbolic change to the existing mode.
+A
+.I mode
+is an octal
+number constructed
+from the OR of the
+following modes.
+.TF 0000
+.TP
+0400
+read by owner
+.TP
+0200
+write by owner
+.TP
+0100
+execute (search in directory) by owner
+.TP
+0070
+read, write, execute (search) by group
+.TP
+0007
+read, write, execute (search) by others
+.PD
+.PP
+A symbolic
+.I mode
+has the form:
+.IP
+.RI [who]
+.I op permission
+.PP
+The
+.I who
+part is a combination
+of the letters 
+.B u
+(for user's permissions),
+.B g
+(group)
+and
+.B o
+(other).
+The letter
+.B a
+stands for
+.BR ugo .
+If
+.I who
+is omitted,
+the default is
+.BR a .
+.PP
+.I Op
+can be
+.B +
+to add
+.I permission
+to the file's mode,
+.B -
+to take away
+.IR permission ,
+and
+.B =
+to assign
+.I permission
+absolutely
+(all other bits will
+be reset).
+.PP
+.I Permission
+is any combination of the letters
+.B r
+(read),
+.B w
+(write),
+.B x
+(execute),
+.B a
+(append only),
+.B l
+(exclusive access),
+and
+.B t
+(temporary file).
+.PP
+Only the owner of a file or the group leader of its group
+may change the file's mode.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/chmod.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR ls (1),
+.IR stat (2),
+.IR stat (5)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/cleanname b/sys/man/1/cleanname
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..41c06c00e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/cleanname
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+.TH CLEANNAME 1
+.SH NAME
+cleanname \- clean a path name
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B cleanname
+[
+.B -d 
+.I pwd
+]
+.I names ...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For each file name argument, 
+.IR cleanname ,
+by lexical processing only, 
+prints the shortest equivalent string that names the same
+(possibly hypothetical) file.
+It eliminates multiple and trailing slashes, and it lexically
+interprets
+.B .
+and
+.B ..
+directory components in the name.
+If the 
+.B -d
+option is present,
+unrooted names are prefixed with
+.IB pwd /
+before processing.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/cleanname.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR cleanname (2).
diff --git a/sys/man/1/cmp b/sys/man/1/cmp
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..55888ce97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/cmp
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+.TH CMP 1 
+.SH NAME
+cmp \- compare two files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B cmp
+[
+.B -lLs
+]
+.I file1 file2
+[
+.I offset1
+[
+.I offset2
+]
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Cmp
+compares the two files and prints
+a message if the contents differ.
+.PP
+The options are:
+.TP
+.B -l
+Print the byte number (decimal) and the
+differing bytes (hexadecimal) for each difference.
+.TP
+.B -L
+Print the line number of the first differing byte.
+.TP
+.B -s
+Print nothing for differing files,
+but set the exit status.
+.PD
+.PP
+If offsets are given,
+comparison starts at the designated byte position
+of the corresponding file.
+Offsets that begin with
+.B 0x
+are hexadecimal;
+with
+.BR 0 ,
+octal; with anything else, decimal.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/cmp.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR diff (1) 
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+If a file is inaccessible or missing, the exit status is
+.LR open .
+If the files are the same, the exit status is empty (true).
+If they are the same except that one is longer than the other, the exit status is
+.LR EOF .
+Otherwise
+.I cmp
+reports the position of the first disagreeing byte and the exit status is
+.LR differ .
diff --git a/sys/man/1/col b/sys/man/1/col
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..6fb03081a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/col
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+.TH COL 1
+.SH NAME
+col \- column alignment
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B col
+[
+.B -bfx 
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Col
+overlays lines to expunge reverse line feeds
+(ESC-7)
+and half line feeds (ESC-9 and ESC-8)
+as produced by
+.I nroff
+for .2C in
+.IR ms (6)
+or
+.IR man (6)
+and for 
+.IR tbl (1).
+.I Col
+is a pure filter.
+It normally emits only full line feeds;
+option 
+.B -f
+(fine) allows half line feeds too.
+Option 
+.B -b
+removes backspaces, printing just one of each pile of overstruck
+characters.
+.I Col
+normally converts white space to tabs;
+option
+.B -x
+overrides this feature.
+Other escaped characters and non-printing characters are ignored.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.TP
+.L
+tbl file | nroff -ms | col | p
+Format some tables for printing on typewriters;
+use
+.I col
+to remove reverse line feeds, and 
+paginate the output.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR pr (1)
+.SH BUGS
+.I Col
+can't back up more than 128 lines or
+handle more than 800 characters per line,
+and understands
+.L VT
+(013) as reverse line feed.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/colors b/sys/man/1/colors
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..67a096a3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/colors
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+.TH COLORS 1
+.SH NAME
+getmap, colors \- display color map
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.PP
+.B colors
+[
+.B -rx
+]
+.PP
+.B getmap
+[
+.I colormap
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Colors
+presents a grid showing the colors in the current color map.
+If the display is true color,
+.I colors
+shows a grid of the RGBV color map
+(see
+.IR color (6)).
+.PP
+Clicking mouse button 1 over a color in the grid will display the map index for that color,
+its
+red, green, and blue components,
+and the 32-bit hexadecimal color value as defined in
+.IR allocimage (2).
+If the
+.B -x
+option is specified, the components will also be listed in hexadecimal.
+.PP
+The
+.B -r
+option instead shows, in the same form, a grey-scale ramp.
+.PP
+A menu on mouse button 3 contains a single entry, to exit the program.
+.PP
+On 8-bit color-mapped displays,
+.I getmap
+loads the display's color map (default
+.BR rgbv ).
+The named
+.I colormap
+can be a file in the current directory or in the standard repository
+.BR /lib/cmap .
+It can also be a string of the form
+.B gamma
+or
+.BI gamma N\f1 ,
+where
+.I N
+is a floating point value for the gamma, defining the contrast for a monochrome map.
+Similarly,
+.B rgamma
+and
+.BI rgamma N
+define a reverse-video monochrome map.
+Finally, the names
+.B screen
+or
+.B display
+or
+.B vga
+are taken as synonyms for the current color map stored in the display hardware.
+.SH FILES
+.B /lib/cmap
+directory of color map files
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/colors.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR color (6)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/comm b/sys/man/1/comm
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..2fd883c05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/comm
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+.TH COMM 1 
+.CT 1 files
+.SH NAME
+comm \- select or reject lines common to two sorted files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B comm
+[
+.B -123
+]
+.I file1 file2
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Comm
+reads
+.I file1
+and
+.IR file2 ,
+which are in lexicographical order,
+and produces a three column output: lines only in
+.IR file1 ;
+lines only in
+.IR file2 ;
+and lines in both files.
+The file name
+.L -
+means the standard input.
+.PP
+Flag
+.LR 1 ,
+.LR 2 ,
+or
+.LR 3
+suppresses printing of the corresponding
+column.
+.SH EXAMPLE
+.TP
+.EX
+comm -12 file1 file2
+.EE
+.IP
+Print lines common to two sorted files.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/comm.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR sort (1),
+.IR cmp (1), 
+.IR diff (1), 
+.IR uniq (1)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/con b/sys/man/1/con
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..44c91b01b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/con
@@ -0,0 +1,315 @@
+.TH CON 1
+.SH NAME
+con, telnet, rx, hayes, xms, xmr \- remote login, execution, and XMODEM file transfer
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B con
+[
+.B -CdnrRsTv
+]
+[
+.B -b
+.I baud
+]
+[
+.B -l
+[
+.I user
+]
+]
+[
+.B -S
+.I svc
+]
+[
+.B -c
+.I cmd
+]
+.RI [ net !] machine
+.PP
+.B telnet
+[
+.B -dCrn
+]
+[
+.B -s
+.I svc
+]
+.RI [ net !] machine
+.PP
+.B rx
+[
+.B -eTr
+]
+[
+.B -l
+.I user
+]
+.RI [ net !] machine
+[
+.I command-word ...
+]
+.PP
+.B hayes
+[
+.B -pv
+]
+.I number
+[
+.I device
+]
+.PP
+.B xms
+[
+.B -1p
+]
+.I file
+.PP
+.B xmr
+.I file
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Con
+connects to the computer whose network address is
+.IR net ! machine
+and logs in if possible.
+With no options, the account name used on the remote system is the same
+as that on the local system.
+Standard input and output go to the local machine.
+.PP
+Options are:
+.TP
+.B -b
+sets the baud rate of a dial-up connection to
+.IR baud .
+.TP
+.B -n
+if the input is a file or pipe, do not hang up the connection when EOF is received,
+but instead wait for the remote end to hang up.
+.TP
+.B -l
+with an argument causes
+.I user
+to be used as the account name on the remote system
+when performing BSD
+.I rlogin
+authentication.
+Without an argument this option disables automatic login
+and a normal login session ensues.
+.TP
+.B -C
+forces cooked mode, that is, local echo.
+.TP
+.B -c
+runs
+.I cmd
+as if it had been typed as a command from the escape mode.
+.TP
+.B -v
+(verbose mode) causes information about connection attempts
+to be output to standard error.  This can be useful when
+trying to debug network connectivity.
+.TP
+.B -d
+causes debugging information to be output to standard error.
+.TP
+.B -r
+suppresses printing of any carriage return followed by a new line.
+This is useful since carriage return is a printable character in
+Plan 9.
+.TP
+.B -R
+translates newlines to carriage returns and
+.IR "vice versa" .
+.TP
+.B -T
+translates incoming carriage returns to newlines.
+.TP
+.B -s
+strips received characters to 7 bits to forestall
+misinterpretation of
+.SM ASCII
+with parity as
+.SM UTF\c
+\&.
+.TP
+.B -S
+Post a pipe as
+.BI /srv/ svc
+and connect it to standard input and output.
+This can be used with
+.B -n
+to create a standing connection that
+.IR consolefs (4),
+for example,
+can then open.
+For
+.IR telnet ,
+this option is
+.BR -s .
+.PP
+The
+.RB control\- \e
+character is a local escape.
+It prompts with
+.BR >>> .
+Legitimate responses to the prompt are
+.TP
+.B i
+Send a quit [sic] signal to the remote machine.
+.PD0
+.TP
+.B q
+Exit.
+.TP
+.B b
+Send a break.
+.TP
+.B .
+Return from the escape.
+.TP
+.B !cmd
+Run the command with the network connection as its
+standard input and standard output.
+Standard error will go to the screen.
+This is useful for transmitting and receiving files
+over the connections using programs such as
+.IR xms .
+.TP
+.B r
+Toggle printing of carriage returns.
+.PD
+.PP
+.I Telnet
+is similar to con, but uses the
+.I telnet
+protocol to communicate with the remote machine.
+It shares
+.I con's
+.BR -C ,
+.BR -d ,
+.BR -n ,
+and
+.BR -r
+options.
+.PP
+.I Rx
+executes one shell command
+on the remote machine as if logged in there,
+but with local standard input and output.
+A rudimentary shell environment is provided.
+If the target is a Plan 9 machine,
+.B $service
+there will be
+.BR rx .
+Options are:
+.TP
+.B \-e
+a zero length message will not be written to the
+connection when standard input is closed.
+.TP
+.B \-l
+runs as
+.I user
+on the remote machine if the remote is a BSD machine.
+.TP
+.B \-r
+same as for
+.I con
+.TP
+.B -T
+same as for
+.I con
+.PD
+.PP
+Network addresses for both
+.I con
+and
+.I rx
+have the form
+.IB network ! machine\f1.
+Supported networks are those listed in
+.BR /net .
+.PP
+.I Hayes
+dials
+.I number
+on a Hayes-compatible modem,
+.IR device .
+Under
+.BR -p ,
+it uses pulse dialing.
+Upon connecting,
+bytes are copied bidirectionally
+between the connection and standard input and output.
+.PP
+The commands
+.I xms
+and
+.I xmr
+respectively send and receive a single file using the
+XMODEM protocol.
+They use standard input and standard output for communication
+and are intended for use with
+.IR con .
+The
+.B -1
+option to
+.I xms
+causes it to use kilobyte packet size of 1024 bytes.
+The
+.B -p
+option causes it to print a progress
+message every ten kilobytes.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.TP
+.L
+rx kremvax cat file1 >file2
+Copy remote
+.I file1
+to local
+.IR file2 .
+.TP
+.L
+rx kremvax cat file1 '>file2'
+Copy remote
+.I file1
+to remote
+.IR file2.
+.TP
+.L
+eqn paper | rx kremvax troff -ms | rx deepthought lp
+Parallel processing:
+do each stage of a pipeline on a different machine.
+.SH SOURCE
+.TF /sys/src/cmd/ip/telnet.c
+.TP
+.B /sys/src/cmd/rx.c
+.TP
+.B /sys/src/cmd/ip/telnet.c
+.TP
+.B /sys/src/cmd/con
+for all other commands
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR cpu (1),
+.IR ssh (1),
+.IR telco (4)
+.SH BUGS
+.I Con
+and
+.I telnet
+are merely obsolescent;
+the other commands are obsolete and deprecated.
+.PP
+Under
+.IR rx ,
+a program
+that should behave specially towards terminals may not: e.g.,
+remote shells will not prompt.
+Also under
+.IR rx ,
+the remote standard error and standard output are combined 
+and go inseparably to the local standard output.
+.I Rx
+will consume its standard input by copying it to the remote system,
+so redirect it from
+.BR /dev/null
+if that's not what you want.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/cp b/sys/man/1/cp
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..ba84be3a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/cp
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+.TH CP 1 
+.SH NAME
+cp, fcp, mv  \- copy, move files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B cp
+[
+.B -gux
+]
+.I file1 file2
+.br
+.B cp
+[
+.B -gux
+]
+.I file ... directory
+.PP
+.B fcp
+[
+.B -gux
+]
+.I file1 file2
+.br
+.B fcp
+[
+.B -gux
+]
+.I file ... directory
+.PP
+.B mv
+.I file1 file2
+.br
+.B mv
+.I file ... directory
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+In the first form
+.I file1
+is any name and
+.I file2
+is any name except an existing directory.
+In the second form the commands
+copy or move one or more
+.I files
+into a
+.I directory
+under their original file names, as if by a sequence of 
+commands in the first form.
+Thus
+.L "cp f1 f2 dir
+is equivalent to
+.LR "cp f1 dir/f1; cp f2 dir/f2" .
+.PP
+.I Cp
+copies the contents of plain
+.I file1
+to
+.IR file2 .
+The mode and owner of  
+.I file2
+are preserved if it already
+exists; the mode of
+.I file1
+is used otherwise.
+The
+.B -x
+option sets the mode and modified time of
+.I file2
+from
+.IR file1 ;
+.B -g
+sets the group id; and
+.B -u
+sets the group id and user id (which is usually only possible if the file server is in an administrative mode).
+.PP
+.I Fcp
+behaves like
+.I cp
+but transfers multiple blocks in parallel while copying;
+it is noticeably faster than
+.I cp
+when the files involved are stored on servers connected over long-distance lines.
+It is only appropriate to use
+.I fcp
+with file servers that respect the
+.I offset
+in
+.IR read (5)
+and
+.I write
+messages.
+This includes the disk-based file systems and ramfs
+but excludes most device file systems.
+.PP
+.I Mv
+moves
+.I file1
+to
+.IR file2 .
+If the files are in the same directory, 
+.I file1
+is just renamed;
+otherwise
+.I mv
+behaves like
+.I cp
+.B -x
+followed by
+.B rm
+.IR file1 .
+.I Mv
+will rename directories,
+but it refuses to move a directory into another directory.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/cp.c
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/fcp.c
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/mv.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR cat (1),
+.I dircp
+in
+.IR tar (1),
+.IR stat (2),
+.IR read (5)
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.IR Cp ,
+.IR fcp ,
+and
+.I mv
+refuse to copy or move files onto themselves.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/cpp b/sys/man/1/cpp
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..3fc931585
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+.TH CPP 1
+.SH NAME
+cpp \- C language preprocessor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B cpp
+[
+.I option ...
+]
+[
+.I ifile
+[
+.I ofile
+]
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Cpp\^
+interprets ANSI C preprocessor directives
+and does macro substitution.
+The input
+.I ifile
+and output
+.I ofile
+default to standard input and standard output respectively.
+.PP
+The options are:
+.TP
+.BI -D name\^
+.PD 0
+.TP
+.BI -D name=def\^
+.TP
+.BI -I dir\^
+Same as in
+.IR 2c "(1): add
+.I dir
+to the search for
+.CW search
+directives.
+.PD
+.TP
+.B -M
+Generate no output except a list of include files
+in a form suitable for specifying dependencies to
+.IR mk (1).
+Use twice to list files in angle brackets.
+.TP
+.B -N
+Turn off default include directories.  All must be
+specified with
+.BR -I ,
+or in the environment variable
+.BR include .
+Without this option,
+.B /$objtype/include
+and
+.B /sys/include
+are used as the last two searched directories for include directives,
+where
+.B $objtype
+is read from the environment.
+.TP
+.B -V
+Print extra debugging information.
+.TP
+.B -P
+Do not insert
+.RB `` #line ''
+directives into the output.
+.TP
+.B -+
+Understand C++ comments.
+.TP
+.B -.
+Inhibit include search in the source's directory.
+.TP
+.B -i
+Print the list of directories searched when
+.I #include
+is found.
+Last listed are searched first.
+.PD
+.PP
+In the absence of the
+.B -P
+option, the processed text output is sprinkled
+with lines that show the original input line numbering:
+.IP
+.B #line
+.I linenumber
+.L
+"\fIifile\fP"
+.PP
+The command reads the environment variable
+.IR include
+and adds its (blank-separated) list of directories to
+the standard search path for
+.CW #include
+directives.  They are looked at before any directories specified with
+.BR -I ,
+which are looked at before the default directories.
+.PP
+The input language is as described in the ANSI C standard.
+The standard Plan 9 C compilers do not use
+.IR cpp ;
+they contain their own simple but adequate preprocessor, so
+.I cpp
+is usually superfluous.
+.SH FILES
+.TF /objtype/include
+.TP
+.B /sys/include
+directory for machine-independent include files
+.TP
+.B /$objtype/include
+directory for machine-dependent include files
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/cpp
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR 2c (1)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/cpu b/sys/man/1/cpu
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..e408683bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/cpu
@@ -0,0 +1,204 @@
+.TH CPU 1
+.SH NAME
+cpu \- connection to CPU server
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B cpu
+[
+.B -h
+.I server
+] [
+.B -u
+.I user
+] [
+.B -a
+.I auth-method
+] [
+.B -P
+.I patternfile
+] [
+.B -e
+.I encryption-hash-algs
+] [
+.B -k
+.I keypattern
+] [
+.B -c
+.I cmd args ...
+]
+.PP
+.B cpu
+[
+.B -R
+|
+.B -O
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Cpu
+starts an
+.IR rc (1)
+running on the
+.I server
+machine, or the machine named in the
+.B $cpu
+environment variable if there is no
+.B -h
+option.
+.IR Rc 's
+standard input, output, and error files will be
+.B /dev/cons
+in the name space where the
+.I cpu
+command was invoked.
+Normally,
+.I cpu
+is run in an
+.IR rio (1)
+window on a terminal, so
+.IR rc
+output goes to that window, and input comes from the keyboard
+when that window is current.
+.IR Rc 's
+current directory is
+the working directory of the
+.I cpu
+command itself.
+.PP
+The name space for the new
+.I rc
+is an analogue of the name space where the
+.I cpu
+command was invoked:
+it is the same except for architecture-dependent bindings such as
+.B /bin
+and the use of fast paths to file servers, if available.
+.PP
+If a
+.B -u
+argument is present,
+.I cpu
+uses the argument as the remote user id.
+.PP
+If a
+.B -c
+argument is present, the remainder of the command line is executed by
+.I rc
+on the server, and then
+.I cpu
+exits.
+.PP
+If a
+.B -P
+argument is present, the
+.I patternfile
+is passed to
+.IR exportfs (4)
+to control how much of the local name space will be exported to
+the remote system.
+.PP
+The
+.B -a
+command allows the user to specify the authentication mechanism used
+when connecting to the remote system.  The two possibilities for
+.I auth-method
+are:
+.TF netkey
+.TP
+.B p9
+This is the default.  Authentication is done using the standard Plan 9
+mechanisms, (see
+.IR authsrv (6)).
+No user interaction is required.
+.TP
+.B netkey
+Authentication is done using challenge/response and a hand held
+authenticator or the
+.I netkey
+program
+(see
+.IR passwd (1)).
+The user must encrypt the challenge and type the encryption
+back to
+.IR cpu .
+This is used if the local host is in a different protection domain than
+the server or if the user wants to log into the server as a different
+user.
+.PD
+.PP
+The
+.B -e
+option specifies an encryption and/or hash algorithm to
+use for the connection.  If both are specified, they must
+be space separated and comprise a single argument, so they
+must be quoted if in a shell command.  The default is
+.L rc4_256
+encryption and
+.L sha1
+hashing.  See
+.IR ssl (3)
+for details on possible algorithms.  The argument
+.L clear
+specifies no encryption algorithm and can be used to talk
+to older versions of the
+.I cpu
+service.
+.PP
+The
+.B -k
+flag specifies a key pattern to use to restrict the keys
+selected by the
+.I auth_proxy
+call used for authentication.
+.PP
+The name space is built by running
+.B /usr/$user/lib/profile
+with the root of the invoking name space bound to
+.BR /mnt/term .
+The
+.B service
+environment variable is set to
+.BR cpu ;
+the
+.B cputype
+and
+.B objtype
+environment variables reflect the server's architecture.
+.PP
+The
+.B -R
+flag causes
+.I cpu
+to run the server (remote) side of the protocol.
+It is run from service files such as
+.BR /bin/service/tcp17010 .
+The
+.B -O
+flag is similar but simulates the pre-9P2000 version
+of the 
+.I cpu
+protocol.
+.SH FILES
+The name space of the terminal side of the
+.I cpu
+command is mounted, via
+.IR exportfs (4),
+on the CPU side on directory
+.BR /mnt/term .
+The files such as
+.B /dev/cons
+are bound to their standard locations from there.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/cpu.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR rc (1) ,
+.IR rio (1) ,
+.IR exportfs (4)
+.SH BUGS
+Binds and mounts done after the terminal
+.B lib/profile
+is run are not reflected in the new name space.
+.PP
+When using the
+.B -a
+option to `log in' as another user, be aware that
+resources in the local name space will be made
+available to that user.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/crop b/sys/man/1/crop
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..209cdcc06
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/crop
@@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
+.TH CROP 1
+.SH NAME
+crop, iconv \- frame, crop, and convert image
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B crop
+[
+.B -b
+.I red
+.I green
+.I blue
+]
+[
+.BI -c
+.I red
+.I green
+.I blue
+]
+[
+.B -i
+.I n
+|
+.B -r
+.I minx
+.I miny
+.I maxx
+.I maxy
+|
+.B -x
+.I dx
+|
+.B -y
+.I dy
+]
+[
+.B -t
+.I tx
+.I ty
+]
+[
+.B -b
+.I red
+.I green
+.I blue
+]
+[
+.I file
+]
+.PP
+.B iconv
+[
+.B -u
+] [
+.B -c
+.I chandesc
+]
+[
+.I file
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Crop
+reads an
+.IR image (6)
+file (default standard input), crops it, and writes it as a compressed
+.IR image (6)
+file to standard output.
+There are two ways to specify a crop, by color value or by geometry.
+They may be combined in a single run of
+.IR crop ,
+in which case the color value crop will be done first.
+.PP
+The
+.B -c
+option takes a red-green-blue triplet as described in
+.IR color (2).
+(For example, white
+is
+.B 255
+.B 255
+.BR 255 .)
+The corresponding color is used as a value to be cut from the outer
+edge of the picture; that is, the image is cropped to remove the maximal
+outside rectangular strip in which every pixel has the specified color.
+.PP
+The
+.B -i
+option insets the image rectangle by a constant amount,
+.IR n ,
+which may be negative to generate extra space around the image.
+The
+.B -x
+and
+.B -y
+options are similar, but apply only to the
+.I x
+or
+.I y
+coordinates of the image.
+.PP
+The
+.B -r
+option specifies an exact rectangle.
+.PP
+The 
+.B -t
+option specifies that the image's coordinate system should
+be translated by
+.IR tx ,
+.IR ty
+as the last step of processing.
+.PP
+The
+.B -b
+option specifies a background color to be used to fill around the image
+if the cropped image is larger than the original, such as if the
+.B -i
+option is given a negative argument.
+This can be used to draw a monochrome frame around the image.
+The default color is black.
+.PP
+.I Iconv
+changes the format of pixels in the image
+.I file
+(default standard input) and writes the resulting image to standard output.
+Pixels in the image are converted according to the channel descriptor
+.IR chandesc ,
+(see
+.IR image (6)).
+For example, to convert a 4-bit-per-pixel grey-scale image to an 8-bit-per-pixel
+color-mapped image,
+.I chandesc
+should be
+.BR m8 .
+If
+.I chandesc
+is not given, the format is unchanged.
+The output image is by default compressed; the
+.B -u
+option turns off the compression.
+.SH EXAMPLE
+To crop white edges off the picture and add a ten-pixel pink border,
+.IP
+.EX
+crop -c 255 255 255 -i -10 -b 255 150 150 imagefile > cropped
+.EE
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/crop.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR image (6),
+.IR color (2)
+.SH BUGS
+.I Iconv
+should be able to do Floyd-Steinberg error diffusion or dithering
+when converting to small image depths.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/date b/sys/man/1/date
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..705a95425
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/date
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+.TH DATE 1
+.SH NAME
+date, clock \- date and time
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B date
+[
+.I option
+] [
+.I seconds
+]
+.br
+.B clock
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Print the date, in the format
+.PP
+.B
+	Tue Aug 16 17:03:52 CDT 1977
+.PP
+The options are
+.TP
+.B -u
+Report Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) rather than local time.
+.TP
+.B -n
+Report the date as the number of seconds since the
+epoch, 00:00:00 GMT, January 1, 1970.
+.PP
+The conversion from Greenwich Mean Time to local time depends on the
+.B $timezone
+environment variable; see
+.IR ctime (2).
+.PP
+If the optional argument
+.I seconds
+is present, it is used as the time to convert rather than
+the real time.
+.PP
+.I Clock
+draws a simple analog clock in its window.
+.SH FILES
+.TF /adm/timezone/local
+.TP
+.B /env/timezone
+Current timezone name and adjustments.
+.TP
+.B /adm/timezone
+A directory containing timezone tables.
+.TP
+.B /adm/timezone/local
+Default timezone file, copied by
+.IR init (8)
+into
+.BR /env/timezone .
+.PD
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/date.c
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/clock.c
diff --git a/sys/man/1/db b/sys/man/1/db
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..34f1f4239
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/db
@@ -0,0 +1,1018 @@
+.TH DB 1
+.SH NAME
+db \- debugger
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B db
+[
+.I option ...
+]
+[
+.I textfile
+]
+[
+.I pid
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Db
+is a general purpose debugging program.
+It may be used to examine files and to provide
+a controlled environment for the execution
+of Plan 9 programs.
+.PP
+A
+.I textfile
+is a file containing the text and initialized
+data of an executable program.
+A
+.I memfile
+is the memory image of an executing process.  It is
+usually accessed via the process id
+.RI ( pid )
+of the process in
+.BI /proc/ pid /mem\f1.
+A
+.I memfile
+contains the text, data, and saved registers and
+process state.  A
+.I map
+associated with each
+.I textfile
+or
+.I memfile
+supports accesses to instructions and data in the file;
+see `Addresses'.
+.PP
+An argument consisting entirely of digits is assumed
+to be a process id; otherwise, it is the name of a
+.IR textfile .
+When a
+.I textfile
+is given, the textfile map
+is associated with it.
+If only a
+.I pid
+is given, the textfile map is
+associated with
+.BI /proc/ pid /text\f1.
+When a
+.I pid
+is given, the memfile map is associated with
+.BI /proc/ pid /mem\f1;
+otherwise it is undefined and accesses to the
+.I memfile
+are not permitted.
+.PP
+Commands to
+.I db
+are read from the standard input and
+responses are to the standard output.
+The options are
+.TP
+.BI -k
+Use the kernel stack of process
+.IR pid 
+to debug the executing kernel process.
+If
+.I textfile
+is not specified, file
+.BI / $cputype /9 type
+is used, where
+.I type
+is the second word in
+.BR $terminal .
+.TP
+.B -w
+Create
+.I textfile
+and
+.I memfile
+if they don't exist; open them for writing
+as well as reading.
+.TP
+.BI -I path
+Directory in which to look for relative path names in
+.B $<
+and
+.B $<<
+commands.
+.TP
+.BI -m machine
+Assume instructions are for the given CPU type
+(any standard architecture name, such as
+.B alpha
+or
+.BR 386 ,
+plus
+.B mipsco
+and
+.BR sunsparc ,
+which cause disassembly to the manufacturer's syntax)
+instead of using the magic number to select
+the CPU type.
+.PP
+Most
+.I db
+commands have the following form:
+.IP
+.RI [ address ]
+.RB [ ,
+.IR count ]
+.RI [ command ]
+.PP
+If
+.I address
+is present then the current position, called `dot',
+is set to
+.IR address .
+Initially dot
+is set to 0.
+Most commands are repeated
+.I count
+times with
+dot advancing between repetitions.
+The default
+.I count
+is 1.
+.I Address
+and
+.I count
+are expressions.
+Multiple commands on one line must be separated by
+.LR ; .
+.SS Expressions
+Expressions are evaluated as long
+.IR ints .
+.TP 7.2n
+.B .
+The value of dot.
+.TP 7.2n
+.B +
+The value of dot
+incremented by the current increment.
+.TP 7.2n
+.B ^
+The value of dot
+decremented by the current increment.
+.TP 7.2n
+.B \&"
+The last
+.I address
+typed.
+.TP 7.2n
+.I integer
+A number, in decimal radix by default.
+The prefixes
+.L 0
+and
+.L 0o
+and
+.L 0O
+(zero oh) force interpretation
+in octal radix; the prefixes
+.L 0t
+and
+.L 0T
+force interpretation in
+decimal radix; the prefixes
+.LR 0x ,
+.LR 0X ,
+and
+.L #
+force interpretation in
+hexadecimal radix.
+Thus
+.LR 020 ,
+.LR 0o20 ,
+.LR 0t16 ,
+and
+.L #10 
+all represent sixteen.
+.TP 7.2n
+.IB integer . fraction
+A single-precision floating point number.
+.TP 7.2n
+.BI \' c\| \'
+The
+16-bit
+value of a character.
+.L \e
+may be used to escape a
+.LR \' .
+.TP 7.2n
+.BI < name
+The value of
+.IR name ,
+which is a register name.
+The register names are
+those printed by the
+.B $r
+command.
+.TP 7.2n
+.I symbol
+A
+.I symbol
+is a sequence
+of upper or lower case letters, underscores or
+digits, not starting with a digit.
+.L \e
+may be used to escape other characters.
+The location of the
+.I symbol
+is calculated from the symbol table
+in
+.IR textfile .
+.TP 7.2n
+.IB routine . name
+The address of the variable
+.I name
+in the specified
+C routine.
+Both
+.I routine
+and
+.I name
+are
+.IR symbols .
+If
+.I name
+is omitted the value is the address of the
+most recently activated stack frame
+corresponding to
+.IR routine ;
+if
+.I routine
+is omitted,
+the active procedure
+is assumed.
+.TP 7.2n
+.IB file : integer
+The address of the instruction corresponding
+to the source statement at the indicated
+line number of the file.  If the source line contains
+no executable statement, the address of the
+instruction associated with the nearest
+executable source line is returned.  Files
+begin at line 1.  If multiple files of the same
+name are loaded, an expression of this form resolves
+to the first file encountered in the symbol table.
+.TP 7.2n
+.BI ( exp )
+The value of the expression
+.IR exp .
+.LP
+.I  Monadic operators
+.RS
+.TP 7.2n
+.BI * exp
+The contents of the location addressed
+by
+.I exp
+in
+.IR memfile .
+.TP 7.2n
+.BI @ exp
+The contents of the location addressed by
+.I exp
+in
+.IR textfile .
+.TP 7.2n
+.BI - exp
+Integer negation.
+.TP 7.2n
+.BI ~ exp
+Bitwise complement.
+.TP 7.2n
+.BI % exp
+When used as an
+.IR address ,
+.I exp
+is an offset into the segment named
+.IR ublock ;
+see `Addresses'.
+.RE
+.LP
+.I "Dyadic\ operators"
+are left-associative
+and are less binding than monadic operators.
+.RS
+.TP 7.2n
+.IB e1 + e2
+Integer addition.
+.TP 7.2n
+.IB e1 - e2
+Integer subtraction.
+.TP 7.2n
+.IB e1 * e2
+Integer multiplication.
+.TP 7.2n
+.IB e1 % e2
+Integer division.
+.TP 7.2n
+.IB e1 & e2
+Bitwise conjunction.
+.TP 7.2n
+.IB e1 | e2
+Bitwise disjunction.
+.TP 7.2n
+.IB e1 # e2
+.I E1
+rounded up to the next multiple of
+.IR e2 .
+.RE
+.DT
+.SS Commands
+Most commands have the following syntax:
+.TP .5i
+.BI ? f
+Locations starting at
+.I address
+in
+.I  textfile
+are printed according to the format
+.IR f .
+.TP
+.BI / f
+Locations starting at
+.I address
+in
+.I  memfile
+are printed according to the format
+.IR f .
+.TP
+.BI = f
+The value of
+.I address
+itself is printed according to the format
+.IR f .
+.PP
+A
+.I format
+consists of one or more characters that specify a style
+of printing.
+Each format character may be preceded by a decimal integer
+that is a repeat count for the format character.
+If no format is given then the last format is used.
+.PP
+Most format letters fetch some data,
+print it,
+and advance (a local copy of) dot
+by the number of bytes fetched.
+The total number of bytes in a format becomes the
+.IR current increment .
+.ta 2.5n .5i
+.RS
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.B o
+Print two-byte integer in octal.
+.TP
+.B O
+Print four-byte integer in octal.
+.TP
+.B q
+Print two-byte integer in signed octal.
+.TP
+.B Q
+Print four-byte integer in signed octal.
+.TP
+.B d
+Print two-byte integer in decimal.
+.TP
+.B D
+Print four-byte integer in decimal.
+.TP
+.B V
+Print eight-byte integer in decimal.
+.TP
+.B Z
+Print eight-byte integer in unsigned decimal.
+.TP
+.B x
+Print two-byte integer in hexadecimal.
+.TP
+.B X
+Print four-byte integer in hexadecimal.
+.TP
+.B Y
+Print eight-byte integer in hexadecimal.
+.TP
+.B u
+Print two-byte integer in unsigned decimal.
+.TP
+.B U
+Print four-byte integer in unsigned decimal.
+.TP
+.B f
+Print
+as a single-precision floating point number.
+.TP
+.B F
+Print double-precision floating point.
+.TP
+.B b
+Print the addressed byte in hexadecimal.
+.TP
+.B c
+Print the addressed byte as an
+.SM ASCII
+character.
+.TP
+.B C
+Print the addressed byte as a character.
+Printable
+.SM ASCII
+characters
+are represented normally; others
+are printed in the form
+.BR \exnn .
+.TP
+.B s
+Print the addressed characters, as a
+.SM UTF
+string, until a zero byte
+is reached.
+Advance dot
+by the length of the string,
+including the zero terminator.
+.TP
+.B S
+Print a string using 
+the escape convention (see
+.B C
+above).
+.TP
+.B r
+Print as
+.SM UTF
+the addressed two-byte integer (rune).
+.TP
+.B R
+Print as
+.SM UTF
+the addressed two-byte integers as runes
+until a zero rune is reached.
+Advance dot
+by the length of the string,
+including the zero terminator.
+.TP
+.B i
+Print as machine instructions.  Dot is
+incremented by the size of the instruction.
+.TP
+.B I
+As
+.B i
+above, but print the machine instructions in
+an alternate form if possible:
+.B sunsparc
+and
+.B mipsco
+reproduce the manufacturers' syntax.
+.TP
+.B M
+Print the addressed machine instruction in a
+machine-dependent hexadecimal form.
+.TP
+.B a
+Print the value of dot
+in symbolic form.
+Dot is unaffected.
+.TP
+.B A
+Print the value of dot
+in hexadecimal.
+Dot is unaffected.
+.TP
+.B z
+Print the function name, source file, and line number
+corresponding to dot (textfile only). Dot is unaffected.
+.TP
+.B p
+Print the addressed value in symbolic form.
+Dot is advanced by the size of a machine address.
+.TP
+.B t
+When preceded by an integer, tabs to the next
+appropriate tab stop.
+For example,
+.B 8t 
+moves to the next 8-space tab stop.
+Dot is unaffected.
+.TP
+.B n
+Print a newline.
+Dot is unaffected.
+.tr '"
+.TP
+.BR ' ... '
+Print the enclosed string.
+Dot is unaffected.
+.br
+.tr ''
+.TP
+.B ^
+Dot is decremented by the current increment.
+Nothing is printed.
+.TP
+.B +
+Dot is incremented by 1.
+Nothing is printed.
+.TP
+.B -
+Dot is decremented by 1.
+Nothing is printed.
+.RE
+.PD
+.LP
+Other commands include:
+.TP
+newline
+Update dot by the current increment.
+Repeat the previous command with a
+.I count
+of 1.
+.TP
+.RB [ ?/ ] l "\fI value mask\fR"
+Words starting at dot
+are masked with
+.I mask
+and compared with
+.I value
+until
+a match is found.
+If
+.B l
+is used,
+the match is for a two-byte integer;
+.B L
+matches four bytes.
+If no match is found then dot
+is unchanged; otherwise dot
+is set to the matched location.
+If
+.I mask
+is omitted then ~0 is used.
+.TP
+.RB [ ?/ ] w "\fI value ...\fR"
+Write the two-byte
+.I value
+into the addressed
+location.
+If the command is
+.BR W ,
+write four bytes.
+.TP
+.RB [ ?/ ] "m\fI s b e f \fP" [ ?\fR]
+.br
+New values for
+.RI ( b,\ e,\ f )
+in the segment named
+.I s
+are recorded.  Valid segment names are
+.IR text ,
+.IR data ,
+or 
+.IR ublock .
+If less than three address expressions are given,
+the remaining parameters are left unchanged.
+If the list is terminated by
+.L ?
+or
+.L /
+then the file
+.RI ( textfile
+or
+.I memfile
+respectively) is used
+for subsequent requests.
+For example,
+.L /m?
+causes
+.L /
+to refer to
+.IR textfile .
+.TP
+.BI > name
+Dot is assigned to the variable or register named.
+.TP
+.B !
+The rest of the line is passed to
+.IR rc (1)
+for execution.
+.TP
+.BI $ modifier
+Miscellaneous commands.
+The available 
+.I modifiers 
+are:
+.RS
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.BI < f
+Read commands from the file
+.IR f .
+If this command is executed in a file, further commands
+in the file are not seen.
+If
+.I f
+is omitted, the current input stream is terminated.
+If a
+.I count
+is given, and is zero, the command is ignored.
+.TP
+.BI << f
+Similar to
+.B <
+except it can be used in a file of commands without
+causing the file to be closed.
+There is a (small) limit to the number of
+.B <<
+files that can be open at once.
+.br
+.ns
+.TP
+.BI > f
+Append output to the file
+.IR f ,
+which is created if it does not exist.
+If
+.I f
+is omitted, output is returned to the terminal.
+.TP
+.B ?
+Print process id, the condition which caused stopping or termination,
+the registers and the instruction addressed by
+.BR pc .
+This is the default if
+.I modifier
+is omitted.
+.TP
+.B r
+Print the general registers and
+the instruction addressed by
+.BR pc .
+Dot is set to
+.BR pc .
+.TP
+.B R
+Like
+.BR $r ,
+but include miscellaneous processor control registers
+and floating point registers.
+.TP
+.B f
+Print floating-point register values as
+single-precision floating point numbers.
+.TP
+.B F
+Print floating-point register values as
+double-precision floating point numbers.
+.TP
+.B b
+Print all breakpoints
+and their associated counts and commands.  `B' produces the same results.
+.TP
+.B c
+Stack backtrace.
+If
+.I address
+is given, it specifies the address of a pair of 32-bit
+values containing the
+.B sp
+and
+.B pc
+of an active process.  This allows selecting
+among various contexts of a multi-threaded
+process.
+If
+.B C
+is used, the names and (long) values of all
+parameters,
+automatic
+and static variables are printed for each active function.
+If
+.I count
+is given, only the first
+.I count
+frames are printed.
+.TP
+.B a
+Attach to the running process whose pid
+is contained in
+.IR address .
+.TP
+.B e
+The names and values of all
+external variables are printed.
+.TP
+.B w
+Set the page width for output to
+.I address
+(default 80).
+.TP
+.B q
+Exit from
+.IR db .
+.TP
+.B m
+Print the address maps.
+.TP
+.B k
+Simulate kernel memory management.
+.TP
+.BI M machine
+Set the
+.I machine
+type used for disassembling instructions.
+.PD
+.RE
+.TP
+.BI : modifier
+Manage a subprocess.
+Available modifiers are:
+.RS
+.TP
+.PD 0
+.BI h
+Halt
+an asynchronously running process to allow breakpointing.
+Unnecessary for processes created under
+.IR db ,
+e.g. by
+.BR :r .
+.TP
+.BI b c
+Set breakpoint at
+.IR address .
+The breakpoint is executed
+.IR count \-1
+times before
+causing a stop.
+Also, if a command
+.I c
+is given it is executed at each
+breakpoint and if it sets dot to zero
+the breakpoint causes a stop.
+.TP
+.B d
+Delete breakpoint at
+.IR address .
+.TP
+.B r
+Run
+.I textfile
+as a subprocess.
+If
+.I address
+is given the
+program is entered at that point; otherwise
+the standard entry point is used.
+.I Count
+specifies how many breakpoints are to be
+ignored before stopping.
+Arguments to the subprocess may be supplied on the
+same line as the command.
+An argument starting with < or > causes the standard
+input or output to be established for the command.
+.TP
+.BI c s
+The subprocess is continued.
+If
+.I s
+is omitted
+or nonzero,
+the subprocess
+is sent the note that caused it to stop.
+If 0
+is specified,
+no note is sent.
+(If the stop was due to a breakpoint or single-step,
+the corresponding note is elided before continuing.)
+Breakpoint skipping is the same
+as for
+.BR r .
+.TP
+.BI s s
+As for
+.B c
+except that
+the subprocess is single stepped for
+.I count
+machine instructions.
+If a note is pending,
+it is received
+before the first instruction is executed.
+If there is no current subprocess then
+.I textfile
+is run
+as a subprocess as for
+.BR r .
+In this case no note can be sent; the remainder of the line
+is treated as arguments to the subprocess.
+.TP
+.BI S s
+Identical to
+.B s
+except the subprocess is single stepped for
+.I count
+lines of C source.  In optimized code, the correspondence
+between C source and the machine instructions is
+approximate at best.
+.TP
+.BI x
+The current subprocess, if any, is released by
+.I db
+and allowed to continue executing normally.
+.TP
+.B k
+The current subprocess, if any, is terminated.
+.TP
+.BI n c
+Display the pending notes for the process.
+If
+.I c
+is specified, first delete
+.I c'th
+pending note.
+.PD
+.RE
+.SS Addresses
+The location in a file or memory image associated with
+an address is calculated from a map
+associated with the file.
+Each map contains one or more quadruples
+.RI ( "t, b, e, f" ),
+defining a segment named
+.I t
+(usually, 
+.IR text ,
+.IR data ,
+or
+.IR ublock )
+mapping addresses in the range
+.I b
+through
+.I e
+to the part of the file
+beginning at
+offset
+.IR f .
+The memory model of a Plan 9 process assumes
+that segments are disjoint.  There
+can be more than one segment of a given type (e.g., a process
+may have more than one text segment) but segments
+may not overlap.
+An address
+.I a
+is translated
+to a file address
+by finding a segment
+for which
+.IR b ≤ a < e ;
+the location in the file
+is then
+.IR address + f \- b .
+.PP
+Usually,
+the text and initialized data of a program
+are mapped by segments called 
+.I text
+and
+.IR data .
+Since a program file does not contain bss, stack or ublock data,
+these data are
+not mapped by the data segment.
+The text segment is mapped similarly in
+a normal (i.e., non-kernel)
+.IR memfile .
+However, the segment called 
+.I data
+maps memory from the beginning of the program's data space to
+the base of the ublock.
+This region contains the program's static data, the bss, the
+heap and the stack.  A segment
+called
+.I ublock
+maps the page containing its registers and process state.
+.PP
+Sometimes it is useful to define a map with a single segment
+mapping the region from 0 to 0xFFFFFFFF; a map of this type
+allows the entire file to be examined
+without address translation.
+.PP
+Registers are saved at a machine-dependent offset in the ublock.
+It is usually not necessary to know this offset; the
+.BR $r ,
+.BR $R ,
+.BR $f ,
+and
+.BR $F
+commands calculate it and display the register contents.
+.PP
+The
+.B $m
+command dumps the currently active maps.  The
+.B ?m
+and
+.B /m
+commands modify the segment parameters in the
+.I textfile
+and
+.I memfile
+maps, respectively.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+To set a breakpoint at the beginning of
+.B write()
+in extant process 27:
+.IP
+.EX
+% db 27
+:h
+write:b
+:c
+.EE
+.PP
+To examine the Plan 9 kernel stack for process 27:
+.IP
+.EX
+% db -k 27
+$C
+.EE
+.PP
+Similar, but using a kernel named
+.BR test :
+.IP
+.EX
+% db -k test 27
+$C
+.EE
+.PP
+To set a breakpoint at the entry of function
+.B parse
+when the local variable
+.B argc
+in
+.B main
+is equal to 1:
+.IP
+.EX
+parse:b *main.argc-1=X
+.EE
+.PP
+This prints the value of
+.B argc-1
+which as a side effect sets dot; when
+.B argc
+is one the breakpoint will fire.
+Beware that local variables may be stored in registers; see the
+BUGS section.
+.PP
+Debug process 127 on remote machine
+.BR kremvax :
+.IP
+.EX
+% import kremvax /proc
+% db 127
+$C
+.EE
+.SH FILES
+.B /proc/*/text
+.br
+.B /proc/*/mem
+.br
+.B /proc/*/ctl
+.br
+.B /proc/*/note
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR acid (1),
+.IR nm (1),
+.IR proc (3)
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/db
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+Exit status is null, unless the last command failed or
+returned non-null status.
+.SH BUGS
+Examining a local variable with
+.I routine.name
+returns the contents of the memory allocated for the variable, but
+with optimization (suppressed by the
+.B -N
+compiler flag) variables often reside in registers.
+Also, on some architectures, the first argument is always
+passed in a register.
+.PP
+Variables and parameters that have been
+optimized away do not appear in the
+symbol table, returning the error 
+.IR "bad local variable"
+when accessed by
+.IR db .
+.PP
+Because of alignment incompatibilities, Motorola 68000
+series machines can not be debugged remotely from a
+processor of a different type.
+.PP
+Breakpoints should not be set on instructions scheduled
+in delay slots.  When a program stops on such a breakpoint,
+it is usually impossible to continue its execution.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/dc b/sys/man/1/dc
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..7032a2bff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/dc
@@ -0,0 +1,257 @@
+.TH DC 1
+.SH NAME
+dc \- desk calculator
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B dc
+[
+.I file
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Dc
+is an arbitrary precision desk calculator.
+Ordinarily it operates on decimal integers,
+but one may specify an input base, output base,
+and a number of fractional digits to be maintained.
+The overall structure of
+.I dc
+is
+a stacking (reverse Polish) calculator.
+If an argument is given,
+input is taken from that file until its end,
+then from the standard input.
+The following constructions are recognized:
+.TP
+number
+The value of the number is pushed on the stack.
+A number is an unbroken string of the digits 
+.B 0-9A-F 
+or
+.BR 0-9a-f .
+A hexadecimal number beginning with a lower case
+letter must be preceded by a zero to distinguish it
+from the command associated with the letter.
+It may be preceded by an underscore
+.B _
+to input a
+negative number.
+Numbers may contain decimal points.
+.TP
+.L
++  - /  *  %  ^
+Add
+.LR + ,
+subtract
+.LR - ,
+multiply
+.LR * ,
+divide
+.LR / ,
+remainder
+.LR % ,
+or exponentiate
+.L ^
+the top two values on the stack.
+The two entries are popped off the stack;
+the result is pushed on the stack in their place.
+Any fractional part of an exponent is ignored.
+.TP
+.BI s x
+.br
+.ns
+.TP
+.BI S x
+Pop the top of the stack and store into
+a register named
+.IR x ,
+where
+.I x
+may be any character.
+Under operation
+.B S
+register
+.I x
+is treated as a stack and the value is pushed on it.
+.TP
+.BI l x
+.br
+.ns
+.TP
+.BI L x
+Push the value in register
+.I x
+onto the stack.
+The register
+.I x
+is not altered.
+All registers start with zero value.
+Under operation
+.B L
+register
+.I x
+is treated as a stack and its top value is popped onto the main stack.
+.TP
+.B  d
+Duplicate the
+top value on the stack.
+.TP
+.B  p
+Print the top value on the stack.
+The top value remains unchanged.
+.B P
+interprets the top of the stack as an
+text
+string,
+removes it, and prints it.
+.TP
+.B  f
+Print the values on the stack.
+.TP
+.B  q
+.br
+.ns
+.TP
+.B Q
+Exit the program.
+If executing a string, the recursion level is
+popped by two.
+Under operation
+.B Q
+the top value on the stack is popped and the string execution level is popped
+by that value.
+.TP
+.B  x
+Treat the top element of the stack as a character string
+and execute it as a string of
+.I dc
+commands.
+.TP
+.B  X
+Replace the number on the top of the stack with its scale factor.
+.TP
+.B "[ ... ]"
+Put the bracketed
+text
+string on the top of the stack.
+.TP
+.PD0
+.BI < x
+.TP
+.BI > x
+.TP
+.BI = x
+.PD
+Pop and compare the
+top two elements of the stack.
+Register
+.I x
+is executed if they obey the stated
+relation.
+.TP
+.B  v
+Replace the top element on the stack by its square root.
+Any existing fractional part of the argument is taken
+into account, but otherwise the scale factor is ignored.
+.TP
+.B  !
+Interpret the rest of the line as a shell command.
+.TP
+.B  c
+Clear the stack.
+.TP
+.B  i
+The top value on the stack is popped and used as the
+number base for further input.
+.TP
+.B I
+Push the input base on the top of the stack.
+.TP
+.B  o
+The top value on the stack is popped and used as the
+number base for further output.
+In bases larger than 10, each `digit' prints as a group of decimal digits.
+.TP
+.B O
+Push the output base on the top of the stack.
+.TP
+.B  k
+Pop the top of the stack, and use that value as
+a non-negative scale factor:
+the appropriate number of places
+are printed on output,
+and maintained during multiplication, division, and exponentiation.
+The interaction of scale factor,
+input base, and output base will be reasonable if all are changed
+together.
+.TP
+.B  z
+Push the stack level onto the stack.
+.TP
+.B  Z
+Replace the number on the top of the stack with its length.
+.TP
+.B  ?
+A line of input is taken from the input source (usually the terminal)
+and executed.
+.TP
+.B "; :"
+Used by 
+.I bc
+for array operations.
+.PP
+The scale factor set by
+.B k
+determines how many digits are kept to the right of
+the decimal point.
+If
+.I s
+is the current scale factor,
+.I sa
+is the scale of the first operand,
+.I sb
+is the scale of the second,
+and
+.I b
+is the (integer) second operand,
+results are truncated to the following scales.
+.IP
+.nf
+\fL+\fR,\fL-\fR	max(\fIsa,sb\fR)
+\fL*\fR	min(\fIsa\fR+\fIsb \fR, max\fR(\fIs,sa,sb\fR))
+\fL/\fI	s
+\fL%\fR	so that dividend = divisor*quotient + remainder; remainder has sign of dividend
+\fL^\fR	min(\fIsa\fR\(mu|\fIb\fR|, max(\fIs,sa\fR))
+\fLv\fR	max(\fIs,sa\fR)
+.fi
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.LP
+Print the first ten values of
+.IR n !
+.IP
+.EX
+[la1+dsa*pla10>y]sy
+0sa1
+lyx
+.EE
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/dc.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR bc (1),
+.IR hoc (1)
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.I x
+.LR "is unimplemented" ,
+where
+.I x
+is an octal number: an internal error.
+.br
+`Out of headers'
+for too many numbers being kept around.
+.br
+`Nesting depth'
+for too many levels of nested execution.
+.SH BUGS
+When the input base exceeds 16,
+there is no notation for digits greater than
+.BR F .
+.PP
+Past its time.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/dd b/sys/man/1/dd
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..afd296b1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/dd
@@ -0,0 +1,196 @@
+.TH DD 1
+.SH NAME
+dd \- convert and copy a file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B dd
+[
+.I option value
+]
+\&...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Dd\^
+copies the specified input file
+to the specified output with
+possible conversions.
+The standard input and output are used by default.
+The input and output block size may be
+specified to take advantage of raw physical I/O.
+The options are
+.TP \w'\fLoseek\ \ \fIn'u
+.BI -if\  f
+Open file
+.I f
+for input.
+.TP
+.BI -of\  f
+Open file
+.I f
+for output.
+.TP
+.BI -ibs\  n\^
+Set input block size to
+.I n\^
+bytes (default 512).
+.TP
+.BI -obs\  n\^
+Set output block size (default 512).
+.TP
+.BI -bs\  n\^
+Set both input and output block size,
+superseding
+.I ibs\^
+and
+.IR obs .
+If no conversion is specified,
+preserve the input block size instead of packing short blocks
+into the output buffer.
+This is particularly efficient since no in-core copy need be done.
+.TP
+.BI -cbs\  n\^
+Set conversion buffer size.
+.TP
+.BI -skip\  n\^
+Skip
+.I n
+input records before copying.
+.TP
+.BI -iseek\  n\^
+Seek
+.I n
+records forward on input file
+before copying.
+.TP
+.BI -files\  n\^
+Catenate
+.I n 
+input files (useful only for magnetic tape or similar input device).
+.TP
+.BI -oseek\  n\^
+Seek
+.I n\^
+records from beginning of output file before copying.
+.TP
+.BI -count\  n\^
+Copy only
+.I n
+input records.
+.TP
+.BI -trunc\  n\^
+By default,
+.I dd
+truncates the output file when it opens it;
+.B -trunc
+.B 0
+opens it without truncation.
+.TP
+.BI -quiet\  n\^
+By default,
+.I dd
+prints the number of blocks read and written
+once it is finished.
+.B -quiet
+.B 1
+silences this summary.
+.HP
+\fL-conv\ ascii\ \ \ \ \fRConvert
+.SM EBCDIC
+to
+.SM ASCII.
+.PD0
+.RS "\w'\fLconv\ \fP'u"
+.TP "\w'\fLunblock\ \ \fP'u"
+.B ebcdic
+Convert
+.SM ASCII
+to
+.SM EBCDIC.
+.TP
+.B ibm
+Like
+.B ebcdic
+but with a slightly different character map.
+.TP
+.B block
+Convert variable length
+.SM ASCII
+records to fixed length.
+.TP
+.B unblock
+Convert fixed length
+.SM ASCII
+records to variable length.
+.TP
+.B lcase
+Map alphabetics to lower case.
+.TP
+.B ucase
+Map alphabetics to upper case.
+.TP
+.B swab
+Swap every pair of bytes.
+.TP
+.B noerror
+Do not stop processing on an error.
+.TP
+.B sync
+Pad every input record to
+.I  ibs\^
+bytes.
+.RE
+.PD
+.PP
+.fi
+Where sizes are specified,
+a number of bytes is expected.
+A number may end with
+.L k
+or
+.LR b
+to specify multiplication by
+1024 or 512 respectively;
+a pair of numbers may be separated by
+.L x
+to indicate a product.
+Multiple conversions may be specified in the style:
+.LR "-conv ebcdic,ucase" .
+.PP
+.L Cbs\^
+is used only if
+.LR ascii\^ ,
+.LR unblock\^ ,
+.LR ebcdic\^ ,
+.LR ibm\^ ,
+or
+.L block\^
+conversion is specified.
+In the first two cases,
+.I n
+characters are copied into the conversion buffer, any specified
+character mapping is done,
+trailing blanks are trimmed and new-line is added
+before sending the line to the output.
+In the latter three cases, characters are read into the
+conversion buffer and blanks are added to make up an
+output record of size
+.IR n .
+If
+.L cbs\^
+is unspecified or zero, the
+.LR ascii\^ ,
+.LR ebcdic\^ ,
+and
+.L ibm\^
+options convert the character set without changing the block
+structure of the input file; the
+.L unblock\^
+and
+.L block\^
+options become a simple file copy.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/dd.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR cp (1)
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.I Dd
+reports the number of full + partial input and output
+blocks handled.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/delkey b/sys/man/1/delkey
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..2f8bbd039
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/delkey
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+.TH DELKEY 1
+.SH NAME
+delkey \- delete keys from factotum
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B delkey
+[
+.B -f
+]
+.I pattern
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Delkey
+shows the user each key stored in
+.IR factotum (4)
+and matching the
+.IR pattern ,
+prompting for whether the key should be deleted.
+At each prompt, typing a response beginning with
+.B y
+deletes the key, typing a response beginning with
+.B q
+aborts the listing,
+and any other response skips over the key.
+.PP
+The
+.B -f
+option disables the prompting; all keys matching the pattern are deleted.
+.PP
+When run on a CPU server,
+.I delkey
+uses the terminal's factotum, if present, instead of the server's factotum.
+.SH FILES
+.TP
+.B /mnt/term/mnt/factotum
+First choice for
+.I factotum
+to use
+.TP
+.B /mnt/factotum
+Second choice
+.PP
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /rc/bin/delkey
diff --git a/sys/man/1/deroff b/sys/man/1/deroff
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..ff94859fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/deroff
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+.TH DEROFF 1 
+.SH NAME
+deroff, delatex \- remove formatting requests
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B deroff
+[
+.I option ...
+]
+.I file ...
+.PP
+.B delatex
+.I file
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Deroff
+reads each file in sequence
+and removes all
+.I nroff
+and
+.IR troff (1)
+requests and non-text arguments, backslash constructions,
+and constructs of preprocessors such as
+.IR eqn (1),
+.IR pic (1),
+and
+.IR tbl (1).
+Remaining text is written on the standard output.
+.I Deroff
+follows files included by
+.L .so
+and
+.L .nx
+commands;
+if a file has already been included, a
+.L .so
+for that file is ignored and a
+.L .nx
+terminates execution.
+If no input file is given,
+.I deroff
+reads from standard input.
+.PP
+The options are
+.TP
+.B -w
+Output a word list, one `word' (string of letters, digits, and
+properly embedded ampersands and apostrophes,
+beginning with a letter) per line.
+Other characters are skipped.
+Otherwise, the output follows the original, with the deletions mentioned above.
+.TP
+.B -_
+Like
+.BR -w ,
+but consider underscores to be alphanumeric rather than punctuation.
+.TP
+.B -i
+Ignore
+.L .so
+and
+.L .nx
+requests.
+.TP
+.BR -ms
+.PD0
+.TP
+.B -mm
+Remove titles, attachments, etc., as well as ordinary 
+.IR troff
+constructs, from
+.IR ms (6)
+or
+.I mm
+documents.
+.PD
+.TP
+.B -ml
+Same as
+.BR -mm ,
+but remove lists as well.
+.PP
+.I Delatex
+does for
+.I tex
+and
+.I latex
+(see
+.IR tex (1))
+files what
+.B deroff -wi
+does for
+.I troff
+files.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/deroff.c
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/tex/local/delatex.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR troff (1), 
+.IR tex (1),
+.IR spell (1)
+.SH BUGS
+These filters are not complete interpreters of
+.I troff
+or
+.IR tex .
+For example, macro definitions containing
+.L \e$
+cause chaos in
+.IR deroff
+when the popular
+.L $$
+delimiters for
+.I eqn
+are in effect. 
+.PP
+Text inside macros is emitted at place of
+definition, not place of call.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/diff b/sys/man/1/diff
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..91d3d491a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/diff
@@ -0,0 +1,176 @@
+.TH DIFF 1 
+.SH NAME
+diff \- differential file comparator
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B diff
+[
+.B -abcefmnrw
+] 
+.I file1 ... file2
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Diff
+tells what lines must be changed in two files to bring them
+into agreement.
+If one file
+is a directory,
+then a file in that directory with basename the same as that of
+the other file is used.
+If both files are directories, similarly named files in the
+two directories are compared by the method of 
+.I diff
+for text
+files and
+.IR cmp (1)
+otherwise.
+If more than two file names are given, then each argument is compared
+to the last argument as above.
+The 
+.B -r
+option causes
+.I diff
+to process similarly named subdirectories recursively.
+When processing more than one file, 
+.I diff
+prefixes file differences with a single line
+listing the two differing files, in the form of
+a 
+.I diff
+command line.
+The
+.B -m
+flag causes this behavior even when processing single files.
+.PP
+The normal output contains lines of these forms:
+.IP "" 5
+.I n1
+.B a
+.I n3,n4
+.br
+.I n1,n2
+.B d
+.I n3
+.br
+.I n1,n2
+.B c
+.I n3,n4
+.PP
+These lines resemble
+.I ed
+commands to convert
+.I file1
+into
+.IR file2 .
+The numbers after the letters pertain to
+.IR file2 .
+In fact, by exchanging `a' for `d' and reading backward
+one may ascertain equally how to convert 
+.I file2
+into
+.IR file1 .
+As in 
+.IR ed ,
+identical pairs where
+.I n1
+=
+.I n2
+or
+.I n3
+=
+.I n4
+are abbreviated as a single number.
+.PP
+Following each of these lines come all the lines that are
+affected in the first file flagged by `<', 
+then all the lines that are affected in the second file
+flagged by `>'.
+.PP
+The
+.B -b
+option causes
+trailing blanks (spaces and tabs) to be ignored
+and other strings of blanks to compare equal.
+The
+.B -w
+option causes all white-space to be removed from input lines
+before applying the difference algorithm.
+.PP
+The
+.B -n
+option prefixes each range with 
+.IB file : \fR
+and inserts a space around the 
+.BR a ,
+.BR c ,
+and
+.B d
+verbs.
+The
+.B -e
+option produces a script of
+.I "a, c"
+and 
+.I d
+commands for the editor
+.IR ed ,
+which will recreate
+.I file2
+from
+.IR file1 .
+The
+.B -f
+option produces a similar script,
+not useful with
+.IR ed ,
+in the opposite order. It may, however, be
+useful as input to a stream-oriented post-processor.
+.PP
+The
+.B -c
+option includes three lines of context around each
+change, merging changes whose contexts overlap.
+In this mode,
+.I diff
+prints
+.L -
+and
+.L +
+instead of
+.L <
+and
+.L >
+because the former are easier to distinguish when mixed.
+The
+.B -a
+flag displays the entire file as context.
+.PP
+Except in rare circumstances,
+.I diff
+finds a smallest sufficient set of file
+differences.
+.SH FILES
+.B /tmp/diff[12]
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/diff
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR cmp (1),
+.IR comm (1),
+.IR ed (1),
+.IR idiff (1)
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+Exit status is the empty string
+for no differences,
+.L some
+for some, 
+and
+.L error
+for trouble.
+.SH BUGS
+Editing scripts produced under the
+.BR -e " or"
+.BR -f " option are naive about"
+creating lines consisting of a single `\fB.\fR'.
+.PP
+When running
+.I diff
+on directories, the notion of what is a text
+file is open to debate.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/doc2txt b/sys/man/1/doc2txt
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..9b85e9f8f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/doc2txt
@@ -0,0 +1,161 @@
+.TH DOC2TXT 1
+.SH NAME
+doc2txt, doc2ps, wdoc2txt, xls2txt, olefs, mswordstrings, msexceltables
+\- extract printable text from Microsoft documents
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B doc2txt
+[
+.I file.doc
+]
+.br
+.B doc2ps
+[
+.I file.doc
+]
+.br
+.B wdoc2txt
+[
+.I file.doc
+]
+.br
+.B xls2txt
+[
+.I file.xls
+]
+.br
+.B aux/olefs
+[
+.B -m
+.I mtpt
+]
+.I file.doc
+.br
+.B aux/mswordstrings 
+.IB mtpt /WordDocument
+.br
+.B aux/msexceltables
+[
+.B -qaDnt
+] [
+.B -d
+.I delim
+] [
+.B -c
+.I column-range
+] [
+.B -w
+.I worksheet-range
+]
+.IB mtpt /Workbook
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Doc2txt
+is an
+.IR rc (1)
+script that uses 
+.I olefs
+and
+.I mswordstrings
+to extract the printable text from the body of a Microsoft Word document
+and write it on the standard output.
+.I Doc2ps
+is similar, but emits PostScript corresponding to the document.
+.I Wdoc2txt
+is similar to
+.IR doc2txt ,
+but uses
+.IR plumb (1)
+to send the output to a new
+.IR acme (1)
+window instead.
+.I Xls2txt
+performs a similar function for Microsoft Excel documents.
+.PP
+Microsoft Office documents are stored in OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)
+format, which is a scaled down version of Microsoft's FAT file system.
+.I Olefs
+presents the contents of an MS Office document as a file system
+on
+.IR mtpt ,
+which defaults to
+.BR /mnt/doc .
+.I Mswordstrings
+or
+.I msexceltables
+may then be used to parse the files inside, extracting
+a text stream.
+.I Msexceltables
+may be given options to control the formatting of its output.
+.TF "\fL-d \fIdelim"
+.TP
+.B -a
+Attempt conversion of non-tabular sheets in the workbook (charts).
+.TP
+.BI -d " delim
+Sets the inter-field delimiter to the string
+.IR delim ,
+by default a single space.
+.TP
+.B -D
+Enables debugging output.
+.TP
+.BI -c " range
+.I Range
+is a comma-separated list of column numbers and ranges.
+Ranges are separated by dashes.
+Limit processing to just those columns named;
+by default all columns are output.
+.TP
+.B -n
+Disables field padding to column width. 
+.TP
+.B -q
+Disable quoting of textural fields (see 
+.IR quote (2).)
+.TP
+.B -t
+Truncate fields to the column width.
+.TP
+.BI -w " range
+.I Range
+is a comma-separated list of worksheet numbers and ranges, this
+limits the sheets output using the same syntax as the
+.B -c
+option above.
+Suppressed chart pages are always included in the sheet count.
+.SH EXAMPLE
+Extract pieces of an MS Excel spreadsheet.
+.PD 0
+.IP
+.EX
+.SM
+aux/olefs report.xls
+msexceltables -q -w 1,7,9-14 -c 3-5 -n -d '@' /mnt/doc/Workbook > rpt.txt
+unmount /mnt/doc
+.EE
+.PD
+.SH SOURCE
+.TF "\fL/sys/src/cmd/aux   "
+.TP
+.B /rc/bin
+.BR doc2txt ,
+.BR doc2ps ,
+.BR wdoc2txt,
+and
+.BR xls2txt
+.TP
+.B /sys/src/cmd/aux
+the others
+.fi
+.PD
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR strings (1)
+.br
+``Microsoft Word 97 Binary File Format'',
+at Microsoft's developer (MSDN) home page.
+.br
+``LAOLA Binary Structures'', 
+.B http://user.cs.tu-berlin.de/~schwartz/pmh 
+.br
+``OpenOffice.Org's Excel Documentation'',
+.br
+.B http://sc.openoffice.org/excelfileformat.pdf
diff --git a/sys/man/1/doctype b/sys/man/1/doctype
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..7811f8e92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/doctype
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+.TH DOCTYPE 1 
+.SH NAME
+doctype \- intuit command line for formatting a document
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B doctype
+[
+.B -n
+]
+[
+.B -T
+.I dev
+]
+[
+.I file
+]
+\&...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Doctype
+examines a
+.IR troff (1)
+input file to deduce the appropriate text formatting command
+and prints it on standard output.
+.I Doctype
+recognizes input for
+.IR troff (1),
+related preprocessors like
+.IR eqn (1),
+and the 
+.IR ms (6)
+and
+.I mm 
+macro packages.
+.PP
+Option
+.B -n
+invokes
+.I nroff
+instead of
+.IR troff .
+The
+.B -T
+option is passed to
+.IR troff .
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.TP
+.L
+eval `{doctype chapter.?} | lp 
+Typeset files named
+.BR chapter.0 ,
+.BR chapter.1 ,
+\&...
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /rc/bin/doctype
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR troff (1), 
+.IR eqn (1), 
+.IR tbl (1), 
+.IR pic (1), 
+.IR grap (1),
+.IR ms (6),
+.IR man (6)
+.SH BUGS
+In true A.I. style, its best guesses are inspired rather than accurate.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/du b/sys/man/1/du
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..c7ecc71e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/du
@@ -0,0 +1,137 @@
+.TH DU 1
+.SH NAME
+du \- disk usage
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B du
+[
+.B -aefhnqstu
+] [
+.B -b
+.I size
+] [
+.B -p
+.I SI-prefix
+] [
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Du
+gives the number of Kbytes allocated to data blocks
+of named
+.I files
+and, recursively, of files in named directories.
+It assumes storage is quantized in units of 1024 bytes (Kbytes) by default.
+Other values can be set by the
+.B -b
+option;
+.I size
+is the number of bytes, optionally suffixed
+.B k
+to specify multiplication by 1024.
+If
+.I file
+is missing,
+the current directory is used.
+The count for a directory includes the counts of the
+contained files and directories.
+.PP
+The
+.B -a
+option prints the number of blocks
+for every file in a directory.
+Normally counts are printed only for contained directories.
+.PP
+The
+.B -f
+option suppresses the printing of warning messages.
+.PP
+The
+.B -n
+option prints the size in bytes and the name of each file; it sets
+.BR -a .
+.PP
+The
+.B -t
+option prints, in the format of
+.B du
+.BR -n ,
+the modified time of
+each file rather than the size.
+If the options
+.B -tu
+are specified then the accessed time is printed.
+.PP
+The
+.B -q
+option prints, in the format of
+.B du
+.BR -n ,
+the QID path of
+each file rather than the size.
+.PP
+The
+.B -s
+option causes
+.I du
+to descend the hierarchy as always, but to print only a summary line
+for each
+.IR file .
+.PP
+The
+.B -e
+option causes
+.I du
+to print values (sizes, times or QID paths)
+in `scientific notation' via
+.IR print (2)'s
+.BR %g .
+.PP
+The
+.B -h
+option causes
+.I du
+to print values (sizes, times or QID paths)
+in scientific notation,
+scaled to less than 1024, and with a suitable SI prefix
+(e.g.,
+.L G
+for binary gigabytes).
+.PP
+The
+.B -p
+option causes
+.I du
+to print values (sizes, times or QID paths)
+in units of
+.IR SI-prefix .
+Case is ignored when looking up
+.IR SI-prefix .
+An empty
+.IR SI-prefix
+corresponds to a scale factor of 1 (e.g., print sizes in bytes).
+.\" .PP
+.\" The
+.\" .B -r
+.\" option causes
+.\" .I du
+.\" to read and discard every byte of every file encountered.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Print the size of
+.L /tmp
+in fractional binary gigabytes:
+.IP
+.EX
+% du -sepg /tmp
+\&.6960154	/tmp
+.EE
+.LP
+Print the size of
+.L /tmp
+in bytes and in scientific notation:
+.IP
+.EX
+% du -sep '' /tmp
+7.473408e+08	/tmp
+.EE
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/du.c
diff --git a/sys/man/1/echo b/sys/man/1/echo
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..86e6cd39b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/echo
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+.TH ECHO 1 
+.SH NAME
+echo \- print arguments
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B echo
+[
+.B -n
+]
+[
+.I arg ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Echo
+writes its arguments separated by blanks and terminated by
+a newline on the standard output.
+Option
+.B -n
+suppresses the newline.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/echo.c
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+If
+.I echo
+draws an error while writing to standard output, the exit status is
+.LR "write error" .
+Otherwise the exit status is empty.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/ecp b/sys/man/1/ecp
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..6be90dfc3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/ecp
@@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
+.TH ECP 1
+.SH NAME
+ecp \- fast copy, handling errors
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.in +.5i
+.ti -.5i
+.B ecp
+[
+.B \-bcprvZ
+] [
+.B \-B
+.I block-size
+] [
+.B \-e
+.I max-errors
+] [
+.B \-i
+.I issect
+] [
+.B \-o
+.I ossect
+] [
+.B \-s
+.I sector-size
+]
+.I sectors
+.I input
+.I output
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Ecp
+copies
+.I sectors
+disk sectors of the specified
+.I input
+file to the specified
+.I output
+file.
+.I Ecp
+copies multiple sectors (a `block') at a time for speed.
+When
+.I ecp
+encounters an I/O error,
+it transfers the current block again,
+assuming the file is seekable,
+one sector at a time,
+prints the sector number(s) of the error(s),
+and continues copying.
+.PP
+Options are:
+.TP 4
+.B \-b
+reblock
+.IR input
+on short reads;
+this was used mainly when reading a pipe on standard input
+on 4.2+BSD systems.
+.TP
+.B \-B
+sets the block size (16,384 bytes by default) to
+.IR block-size .
+.TP
+.B \-c
+ask for confirmation on
+.B /dev/cons
+before starting the copy.
+.TP
+.B \-e
+sets a maximum number of consecutive I/O errors to permit
+at the beginning of the copy before quitting to
+.IR max-errors .
+Lots of consecutive errors may indicate a deeper problem,
+such as missing media.
+By default there is no limit.
+.TP
+.B \-i
+seeks to sector
+.I issect
+(assuming zero-origin)
+before beginning input.
+.TP
+.B \-o
+seeks to sector
+.I ossect
+(assuming zero-origin)
+before beginning output.
+.TP
+.B \-p
+print reassuring progress reports;
+helpful mainly when dealing with cranky hardware.
+.TP
+.B \-r
+copy sector groups in reverse order,
+assuming the files are seekable;
+this is most useful when
+.I input
+and
+.I output
+overlap.
+.TP
+.B \-s
+sets the sector size (512 bytes by default) to
+.IR sector-size .
+.TP
+.B \-v
+verify the copy by rereading the
+.I input
+and
+.I output
+files after copying all sectors.
+This is intended to force the disk to deliver the actual
+data written on it rather than some cached copy.
+The locations of any differences are printed.
+.TP
+.B \-Z
+`Swizzle' the input: stir the bits around in some fashion.
+Intended for diagnosing bad disks by copying a disk to itself
+a few times with swizzling on (to defeat caching in operating systems
+or disk controllers).
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.I fcp
+in
+.IR cp (1),
+.IR dd (1),
+.IR dup (3)
+.SH BUGS
+.BR \-i ,
+.BR \-o ,
+.BR \-r ,
+.B \-v
+and error retries only work on devices capable of seeking.
+.PP
+The set of options reflects decades of experience
+dealing with troublesome hardware.
+.PP
+If the input file is a tape and
+the last record on the tape before a file mark is less than
+.I blocksize
+bytes long,
+then
+.I ecp
+will read through past the file mark and into the next file.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/ed b/sys/man/1/ed
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..adb79fb72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/ed
@@ -0,0 +1,683 @@
+.TH ED 1
+.SH NAME
+ed \- text editor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B ed
+[
+.B -
+]
+[
+.B -o
+]
+[
+.I file
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Ed
+is a venerable text editor.
+.PP
+If a
+.I file
+argument is given,
+.I ed
+simulates an
+.L e
+command (see below) on that file:
+it is read into
+.I ed's
+buffer so that it can be edited.
+The options are
+.TP
+.B -
+Suppress the printing
+of character counts by
+.LR e ,
+.LR r ,
+and
+.L w
+commands and of the confirming 
+.L !
+by
+.L !
+commands.
+.TP
+.B -o
+(for output piping)
+Write all output to the standard error file except writing by
+.L w
+commands.
+If no 
+.I file
+is given, make
+.B /fd/1
+the remembered file; see the
+.L e
+command below.
+.PP
+.I Ed
+operates on a `buffer', a copy of the file it is editing;
+changes made
+in the buffer have no effect on the file until a
+.L w
+(write)
+command is given.
+The copy of the text being edited resides
+in a temporary file called the 
+.IR buffer .
+.PP
+Commands to
+.I ed
+have a simple and regular structure: zero, one, or
+two
+.I addresses
+followed by a single character
+.IR command ,
+possibly
+followed by parameters to the command.
+These addresses specify one or more lines in the buffer.
+Missing addresses are supplied by default.
+.PP
+In general, only one command may appear on a line.
+Certain commands allow the 
+addition of text to the buffer.
+While
+.I ed
+is accepting text, it is said
+to be in
+.I  "input mode."
+In this mode, no commands are recognized;
+all input is merely collected.
+Input mode is left by typing a period 
+.L .
+alone at the
+beginning of a line.
+.PP
+.I Ed
+supports the 
+.I "regular expression"
+notation described in
+.IR regexp (6).
+Regular expressions are used in addresses to specify
+lines and in one command
+(see
+.I s
+below)
+to specify a portion of a line which is to be replaced.
+If it is desired to use one of
+the regular expression metacharacters as an ordinary
+character, that character may be preceded by
+.RB ` \e '.
+This also applies to the character bounding the regular
+expression (often 
+.LR / )
+and to
+.L \e
+itself.
+.PP
+To understand addressing in
+.I ed
+it is necessary to know that at any time there is a
+.I "current line."
+Generally, the current line is
+the last line affected by a command; however,
+the exact effect on the current line
+is discussed under the description of
+each command.
+Addresses are constructed as follows.
+.TP
+1.
+The character
+.LR . ,
+customarily called `dot',
+addresses the current line.
+.TP
+2.
+The character 
+.L $
+addresses the last line of the buffer.
+.TP
+3.
+A decimal number
+.I n
+addresses the
+.IR n -th
+line of the buffer.
+.TP
+4.
+.BI \'x
+addresses the line marked with the name
+.IR x ,
+which must be a lower-case letter.
+Lines are marked with the
+.L k
+command.
+.TP
+5.
+A regular expression enclosed in slashes (
+.LR / )
+addresses
+the line found by searching forward from the current line
+and stopping at the first line containing a
+string that matches the regular expression.
+If necessary the search wraps around to the beginning of the
+buffer.
+.TP
+6.
+A regular expression enclosed in queries 
+.L ?
+addresses
+the line found by searching backward from the current line
+and stopping at the first line containing
+a string that matches the regular expression.
+If necessary
+the search wraps around to the end of the buffer.
+.TP
+7.
+An address followed by a plus sign 
+.L +
+or a minus sign
+.L -
+followed by a decimal number specifies that address plus
+(resp. minus) the indicated number of lines.
+The plus sign may be omitted.
+.TP
+8.
+An address followed by 
+.L +
+(or
+.LR - )
+followed by a
+regular expression enclosed in slashes specifies the first
+matching line following (or preceding) that address.
+The search wraps around if necessary.
+The 
+.L +
+may be omitted, so
+.L 0/x/
+addresses the
+.I first
+line in the buffer with an 
+.LR x .
+Enclosing the regular expression in 
+.L ?
+reverses the search direction.
+.TP
+9.
+If an address begins with 
+.L +
+or
+.L -
+the addition or subtraction is taken with respect to the current line;
+e.g.\&
+.L -5
+is understood to mean
+.LR .-5 .
+.TP
+10.
+If an address ends with 
+.L +
+or
+.LR - ,
+then 1 is added (resp. subtracted).
+As a consequence of this rule and rule 9,
+the address
+.L -
+refers to the line before the current line.
+Moreover,
+trailing
+.L +
+and
+.L -
+characters
+have cumulative effect, so
+.L --
+refers to the current
+line less 2.
+.TP
+11.
+To maintain compatibility with earlier versions of the editor,
+the character 
+.L ^
+in addresses is 
+equivalent to
+.LR - .
+.PP
+Commands may require zero, one, or two addresses.
+Commands which require no addresses regard the presence
+of an address as an error.
+Commands which accept one or two addresses
+assume default addresses when insufficient are given.
+If more addresses are given than a command requires,
+the last one or two (depending on what is accepted) are used.
+.PP
+Addresses are separated from each other typically by a comma
+.LR , .
+They may also be separated by a semicolon
+.LR ; .
+In this case the current line 
+is set to
+the previous address before the next address is interpreted.
+If no address precedes a comma or semicolon, line 1 is assumed;
+if no address follows, the last line of the buffer is assumed.
+The second address of any two-address sequence
+must correspond to a line following the line corresponding to the first address.
+.PP
+In the following list of
+.I ed
+commands, the default addresses
+are shown in parentheses.
+The parentheses are not part of
+the address, but are used to show that the given addresses are
+the default.
+`Dot' means the current line.
+.TP
+.RB (\|\fL.\fP\|) \|a
+.br
+.ns
+.TP
+<text>
+.br
+.ns
+.TP
+.B .
+Read the given text
+and append it after the addressed line.
+Dot is left
+on the last line input, if there
+were any, otherwise at the addressed line.
+Address 
+.L 0
+is legal for this command; text is placed
+at the beginning of the buffer.
+.TP
+.RB (\|\fL.,.\fP\|) \|b [ +- ][\fIpagesize\fP][ pln\fR]
+Browse.
+Print a `page', normally 20 lines.
+The optional 
+.L +
+(default) or
+.L -
+specifies whether the next or previous
+page is to be printed.
+The optional
+.I pagesize
+is the number of lines in a page.
+The optional
+.LR p ,
+.LR n ,
+or 
+.L l
+causes printing in the specified format, initially
+.LR p .
+Pagesize and format are remembered between 
+.L b
+commands.
+Dot is left at the last line displayed.
+.TP
+.RB (\|\fL.,.\fP\|) \|c
+.br
+.ns
+.TP
+<text>
+.br
+.ns
+.TP
+.B .
+Change.
+Delete the addressed lines, then accept input
+text to replace these lines.
+Dot is left at the last line input; if there were none,
+it is left at the line preceding the deleted lines.
+.TP
+.RB (\|\fL.,.\fP\|) \|d
+Delete the addressed lines from the buffer.
+Dot is set to the line following the last line deleted, or to
+the last line of the buffer if the deleted lines had no successor.
+.TP
+.BI e " filename"
+Edit.
+Delete the entire contents of the buffer;
+then read the named file into the buffer.
+Dot is set to the last line of the buffer.
+The number of characters read is typed.
+The file name is remembered for possible use in later
+.LR e ,
+.LR r ,
+or
+.L w
+commands.
+If
+.I filename
+is missing, the remembered name is used.
+.TP
+.BI E " filename"
+Unconditional
+.LR e ;
+see
+.RL ` q '
+below.
+.TP
+.BI f " filename"
+Print the currently remembered file name.
+If
+.I filename
+is given,
+the currently remembered file name is first changed to
+.IR filename .
+.TP
+.RB (\|\fL1,$\fP\|) \|g/\fIregular\ expression\fP/\fIcommand\ list\fP
+.PD 0
+.TP
+.RB (\|\fL1,$\fP\|) \|g/\fIregular\ expression\fP/
+.TP
+.RB (\|\fL1,$\fP\|) \|g/\fIregular\ expression\fP
+.PD
+Global.
+First mark every line which matches
+the given
+.IR regular expression .
+Then for every such line, execute the
+.I command list
+with dot initially set to that line.
+A single command or the first of multiple commands
+appears on the same line with the global command.
+All lines of a multi-line list except the last line must end with
+.LR \e .
+The
+.RB \&` \&. \&'
+terminating input mode for an
+.LR a ,
+.LR i ,
+.L c
+command may be omitted if it would be on the
+last line of the command list.
+The commands
+.L g
+and
+.L v
+are not permitted in the command list.
+Any character other than space or newline may
+be used instead of 
+.L /
+to delimit the regular expression.
+The second and third forms mean
+.BI g/ regular\ expression /p \f1.
+.TP
+.RB (\| .\| ) \|i
+.PD 0
+.TP
+<text>
+.TP
+.B .
+Insert the given text before the addressed line.
+Dot is left at the last line input, or, if there were none,
+at the line before the addressed line.
+This command differs from the
+.I a
+command only in the placement of the
+text.
+.PD
+.TP
+.RB (\| .,.+1 \|) \|j
+Join the addressed lines into a single line;
+intermediate newlines are deleted.
+Dot is left at the resulting line.
+.TP
+.RB (\|\fL.\fP\|) \|k\fIx\fP
+Mark the addressed line with name
+.IR x ,
+which must be a lower-case letter.
+The address form
+.BI \' x
+then addresses this line.
+.ne 2.5
+.TP
+.RB (\|\fL.,.\fP\|) \|l
+List.
+Print the addressed lines in an unambiguous way:
+a tab is printed as
+.LR \et ,
+a backspace as
+.LR \eb ,
+backslashes as
+.LR \e\e ,
+and non-printing characters as
+a backslash, an
+.LR x ,
+and four hexadecimal digits.
+Long lines are folded,
+with the second and subsequent sub-lines indented one tab stop.
+If the last character in the line is a blank,
+it is followed by
+.LR \en .
+An
+.L l
+may be appended, like
+.LR p ,
+to any non-I/O command.
+.TP
+.RB (\|\fL.,.\fP\|) \|m\fIa
+Move.
+Reposition the addressed lines after the line
+addressed by
+.IR a .
+Dot is left at the last moved line.
+.TP
+.RB (\|\fL.,.\fP\|) \|n
+Number.
+Perform
+.LR p ,
+prefixing each line with its line number and a tab.
+An
+.L n
+may be appended, like
+.LR p ,
+to any non-I/O command.
+.TP
+.RB (\|\fL.,.\fP\|) \|p
+Print the addressed lines.
+Dot is left at the last line printed.
+A
+.L p
+appended to any non-I/O command causes the then current line
+to be printed after the command is executed.
+.TP
+.RB (\|\fL.,.\fP\|) \|P
+This command is a synonym for
+.LR p .
+.TP
+.B q
+Quit the editor.
+No automatic write
+of a file is done.
+A
+.L q
+or
+.L e
+command is considered to be in error if the buffer has
+been modified since the last
+.LR w ,
+.LR q ,
+or
+.L e
+command.
+.TP
+.B Q
+Quit unconditionally.
+.TP
+.RB ( $ )\|r\ \fIfilename\fP
+Read in the given file after the addressed line.
+If no
+.I filename
+is given, the remembered file name is used.
+The file name is remembered if there were no
+remembered file name already.
+If the read is successful, the number of characters
+read is printed.
+Dot is left at the last line read from the file.
+.TP
+.RB (\|\fL.,.\fP\|) \|s\fIn\fP/\fIregular\ expression\fP/\fIreplacement\fP/
+.PD 0
+.TP
+.RB (\|\fL.,.\fP\|) \|s\fIn\fP/\fIregular\ expression\fP/\fIreplacement\fP/g
+.TP
+.RB (\|\fL.,.\fP\|) \|s\fIn\fP/\fIregular\ expression\fP/\fIreplacement\fP
+.PD
+Substitute.
+Search each addressed
+line for an occurrence of the specified regular expression.
+On each line in which
+.I n
+matches are found
+.RI ( n
+defaults to 1 if missing),
+the
+.IR n th
+matched string is replaced by the replacement specified.
+If the global replacement indicator 
+.L g
+appears after the command,
+all subsequent matches on the line are also replaced.
+It is an error for the substitution to fail on all addressed lines.
+Any character other than space or newline
+may be used instead of 
+.L /
+to delimit the regular expression
+and the replacement.
+Dot is left at the last line substituted.
+The third form means
+.BI s n / regular\ expression / replacement\fP/p\f1.
+The second
+.L /
+may be omitted if the replacement is
+empty.
+.IP
+An ampersand 
+.L &
+appearing in the replacement
+is replaced by the string matching the regular expression.
+The characters
+.BI \e n\f1,
+where
+.I n
+is a digit,
+are replaced by the text matched by the
+.IR n -th
+regular subexpression
+enclosed between
+.L (
+and
+.LR ) .
+When
+nested parenthesized subexpressions
+are present,
+.I n
+is determined by counting occurrences of
+.L (
+starting from the left.
+.IP
+A literal 
+.LR & ,
+.LR / ,
+.L \e
+or newline may be included in a replacement
+by prefixing it with
+.LR \e .
+.TP
+.RB (\|\fL.,.\fP\|) \|t\|\fIa
+Transfer.
+Copy the addressed lines 
+after the line addressed by
+.IR a .
+Dot is left at the last line of the copy.
+.TP
+.RB (\|\fL.,.\fP\|) \|u
+Undo.
+Restore the preceding contents
+of the first addressed line (sic), which must be the last line
+in which a substitution was made (double sic).
+.TP
+.RB (\|\fL1,$\fP\|) \|v/\fIregular\ expression\fP/\fIcommand\ list\fP
+This command is the same as the global command
+.L g
+except that the command list is executed with
+dot initially set to every line
+.I except
+those
+matching the regular expression.
+.TP
+.RB (\|\fL1,$\fP\|) \|w " \fIfilename\fP"
+Write the addressed lines to
+the given file.
+If the file does not exist,
+it is created with mode 666 (readable and writable by everyone).
+If no
+.I filename
+is given, the remembered file name, if any, is used.
+The file name is remembered if there were no 
+remembered file name already.
+Dot is unchanged.
+If the write is successful, the number of characters written is
+printed.
+.TP
+.RB (\|\fL1,$\fP\|) \|W " \fIfilename\fP"
+Perform
+.LR w ,
+but append to, instead of overwriting, any existing file contents.
+.TP
+.RB ( $ ) \|=
+Print the line number of the addressed line.
+Dot is unchanged.
+.TP
+.BI ! shell\ command
+Send the remainder of the line after the 
+.L !
+to
+.IR rc (1)
+to be interpreted as a command.
+Dot is unchanged.
+.TP
+.RB (\| .+1 )\|<newline>
+An address without a command is taken as a
+.L p 
+command.
+A terminal
+.L /
+may be omitted from the address.
+A blank line alone is equivalent to
+.LR .+1p ;
+it is useful
+for stepping through text.
+.PP
+If an interrupt signal 
+.SM (DEL)
+is sent,
+.I ed
+prints a 
+.L ?
+and returns to its command level.
+.PP
+When reading a file,
+.I ed
+discards
+.SM NUL
+characters
+and all characters after the last newline.
+.SH FILES
+.B /tmp/e*
+.br
+.B ed.hup
+\ \ work is saved here if terminal hangs up
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/ed.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR sam (1), 
+.IR sed (1),
+.IR regexp (6)
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.BI ? name
+for inaccessible file;
+.L ?TMP
+for temporary file overflow;
+.L ?
+for errors in commands or other overflows.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/emacs b/sys/man/1/emacs
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..3854c528f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/emacs
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+.TH EMACS 1
+.SH NAME
+emacs \- editor macros
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B emacs
+[
+.I options
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This page intentionally left blank.
+.SH SOURCE
+MIT
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR sam (1),
+.IR vi (1)
+.SH BUGS
+Yes.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/eqn b/sys/man/1/eqn
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..7c917cdbe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/eqn
@@ -0,0 +1,339 @@
+.TH EQN 1
+.EQ
+delim $$
+.EN
+.SH NAME
+eqn  \- typeset mathematics
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B eqn
+[
+.I option ...
+]
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Eqn
+is a
+.IR troff (1)
+preprocessor
+for typesetting mathematics
+on a typesetter.
+Usage is almost always
+.IP
+.L
+eqn file ... | troff
+.PP
+If no files are specified, 
+.I eqn
+reads from the standard input.
+.I Eqn
+prepares output for the typesetter 
+named in the
+.BI -T dest
+option (default
+.BR -Tutf ;
+see
+.IR troff (1)).
+When run with other preprocessor filters,
+.I eqn
+usually comes last.
+.PP
+A line beginning with
+.B .EQ
+marks the start of an equation;
+the end of an equation
+is marked by a line beginning with
+.BR .EN .
+Neither of these lines is altered,
+so they may be defined in macro packages
+to get
+centering, numbering, etc.
+It is also possible to set two characters
+as `delimiters';
+text between delimiters is also
+.I eqn
+input.
+Delimiters may be set to characters
+.I x
+and
+.I y
+with the option
+.BI -d xy
+or (more commonly) with
+.B delim
+.I xy
+between
+.B .EQ
+and
+.BR .EN .
+Left and right delimiters may be identical.
+(They are customarily taken to be
+$font L "$$" )$.
+Delimiters are turned off by
+.LR "delim off" .
+All text that is neither between delimiters nor between
+.B .EQ
+and
+.B .EN
+is passed through untouched.
+.PP
+Tokens within
+.I eqn
+are separated by
+spaces, tabs, newlines, braces, double quotes,
+tildes or circumflexes.
+Braces {} are used for grouping;
+generally speaking,
+anywhere a single character like
+.L x
+could appear, a complicated construction
+enclosed in braces may be used instead.
+Tilde
+.L ~
+represents a full space in the output,
+circumflex
+.L ^
+half as much.
+.PP
+.vs 13p
+Subscripts and superscripts are produced with the keywords
+.B sub
+and
+.BR sup .
+Thus
+.L "x sub i" 
+makes
+$x sub i$, 
+.L "a sub i sup 2"
+produces
+$a sub i sup 2$,
+and
+.L "e sup {x sup 2 + y sup 2}"
+gives
+$e sup {x sup 2 + y sup 2}$.
+.PP
+.B Over
+makes fractions:
+.L "a over b"
+yields $a over b$.
+.PP
+.B Sqrt
+produces square roots:
+.L "1 over sqrt {ax sup 2 +bx+c}"
+results in
+$1 over sqrt {ax sup 2 +bx+c}$ .
+.PP
+The keywords
+.B from
+and
+.B to
+introduce lower and upper
+limits on arbitrary things:
+$lim from {n -> inf} sum from 0 to n x sub i$
+is made with
+.LR "lim from {n -> inf} sum from 0 to n x sub i" .
+.PP
+Left and right brackets, braces, etc., of the right height are made with
+.B left
+and
+.BR right :
+.L "left [ x sup 2 + y sup 2 over alpha right ] ~=~1"
+produces
+$left [ x sup 2 + y sup 2 over alpha right ] ~=~1$.
+The
+.B right
+clause is optional.
+Legal characters after 
+.B left
+and
+.B right
+are braces, brackets, bars,
+.B c
+and
+.B f
+for ceiling and floor,
+and
+.B
+""
+for nothing at all (useful for a right-side-only bracket).
+.PP
+Vertical piles of things are made with 
+.BR pile ,
+.BR lpile ,
+.BR cpile ,
+and
+.BR rpile :
+.L "pile {a above b above c}"
+produces
+$pile {a above b above c}$.
+There can be an arbitrary number of elements in a pile.
+.B lpile
+left-justifies,
+.B pile
+and
+.B cpile
+center, with different vertical spacing,
+and 
+.B rpile
+right justifies.
+.PP
+Matrices are made with
+.BR matrix :
+.L "matrix { lcol { x sub i above y sub 2 } ccol { 1 above 2 } }"
+produces
+$matrix { lcol { x sub i above y sub 2 } ccol { 1 above 2 } }$.
+In addition, there is
+.B rcol
+for a right-justified column.
+.PP
+.vs 12p
+Diacritical marks are made with
+.BR prime ,
+.BR dot ,
+.BR dotdot ,
+.BR hat ,
+.BR tilde ,
+.BR bar ,
+.BR under ,
+.BR vec ,
+.BR dyad ,
+and
+.BR under :
+.L "x sub 0 sup prime = f(t) bar + g(t) under"
+is
+$x sub 0 sup prime = f(t) bar + g(t) under$,
+and
+.L "x vec = y dyad"
+is
+$x vec = y dyad$.
+.PP
+Sizes and fonts can be changed with prefix operators
+.B size 
+.IR n ,
+.B size
+.BI ± n \f1,
+.BR fat ,
+.BR roman ,
+.BR italic ,
+.BR bold ,
+or
+.BR font
+.IR n .
+Size and fonts can be changed globally in a document by
+.B gsize
+.I n
+and
+.B gfont
+.IR n ,
+or by the command-line arguments
+.BI -s n
+and
+.BI -f n\f1.
+.PP
+Normally subscripts and superscripts are reduced by
+3 point sizes from the previous size;
+this may be changed by the command-line argument
+.BI -p n\f1.
+.PP
+Successive display arguments can be lined up.
+Place
+.B mark
+before the desired lineup point in the first equation;
+place
+.B lineup
+at the place that is to line up vertically in subsequent equations.
+.PP
+Shorthands may be defined
+or existing keywords redefined with
+.BR define :
+.L define
+.I thing
+.L %
+.I replacement
+.L %
+defines a new token called
+.I thing
+which will be replaced by
+.I replacement
+whenever it appears thereafter.
+The 
+.L %
+may be any character that does not occur in
+.LR replacement .
+.PP
+Keywords like 
+.L sum
+.EQ
+( sum ),
+.EN
+.L int
+.EQ
+( int ),
+.EN
+.L inf
+.EQ
+( inf ),
+.EN
+and shorthands like
+.L >=
+.EQ
+(>=),
+.EN
+.L ->
+.EQ
+(->),
+.EN
+and
+.L !=
+.EQ
+( != )
+.EN
+are recognized.
+Greek letters are spelled out in the desired case, as in
+.L alpha
+or
+.LR GAMMA .
+Mathematical words like
+.LR sin ,
+.LR cos ,
+.L log
+are made Roman automatically.
+.IR Troff (1)
+four-character escapes like
+.L \e(lh
+(\(lh) can be used anywhere.
+Strings enclosed in double quotes " "
+are passed through untouched;
+this permits keywords to be entered as text,
+and can be used to communicate
+with 
+.I troff
+when all else fails.
+.SH FILES
+.TF /sys/lib/troff/font/devutf
+.TP
+.B /sys/lib/troff/font/devutf
+font descriptions for PostScript
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/eqn
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR troff (1), 
+.IR tbl (1)
+.br
+J. F. Ossanna and B. W. Kernighan,
+``Troff User's Manual''.
+.br
+B. W. Kernighan and L. L. Cherry,
+``Typesetting Mathematics\(emUser's Guide'', 
+.I
+Unix Research System Programmer's Manual,
+Tenth Edition, Volume 2.
+.SH BUGS
+To embolden digits, parens, etc.,
+it is necessary to quote them,
+as in 
+.LR bold\ "12.3" .
+.EQ
+delim off
+.EN
diff --git a/sys/man/1/expect b/sys/man/1/expect
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..95ea52b30
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/expect
@@ -0,0 +1,172 @@
+.TH EXPECT 1
+.SH NAME
+at, drain, expect, pass \- dialer scripting tools
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B dial/at
+[
+.B -q
+] [
+.B -t
+.I seconds
+]
+atcommand
+.br
+.B dial/expect
+[
+.B -iq
+] [
+.B -t
+.I seconds
+]
+.I goodstring
+[
+.IR badstring ...
+]
+.br
+.B dial/drain
+.br
+.B dial/pass
+[
+.B -q
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These commands are used to write telephone dialing
+scripts, mostly for PPP sessions.  They all expect standard input and
+output to be connected to a communications device, e.g,
+a serial line to a modem.  They communicate with the user using
+.BR /dev/cons .
+.PP
+.I At
+sends
+.B atcommand
+to the modem prefixed with the string
+.BR at .
+It then reads from the modem expecting an AT response. 
+.I At
+will return success if it gets and
+.B OK
+of
+.B CONNECT
+response.  Otherwise it will return the response as an
+error status.  The options are:
+.TP
+.B -t
+set the timeout to
+.IR seconds .
+The default is 300.
+.TP
+.B -q
+don't write to
+.B /dev/cons
+what is read from standard in.  The default is
+to copy everything through.
+.PD
+.PP
+.I Expect
+reads standard input looking for one of the strings given
+as arguments.  Reading the first string causes a successul exit
+status.  Reading any of the others causes an exit status equal to
+the string.  The command also terminates on a timeout.  The options
+are:
+.TP
+.B -t
+set the timeout to
+.IR seconds .
+The default is 300.
+.TP
+.B -i
+ignore case when doing the matches.
+.TP
+.B -q
+don't write to
+.B /dev/cons
+what is read from standard in.  The default is
+to copy everything through.
+.PD
+.PP
+.I Pass
+copies input from
+.B /dev/cons
+to standard output.
+It terminates on a newline.  The only flag is
+.B -q
+and means the same as it does for
+.IR expect .
+.PP
+.I Drain
+discards any input waiting on standard input.  It
+is used to sync up the stream at the start of dialing
+or after an error.
+.SH EXAMPLE
+The following
+.B rc
+script dials out through a Hayes compatible modem on
+.B /dev/eia1
+and lets the user type in a user name and password
+before starting
+.BR ppp .
+.EX
+#!/bin/rc
+dev=/dev/eia1
+telno=18005551212
+
+fn initfn {
+	dial/drain
+	echo +++
+	dial/at zh0
+}
+
+fn dialfn {
+	dial/drain
+	dial/at dt^$telno
+}
+{
+	# set up uart
+	if( test -e $dev^ctl ){
+		echo -n b^$baud
+		echo -n m1	# cts/rts flow control
+		echo -n q64000	# big buffer
+		echo -n n1	# nonblocking writes
+		echo -n r1	# rts on
+		echo -n d1	# dtr on
+		echo -n c1	# handup when we lose dcd
+	} > $dev^ctl
+
+	# get the modem's attention
+	while( ! initfn )
+		sleep 1
+
+	# dial
+	while( ! dialfn )
+		sleep 30
+		
+	if( ! dial/expect -it 60 'username:' ){
+		echo can''t connect >[1=2]
+		exit connect
+	}
+	dial/pass
+	if( ! dial/expect -it 60 'password:' ){
+		echo can''t connect >[1=2]
+		exit connect
+	}
+	dial/pass
+	if( ! dial/expect -t 60 'ppp or telnet:' ){
+		echo can''t connect >[1=2]
+		exit connect
+	}
+	echo ppp
+	dial/expect -t 5 something
+	echo connected >[1=2]
+
+	# start ppp
+	ip/ppp $primary -f
+} < $dev > $dev
+.EE
+.SH FILES
+.B /rc/bin/ipconf/*
+example dialer scripts for ppp
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/dial/*.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR ppp (8),
+.IR telco (4)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/faces b/sys/man/1/faces
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..633fb688b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/faces
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+.TH FACES 1
+.SH NAME
+faces, seemail, vwhois \-  mailbox interface
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B faces
+[
+.B -ih
+] [
+.B -m
+.I maildir
+]
+.br
+.B seemail
+.br
+.B vwhois
+.I person
+\&...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.I faces
+command monitors incoming mail and
+displays in its window a representation of the user's mail box
+using a small image for each message.
+The image is typically a portrait of the sender. Which image to 
+display is determined by two directories /usr/$user/lib/face 
+and /lib/face. Entries in /usr/$user/lib/face take priority over 
+those in /lib/face. See 
+.IR face (6),
+for how these directories are organised.
+.PP
+If the user is running
+.IR plumber (4),
+.I faces
+reacts to plumb messages to the
+.B seemail
+port,
+typically from
+.BR upas/fs ,
+and is thus notified of message additions and deletions.
+.PP
+Right-clicking on a message icon causes that message to be `plumbed' to
+.BR showmail .
+A typical plumb action will be to display the message, such as by
+the rule
+.EX
+    plumb start window mail -s $0
+.EE
+The
+.IR acme (1)
+mail reader listens to the
+.B showmail
+port automatically.
+.PP
+If the user is not running
+.IR plumber ,
+.I faces
+reads the log file
+.F /sys/log/mail
+and right-clicking has no effect.
+.PP
+If arrows are visible, clicking on them will scroll the display.
+Middle-clicking on the arrows scrolls to the end.
+.PP
+Starting
+.B faces
+with the
+.B -i
+flag causes
+.B faces
+to read the messages in
+.BR /mail/fs/mbox
+— or the mailboxes specified with the
+.B -m
+flag —
+upon startup.
+.PP
+The
+.B -m
+option directs
+.I faces
+to watch for messages arriving in
+.I maildir
+instead of
+.BR /mail/fs/mbox .
+Multiple
+.B -m
+flags may be used to watch multiple mailboxes.
+.PP
+The
+.B -h
+flag causes a different, venerable behavior in which
+the window displays the history of messages received
+rather than the current state of the mail box.
+In particular, faces are not removed from the screen when messages are deleted.
+Also, in this mode clicking button 1 in the display will clear the window.
+.PP
+.I Seemail
+is an
+.IR rc (1)
+script that invokes
+.B faces
+.BR -h .
+.PP
+.I Vwhois
+tells
+.I faces
+to display the icons of the named
+.IR persons ,
+without sending a message.
+.SH FILES
+.BR /mail/fs/mbox   "   mail directory.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/faces
+.br
+.B /rc/bin/seemail
+.br
+.B /rc/bin/vwhois
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR mail (1),
+.IR marshal (1),
+.IR nedmail (1),
+.IR plumber (4),
+.IR face (6),
+.IR plumb (6)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/factor b/sys/man/1/factor
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..10baf9960
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/factor
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+.TH FACTOR 1 
+.CT 1 numbers
+.SH NAME
+factor, primes \- factor a number, generate large primes
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B factor
+[
+.I number
+]
+.PP
+.B primes
+.I start
+[
+.I finish
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Factor
+prints
+.I number
+and its prime factors,
+each repeated the proper number of times.
+The number must be positive and less than
+.if n 2**54
+.if t 2\u\s754\s0\d
+(about
+.if n 1.8e16)
+.if t 1.8\(mu10\u\s716\s0\d\|).
+.PP
+If no
+.I number 
+is given,
+.I factor
+reads a stream of numbers from the standard input and factors them.
+It exits on any input not a positive integer.
+Maximum running time is proportional to
+.if n sqrt(n).
+.if t .I \(sr\o'n\(rn'\f1.
+.PP
+.PP
+.I Primes
+prints the prime numbers ranging from
+.I start
+to
+.IR finish ,
+where
+.I start
+and
+.I finish
+are positive numbers less than 
+.if n 2**56.
+.if t 2\u\s756\s0\d.
+If 
+.I finish
+is missing,
+.I primes
+prints without end;
+if
+.I start
+is missing, it reads the starting number from the
+standard input.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/factor.c
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/primes.c
diff --git a/sys/man/1/fedex b/sys/man/1/fedex
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..0434382ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/fedex
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+.TH FEDEX 1
+.SH NAME
+fedex, ups, usps \- track shipments
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B fedex 
+.I tracking-number
+.br
+.B ups 
+.I tracking-number
+.br
+.B usps
+.I tracking-number
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Fedex
+writes available shipment details for the given Federal Express 12-digit
+.I tracking-number
+on the standard output.
+.I Ups
+is similar, but takes a United Parcel Service 18-digit
+.IR tracking-number .
+.I Usps
+takes a US Post Office
+.IR tracking-number .
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /rc/bin
+.SH BUGS
+Redesigns of the source website can break these programs.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/file b/sys/man/1/file
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..40b0d3b64
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/file
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+.TH FILE 1
+.SH NAME
+file \- determine file type
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B file
+[
+.B -m
+]
+[
+.I file
+\&...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I File
+performs a series of tests on its argument
+.I files
+in an attempt to classify their contents by language or purpose.
+If no arguments are given, the classification is performed
+on standard input.
+.PP
+If the
+.B -m
+flag is given, 
+.I file
+outputs an
+appropriate MIME
+.B Content-Type
+specification describing the
+.B type
+and
+.B subtype
+of each file.
+.PP
+The file types it looks for include
+directory,
+device file,
+zero-filled file,
+empty file,
+Plan 9 executable,
+PAC audio file,
+.B cpio
+archive,
+.B tex
+.B dvi
+file,
+archive symbol table,
+archive,
+.B rc
+script,
+.B sh
+script,
+PostScript,
+.B troff
+output file for various devices,
+mail box,
+GIF,
+FAX,
+object code,
+C and Alef source,
+assembler source,
+compressed files,
+encrypted file,
+English text,
+compressed image,
+image,
+subfont,
+and
+font.
+.PP
+If a file has no apparent format,
+.I file
+looks at the character set it uses to classify it according to
+.SM ASCII\c
+,
+extended
+.SM ASCII\c
+, Latin
+.SM ASCII\c
+, or
+.SM UTF
+holding one or more of the following blocks of the Unicode Standard:
+Extended Latin,
+Greek,
+Cyrillic,
+Armenian,
+Hebrew,
+Arabic,
+Devanagari,
+Bengali,
+Gurmukhi,
+Gujarati,
+Oriya,
+Tamil,
+Telugu,
+Kannada,
+Malayalam,
+Thai,
+Lao,
+Tibetan,
+Georgian,
+Japanese,
+Chinese,
+or Korean.
+.PP
+If all else fails,
+.I file
+decides its input is
+binary.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/file.c
+.SH BUGS
+It can make mistakes.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/filter b/sys/man/1/filter
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..ae86aa336
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/filter
@@ -0,0 +1,320 @@
+.TH FILTER 1
+.SH NAME
+filter, list, deliver, token, vf \-  filtering mail
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B upas/filter
+[
+.B -bh
+]
+.I rcvr
+.I mailbox
+[
+.I "regexp file
+] ...
+.PP
+.B upas/list
+[
+.B -d
+]
+.B add|check
+.I patternfile
+.I addressfile ...
+.PP
+.B upas/deliver
+.I recipient
+.I fromfile
+.I mbox
+.PP
+.B upas/token
+.I key
+[
+.I tokenfile
+]
+.PP
+.B upas/vf
+[
+.B -r
+]
+[
+.B -s
+.I savefile
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+A user may filter all incoming mail by creating
+a world readable/executable file
+.BI /mail/box/ username /pipeto.
+If the file is a shell script, it can use the
+commands described here to implement a filter.
+.PP
+.I Filter
+provides simple mail filtering.
+The first two arguments are the recipient's address and mailbox, that is,
+the same arguments provided to
+.BR pipeto .
+The remaining arguments are all pairs of a regular expression and a file name.
+With no flags, the sender's address is matched against each
+regular expression starting with the first.  If the expression
+matches, then the message is delivered to the file whose name
+follows the expression.  The file must be world writable and should
+be append only.
+A message that matches none of the expressions is delivered into
+the user's standard mail box.
+.PP
+By default,
+.I filter
+matches each regular expression against the message's sender.
+The
+.B -h
+flag causes
+.I filter
+to match against the entire header,
+and the
+.B -b
+flag causes
+.I filter
+to match against the entire message (header and body).
+.PP
+For example, to delete any messages of precedence bulk, place in
+your
+.B pipeto
+file:
+.IP
+.EX
+/bin/upas/filter -h $1 $2 'Precedence: bulk' /dev/null
+.EE
+.PP
+Three other commands exist which, combined by an
+.IR rc (1)
+script, allow you to build your own filter.
+.PP
+.I List
+takes two verbs;
+.B check
+and
+.BR add .
+.B Check
+directs
+.I list
+to check each address contained in the
+.IR addressfile s
+against a list of patterns in
+.IR patternfile .
+Patterns come in four forms:
+.TF ~\fIregular-expression\fP
+.PD
+.TP
+.B ~\fIregular-expression\fP
+If any address matches the regular expression,
+.I list
+returns successfully.
+.TP
+.BR =\fIstring\fP .
+If any address exactly matches
+.IR string ,
+.I list
+returns successfully.
+.TP
+.B !~\fIregular-expression\fP
+If any address matches the regular expression
+and no other address matches a non `!' rule,
+.I list
+returns error status "!match".
+.TP
+.B !=\fIstring\fP
+If any address exactly matches
+.I string
+and no other address matches a non `!' rule,
+.I list
+returns error status "!match".
+.PP
+If no addresses match a pattern,
+.I list
+returns "no match".
+.PP
+The pattern file may also contain lines of the form
+.IP
+.EX
+#include filename
+.EE
+.LP
+to allow pattern files to include other pattern files.
+All pattern matches are case insensitive.
+.I List
+searches the pattern file (and its includes) in order.
+The first matching pattern determines the action.
+.PP
+.I List
+.B add
+directs
+.I list
+to add a pattern to
+.I patternfile
+for each address in the
+.I addressfiles
+that doesh't already match a pattern.
+.PP
+.IR Token ,
+with only one argument, prints to standard output a unique token
+created from the current date and
+.IR key .
+With two arguments, it checks
+.I token
+against tokens created over the last 10 days with
+.IR key .
+If a match is found, it returns successfully.
+.PP
+.I Deliver
+delivers into mail box
+.I mbox
+the message read from standard input.
+It obeys standard mail file locking and logging
+conventions.
+.PP
+.B /sys/src/cmd/upas/filterkit/pipeto.sample
+is a sample
+.B pipeto
+using the filter kit.
+.PP
+A sample
+.BR pipefrom ,
+.BR /sys/src/cmd/upas/filterkit/pipefrom.sample ,
+is provided which adds all addresses of your outgoing
+mail to your pattern file.
+You should copy it into a directory that normally gets
+bound by your profile onto
+.BR /bin .
+.PP
+.I Vf
+(virus filter)
+takes a mail message as standard input
+and searches for executable MIME attachments,
+either rewriting them to be non-executable or
+rejecting the message.
+The behavior depends on the attachment's file name
+extension and MIME content type.
+.B /sys/lib/mimetype
+contains the list of known extensions and MIME content types.
+The fifth field of each line specifies the
+safety of a particular file type:
+.B y
+(yes),
+.B m
+(maybe; treated same as yes),
+.B n
+(no),
+.B p
+(previous),
+or
+.B r
+(reject).
+.I Vf
+allows attachments with safety
+.B y
+or
+.B m
+to pass through unaltered.
+Attachments with safety
+.B n
+both are wrapped in extra MIME headers
+and have
+.B .suspect
+appended to their file names, to avoid
+automatic execution by mail readers.
+Attachments with safety
+.B r
+(currently,
+.BR .bat ,
+.BR .com ,
+.BR .exe ,
+and
+.BR .scr ,
+all Microsoft executable extensions)
+are taken as
+cause for the entire message to be rejected.
+A safety of
+.B p
+(used for the
+.B x-gunzip
+mime type)
+causes the previous extension to be tested,
+so that
+.B x.tar.gz
+is treated the same as
+.BR x.tar .
+.PP
+If
+.B /mail/lib/validateattachment
+exists and is executable,
+.B vf
+runs it on all attachments with safety
+.B n
+(attachments it would normally sanitize).
+If
+.IR validateattachment 's
+exit status contains the string
+.LR discard ,
+.I vf
+rejects the entire message.
+If the status contains the string
+.LR accept ,
+.I vf
+does not sanitize the attachment.
+Otherwise,
+.I vf
+sanitizes the attachment as before.
+The standard
+.I validateattachment
+uses
+.IR file (1)
+to determine the file type.
+It accepts text and image files
+and discards messages containing
+executables or
+.I zip
+(see
+.IR gzip (1))
+archives of executables.
+.PP
+The
+.B -r
+option causes
+.I vf
+not to sanitize MIME attachments, but instead to
+reject messages it determines to be viruses.
+The
+.B -s
+option causes
+.I vf
+to log all attachments of safety
+.B r
+in the mail box
+.IR savefile .
+.SH FILES
+.TF /mail/lib/validateattachment
+.TP
+.B /mail/box/*/pipeto
+mail filter
+.TP
+.B /sys/lib/mimetype
+MIME content types
+.TP
+.B /mail/lib/validateattachment
+attachment checker
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/upas/send
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/upas/filterkit
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/upas/vf
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR aliasmail (8),
+.IR faces (1),
+.IR mail (1),
+.IR marshal (1),
+.IR mlmgr (1),
+.IR nedmail (1),
+.IR qer (8),
+.IR rewrite (6),
+.IR send (8),
+.IR smtp (8),
+.IR upasfs (4)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/fmt b/sys/man/1/fmt
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..511860018
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/fmt
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+.TH FMT 1
+.SH NAME
+fmt, htmlfmt \- simple text formatters
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B fmt
+[
+.I option ...
+]
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.PP
+.B htmlfmt
+[
+.B -a
+] [
+.B -c
+.I charset
+] [
+.B -u
+.I url
+] [
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Fmt
+copies the given
+.I files
+(standard input by default)
+to its standard output, filling and indenting lines.
+The options are
+.TP
+.BI -l " n
+Output line length is
+.IR n ,
+including indent (default 70).
+.TP
+.BI -w " n
+A synonym for
+.BR -l .
+.TP
+.BI -i " n
+Indent
+.I n
+spaces (default 0).
+.TP
+.BI -j
+Do not join short lines: only fold long lines.
+.PP
+Empty lines and initial white space in input lines are preserved.
+Empty lines are inserted between input files.
+.PP
+.I Fmt
+is idempotent: it leaves already formatted text unchanged.
+.PP
+.I Htmlfmt
+performs a similar service, but accepts as input text formatted with
+HTML tags.
+It accepts
+.IR fmt 's
+.B -l
+and
+.B -w
+flags and also:
+.TP
+.BI -a
+Normally
+.I htmlfmt
+suppresses the contents of form fields and anchors (URLs and image files); this flag
+causes it to print them, in square brackets.
+.TP
+.BI -c " charset
+change the default character set from iso-8859-1 to
+.IR charset .
+This is the character set assumed if there isn't one
+specified by the html itself in a <meta> directive.
+.TP
+.BI -u " url
+Use
+.I url
+as the base URL for the document when displaying anchors; sets
+.BI -a .
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/fmt.c
+.PP
+.B /sys/src/cmd/htmlfmt
+.SH BUGS
+.I Htmlfmt
+makes no attempt to render the two-dimensional geometry of tables;
+it just treats the table entries as plain, to-be-formatted text.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/fortune b/sys/man/1/fortune
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..dfae7186a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/fortune
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+.TH FORTUNE 1
+.SH NAME
+fortune \- sample lines from a file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B fortune
+[
+.I file
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Fortune
+prints a one-line aphorism chosen at random.
+If a
+.I file
+is specified, the saying is taken from that file;
+otherwise it is selected from
+.BR /sys/games/lib/fortunes .
+.SH FILES
+.B /sys/games/lib/fortunes
+.br
+.B /sys/games/lib/fortunes.index
+\ \ fast lookup table, maintained automatically
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/fortune.c
diff --git a/sys/man/1/freq b/sys/man/1/freq
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..e6b5086f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/freq
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+.TH FREQ 1
+.SH NAME
+freq \- print histogram of character frequencies
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B freq
+[
+.B -cdorx
+]
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Freq
+reads the given files (default standard input)
+and prints histograms of the character frequencies.
+By default,
+.I freq
+counts each byte as a character;
+under the
+.B -r
+option it instead counts
+.SM UTF
+sequences, that is, runes.
+.PP
+Each non-zero entry of the table is printed preceded by the byte value,
+in decimal, octal, hex, and
+Unicode
+character (if printable).
+If any options are given, the
+.BR -d ,
+.BR -x ,
+.BR -o ,
+.B -c
+flags specify a subset of value formats: decimal, hex, octal, and
+character, respectively.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/freq.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR utf (6),
+.IR wc (1)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/games b/sys/man/1/games
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..c5a23cb30
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/games
@@ -0,0 +1,312 @@
+.TH GAMES 1
+.SH NAME
+4s, 5s, festoon, juggle, life, mahjongg, memo, sokoban, sudoku \- time wasters
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B games/4s
+.br
+.B games/5s
+.br
+.B games/festoon
+[
+.B -pet
+] [
+.I sentences
+[
+.I percent-invented-nouns
+] ]
+.br
+.B games/juggle
+[
+.B -d
+.I delay
+] [
+.B -h
+.I hands
+] [
+.I start
+]
+.I pattern
+.br
+.B games/life
+.I startfile
+.br
+.B games/mahjongg
+[
+.B -c
+] [
+.B -f
+] [
+.B -b
+.I background
+] [
+.B -t 
+.I tileset
+] [
+.B -l
+.I layout
+]
+.br
+.B games/memo
+[
+.B -h
+]
+.br
+.B games/sokoban
+[
+.I level
+]
+.br
+.B games/sudoku
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+There are a few games in
+.BR /bin/games :
+.TF mahjongg
+.PD
+.TP
+.BR 4s , " 5s"
+Try to fill complete rows using 4-square or 5-square tiles.
+Move tiles left or right by moving the mouse.
+Rotate tiles with buttons 1 and 3.
+Drop tiles for more points with button 2 or the space bar.
+Keys
+.LR a
+and 
+.LR j
+move left,
+.LR s
+and 
+.LR k
+rotate left,
+.LR d
+and 
+.LR l
+rotate right,
+.LR f
+and 
+.LR ;
+move right.
+.LR z ,
+.LR p
+and
+.LR Esc
+toggle suspend/resume.
+.LR q ,
+.LR Del
+and
+.LR control-D
+quit.
+.TP
+.B festoon
+Generate an official-looking but utterly nonsensical bureaucratic report as
+.L "pic | eqn | tbl | troff -mm"
+input.
+Options
+.BR -p ,
+.B -e
+and
+.B -t
+add gibberish diagrams, equations and tables.
+.TP
+.B juggle
+Display the juggling
+.I pattern
+using the optional initial
+.I start
+pattern.
+The number of hands involved (default 2) can be specified with
+.BR -h ,
+and
+.I delay
+can be used to speed up or slow down the action (default is 20).
+Try the pattern 333333441333333 or 333353505151512333333
+or YWUSQOMKIGECA
+(see
+.BR http://seehuhn.de/jong/theory.html ).
+.TP
+.B life
+Play the game of Life, given an initial position.
+There is a library of interesting initial positions;
+the library is consulted if
+.I startfile
+cannot be found.
+.TP
+.B mahjongg
+Remove all tiles
+from the board. Click on tiles with the same face that
+are not blocked by others. A blocked tile is one that is partially or
+fully covered on top or has neighbouring tiles to the left and right.
+The game finishes when either all tiles are gone or there are no
+more moves left. The arguments are for changing background
+.RB (-b),
+tile
+.RB (-t)
+and layout
+.RB (-l)
+images;
+.RB -c
+selects a true-color buffer image, for use with
+drawterm or in case selecting a tile obscures it completely;
+.RB -f
+causes mahjongg to indicate non-blocked tiles on mouse-over.
+The 
+.LR N
+key will generate a new level, 
+.LR R
+restarts the current one. 
+.LR Q
+and 
+.LR Del
+quit, 
+.LR H
+gives a hint, either trying to match the currently selected tile, or if no tile is
+selected finding out the first available tile.
+.LR U
+and
+.LR Bksp
+undo the last move,
+.LR C
+tries to solve the level.
+.TP
+.B memo
+Remove all tiles from the board.
+At first, pictures of various Bell Labs employees, Lucent Technologies' logo, and Glenda will appear.
+Memorize the sequence, then click to hide them and begin.
+Use the mouse to select two tiles.
+If they are the same, the tiles will disappear, otherwise the tiles will flip back and you will get a chance to try again.
+Button 3 generates a memu allowing you to restart, switch between easy and hard modes, and exit.
+The
+.B -h
+option sets the game to hard mode.
+Once the game has been completed, a message pops up with how long it took to win.
+Use the button 3 menu to choose a mode, or click to play again.
+.TP
+.B sokoban
+Guide Glenda through a room full of walls, pebbles and holes to put
+the pebbles in.  Your goal is to arrange all pebbles into holes by
+pushing them around, but you can only push a pebble if there is no
+wall or another pebble blocking the way.
+Arrow keys move Glenda up-down-left-right.  
+.LR N 
+and 
+.LR P 
+keys switch between
+the next and previous levels, 
+.LR R
+restarts the current level.  
+.LR Del 
+and
+.LR Q
+quit.  Button 3 invokes a menu to restart the current level, load different level sets, and en- and disable animation of multi-step moves.
+Button 2 lets you change between levels. 
+Button 1 lets you do multi-step moves and pushes,
+by clicking it on the destination where you want Glenda to go.
+Glenda will only move if it can reach the destination.
+For a multi-step push the pebble must be next to Glenda,
+the destination must be on the same row or column,
+and there must be a free place next to the destination
+where the pebble can be pushed to.
+Otherwise, if possible, Glenda will walk to the destination without pushing the pebble.
+.I Sokoban
+accepts a level file as its argument.
+.TP
+.B sudoku
+.I Sudoku
+is a puzzle game from Japan.  The goal of the game is to
+fill the numbers 1 to 9 in all squares of the 9x9 board following a
+few simple rules: no digit should repeat on the same row and column,
+and no digit should repeat in the same 3x3 boxes outlined with thicker
+lines.  The board is initially filled with a partial solution which
+can be used for inferring digits for the empty squares.  The top row
+of the board contains the digits 1 through 9, clicking on one of those
+digits selects that number for placement on the board, clicking it
+again will deselect that digit.  Clicking on an empty square will then
+affix the square with the selected digit or, if no digit is selected
+empty the square.
+.IP
+Button 3 presents a menu with the following options:
+.RS \w'\fLfireworksXX'u
+.TP \w'\fLOffsetXX'u
+.B New
+autogenerate a new, random board
+.TP
+.B Check
+mark in red any digits not placed according to the rules
+.TP
+.B Solve
+present the board's solution
+.TP
+.B Clear
+clear the board to its starting (or last loaded) state
+.TP
+.B Save
+save the current board to
+.B /tmp/sudoku-save
+.TP
+.B Load
+load the last saved board from
+.B /tmp/sudoku-save
+.TP
+.B Print
+print the current board and solution in a format
+suitable for addition in the
+.I sudoku
+library to
+.B /tmp/sudoku-board
+.TP
+.B Offline
+pretty-print the board for off-line solving to
+.B /tmp/sudoku-print
+.TP
+.B Exit
+quit the game
+.RE
+.IP
+Button 2 presents a list of
+.I sudoku
+boards of varying degrees of difficulty from
+.BR /sys/games/lib/sudoku/boards .
+.IP
+Pressing the
+.B Q
+key quits
+.IR sudoku .
+.SH FILES
+.TF /sys/games/lib/mahjongg/*
+.TP
+.B /sys/games/lib/[45]scores
+score files of
+.I 4s
+and
+.I 5s
+.TP
+.B /sys/games/lib/life/*
+interesting starting positions
+.TP
+.B /sys/games/lib/mahjongg/*
+image sprites, levels and backgrounds used by
+.I mahjongg
+.TP
+.B /lib/face/*
+tiles for
+.I memo
+.TP
+.B /sys/games/lib/sokoban/*
+image sprites and levels used by
+.I sokoban
+.TP
+.B /sys/games/lib/sudoku/*
+images and boards used by
+.I sudoku
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/games
+.SH BUGS
+In
+.I 4s
+and
+.IR 5s ,
+mouse warping (when the game is resumed,
+and when a new tile appears) does not happen when
+the mouse cursor is outside the game window.
+Those who prefer to use the keyboard without the mouse
+cursor blocking the view (or being warped all the time)
+may consider this a feature.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/grap b/sys/man/1/grap
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..b098f8220
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/grap
@@ -0,0 +1,416 @@
+.TH GRAP 1
+.SH NAME
+grap \- pic preprocessor for drawing graphs
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B grap
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Grap
+is a
+.IR pic (1)
+preprocessor for drawing graphs on a typesetter.
+Graphs are surrounded by the
+.I troff
+`commands'
+.B \&.G1
+and
+.BR  \&.G2 .
+Data are scaled and plotted,
+with tick marks supplied automatically.
+Commands exist to modify the frame,
+add labels, override the default ticks,
+change the plotting style,
+define coordinate ranges and transformations,
+and include data from files.
+In addition,
+.I grap
+provides the same loops, conditionals, and macro processing that
+.I pic
+does.
+.PP
+.BI frame
+.B ht
+.I e
+.B wid
+.I e
+.B top
+.B dotted
+.IR ... :
+Set the frame around the graph to specified
+.B ht
+and
+.BR wid ;
+default is 2 by 3 (inches).
+The line
+.I styles
+.RB ( dotted ,
+.BR dashed ,
+.BR invis ,
+.BR solid
+(default))
+of the 
+.I sides
+.RB ( top ,
+.BR bot ,
+.BR left ,
+.BR right )
+of the frame can be set
+independently.
+.PP
+.B label
+.I side
+.B \&"a label"
+.B \&"as a set of strings"
+.IR adjust :
+Place label on specified side; default side is bottom.
+.I adjust
+is
+.B up
+(or
+.B down
+.B left
+.BR right )
+.I expr
+to shift default position;
+.B width
+.I expr
+sets the width explicitly.
+.PP
+.BI ticks
+.I side
+.B in
+.B at
+.IR "optname expr, expr, ..." :
+Put ticks on
+.I side
+at
+.I "expr, ...,
+and label with
+.I \&"expr"\f1.
+If any
+.I expr
+is followed by "...", label tick with "...",
+and turn off all automatic labels.
+If "..." contains
+.BR %f 's,
+they will be interpreted as
+.B printf
+formatting instructions for the tick value.
+Ticks point
+.B in
+or
+.B out
+(default out).
+Tick iterator: instead of
+.B at
+.IR \&... ,
+use
+.BI from
+.I expr
+.B to
+.I expr
+.B by
+.I "op expr
+where
+.I op
+is optionally
+.B +-*/
+for additive or multiplicative steps.
+.B by
+can be omitted, to give steps of size 1.
+If no ticks are requested, they are supplied automatically;
+suppress this with
+.B ticks
+.BR off .
+Automatic ticks normally
+leave a margin of 7% on each side; set this to anything by
+.B margin
+.B =
+.IR expr .
+.PP
+.B grid
+.I "side linedesc"
+.B at
+.IR "optname expr, expr, ..." :
+Draw grids perpendicular to
+.I side
+in style
+.I linedesc
+at
+.I "expr, ....\&
+Iterators and labels work as with ticks.
+.PP
+.B coord
+.I optname
+.B x
+.I "min, max"
+.B y
+.I "min, max"
+.B "log x
+.BR " log y" :
+Set range of coords and optional log scaling on either or both.
+This overrides computation of data range.
+Default value of
+.I optname
+is current coordinate system
+(each
+.B coord
+defines a new coordinate system).
+.PP
+.B plot
+.I \&"str"
+.B at
+.IR point ;
+.B
+.I \&"str"
+.B at
+.IR point :
+Put
+.I str
+at
+.IR point .
+Text position can be qualified with
+.BR rjust ,
+.BR ljust ,
+.BR above ,
+.BR below
+after "...".
+.PP
+.B line
+.B from
+.I point
+.B to
+.IR "point linedesc" :
+Draw line from here to there.
+.B arrow
+works in place of
+.BR line .
+.PP
+.B next
+.I optname
+.B at
+.IR "point linedesc" :
+Continue plot of data in
+.I optname to
+.IR point ;
+default is current.
+.PP
+.BI draw
+.IR "optname linedesc ..." :
+Set mode for
+.BR next :
+use this style from now on,
+and plot "..." at each point (if given).
+.PP
+.BI new
+.IR "optname linedesc ..." :
+Set mode for
+.BR next ,
+but disconnect from previous.
+.PP
+A list of numbers
+.I "x y1 y2 y3 ...
+is treated as 
+.B plot
+.B bullet
+.B at
+.IR x,y1 ;
+.B plot
+.B bullet
+.B at
+.IR x,y2 ;
+etc., or as
+.B next
+.B at
+.I x,y1
+etc., if
+.B draw
+is specified.
+Abscissae of 1,2,3,... are provided if there is only one input number per line.
+.PP
+A
+point
+.I "optname expr, expr
+maps the point to the named coordinate system.
+A
+.I linedesc
+is one of
+.B dot
+.B dash
+.B invis
+.B solid
+optionally followed by an expression.
+.PP
+.BI define
+.I name
+.BI { whatever } \f1:
+Define a macro.
+There are macros already defined for standard plotting
+symbols like
+.BR bullet ,
+.BR circle ,
+.BR star ,
+.BR plus ,
+etc., in
+.BR /sys/lib/grap.defines ,
+which is included if it exists.
+.PP
+.I var
+.B =
+.IR expr :
+Evaluate an expression.
+Operators are
+.B=
+.B +
+.B -
+.B *
+and
+.BR / .
+Functions are
+.B log
+and
+.B exp
+(both base 10),
+.BR sin ,
+.BR cos ,
+.BR sqrt ;
+.B rand
+returns random number on [0,1);
+.BI max( e , e )\f1,
+.BI min( e , e )\f1,
+.BI int( e )\f1.
+.PP
+.B print
+.IR expr ;
+.B print
+\fL"\f2...\fL"\f1:
+As a debugging aid, print
+.I expr
+or
+.I string
+on the standard error.
+.PP
+.B copy
+\fL"\fIfile name\fL"\fR:
+Include this file right here.
+.PP
+.B copy
+.B thru
+.IR macro :
+Pass rest of input (until
+.BR \&.G2 )
+through
+.IR macro ,
+treating each field (non-blank, or "...") as an argument.
+.I macro
+can be the name of a macro previously defined,
+or the body of one in place, like
+.BR "/plot $1 at $2,$3/" .
+.PP
+.B copy
+.B thru
+.I macro
+.B until
+\fL"\fIstring\fL"\fR:
+Stop copy when input is
+.I string
+(left-justified).
+.PP
+.BI pic
+.IR "remainder of line" :
+Copy to output with leading blanks removed.
+.PP
+.BI graph
+.IR "Name pic-position" :
+Start a new frame, place it at specified position,
+e.g.,
+.B graph
+.B Thing2
+.BR "with .sw at Thing1.se + (0.1,0)" .
+.I Name
+must be capitalized to keep
+.I pic
+happy.
+.PP
+.BI \&. "anything at beginning of
+.IR line :
+Copied verbatim.
+.PP
+.B sh
+.BI % anything
+.BR % :
+Pass everything between the
+.BR % 's
+to the shell;
+as with macros,
+.B %
+may be any character and
+.I anything
+may include newlines.
+.PP
+.B #
+.IR anything :
+A comment, which is discarded.
+.PP
+Order is mostly irrelevant; no category is mandatory.
+Any arguments on the
+.B \&.G1
+line are placed on the generated
+.B \&.PS
+line for
+.IR pic .
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.EX
+.ps -1
+.vs -1
+\&.G1
+frame ht 1 top invis right invis
+coord x 0, 10 y 1, 3 log y
+ticks left in at 1 "bottommost tick", 2,3 "top tick"
+ticks bot in from 0 to 10 by 2
+label bot "silly graph"
+label left "left side label" "here"
+grid left dashed at 2.5
+copy thru / circle at $1,$2 /
+1 1
+2 1.5
+3 2
+4 1.5
+10 3
+\&.G2
+.G1
+frame ht 1 top invis right invis
+coord x 0, 10 y 1, 3 log y
+ticks left in at 1 "bottommost tick", 2,3 "top tick"
+ticks bot in from 0 to 10 by 2
+label bot "silly graph"
+label left "left side label" "here"
+grid left dashed at 2.5
+copy thru / circle at $1,$2 /
+1 1
+2 1.5
+3 2
+4 1.5
+10 3
+.G2
+.ps
+.vs
+.EE
+.SH FILES
+.TF /sys/lib/grap.defines
+.TP
+.B /sys/lib/grap.defines
+definitions of standard plotting characters, e.g., bullet
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/grap
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR pic (1), 
+.IR troff (1)
+.br
+J. L. Bentley and B. W. Kernighan,
+``GRAP\(emA Language for Typesetting Graphs'',
+.I
+Unix Research System Programmer's Manual,
+Tenth Edition, Volume 2.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/graph b/sys/man/1/graph
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..c2c24366c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/graph
@@ -0,0 +1,155 @@
+.TH GRAPH 1
+.CT 1 numbers graphics
+.SH NAME
+graph \- draw a graph
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B graph
+[
+.I option ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Graph
+with no options takes pairs of numbers from the
+standard input as abscissas
+.RI ( x -values)
+and ordinates
+.RI ( y -values)
+of a graph.
+Successive points are connected by straight lines.
+The graph is encoded on the standard output
+for display by
+.IR  plot (1)
+filters.
+.PP
+If an ordinate is followed by
+a nonnumeric string, that string is printed as a
+label beginning on the point.
+Labels may be surrounded with quotes
+.L
+" "
+in which case they may be empty or contain blanks
+and numbers;
+labels never contain newlines.
+.PP
+The following options are recognized,
+each as a separate argument.
+.TP
+.B  -a
+Supply abscissas automatically; no
+.IR x -values
+appear in the input.
+Spacing is given by the next
+argument (default 1).
+A second optional argument is the starting point for
+automatic abscissas (default 0, or 1
+with a log scale in
+.IR x ,
+or the lower limit given by
+.BR -x ).
+.TP
+.B  -b
+Break (disconnect) the graph after each label in the input.
+.TP
+.B  -c
+Character string given by next argument
+is default label for each point.
+.TP
+.B  -g
+Next argument is grid style,
+0 no grid, 1 frame with ticks, 2 full grid (default).
+.TP
+.B  -l
+Next argument is a legend to title the graph.
+Grid ranges
+are automatically printed as part
+of the title unless a
+.B -s
+option is present.
+.TP
+.B  -m
+Next argument is mode (style)
+of connecting lines:
+0 disconnected, 1 connected.
+Some devices give distinguishable line styles
+for other small integers.
+Mode \-1 (default) begins with style 1 and
+rotates styles for successive curves under option
+.BR -o .
+.TP
+.B -o
+(Overlay.)
+The ordinates for
+.I n
+superposed curves appear in the input
+with each abscissa value.
+The next argument is
+.IR n .
+.TP
+.B -p
+Next argument is one or more of the characters
+.B bcgkmrwy,
+choosing pen colors by their initial letter, as in
+.IR plot (6).
+Successive curves will cycle through the colors in the given order.
+.TP
+.B  -s
+Save screen; no new page for this graph.
+.TP
+.B -x l
+If
+.B l
+is present,
+.IR x -axis
+is logarithmic.
+Next 1 (or 2) arguments are lower (and upper)
+.I x
+limits.
+Third argument, if present, is grid spacing on
+.I x
+axis.
+Normally these quantities are determined automatically.
+.TP
+.B -y l
+Similarly for
+.IR y .
+.TP
+.B -e
+Make automatically determined
+.I x
+and
+.I y
+scales equal.
+.TP
+.B  -h
+Next argument is fraction of space for height.
+.TP
+.B  -w
+Similarly for width.
+.TP
+.B  -r
+Next argument is fraction of space to move right before plotting.
+.TP
+.B  -u
+Similarly to move up before plotting.
+.TP
+.B  -t
+Transpose horizontal and vertical axes.
+(Option
+.B -a
+now applies to the vertical axis.)
+.PP
+If a specified lower limit exceeds the upper limit,
+the axis
+is reversed.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/graph
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR plot (1), 
+.IR grap (1)
+.SH BUGS
+Segments that run out of bounds are dropped, not windowed.
+Logarithmic axes may not be reversed.
+Option
+.B -e
+actually makes automatic limits, rather than automatic scaling,
+equal.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/grep b/sys/man/1/grep
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..8bf2455ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/grep
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+.TH GREP 1
+.SH NAME
+grep \- search a file for a pattern
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B grep
+[
+.B -bchiLlnsv
+]
+[
+.B -e
+]
+.I pattern
+|
+.B -f
+.I patternfile
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Grep\^
+searches the input
+.I files\^
+(standard input default)
+for lines that match the
+.IR pattern ,
+a regular expression as defined in
+.IR regexp (6)
+with the addition of a newline character as an alternative
+(substitute for
+.BR | )
+with lowest precedence.
+Normally, each line matching the pattern is `selected',
+and each selected line is copied to the standard output.
+The options are
+.TP
+.B -c
+Print only a count of matching lines.
+.PD 0
+.TP
+.B -h
+Do not print file name tags (headers) with output lines.
+.TP
+.B -e
+The following argument is taken as a
+.IR pattern .
+This option makes it easy to specify patterns that
+might confuse argument parsing, such as
+.BR -n .
+.TP
+.B -i
+Ignore alphabetic case distinctions.  The implementation
+folds into lower case all letters in the pattern and input before
+interpretation.  Matched lines are printed in their original form.
+.TP
+.B -l
+(ell) Print the names of files with selected lines; don't print the lines.
+.TP
+.B -L
+Print the names of files with no selected lines;
+the converse of
+.BR -l .
+.TP
+.B -n
+Mark each printed line with its line number counted in its file.
+.TP
+.B -s
+Produce no output, but return status.
+.TP
+.B -v
+Reverse: print lines that do not match the pattern.
+.TP
+.B -f
+The pattern argument is the name of a file containing regular
+expressions one per line.
+.TP
+.B -b
+Don't buffer the output: write each output line as soon as it is discovered.
+.PD
+.PP
+Output lines are tagged by file name when there is more than one
+input file.
+(To force this tagging, include
+.B /dev/null
+as a file name argument.)
+.PP
+Care should be taken when
+using the shell metacharacters
+.B $*[^|()=\e
+and newline
+in
+.IR pattern ;
+it is safest to enclose the
+entire expression
+in single quotes
+.BR \&\|' \|.\|.\|.\| ' .
+An expression starting with '*'
+will treat the rest of the expression
+as literal characters.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/grep
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR ed (1),
+.IR awk (1),
+.IR sed (1),
+.IR sam (1),
+.IR regexp (6)
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+Exit status is null if any lines are selected,
+or non-null when no lines are selected or an error occurs.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/gs b/sys/man/1/gs
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..a65e3e236
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/gs
@@ -0,0 +1,280 @@
+.TH GS 1
+.\" This file is an edited version of /sys/src/cmd/gs/man/gs.1, to
+.\" document the local installation and remove needless background.
+.de TQ
+.br
+.ns
+.TP \\$1
+..
+.SH NAME 
+gs \- Aladdin Ghostscript (PostScript and PDF language interpreter)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B gs
+[
+.I options
+] [
+.I files
+] ...
+.br
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Ghostscript is a programming language similar to Adobe Systems'
+PostScript and PDF languages, which are in turn similar to Forth.
+.I Gs
+reads
+.I files
+in sequence and executes them as Ghostscript programs.
+After doing this, it reads further input from the standard input.
+If the
+.I file
+.B -
+is named, however, it represents the standard input, which is read
+in order and not after the files on the command line.
+Each line is interpreted separately.
+The `quit' command, or end-of-file, exits the interpreter.
+.PP
+The interpreter recognizes several switches described below, which may appear
+anywhere in the command line and apply to all files thereafter.
+.PP
+The
+.B -h
+or
+.B -?
+options give help and list the available devices; the default is
+.BR plan9 ,
+which produces compressed image files suitable for viewing with
+.IR page (1)
+(but note that
+.IR page (1)
+will invoke
+.I gs
+automatically; see its manual).
+.PP
+Ghostscript may be built with multiple output devices.  Ghostscript
+normally opens the first one and directs output to it.  To use device xyz
+as the initial output device, include the switch
+.EX
+	-sDEVICE=xyz
+.EE
+in the command line.  This switch must precede the first PostScript
+file and only its first invocation has any effect.
+Output devices can also be selected by the word
+.B selectdevice
+in the input language, or by setting the environment variable
+.BR GS_DEVICE .
+The order of precedence for
+these alternatives, highest to lowest, is:
+.EX
+	selectdevice
+	\f1(command line)\fP
+	GS_DEVICE
+	plan9
+.EE
+.PP
+Normally, output goes
+directly to a scratch file.
+To send the output to a series of files
+.BR foo1.xyz ,
+.BR foo2.xyz ,
+etc., use the switch
+.EX
+	-sOutputFile=foo%d.xyz
+.EE
+The %d may be any
+.I printf
+(see
+.IR fprintf (2))
+format specification.  Each file will receive one page of output.
+If the file name begins with a pipe character,
+the output will be sent as standard input to the following pipeline.
+For example,
+.EX
+	-sOutputFile=|lp
+.EE
+Specifying the file
+.B -
+will send the files to standard output; this also requires enabling the
+.B -q
+option.
+.SS "Initialization files"
+When looking for the initialization files
+.RB ( gs_*.ps ),
+the files related
+to fonts, or the file for the
+.B run
+operator, Ghostscript first looks for the file (if
+it doesn't start with a slash) in the current directory, then in these
+directories in the following order:
+.TP
+1.
+Any directories specified by
+.B -I
+switches in the command
+line (see below);
+.TP
+2.
+Any directories specified by the
+.B GS_LIB
+environment variable;
+.TP
+3.
+The directories
+.BR /sys/lib/ghostscript ,
+.BR /sys/lib/ghostscript/font ,
+and
+.BR /sys/lib/postscript/font .
+.PP
+The
+.B GS_LIB
+or
+.B -I
+parameters may be
+a single directory or a colon-separated list.
+.SS Options
+.TP
+.BI -- " filename arg1 ..."
+Take the next argument as a file name as usual, but take all
+remaining arguments (even if they have the syntactic form of switches)
+and define the name ARGUMENTS in userdict (not systemdict) as an
+array of those strings,
+.I before
+running the file.  When Ghostscript
+finishes executing the file, it exits back to the shell.
+.TP
+.BI -D name = token
+.TQ
+.BI -d name = token
+Define a name in systemdict with the given definition.  The token must
+be exactly one token (as defined by the `token' operator) and must not
+contain any white space.
+.TP
+.BI -D name
+.TQ
+.BI -d name 
+Define a name in systemdict with value=null.
+.TP
+.BI -S name = string
+.TQ
+.BI -s name = string
+Define a name in systemdict with a given string as value.  This is
+different from
+.BR  -d .
+For example,
+.B -dname=35
+is equivalent to the
+program fragment
+.EX
+	/name 35 def 
+.EE
+whereas 
+.B -sname=35
+is equivalent to
+.EX
+	/name (35) def
+.EE
+.TP
+.B -q
+Quiet startup: suppress normal startup messages, and also do the
+equivalent of
+.BR -dQUIET .
+.TP
+.BI -g number1 x number2
+Equivalent to
+.BI -dDEVICEWIDTH= number1 
+and
+.BI -dDEVICEHEIGHT= number2\f1.
+This is for the benefit of devices, such as windows,
+that allow width and height to be specified.
+.TP
+.BI -r number
+.TQ
+.BI -r number1 x number2
+Equivalent to
+.BI -dDEVICEXRESOLUTION= number1 
+and
+\fL-dDEVICE\%YRESOLUTION= \f2\%number2\f1.
+This is for the benefit of devices, such as printers,
+that support multiple X and Y resolutions.
+If only one number is given, it is used for both X and Y resolutions.
+.TP
+.BI -I directories
+Adds the designated list of directories at the head of the
+search path for library files.
+.PP
+Note that gs_init.ps makes systemdict read-only, so the values of names
+defined with -D/d/S/s cannot be changed (although, of course, they can be
+superseded by definitions in userdict or other dictionaries.)
+.SS "Special names"
+.TP
+.B -dBATCH
+Exit after the last file has been processed.
+This is equivalent to listing
+.I quit.ps
+at the end of the list of files.
+.TP
+.B -dDISKFONTS
+Causes individual character outlines to be loaded from the disk
+the first time they are encountered.  (Normally Ghostscript loads all the
+character outlines when it loads a font.)  This may allow loading more
+fonts into RAM, at the expense of slower rendering.
+.TP
+.B -dNOCACHE
+Disables character caching.  Only useful for debugging.
+.TP
+.B -dNOBIND
+Disables the `bind' operator.  Only useful for debugging.
+.TP
+.B -dNODISPLAY
+Suppresses the normal initialization of the output device.
+This may be useful when debugging.
+.TP
+.B -dNOPAUSE
+Disables the prompt and pause at the end of each page.
+This may be desirable for applications where another program
+(e.g.
+.IR page (1))
+is
+`driving' Ghostscript.
+.TP
+.B -dSAFER
+Disables the
+.B deletefile
+and
+.B renamefile
+operators, and the
+ability to open files in any mode other than read-only.  This may be
+desirable for spoolers or other sensitive environments.
+Files in the
+.B /fd
+directory may still be opened for writing.
+.TP
+.B -dWRITESYSTEMDICT
+Leaves systemdict writable.  This is necessary when running
+special utility programs such as font2c and pcharstr, which must bypass
+normal PostScript access protection.
+.TP
+.BI -sDEVICE= device
+Selects an alternate initial output device, as described above.
+.TP
+.BI -sOutputFile= filename
+Selects an alternate output file (or pipe) for the initial output
+device, as described above.
+.SH FILES
+.TP 
+.B /sys/lib/ghostscript/*
+Startup-files, utilities, examples, and basic font definitions.
+.TP 
+.B /sys/lib/ghostscript/fonts/*
+Additional font definitions.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/gs
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR page (1),
+.IR ps2pdf (1)
+.br
+The Ghostscript document files in 
+.B doc
+and
+.B man
+subdirectories of the source directory.
+.SH BUGS
+The treatment of standard input is non-standard.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/gview b/sys/man/1/gview
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..1777a3f7d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/gview
@@ -0,0 +1,204 @@
+.TH GVIEW 1
+.SH NAME
+gview \- interactive graph viewer
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B gview
+[
+.B -mp
+]
+[
+.B -l
+.I logfile
+]
+[
+.I files
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Gview
+reads polygonal lines or a polygonal line drawing from an
+.B ASCII
+input file (which defaults to standard input), and views it interactively,
+with commands to zoom in and out, perform simple editing operations, and
+display information about points and polylines.  (Multiple input files are
+allowed if you want to overlay several line drawings.)  The editing commands can
+change the color and thickness of the polylines, delete (or undelete)
+some of them, and optionally rotate and move them.  It is also possible to
+generate an output file that reflects these changes and is in the same format
+as the input.
+.PP
+Since the
+.B move
+and
+.B rotate
+commands are undesirable when just viewing a graph, they are only enabled if
+.I gview
+is invoked with the
+.B -m
+option.
+.PP
+The
+.B -p
+option plots only the vertices of the polygons.
+.PP
+Clicking on a polyline with button 1 displays the coordinates and a
+.I t
+value that tells how far along the polyline.
+.IR (t =0
+at the first vertex,
+.IR t =1
+at the first vertex,
+.IR t =1.5
+halfway between the second and third vertices, etc.)  The
+.B -l
+option generates a log file that lists all points selected in this manner.
+.PP
+The most important interactive operations are to
+.I zoom in
+by sweeping out a rectangle, or to
+.I zoom out
+so that everything currently being displayed shrinks to fit in the swept-out
+rectangle.  Other options on the button 3 menu are
+.I unzoom
+which restores the coordinate system to the default state where everything
+fits on the screen,
+.I recenter
+which takes a point and makes it the center of the window, and
+.I square up
+which makes the horizontal and vertical scale factors equal.
+.PP
+To take a graph of a function where some part is almost linear and
+see how it deviates from a straight line, select two points on this
+part of the graph (i.e., select one with button 1 and then select the
+other) and then use the
+.I slant
+command on the button 3 menu.
+This slants the coordinate system so that the line between the two
+selected points appears horizontal (but vertical still means positive
+.IR y ).
+Then the
+.I zoom in
+command can be used to accentuate deviations from horizontal.
+There is also an
+.I unslant
+command that undoes all of this and goes back to an unslanted coordinate
+system.
+.PP
+There is a
+.I recolor
+command on button 3 that lets you select a color and change everything
+to have that color, and a similar command on button 2 that only affects
+the selected polyline.  If the input file uses the
+.B Multi(...)
+feature explained below, either flavor of
+.I recolor
+allows you to type a digit in lieu of selecting a color.
+.PP
+The
+.I thick
+or
+.I thin
+command on button 2 changes the thickness of the selected polyline
+and there is also an undo command for such edits.
+Finally, button 3 has commands to
+.I read
+a new input file and display it on top of everything else,
+.I restack
+the drawing order (in case lines of different color are drawn on top of
+each other),
+.I write
+everything into an output file, or
+.I exit
+the program.
+.PP
+Each polyline in an input or output file is a space-delimited
+.I x
+.I y
+coordinate pair on a line by itself, and the polyline is a sequence
+of such vertices followed by a label.  The label could be just a
+blank line or it could be a string in double
+quotes, or virtually any text that does not contain spaces and is
+on a line by itself.  The label at the end of the last polyline is
+optional.   It is not legal to have two consecutive labels, since that
+would denote a zero-vertex polyline and each polyline must have at least
+one vertex. (One-vertex polylines are useful for scatter plots.)
+Under the
+.B -l
+option, a newline causes the selected polyline's label to appear in
+the log file (where it could be seen by invoking
+.B tail -f
+in another window).
+
+If the label after a polyline contains the word
+.B "Thick"
+or a color name
+.BR (Red ,
+.BR Pink ,
+.BR Dkred ,
+.BR Orange ,
+.BR Yellow ,
+.BR Dkyellow ,
+.BR Green ,
+.BR Dkgreen ,
+.BR Cyan ,
+.BR Blue ,
+.BR Ltblue ,
+.BR Magenta ,
+.BR Violet ,
+.BR Gray ,
+.BR Black ,
+.BR White ),
+whichever color name comes first will be used to color the polyline.
+Alternatively, labels can contain
+.B Multi
+followed by single-letter versions of these names:
+.BR (R ,
+.BR P ,
+.BR r ,
+.BR O ,
+.BR Y ,
+.BR y ,
+.BR G ,
+.BR g ,
+.BR C ,
+.BR B ,
+.BR b ,
+.BR M ,
+.BR V ,
+.BR A ,
+.BR K ,
+.BR W ,
+each optionally preceded by
+.BR T ).
+Then
+.I recolor
+followed by a nonzero digit
+.I n
+selects the
+.IR n th
+alternative for each polyline.
+
+.SH EXAMPLE
+To see a graph of the function
+.IR y = sin( x )/ x ,
+generate input with an awk script and pipe it into
+.IR gview :
+.IP
+.EX
+awk 'BEGIN{for(x=.1;x<500;x+=.1)print x,sin(x)/x}' | gview
+.EE
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/gview.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR awk (1),
+.IR tail (1)
+.SH BUGS
+The user interface for the
+.I slant
+command is counter-intuitive.  Perhaps it would be better to have a scheme
+for sweeping out a parallelogram.
+.PP
+The
+.B -p
+option makes the interactive point selection feature behave strangely, and
+is unnecessary since extra blank lines in the input achieve essentially the
+same effect.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/gzip b/sys/man/1/gzip
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..f56a6a246
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/gzip
@@ -0,0 +1,210 @@
+.TH GZIP 1
+.SH NAME
+gzip, gunzip, bzip2, bunzip2, compress, uncompress, zip, unzip \- compress and expand data
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B gzip
+.RB [ -cvD [ 1-9 ]]
+.RI [ file
+.BR ... ]
+.PP
+.B gunzip
+.RB [ -ctTvD ]
+.RI [ file
+.BR ... ]
+.PP
+.B bzip2
+.RB [ -cvD [ 1-9 ]]
+.RI [ file
+.BR ... ]
+.PP
+.B bunzip2
+.RB [ -cvD ]
+.RI [ file
+.BR ... ]
+.PP
+.B compress
+[
+.B -cv
+] [
+.I file
+.B ...
+]
+.PP
+.B uncompress
+[
+.B -cv
+] [
+.I file
+.B ...
+]
+.PP
+.B zip
+.RB [ -avD [ 1-9 ]]
+.RB [ -f
+.IR zipfile ]
+.I file
+.RB [ ... ]
+.PP
+.B unzip
+.RB [ -cistTvD ]
+.RB [ -f
+.IR zipfile ]
+.RI [ file
+.BR ... ]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+.I Gzip
+encodes files with a hybrid Lempel-Ziv 1977 and Huffman compression algorithm
+known as
+.BR deflate .
+Most of the time, the resulting file is smaller,
+and will never be much bigger.
+Output files are named by taking the last path element of each file argument
+and appending
+.BR .gz ;
+if the resulting name ends with
+.BR .tar.gz ,
+it is converted to
+.B .tgz
+instead.
+.I Gunzip
+reverses the process.
+Its output files are named by taking the last path element of each file argument,
+converting
+.B .tgz
+to
+.BR .tar.gz ,
+and stripping any
+.BR .gz ;
+the resulting name must be different from the original name.
+.PP
+.I Bzip2
+and
+.I bunzip2
+are similar in interface to
+.I gzip
+and
+.IR gunzip ,
+but use a modified Burrows-Wheeler block sorting
+compression algorithm.
+The default suffix for output files is
+.BR .bz2 ,
+with
+.B .tar.bz2
+becoming
+.BR .tbz .
+.I Bunzip2
+recognizes the extension 
+.B .tbz2
+as a synonym for
+.BR .tbz .
+.PP
+.I Compress
+and
+.I uncompress
+are similar in interface to
+.I gzip
+and
+.IR gunzip ,
+but use the Lempel-Ziv-Welch compression algorithm.
+The default suffix for output files is
+.BR .Z .
+.I Compress
+is one of the oldest widespread Unix compression programs.
+.PP
+.I Zip
+encodes the named files and places the results into the archive
+.IR zipfile ,
+or the standard output if no file is given.
+.I Unzip
+extracts files from an archive created by
+.IR zip .
+If no files are named as arguments, all of files in the archive are extracted.
+A directory's name implies all recursively contained files and subdirectories.
+.I Zip
+is the
+.I "de facto"
+standard for compression on Microsoft operating systems.
+.PP
+None of these programs removes the original files.
+If the process fails, the faulty output files are removed.
+.PP
+The options are:
+.TP 0.6i
+.B -a
+Automaticialy creates directories as needed, needed for zip files
+created by broken implementations which omit directories.
+.TP
+.B -c
+Write to standard output rather than creating an output file.
+.TP
+.B -i
+Convert all archive file names to lower case.
+.TP
+.B -s
+Streaming mode.  Looks at the file data adjacent to each compressed file
+rather than seeking in the central file directory.
+This is the mode used by
+.I unzip
+if no
+.I zipfile
+is specified.
+If
+.B -s
+is given,
+.B -T
+is ignored.
+.TP
+.B -t
+List matching files in the archive rather than extracting them.
+.TP
+.B -T
+Set the output time to that specified in the archive.
+.TP
+.BR -1 " .. " -9
+Sets the compression level.
+.B -1
+is tuned for speed,
+.B -9
+for minimal output size.
+The best compromise is
+.BR -6 ,
+the default.
+.TP
+.B -v
+Produce more descriptive output.
+With
+.BR -t ,
+adds the uncompressed size in bytes and the modification time to the output.
+Without
+.BR -t ,
+prints the names of files on standard error as they are compressed or decompressed.
+.TP
+.B -D
+Produce debugging output.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/gzip
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/bzip2
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/compress
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR tar (1)
+.br
+"A Technique for High Performance Data Compression",
+Terry A. Welch,
+.IR "IEEE Computer" ,
+vol. 17, no. 6 (June 1984), pp. 8-19.
+.SH BUGS
+.I Unzip
+can only extract files which are uncompressed or compressed
+with the
+.B deflate
+compression scheme.  Recent zip files fall into this category.
+Very recent zip files may have tables of contents that 
+.I unzip
+cannot read.  Such files are still readable by invoking
+.I unzip
+with the
+.B -s
+option.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/hget b/sys/man/1/hget
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..7cc8c97c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/hget
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+.TH HGET 1
+.SH NAME
+hget \- retrieve a web page corresponding to a url
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B hget
+[
+.B -dhv
+] [
+.B -o
+.I ofile
+] [
+.B -p
+.I body
+] [
+.B -x
+.I netmntpt
+] [
+.B -r
+.I header
+]
+.I url
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Hget
+retrieves the web page specified by the URL
+.I url
+and writes it, absent the
+.B -o
+option, to standard output.
+The known URL types are: http and ftp.
+.PP
+If
+.I url
+is of type HTTP and the
+.B -p
+option is specified, then an HTTP POST is performed
+with
+.I body
+as the data to be posted.
+.PP
+The
+.B -o
+option is used to keep a local file in sync with a
+web page.  If the web page has been modified later than the
+file, it is copied into the file.  If the file is up to date
+but incomplete,
+.I hget
+will fetch the missing bytes.
+.PP
+Option
+.B -h
+causes HTTP headers to be printed to standard output
+in addition to the transferred web page.
+.PP
+Option
+.B -r
+sends an arbitrary HTTP
+.IR header .
+.PP
+Option
+.B -d
+turns on debugging written to standard error.
+.PP
+Normally,
+.I hget
+uses the IP stack mounted under
+.BR /net .
+The
+.B -x
+option can be used to specify the mount point of
+a different IP stack to use.
+.PP
+Option
+.B -v
+writes progress lines to standard error once a second.
+Each line contains two numbers, the bytes transferred so
+far and the total length to be transferred.
+.PP
+If the environment variable
+.B httpproxy
+is set, it is used as a URL denoting an HTTP proxy server.
+All HTTP accesses use this server to get the page instead of
+calling the destination server.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/hget.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR ftpfs (4)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/history b/sys/man/1/history
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..889da36a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/history
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+.TH HISTORY 1
+.SH NAME
+history \- print file names from the dump
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B history
+[
+.B -Dabcemnw
+] [
+.B -fuv
+] [
+.B -d
+.I dumpfilesystem
+] [
+.B -s
+.I yyyymmdd
+]
+.I files ...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I History
+prints the names, dates, and sizes, and modifier of all versions of the named
+.IR files ,
+looking backwards in time,
+stored in the dump file system.
+If the file exists in the main tree, the first line of output will be its current state.
+For example,
+.IP
+.EX
+history /adm/users
+.EE
+.PP
+produces
+.IP
+.EX
+May 14 15:29:18 EDT 2001 /adm/users 10083 [adm]
+May 14 15:29:18 EDT 2001 /n/dump/2001/0515/adm/users 10083 [adm]
+May 11 17:26:24 EDT 2001 /n/dump/2001/0514/adm/users 10481 [adm]
+May 10 16:40:51 EDT 2001 /n/dump/2001/0511/adm/users 10476 [adm]
+	...
+.EE
+.PP
+When presented with a path of the form
+.BI /n/ fs / path \fR,
+.I history
+will use
+.IB fs dump
+as the name of the dump file system, and will print a history of
+.IR path .
+.PP
+The
+.B -v
+option enables verbose debugging printout.
+.PP
+The 
+.B -D
+option causes
+.IR diff (1)
+to be run for each adjacent pair of dump files.
+The options
+.B -abcemnw
+are passed through to
+.IR diff;
+the little-used
+.I diff option
+.B -f
+is replaced by the functionality described below,
+and the
+.B -r
+option is disallowed.
+.PP
+The
+.B -u
+option causes times to be printed in GMT (UT) rather than local time.
+.PP
+The
+.B -d
+option selects some other dump file system such as
+.IR /n/bootesdump .
+.PP
+The
+.B -f
+option forces the search to continue even when the
+file in question does not exist (useful for files that only
+exist intermittently).
+.PP
+Finally, the
+.B -s
+option
+sets the starting (most recent) date for the output.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Check how often a user has been logged in.
+.IP
+.EX
+history /usr/ches/tmp
+.EE
+.SH FILES
+.B /n/dump
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/history.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR fs (4)
+.br
+.IR yesterday (1)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/hoc b/sys/man/1/hoc
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..0d939afc0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/hoc
@@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
+.TH HOC 1
+.SH NAME
+hoc \- interactive floating point language
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B hoc
+[
+.B -e
+.I expression
+]
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Hoc
+interprets a simple language for floating point arithmetic,
+at about the level of BASIC, with C-like syntax and
+functions.
+.PP
+The named
+.I files
+are read and interpreted in order.
+If no
+.I file
+is given or if
+.I file
+is
+.L -
+.I hoc
+interprets the standard input.
+The
+.B -e
+option allows input to
+.I hoc
+to be specified on the command line, to be treated as if it appeared in a file.
+.PP
+.I Hoc
+input consists of
+.I expressions
+and
+.IR statements .
+Expressions are evaluated and their results printed.
+Statements, typically assignments and function or procedure
+definitions, produce no output unless they explicitly call
+.IR print .
+.PP
+Variable names have the usual syntax, including 
+.LR _ ;
+the name 
+.L _
+by itself contains the value of the last expression evaluated.
+The variables
+.BR E ,
+.BR PI ,
+.BR PHI ,
+.BR GAMMA
+and
+.B DEG 
+are predefined; the last is 59.25..., degrees per radian.
+.PP
+Expressions are formed with these C-like operators, listed by
+decreasing precedence.
+.TP
+.B ^
+exponentiation
+.TP
+.B ! - ++ --
+.TP
+.B * / %
+.TP
+.B + -
+.TP
+.B > >= < <= == !=
+.TP
+.B &&
+.TP
+.B ||
+.TP
+.B = += -= *= /= %=
+.PP
+Built in functions are
+.BR abs ,
+.BR acos ,
+.BR asin ,
+.B atan
+(one argument),
+.BR cos ,
+.BR cosh ,
+.BR exp ,
+.BR int ,
+.BR log ,
+.BR log10 ,
+.BR sin ,
+.BR sinh ,
+.BR sqrt ,
+.BR tan ,
+and
+.BR tanh .
+The function
+.B read(x)
+reads a value into the variable
+.B x
+and returns 0 at EOF;
+the statement
+.B print
+prints a list of expressions that may include
+string constants such as
+\fL"hello\en"\f1.\fP
+.PP
+Control flow statements are
+.BR if - else ,
+.BR while ,
+and
+.BR for ,
+with braces for grouping.
+Newline ends a statement.
+Backslash-newline is equivalent to a space.
+.PP
+Functions and procedures are introduced by the words
+.B func
+and
+.BR proc ;
+.B return
+is used to return with a value from a function.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.EX
+func gcd(a, b) {
+	temp = abs(a) % abs(b)
+	if(temp == 0) return abs(b)
+	return gcd(b, temp)
+}
+for(i=1; i<12; i++) print gcd(i,12)
+.EE
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/hoc
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR bc (1),
+.IR dc (1)
+.br
+B. W. Kernighan and R. Pike,
+.I
+The Unix Programming Environment,
+Prentice-Hall, 1984
+.SH BUGS
+Error recovery is imperfect within function and procedure definitions.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/htmlroff b/sys/man/1/htmlroff
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..470d1952d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/htmlroff
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+.TH HTMLROFF 1
+.SH NAME
+htmlroff \- HTML formatting and typesetting
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B htmlroff
+[
+.B -iuv
+]
+[
+.B -m
+.I name
+]
+[
+.B -r
+.I aN
+]
+[
+.I file
+\&...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Htmlroff
+accepts
+.IR troff (1)
+input in the named 
+.I files
+and formats it as HTML for viewing in a web browser.
+.PP
+If no
+.I file
+argument is given, 
+.I htmlroff
+reads the standard input.
+An argument consisting of a single minus
+.RB ( - )
+is taken to be
+a file name corresponding to the standard input.
+The options are:
+.TP
+.B -i
+Read standard input after the input files are exhausted.
+.TP
+.BI -m name
+Process the macro file
+.BI /sys/lib/tmac/tmac. name
+before the input
+.IR files .
+.TP
+.BI -r aN
+Set register
+.I a
+(one character name) to
+.IR N .
+.TP
+.B -u
+Generate UTF output.
+By default, 
+.I htmlroff
+converts Unicode runes into the corresponding
+HTML entity sequences
+.RB ( &alpha; ,
+.BR &nbsp; ,
+and so on).
+.I Htmlroff
+invokes
+.IR tcs (1)
+for the conversion.
+.TP
+.B -v
+Generate debugging output and warnings about suspicious input.
+.PD
+.PP
+Most 
+.I troff
+input files, especially those using the
+.IR ms (6)
+macros, can be used unaltered.
+In general, the macro file
+.B tmac.html
+should be processed after processing other standard macro files,
+as in 
+.B htmlroff
+.B -ms
+.BR -mhtml .
+.PP
+.IR Htmlroff (6)
+describes the changes to the input language.
+.PP
+.IR Mhtml (6)
+describes the new macros.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Format the Plan 9 web page:
+.IP
+.EX
+cd /usr/web/plan9
+htmlroff -mhtml index.tr >index.html
+.EE
+.PP
+Format a paper:
+.IP
+.EX
+cd /sys/doc
+pic auth.ms | tbl | eqn | htmlroff -ms -mhtml >auth.html
+.EE
+.SH FILES
+.TP
+.B /sys/lib/troff/font/devutf/utfmap
+Mapping from
+.I troff
+two-character names like
+.B \e(*a
+to Unicode characters like α.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/htmlroff
+.SH "SEE ALSO
+.IR tcs (1),
+.IR troff (1),
+.IR htmlroff (6),
+.IR mhtml (6)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/idiff b/sys/man/1/idiff
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..e16bada67
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/idiff
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+.TH IDIFF 1
+.SH NAME
+idiff \- interactive diff
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B idiff
+[
+.B -bw
+]
+.I file1
+.I file2
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Idiff
+interactively
+merges 
+.I file1
+and 
+.I file2
+onto standard output.
+Wherever
+.I file1
+and
+.I file2
+differ,
+.I idiff
+displays the differences in the style of
+.RB `` diff
+.BR -n ''
+on standard error
+and prompts the user to select a chunk.
+Valid responses are:
+.TP
+.B <
+Use the chunk from 
+.IR file1 .
+.TP
+.B >
+Use the chunk from
+.IR file2 .
+.TP
+.B =
+Use the diff output itself.
+.TP
+.BR q< ", " q> ", " q=
+Use the given response for all future questions.
+.TP
+.BI ! cmd
+Execute
+.I cmd
+and prompt again.
+.PP
+.I Idiff
+invokes
+.IR diff (1)
+to compare the files.
+The
+.B -b
+and
+.B -w
+flags,
+if passed,
+are
+passed to
+.IR diff .
+.SH FILES
+.B /tmp/idiff.*
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/idiff.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO
+.IR diff (1)
+.br
+Kernighan and Pike,
+.IR "The Unix Programming Environment" ,
+Prentice-Hall, 1984.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/join b/sys/man/1/join
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..9c3368163
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/join
@@ -0,0 +1,147 @@
+.TH JOIN 1
+.CT 1 files
+.SH NAME
+join \- relational database operator
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B join
+[
+.I options
+]
+.I file1 file2
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Join
+forms, on the standard output,
+a join
+of the two relations specified by the lines of
+.I file1
+and
+.IR file2 .
+If one of the file names is
+.LR - ,
+the standard input is used.
+.PP
+.I File1
+and
+.I file2
+must be sorted in increasing
+.SM ASCII 
+collating
+sequence on the fields
+on which they are to be joined,
+normally the first in each line.
+.PP
+There is one line in the output
+for each pair of lines in
+.I file1
+and
+.I file2
+that have identical join fields.
+The output line normally consists of the common field,
+then the rest of the line from
+.IR file1 ,
+then the rest of the line from
+.IR file2 .
+.PP
+Input fields are normally separated spaces or tabs;
+output fields by space.
+In this case, multiple separators count as one, and
+leading separators are discarded.
+.PP
+The following options are recognized, with POSIX syntax.
+.TP
+.BI -a " n
+In addition to the normal output,
+produce a line for each unpairable line in file
+.IR n ,
+where
+.I n
+is 1 or 2.
+.TP
+.BI -v " n
+Like
+.BR -a ,
+omitting output for paired lines.
+.TP
+.BI -e " s
+Replace empty output fields by string
+.IR s .
+.TP
+.BI -1 " m
+.br
+.ns
+.TP
+.BI -2 " m
+Join on the
+.IR m th
+field of
+.I file1
+or
+.IR file2 .
+.TP
+.BI -j "n m"
+Archaic equivalent for
+.BI - n " m"\f1.
+.TP
+.BI -o fields
+Each output line comprises the designated fields.
+The comma-separated field designators are either
+.BR 0 ,
+meaning the join field, or have the form
+.IR n . m ,
+where
+.I n
+is a file number and
+.I m
+is a field number.
+Archaic usage allows separate arguments for field designators.
+.PP
+.TP
+.BI -t c
+Use character
+.I c
+as the only separator (tab character) on input and output.
+Every appearance of
+.I c
+in a line is significant.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.TP
+.L
+sort -t: +1 /adm/users | join -t: -1 2 -a 1 -e "" - bdays
+Add birthdays to the
+.B /adm/users
+file, leaving unknown
+birthdays empty.
+The layout of 
+.B /adm/users
+is given in
+.IR users (6);
+.B bdays
+contains sorted lines like
+.LR "ken:Feb\ 4,\ 1953" .
+.TP
+.L
+tr : ' ' </adm/users | sort -k 3 3 >temp
+.br
+.ns
+.TP
+.L
+join -1 3 -2 3 -o 1.1,2.1 temp temp | awk '$1 < $2'
+Print all pairs of users with identical userids.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/join.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR sort (1), 
+.IR comm (1), 
+.IR awk (1)
+.SH BUGS
+With default field separation,
+the collating sequence is that of
+.BI "sort -b"
+.BI -k y , y\f1;
+with
+.BR -t ,
+the sequence is that of
+.BI "sort -t" x
+.BI -k y , y\f1.
+.PP
+One of the files must be randomly accessible.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/jpg b/sys/man/1/jpg
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..f9b42adc5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/jpg
@@ -0,0 +1,263 @@
+.TH JPG 1
+.SH NAME
+jpg, gif, png, ppm, bmp, v210, yuv, ico, togif, toppm, topng, toico \- view and convert pictures
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B jpg
+[
+.B -39cdefFkJrtv
+] [
+.I file ...
+]
+.br
+.B gif
+[
+.B -39cdektv
+] [
+.I file ...
+]
+.br
+.B png
+[
+.B -39cdektv
+] [
+.I file ...
+]
+.br
+.B ppm
+[
+.B -39cdektv
+] [
+.I file ...
+]
+.br
+.B bmp
+[
+.I file
+]
+.br
+.B v210
+[
+.B -39cdektv
+] [
+.I file ...
+]
+.br
+.B yuv
+[
+.I file
+]
+.PP
+.B togif
+[
+.B -c
+.I comment
+] [
+.B -l
+.I loopcount
+] [
+.B -d
+.I msec
+] [
+.B -t
+.I transindex
+] [
+.I file ...
+[
+.B -d
+.I msec
+]
+.I file ...
+]
+.br
+.B toppm
+[
+.B -c
+.I comment
+] [
+.I file
+]
+.br
+.B topng
+[
+.B -c
+.I comment
+] [
+[
+.B -g
+.I gamma
+] [
+.I file
+]
+.PP
+.B ico
+[
+.I file
+]
+.br
+.B toico
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These programs read, display, and write image files in public formats.
+.IR Jpg ,
+.IR gif ,
+.IR png ,
+.IR ppm ,
+.IR bmp ,
+.IR v210 ,
+and
+.IR yuv
+read files in the corresponding formats and, by default, display
+them in the current window; options cause them instead to convert the images
+to Plan 9 image format and write them to standard output.
+.IR Togif ,
+.IR Toppm ,
+and
+.I topng
+read Plan 9 images files, convert them to GIF, PPM, or PNG, and write them to standard output.
+.PP
+The default behavior of
+.IR jpg ,
+.IR gif ,
+and
+.IR ppm
+is to display the
+.IR file ,
+or standard input if no file is named.
+Once a file is displayed, typing a character causes the program to display the next image.
+Typing a
+.BR q ,
+DEL, or control-D exits the program.
+For a more user-friendly interface, use
+.IR page (1),
+which invokes these programs to convert the images to standard format,
+displays them, and offers scrolling, panning, and menu-driven navigation among the files.
+.PP
+These programs share many options:
+.TP
+.B -e
+Disable Floyd-Steinberg error diffusion, which is used to improve the appearance
+of images on color-mapped displays, typically with 8 bits per pixel.
+Primarily useful for debugging; if the display has true RGB color, the image
+will be displayed in full glory.
+.TP
+.B -k
+Convert and display the image as a black and white (really grey-scale) image.
+.TP
+.B -v
+Convert the image to an RGBV color-mapped image, even if the
+display has true RGB color.
+.TP
+.B -d
+Suppress display of the image; this is set automatically by
+any of the following options:
+.TP
+.B -c
+Convert the image to a Plan 9 representation, as defined by
+.IR image (6),
+and write it to standard output.
+.TP
+.B -9
+Like
+.BR -c ,
+but produce an uncompressed image.
+This saves processing time, particularly when the output is
+being piped to another program such as
+.IR page (1),
+since it avoids compression and decompression.
+.TP
+.B -t
+Convert the image, if it is in color, to a true color RGB image.
+.TP
+.B -3
+Like
+.BR -t ,
+but force the image to RGB even if it is originally grey-scale.
+.PD
+.PP
+.I Jpg
+has two extra options used to process the output of the LML
+video card:
+.TP
+.B -f
+Merge two adjacent images, which represent the two fields of a video picture,
+into a single image.
+.TP
+.B -F
+The input is a motion JPEG file, with multiple images representing frames of the movie.  Sets
+.BR -f .
+.PD
+.PP
+The
+.IR togif
+and
+.IR toppm
+programs go the other way: they convert from Plan 9 images to GIF and PPM,
+and have no display capability.
+Both accept an option
+.B -c
+to set the comment field of the resulting file.
+If there is only one input picture,
+.I togif
+converts the image to GIF format.
+If there are many
+.IR files ,
+though, it will assemble them into an animated GIF file.
+The options control this process:
+.TP
+.BI -l loopcount
+By default, the animation will loop forever;
+.I loopcount
+specifies how many times to loop.
+A value of zero means loop forever and a negative value means
+to stop after playing the sequence once.
+.TP
+.BI -d msec
+By default, the images are displayed as fast as they can be rendered.
+This option specifies the time, in milliseconds, to pause while
+displaying the next named
+.IR file .
+.PP
+.I Gif
+translates files that contain a `transparency' index by attaching
+an alpha channel to the converted image.
+.PP
+.I Ico
+displays a Windows icon (.ico) file.  If no file is
+specified,
+.I ico
+reads from standard input.
+Icon files
+contain sets of icons represented by an image and a mask.
+Clicking the right button pops up a menu that lets you
+write any icon's image as a Plan 9 image (\fIwidth\fBx\fIheight\fB.image\fR),
+write any icon's mask as a Plan 9 image (\fIwidth\fBx\fIheight\fB.mask\fR),
+or exit.  Selecting one of the write menu items yields a sight cursor.
+Move the sight over the icon and right click again to write.
+.PP
+.I Toico
+takes a list of Plan 9 image files (or standard input) and creates
+a single icon file.  The masks in the icon file will be the white
+space in the image.  The icon file is written to standard output.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/jpg
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR page (1),
+.IR image (6).
+.br
+.B http://www.w3.org/Graphics/JPEG/itu-t81.pdf
+.br
+.B http://www.w3.org/Graphics/GIF/spec-gif89a.txt
+.br
+.B http://www.w3.org/TR/2003/REC-PNG-20031110
+.br
+.B http://netpbm.sourceforge.net/doc/ppm.html
+.br
+.B http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Windows_bitmap
+.br
+.B http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Yuv
+.SH BUGS
+Writing an animated GIF using
+.I togif
+is a clumsy undertaking.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/kbmap b/sys/man/1/kbmap
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..5a8d8a4e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/kbmap
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+.TH KBMAP 1
+.SH NAME
+kbmap \- show a list of available keyboard maps and switch between them.
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B kbmap
+[
+.IR file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Kbmap
+shows a single column consisting of the names of keyboard maps for different
+alphabets available on the system. With no arguments 
+.B kbmap
+will look for files in 
+.BR /sys/lib/kbmap .
+.PP
+Clicking the right mouse button will highlight the entry and force the
+keyboard mapping defined in the corresponding file to become current
+for the system; typing 'q' quits.
+.PP
+.I Kbmap
+requires that the file
+.B /dev/kbmap
+served by 
+.IR kbmap (3)
+exists and is writable.
+..SH FILES
+.TF /lib/kbmap/*
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/kbmap.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR kbmap (3)
+.SH BUGS
+Not all keyboards map the entire set of characters, so one has to
+switch back to the default map before changing to another.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/kill b/sys/man/1/kill
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..a4abe8a2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/kill
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+.TH KILL 1
+.SH NAME
+kill, slay, broke \- print commands to kill processes
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B kill
+.I name ...
+.PP
+.B slay
+.I name ...
+.PP
+.B broke
+[
+.I user
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Kill
+prints commands that will cause all processes called
+.I name
+and owned by the current user to be terminated.
+Use the
+.B send
+command of
+.IR rio (1),
+or pipe the output of
+.I kill
+into
+.IR rc (1)
+to execute the commands.
+.PP
+.I Kill
+suggests sending a
+.B "kill"
+note to the process; the same
+message delivered to the process's
+.B ctl
+file (see
+.IR proc (3))
+is a surer, if heavy handed, kill,
+but is necessary if the offending process is
+ignoring notes.
+The
+.I slay
+command prints commands to do this.
+.PP
+.I Broke
+prints commands that will cause all processes
+in the
+.I Broken
+state
+and owned by
+.I user
+(by default, the current user)
+to go away.
+When a process dies because of an error caught by
+the system, it may linger in the
+.I Broken
+state to allow examination with a debugger.
+Executing the commands printed by
+.I broke
+lets the system reclaim the resources used by
+the broken processes.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /rc/bin/kill
+.br
+.B /rc/bin/broke
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR ps (1),
+.IR stop (1),
+.IR notify (2),
+.IR proc (3)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/ktrace b/sys/man/1/ktrace
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..ef1086f11
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/ktrace
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+.TH KTRACE 1
+.SH NAME
+ktrace \- interpret kernel stack dumps
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B ktrace 
+[
+.B -i
+]
+.I kernel
+.I pc
+.I sp
+[
+.I link
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Ktrace
+translates a hexadecimal kernel stack dump 
+into a sequence of 
+.IR acid (1)
+commands to show the points in the call trace.
+The
+.I kernel
+argument should be the path of the kernel being debugged,
+and
+.I pc
+and
+.I sp
+are the PC and SP values given in the stack dump.
+For MIPS kernels, the contents of the
+.I link
+register must also be supplied.
+.PP
+A stack trace consists of a 
+.I ktrace
+command followed by a series of lines containing
+fields of the form
+.IB location = contents \fR:
+.EX
+ktrace /kernel/path 80105bc1 8048e174
+8048e114=80105ac6 8048e120=80140bb4 8048e134=8010031c
+8048e16c=80137e45 8048e170=80105bc1 8048e178=80137e62
+\&...
+.EE
+.PP
+The trace can be edited to provide the correct kernel path
+and then pasted into a shell window.
+If the
+.B -i
+option is present, 
+.I ktrace
+instead prompts for the contents of the memory locations in which it is interested;
+this is useful when the stack trace is on a screen rather than
+in a machine readable form.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/ktrace.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR acid (1),
+.IR rdbfs (4)
+.SH BUGS
+When examining a kernel trace resulting from 
+an interrupt on top of other interrupts,
+only the topmost call trace is printed.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/leak b/sys/man/1/leak
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..6890b0553
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/leak
@@ -0,0 +1,235 @@
+.TH LEAK 1
+.SH NAME
+leak, kmem, umem \- help find memory leaks
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B leak
+[
+.B -abcds
+]
+[
+.B -f
+.I binary
+]
+[
+.B -r
+.I res
+]
+[
+.B -x
+.I width
+]
+.I pid ...
+.PP
+.B kmem
+[
+.I kernel
+]
+.PP
+.B umem
+.I pid
+[
+.I textfile
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Leak
+examines the named processes, which
+should be sharing their data and bss segments,
+for memory leaks.
+It uses a mark and sweep-style algorithm to 
+determine which allocated blocks are no longer
+reachable from the set of root pointers.
+The set of root pointers is created by looking through
+the shared bss segment as well as each process's registers.
+.PP
+Unless directed otherwise,
+.I leak
+prints, for each block, a line with seven space-separated fields:
+the string
+.BR block ,
+the address of the block,
+the size of the block, 
+the first two words of the block,
+and the function names represented by the first two words of the block.
+Usually, the first two words of the block
+contain the malloc and realloc tags
+(see
+.IR malloc (2)),
+useful for finding who allocated the leaked blocks.
+.PP
+If the
+.B -s
+or the
+.B -c
+option is given,
+.I leak 
+will instead present a sequence of
+.IR acid (1)
+commands that show each leaky allocation site.
+With
+.B -s
+a comment appears next to each command to 
+indicate how many lost blocks were allocated
+at that point in the program.
+With
+.B -c
+the comments are extended to indicate also the total
+number of bytes lost at that point in the program,
+and an additional comment line gives the
+overall total number of bytes.
+.PP
+If the
+.B -a
+option is given,
+.I leak 
+will print information as decribed above,
+but for all allocated blocks,
+not only leaked ones.
+If the
+.B -d
+option is given,
+.I leak 
+will print information as decribed above,
+but for all free blocks,
+i.e. those freed,
+or those that are not yet
+in use (fragmentation?).
+The
+.B -a
+and
+.B -d
+options can be combined.
+.PP
+If the
+.B -b
+option is given,
+.I leak
+will print a Plan 9 image file
+graphically summarizing the memory arenas.
+In the image, each pixel represents
+.I res
+(default 8)
+bytes.
+The color code is:
+.TP "\w'\fIbright blue\fR   'u
+.I "dark blue
+Completely allocated.
+.TP
+.I "bright blue
+Contains malloc headers.
+.TP
+.I "bright red
+Contains malloc headers for leaked memory.
+.TP
+.I "dark red
+Contains leaked memory.
+.TP
+.I "yellow
+Completely free
+.TP
+.I "white
+Padding to fill out the image.
+.PD
+The bright pixels representing headers help in 
+counting the number of blocks.
+Magnifying the images with
+.IR lens (1)
+is often useful.
+.PP
+If given a name rather than a list of process ids,
+.I leak
+echoes back a command-line with process ids of every process
+with that name.
+.PP
+The
+.B -f
+option specifies a binary to go on the 
+.IR acid (1)
+command-line used to inspect the
+processes, and is only necessary
+when inspecting processes started
+from stripped binaries.
+.PP
+.I Umem
+prints a summary of all allocated blocks in the process with id
+.IR pid .
+Each line of the summary gives the count and total size of 
+blocks allocated at an allocation point.
+The list is sorted by count in decreasing order.
+.I Umem
+prints summarizes all allocations, not just 
+memory leaks, but it is faster and requires less memory than 
+.I leak .
+.PP
+.I Kmem
+is like
+.I umem
+but prints a summary for the running kernel.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+List lost blocks in 
+.IR 8.out .
+This depends on the fact that there is only
+once instance of 
+.I 8.out
+running; if there were more, the output of
+.B "leak -s 8.out
+would need editing before sending to the shell.
+.IP
+.EX
+% leak -s 8.out
+leak -s 229 230
+% leak -s 8.out | rc
+src(0x0000bf1b); // 64
+src(0x000016f5); // 7
+src(0x0000a988); // 7
+%
+.EE
+.LP
+View the memory usage graphic for the window system.
+.IP
+.EX
+% leak -b rio | rc | page
+.EE
+.PP
+List the top allocation points in the kernel,
+first by count and then by total size:
+.IP
+.EX
+% kmem | sed 10q
+% kmem | sort -nr +1 | sed 10q
+.EE
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/lib/acid/leak
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/aux/acidleak.c
+.br
+.B /rc/bin/leak
+.br
+.B /rc/bin/kmem
+.br
+.B /rc/bin/umem
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR getcallerpc (2),
+.I setmalloctag
+in
+.IR malloc (2)
+.SH BUGS
+.I Leak
+and
+.I kmem
+depend on the internal structure of the
+libc pool memory allocator (see 
+.IR pool (2)).
+Since the ANSI/POSIX environment uses a different
+allocator,
+.I leak
+will not work on APE programs.
+.PP
+.I Leak
+is not speedy, and
+.I acidleak
+can consume more memory than the process(es) being examined.
+.PP
+These commands require
+.B /sys/src/libc/port/pool.acid
+to be present and generated from
+.BR pool.c .
diff --git a/sys/man/1/lens b/sys/man/1/lens
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..f944540c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/lens
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+.TH LENS 1
+.SH NAME
+lens \- interactive screen magnifier
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B lens
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Lens
+presents a magnified view in its window of an arbitrary area on the screen.
+The default magnification is 4 (showing each pixel as a 4×4 pixel block in
+.IR lens 's
+window). This may be changed by typing a digit on the keyboard (with
+.B 0
+standing for 10), or by using the
+.B +
+and
+.B -
+keys to increase or decrease the magnification by one unit.
+The lower limit is ×1; the upper ×16.
+.PP
+The interface to indicate what area to magnify is dictated by the mouse multiplexing rules of
+.IR rio (1).
+Start by pressing mouse button 1 in the
+.I lens
+window and dragging, with the button pressed, to the center of the area to magnify.
+.I Lens
+will update the display as the mouse moves.
+Releasing the button freezes the
+.I lens
+display.
+The magnified view is static\(ema snapshot, not a movie\(embut typing a space or
+.B .
+key  in the
+.I lens
+window will refresh the
+display, as will changing the magnification.
+.PP
+To make counting pixels easier, typing a
+.B g
+toggles whether a checkerboard grid is imposed on the magnified area.
+.PP
+Button 3 brings up a menu of actions.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/lens.c
+.SH BUGS
+There should be an easier way to indicate what to magnify.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/lex b/sys/man/1/lex
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..f0f148335
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/lex
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+.TH LEX 1
+.SH NAME
+lex \- generator of lexical analysis programs
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B lex
+[
+.B -tvn9
+]
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Lex
+generates programs to be used in simple lexical analysis of text.
+The input
+.I files
+(standard input default)
+contain regular expressions
+to be searched for and actions written in C to be executed when
+expressions are found.
+.PP
+A C source program,
+.B lex.yy.c
+is generated.
+This program, when run, copies unrecognized portions of
+the input to the output,
+and executes the associated
+C action for each regular expression that is recognized.
+.PP
+The options have the following meanings.
+.TP
+.B -t
+Place the result on the standard output instead of in file
+.BR lex.yy.c .
+.TP
+.B -v
+Print a one-line summary of statistics of the generated analyzer.
+.TP
+.B -n
+Opposite of
+.BR -v ;
+.B -n
+is default.
+.TP
+.B -9
+Adds code to be able to compile through the native C compilers.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+This program converts upper case to lower,
+removes blanks at the end of lines,
+and replaces multiple blanks by single blanks.
+.PP
+.EX
+%%
+[A-Z]	putchar(yytext[0]+\'a\'-\'A\');
+[ ]+$
+[ ]+	putchar(\' \');
+.EE
+.SH FILES
+.TF /sys/lib/lex/ncform
+.TP
+.B lex.yy.c
+output
+.TP
+.B /sys/lib/lex/ncform
+template
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR yacc (1), 
+.IR sed (1)
+.br
+M. E. Lesk and E. Schmidt,
+`LEX\(emLexical Analyzer Generator', 
+.I
+Unix Research System Programmer's Manual,
+Tenth Edition, Volume 2.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/lex
+.SH BUGS
+Cannot handle
+.SM UTF.
+.PP
+The asteroid to kill this dinosaur is still in orbit.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/lock b/sys/man/1/lock
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..bc6251e04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/lock
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+.TH LOCK 1
+.SH NAME
+lock \- run a command under lock
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B lock
+[
+.B -w
+]
+.I lockfile
+[
+.I command
+[
+.I argument
+\&...
+] ]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Lock
+runs
+.I command
+(default
+.LR rc )
+with
+.I arguments
+while holding
+.I lockfile
+open and (over)writing at least one byte each minute
+to keep the exclusive-access lock alive.
+If
+.I lockfile
+doesn't already have the exclusive-access bit set in
+its mode,
+the exclusive-access bits are set in its mode and
+.BR qid.type .
+.PP
+Under
+.BR -w ,
+.I lock
+waits for exclusive access to
+.I lockfile
+instead of just trying once.
+.PP
+.I Lock
+sets
+.B /env/prompt
+to contain the name of the lock file.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Build a
+.IR replica (1)
+database while preventing collisions with other occurrences.
+.IP
+.EX
+cd /sys/lib/dist
+lock scan.lock replica/scan $dist/sources.replica
+.EE
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/lock.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR intro (5),
+.IR stat (5)
+.\" .SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.\" .SH BUGS
diff --git a/sys/man/1/look b/sys/man/1/look
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..1bf634fd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/look
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+.TH LOOK 1
+.SH NAME
+look \- find lines in a sorted list
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B look
+[
+.BI -dfnixt c
+]
+[
+.I string
+]
+[
+.I file
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Look
+consults a sorted
+.I file
+and prints all lines that begin with
+.IR string .
+It uses binary search.
+.PP
+The following options are recognized.
+Options
+.B dfnt
+affect comparisons as in
+.IR  sort (1).
+.TP
+.B -i
+Interactive.
+There is no
+.I string
+argument; instead
+.I look
+takes lines from the standard input as strings to be looked up.
+.TP
+.B -x
+Exact.
+Print only lines of the file whose key matches
+.I string
+exactly.
+.TP
+.B  -d
+`Directory' order:
+only letters, digits,
+tabs and blanks participate in comparisons.
+.TP
+.B  -f
+Fold.
+Upper case letters compare equal to lower case.
+.TP
+.B -n
+Numeric comparison with initial string of digits, optional minus sign,
+and optional decimal point.
+.TP
+.BR -t [ \f2c\f1 ]
+Character
+.I c
+terminates the sort key in the
+.IR file .
+By default, tab terminates the key.  If
+.I c
+is missing the entire line comprises the key.
+.PP
+If no
+.I file
+is specified,
+.B /lib/words
+is assumed, with collating sequence
+.BR df .
+.SH FILES
+.B /lib/words
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/look.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR sort (1), 
+.IR grep (1)
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+The exit status is
+.RB `` "not found" ''
+if no match is found, and
+.RB `` "no dictionary" ''
+if
+.I file
+or the default dictionary cannot be opened.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/lp b/sys/man/1/lp
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..35b30e7c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/lp
@@ -0,0 +1,189 @@
+.TH LP 1 
+.SH NAME
+lp \- printer output
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B lp
+[
+.I option ...
+]
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Lp
+is a generalized output printing service.
+It can be used to queue files for printing,
+check a queue, or kill jobs in a queue.
+The options are:
+.TF -d\ \fIde\fP
+.TP
+.BI -d " dest"
+Select the destination printer.
+If
+.I dest
+is
+.LR ? ,
+list the currently available printers.
+In the absence of
+.LR -d ,
+the destination is taken from the environment variable
+.BR LPDEST .
+Destination
+.L stdout
+is the standard output.
+Destination
+.L safari
+is
+.L /dev/lpt1data
+line printer port on a 386 machine, assumed
+to be connected to a PostScript printer.
+Destinations 
+.L hpdeskjet
+and
+.L bjc240l
+are also
+.L /dev/lpt1data
+but assumed to be connected to an HP Deskjet 670 or
+Canon BJC-240.
+.I Lp
+can print to any printer supported by
+Ghostscript using syntax
+.BI gs!device
+where
+.I device
+is a Ghostscript output device.
+See
+.IR gs (1)
+and the 
+.L canonbjc240l 
+entry in
+.LR /sys/lib/lp/devices .
+.TP
+.B -k
+Kill the job(s) given as subsequent arguments, instead of file names,
+for the given destination.
+.TP
+.BI -p " proc"
+The given processor is invoked.
+The default processor is
+.LR generic ,
+which tries to do the right thing for regular text, 
+.IR troff (1)
+output, or 
+.IR tex (1)
+output.
+If no processing is desired
+.L noproc
+may be specified.
+.TP
+.B -q
+Print the queue for the given destination.
+For some devices, include printer status.
+.TP
+.B -R
+Stops and restarts the printer daemon.
+If the printer is wedged, it is often useful to cycle the power on the printer
+before running this command.
+.PD
+.PP
+The remaining options may be used to affect the output at a given device.
+These options may not be applicable to all devices.
+.TF "-p\ \fIpr\fP"
+.TP
+.BI -c " n"
+Print
+.I n
+copies.
+.TP
+.BI -f " font"
+Set the font (default
+.LR CW.11 ).
+.TP
+.BI -H
+Suppress printing of header page.
+.TP
+.BI -i " n"
+Select paper input tray.
+.I n
+may be a number 0-9, the word
+.L man
+for the manual feed slot, and/or
+.L simplex
+or
+.L duplex
+to get single or double sided output.
+Multiple input tray options may be specified if they are
+separated by commas.
+.TP
+.BI -l " n"
+Set the number of lines per page to
+.IR n .
+.TP
+.B -L
+Print pages in landscape mode (i.e. turned 90 degrees).
+.TP
+.BI -m " v"
+Set magnification to
+.IR v .
+.TP
+.BI -n " n"
+Print
+.I n
+logical pages per physical page.
+.TP
+.BI -o " list"
+Print only pages whose page numbers appear in
+the comma-separated
+.I list
+of numbers and ranges.
+A range
+.IB n - m
+means pages
+.I n
+through
+.IR m ;
+a range
+.BI - n
+means from the beginning to page
+.IR n ;
+a range
+.IB n -
+means from page
+.I n
+to the end. 
+.TP
+.B -r
+Reverse the order of page printing.
+.TP
+.BI -x " v"
+Set the horizontal
+offset of the print image, measured in inches.
+.TP
+.BI -y " v"
+Set the vertical
+offset of the print image, measured in inches.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.TP 0
+.L
+eqn paper | troff -ms | lp -dsafari
+Typeset and print a paper containing equations.
+.TP
+.L
+pr -l100 file | lp -l100 -fCW.8
+Print a file in a small font at 100 lines per page.
+.TP
+.L
+lp -dstdout /dev/windows/3/window > doc.ps
+Convert an image to a postscript file.
+.SH SOURCE
+.nf
+.B /rc/bin/lp
+.B /sys/src/cmd/lp
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR lp (8)
+.br
+P. Glick,
+``A Guide to the Lp Printer Spooler''.
+.SH BUGS
+Not all options work with all output devices.
+Any user can kill any job.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/ls b/sys/man/1/ls
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..e89d75d6a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/ls
@@ -0,0 +1,160 @@
+.TH LS 1
+.SH NAME
+ls, lc \- list contents of directory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B ls
+[
+.B -dlmnpqrstuFQT
+]
+.I name ...
+.PP
+.B lc
+[
+.B -dlmnqrstuFQT
+]
+.I name ...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For each directory argument,
+.I ls
+lists the contents of the directory;
+for each file argument,
+.I ls
+repeats its name and any other information requested.
+When no argument is given, the current directory is listed.
+By default, the output is sorted alphabetically by name.
+.PP
+.I Lc
+is the same as
+.IR ls ,
+but sets the
+.B -p
+option and pipes the output through
+.IR mc (1).
+.PP
+There are a number of options:
+.TP
+.B  -d
+If argument is a directory, list it, not
+its contents.
+.TP
+.B  -l
+List in long format, giving mode (see below), file system type
+(e.g., for devices, the
+.B #
+code letter that names it; see
+.IR intro (3)),
+the instance or subdevice number, owner, group,
+size in bytes, and time of last modification
+for each file.
+.TP
+.B -m
+List the name of the user who most recently modified the file.
+.TP
+.B  -n
+Don't sort the listing.
+.TP
+.B  -p
+Print only the final path element of each file name.
+.TP
+.B  -q
+List the
+.I qid
+(see
+.IR stat (2))
+of each file; the printed fields are in the order
+path, version, and type.
+.TP
+.B  -r
+Reverse the order of sort.
+.TP
+.B  -s
+Give size in Kbytes for each entry.
+.TP
+.B  -t
+Sort by time modified (latest first) instead of
+by name.
+.TP
+.B  -u
+Under
+.B -t
+sort by time of last access;
+under
+.B -l
+print time of last access.
+.TP
+.B  -F
+Add the character
+.B /
+after all directory names
+and the character
+.B *
+after all executable files.
+.TP
+.B -T
+Print the character
+.B t
+before each file if it has the temporary flag set, and
+.B -
+otherwise.
+.TP
+.B -Q
+By default, printed file names are quoted if they contain characters special to
+.IR rc (1).
+The
+.B -Q
+flag disables this behavior.
+.PP
+The mode printed under the
+.B -l
+option contains 11 characters,
+interpreted
+as follows:
+the first character is
+.TP
+.B d
+if the entry is a directory;
+.TP
+.B a
+if the entry is an append-only file;
+.TP
+.B -
+if the entry is a plain file.
+.PD
+.PP
+The next letter is
+.B l
+if the file is exclusive access (one writer or reader at a time).
+.PP
+The last 9 characters are interpreted
+as three sets of three bits each.
+The first set refers to owner permissions;
+the next to permissions to others in the same user-group;
+and the last to all others.
+Within each set the three characters indicate
+permission respectively to read, to write, or to
+execute the file as a program.
+For a directory, `execute' permission is interpreted
+to mean permission to search the directory
+for a specified file.
+The permissions are indicated as follows:
+.TP 3
+.B  r
+if the file is readable;
+.PD 0
+.TP 3
+.B  w
+if the file is writable;
+.TP 3
+.B  x
+if the file is executable;
+.TP 3
+.B  -
+if none of the above permissions is granted.
+.PD
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/ls.c
+.br
+.B /rc/bin/lc
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR stat (2),
+.IR mc (1)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/mail b/sys/man/1/mail
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..cfe042969
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/mail
@@ -0,0 +1,164 @@
+.TH MAIL 1
+.SH NAME
+mail, go.fishing \- mail and mailboxes
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B mail
+[
+.I arg ...
+]
+.PP
+.B go.fishing
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+Mail is a shell script that invokes
+.IR nedmail (1),
+the mail reader,
+when no recipients appear on the command line and
+.IR marshal (1),
+the mail preparer,
+otherwise.
+All command line options are passed through.
+See the man pages for those two commands for
+more details.
+.PP
+Incoming mail for a user
+.I username
+is put in the file
+.BI /mail/box/ username /mbox
+unless either the file
+.BI /mail/box/ username /forward
+or
+.BI /mail/box/ username /pipeto
+exists.
+The mailbox must have append-only and exclusive-access mode
+(see
+.IR chmod (1)).
+A user must create his or her own mailbox using the
+.B -c
+option of
+.IR nedmail (1).
+Mailboxes are created writable (append-only) but not readable by others.
+.PP
+If the file
+.BI /mail/box/ username /forward
+exists and is readable by everyone, incoming mail
+will be forwarded to the addresses contained in the first line of the file.
+The file may contain multiple addresses.
+Forwarding loops are caught and resolved by local delivery.
+.PP
+If the file
+.BI /mail/box/ username /pipeto
+exists and is readable and executable by everyone,
+it will be run for each incoming message for the user.
+The message will be piped to it rather
+than appended to his/her mail box.
+The file is run as user
+.BR none .
+Its two arguments are the 
+with arguments of the destination address
+(e.g.,
+.BR local!gremlin )
+and the user's mail box path
+(e.g.,
+.BR /mail/box/gremlin/mbox )
+.SS Auto-answer
+.PP
+To use 
+.I mail
+as an answering machine while you are away,
+run
+.IR go.fishing ,
+which will create
+.B /mail/box/$user/gone.fishing
+as a flag for
+.B pipeto
+processing,
+and truncate
+.BR /mail/box/$user/gone.addrs .
+Any existing
+.B pipeto
+file that uses
+.B /mail/lib/pipeto.lib
+will invoke the
+.I gone.fishing
+machinery when it calls
+.B spool
+or
+.BR spool-tagged-spam .
+.PP
+If
+.B /mail/box/$user/gone.msg
+exists, it
+will be sent (just once) to everyone who
+sends you mail that lists your address in a
+.L To
+or
+.L Cc
+header;
+if not,
+.B /mail/lib/gone.msg
+will be sent.
+Upon your return, remove
+.B /mail/box/$user/gone.fishing
+to stop automatic responses.
+.SH FILES
+.TF /mail/box/$user/gone.fishing
+.TP
+.B /sys/log/mail
+mail log file
+.TP
+.B /mail/box/*
+mail directories
+.TP
+.B /mail/box/*/mbox
+mailbox files
+.TP
+.B /mail/box/*/forward
+forwarding address(es)
+.TP
+.B /mail/box/*/pipeto
+mail filter
+.TP
+.B /mail/box/*/L.reading
+mutual exclusion lock for multiple mbox readers
+.TP
+.B /mail/box/*/L.mbox
+mutual exclusion lock for altering mbox
+.TP
+.B /lib/face/48x48x?
+directories of icons for
+.I seemail
+.TP
+.B /mail/lib/pipeto.lib
+helper functions for pipeto files
+.TP
+.B /mail/lib/gone.msg
+default vacation message
+.TP
+.B /mail/lib/gone.fishing
+auto-responder as
+.I pipeto
+script
+.TP
+.B /mail/box/$user/gone.fishing
+flag to active gone processing
+.TP
+.B /mail/box/$user/gone.addrs
+list of senders answered by
+.I gone.fishing
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /rc/bin/mail
+.br
+.B /rc/bin/go.fishing
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR aliasmail (8),
+.IR faces (1),
+.IR filter (1),
+.IR marshal (1),
+.IR mlmgr (1),
+.IR nedmail (1),
+.IR qer (8),
+.IR rewrite (6),
+.IR send (8),
+.IR smtp (8),
+.IR upasfs (4)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/man b/sys/man/1/man
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..fd85456c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/man
@@ -0,0 +1,122 @@
+.TH MAN 1
+.SH NAME
+man, lookman, sig \- print or find pages of this manual
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B man
+[
+.B -bnpPStw
+]
+[
+.I section ...
+]
+.I title ...
+.PP
+.B lookman
+.I key ...
+.PP
+.B sig
+.I function ...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Man
+locates and prints pages of this manual named
+.I title
+in the specified
+.IR sections .
+.I Title
+is given in lower case.
+Each
+.I section
+is a number;
+pages marked (2S), for example,
+belong to chapter 2.
+If no
+.I section
+is specified, pages 
+in all sections are printed.
+Any name from the
+.SM NAME
+section at the top of the page will serve as a
+.IR title .
+.PP
+The options are:
+.TP
+.B -n
+(Default)
+Print the pages on the standard output using
+.IR nroff .
+.TP
+.B -b
+Print the pages using
+.I nroff
+and send them to 
+.IR plumber (4)
+for display in the editor.
+.TP
+.B -p
+Run
+.IR proof (1)
+on the specified man pages.
+.TP
+.B -P
+Run
+.IR page (1)
+on the specified man pages.
+.TP
+.B -S
+Do not search the manual indices for the names.
+Only print pages whose file names match the names.
+.TP
+.B -t
+Run
+.IR troff (1)
+and send its output
+to standard output.
+.TP
+.B -w
+Print the names of the man page source files.
+.PD
+.PP
+.B Lookman
+prints the names of all manual sections that contain
+all of the
+.I key
+words given on the command line.
+.PP
+.B Sig
+prints the signature (i.e. C definition) of the
+.IR function s
+given on the command line.
+.SH FILES
+.TP
+.B /sys/man/?/*
+.I troff
+source for manual; this page is
+.B /sys/man/1/man
+.TP
+.B /sys/man/?/INDEX
+indices searched to find pages corresponding to titles
+.TP
+.B /sys/lib/man/secindex
+command to make an index for a given section
+.TP
+.B /sys/lib/man/lookman/index
+index for
+.I lookman
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /rc/bin/man
+.br
+.B /rc/bin/lookman
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR page (1),
+.IR proof (1)
+.SH BUGS
+The manual was intended to be typeset; some detail is sacrificed on text terminals.
+.PP
+There is no automatic mechanism to keep the indices up to date.
+.PP
+Except for special cases,
+.I man
+doesn't recognize things that should be run through
+.I tbl
+and/or
+.IR eqn .
diff --git a/sys/man/1/marshal b/sys/man/1/marshal
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..b2fc90e27
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/marshal
@@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
+.TH MARSHAL 1
+.SH NAME
+marshal \- formatting and sending mail
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B upas/marshal
+[
+.B -[aA]
+.I attachment
+] [
+.B -C
+.I copyaddr
+] [
+.B -nrx#
+] [
+.B -R
+.I reply-msg
+] [
+.B -s
+.I subject
+] [
+.B -t
+.I mime-type
+] [
+.I mailaddr ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Marshal
+builds a mail message from standard input and passes it,
+if the body is non-empty,
+for transmission or delivery to
+.BI /mail/box/ username /pipefrom
+if it exists, otherwise to
+.BR /bin/upas/send .
+The message format is both RFC 822 and
+MIME conformant, so
+.I marshal
+adds any required headers not already in the message, prefixed by
+the contents of
+.BI /mail/box/ username /headers\f1.
+This allows the addition of personal headers like
+.B From:
+lines with a full name or a different
+return address.
+Command line options direct marshal to add a subject line
+and append attachments.  The arguments to
+.I marshal
+are the addresses of the recipients.
+.PP
+When running in a
+.IR rio (1)
+window,
+.I marshal
+automatically puts the window into hold mode (see
+.IR rio (1));
+this means that the message can be edited freely,
+because nothing will be sent to
+.I marshal
+until the ESC key is hit to exit hold mode.
+.PP
+The options are:
+.TF "-a file"
+.TP
+.BI -a file
+directs
+.I marshal
+to append 
+.I file
+as a mime attachment.
+Unless explicitly specified by the
+.B -t
+option, the type of the attachment is determined
+by running the
+.IR file (1)
+command.
+.TP
+.BI -A file
+is like
+.B -a
+but the message disposition is marked as
+.I inline
+directing any mail reader to display the attachment
+(if it can) when the mail message is read.
+.TP
+.BI -C copyaddr
+adds a
+.B Cc:
+header with
+.I copyaddr
+and also adds
+.I copyaddr
+as a recipient.
+.TP
+.BI -n
+intentionally no standard input
+.TP
+.B -#xr
+are all passed as command line options to the
+.I send
+that
+.I marshal
+invokes.
+.TP
+.BI -R replymsg
+tells marshal what message this one is in reply to.
+.I Replymsg
+is an
+.IR upasfs (4)
+directory containing the message.
+.I Marshal
+uses any message id in this message in its
+.B In-Reply-To
+field.  It also passes the directory to
+.BI /mail/box/ username /pipefrom
+in the
+.B replymsg
+environment variable.  Thus,
+.B pipefrom
+can alter the message to somehow match
+the reply to the message it is replying to.
+.TP
+.BI -s subject
+adds a
+.B Subject:
+header line to the message if one does not
+already exist.
+.TP
+.BI -t type
+sets the content type for the attachments from
+all subsequent
+.B -a
+and
+.B -A
+options.
+.PD
+.PP
+.I Marshal
+also expands any user mail aliases contained in
+.BI /mail/box/ username /names.
+The format of the alias file is the same as that
+for system aliases, see
+.IR aliasmail (8).
+.PP
+.I Marshal
+uses the login name as the reply address.  This
+can be overriden using the environment variable
+.BR upasname .
+Its value will become both the envelope
+and
+.B From:
+mailbox name.
+For example:
+.IP
+.EX
+upasname=natasha@kremvax.com upas/mail boris@squirrel.com
+.EE
+.SH FILES
+.TP
+.B /mail/box/*/dead.letter
+.SH SOURCE
+.TP
+.B /sys/src/cmd/upas/marshal
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR aliasmail (8),
+.IR faces (1),
+.IR filter (1),
+.IR mail (1),
+.IR mlmgr (1),
+.IR nedmail (1),
+.IR qer (8),
+.IR rewrite (6),
+.IR send (8),
+.IR smtp (8),
+.IR upasfs (4)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/mc b/sys/man/1/mc
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..40fec44d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/mc
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+.TH MC 1
+.SH NAME
+mc \- multicolumn print
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B mc
+[
+.B -
+]
+[
+.BI - N
+]
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Mc
+splits the input into as many columns as will fit in
+.I N
+print positions.
+If run in a
+.IR rio (1)
+or
+.IR acme (1)
+window, the default
+.I N
+is the number of blanks that will fit across the window;
+otherwise the default
+.I N
+is 80.
+Under option
+.B -
+each input line ending in a colon 
+.L :
+is printed separately.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/mc.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR rio (1),
+.IR acme (1),
+.IR acme (4),
+.IR pr (1),
+.I lc
+in
+.IR ls (1)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/mk b/sys/man/1/mk
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..bd1a8ae8f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/mk
@@ -0,0 +1,655 @@
+.TH MK 1
+.SH NAME
+mk, membername \- maintain (make) related files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B mk
+[
+.B -f
+.I mkfile
+] ...
+[
+.I option ...
+]
+[
+.I target ...
+]
+.PP
+.B membername
+.I aggregate ...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Mk
+uses the dependency rules specified in
+.I mkfile
+to control the update (usually by compilation) of
+.I targets
+(usually files)
+from the source files upon which they depend.
+The
+.I mkfile
+(default
+.LR mkfile )
+contains a
+.I rule
+for each target that identifies the files and other
+targets upon which it depends and an
+.IR rc (1)
+script, a
+.IR recipe ,
+to update the target.
+The script is run if the target does not exist
+or if it is older than any of the files it depends on.
+.I Mkfile
+may also contain
+.I meta-rules
+that define actions for updating implicit targets.
+If no
+.I target
+is specified, the target of the first rule (not meta-rule) in
+.I mkfile
+is updated.
+.PP
+The environment variable
+.B $NPROC
+determines how many targets may be updated simultaneously;
+Plan 9 sets
+.B $NPROC
+automatically to the number of CPUs on the current machine.
+.PP
+Options are:
+.TP \w'\fL-d[egp]\ 'u
+.B -a
+Assume all targets to be out of date.
+Thus, everything is updated.
+.PD 0
+.TP
+.BR -d [ egp ]
+Produce debugging output
+.RB ( p
+is for parsing,
+.B g
+for graph building,
+.B e
+for execution).
+.TP
+.B -e
+Explain why each target is made.
+.TP
+.B -i
+Force any missing intermediate targets to be made.
+.TP
+.B -k
+Do as much work as possible in the face of errors.
+.TP
+.B -n
+Print, but do not execute, the commands
+needed to update the targets.
+.TP
+.B -s
+Make the command line arguments sequentially rather than in parallel.
+.TP
+.B -t
+Touch (update the modified date of) file targets, without
+executing any recipes.
+.TP
+.BI -w target1 , target2,...
+Pretend the modify time for each
+.I target
+is the current time; useful in conjunction with
+.B -n
+to learn what updates would be triggered by
+modifying the
+.IR targets .
+.PD
+.PP
+The
+.IR rc (1)
+script
+.I membername
+extracts member names
+(see `Aggregates' below)
+from its arguments.
+.SS The \fLmkfile\fP
+A
+.I mkfile
+consists of
+.I assignments
+(described under `Environment') and
+.IR rules .
+A rule contains
+.I targets
+and a
+.IR tail .
+A target is a literal string
+and is normally a file name.
+The tail contains zero or more 
+.I prerequisites
+and an optional
+.IR recipe ,
+which is an
+.B rc
+script.
+Each line of the recipe must begin with white space.
+A rule takes the form
+.IP
+.EX
+target: prereq1 prereq2
+        rc \f2recipe using\fP prereq1, prereq2 \f2to build\fP target
+.EE
+.PP
+When the recipe is executed,
+the first character on every line is elided.
+.PP
+After the colon on the target line, a rule may specify
+.IR attributes ,
+described below.
+.PP
+A
+.I meta-rule 
+has a target of the form
+.IB A % B
+where
+.I A
+and
+.I B
+are (possibly empty) strings.
+A meta-rule acts as a rule for any potential target whose
+name matches
+.IB A % B
+with
+.B %
+replaced by an arbitrary string, called the
+.IR stem .
+In interpreting a meta-rule,
+the stem is substituted for all occurrences of
+.B %
+in the prerequisite names.
+In the recipe of a meta-rule, the environment variable
+.B $stem
+contains the string matched by the
+.BR % .
+For example, a meta-rule to compile a C program using
+.IR 2c (1)
+might be:
+.IP
+.EX
+%:    %.c
+        2c $stem.c
+        2l -o $stem $stem.2
+.EE
+.PP
+Meta-rules may contain an ampersand
+.B &
+rather than a percent sign
+.BR % .
+A
+.B %
+matches a maximal length string of any characters;
+an
+.B &
+matches a maximal length string of any characters except period
+or slash.
+.PP
+The text of the
+.I mkfile
+is processed as follows.
+Lines beginning with
+.B <
+followed by a file name are replaced by the contents of the named
+file.
+Lines beginning with
+.B "<|"
+followed by a file name are replaced by the output
+of the execution of the named
+file.
+Blank lines and comments, which run from unquoted
+.B #
+characters to the following newline, are deleted.
+The character sequence backslash-newline is deleted,
+so long lines in
+.I mkfile
+may be folded.
+Non-recipe lines are processed by substituting for
+.BI `{ command }
+the output of the
+.I command
+when run by
+.IR rc .
+References to variables are replaced by the variables' values.
+Special characters may be quoted using single quotes
+.BR \&''
+as in
+.IR rc (1).
+.PP
+Assignments and rules are distinguished by
+the first unquoted occurrence of
+.B :
+(rule)
+or
+.B =
+(assignment).
+.PP
+A later rule may modify or override an existing rule under the
+following conditions:
+.TP
+\-
+If the targets of the rules exactly match and one rule
+contains only a prerequisite clause and no recipe, the
+clause is added to the prerequisites of the other rule.
+If either or both targets are virtual, the recipe is
+always executed.
+.TP
+\-
+If the targets of the rules match exactly and the
+prerequisites do not match and both rules
+contain recipes,
+.I mk
+reports an ``ambiguous recipe'' error.
+.TP
+\-
+If the target and prerequisites of both rules match exactly,
+the second rule overrides the first.
+.SS Environment
+Rules may make use of
+.B rc
+environment variables.
+A legal reference of the form
+.B $OBJ
+is expanded as in
+.IR rc (1).
+A reference of the form
+.BI ${name: A % B = C\fL%\fID\fL}\fR,
+where
+.I A, B, C, D
+are (possibly empty) strings,
+has the value formed by expanding
+.B $name
+and substituting
+.I C
+for
+.I A
+and
+.I D
+for
+.I B
+in each word in
+.B $name
+that matches pattern
+.IB A % B\f1.
+.PP
+Variables can be set by
+assignments of the form
+.I
+        var\fL=\fR[\fIattr\fL=\fR]\fIvalue\fR
+.br
+Blanks in the
+.I value
+break it into words, as in
+.I rc
+but without the surrounding parentheses.
+Such variables are exported
+to the environment of
+recipes as they are executed, unless
+.BR U ,
+the only legal attribute
+.IR attr ,
+is present.
+The initial value of a variable is
+taken from (in increasing order of precedence)
+the default values below,
+.I mk's
+environment, the
+.IR mkfiles ,
+and any command line assignment as an argument to
+.IR mk .
+A variable assignment argument overrides the first (but not any subsequent)
+assignment to that variable.
+.PP
+The variable
+.B MKFLAGS
+contains all the option arguments (arguments starting with
+.L -
+or containing
+.LR = )
+and
+.B MKARGS
+contains all the targets in the call to
+.IR mk .
+.PP
+It is recommended that mkfiles start with
+.IP
+.EX
+</$objtype/mkfile
+.EE
+.PP
+to set
+.BR CC ,
+.BR LD ,
+.BR AS ,
+.BR O ,
+.BR YACC ,
+and
+.B MK
+to values appropriate to the target architecture (see the examples below).
+.SS Execution
+.PP
+During execution,
+.I mk
+determines which targets must be updated, and in what order,
+to build the
+.I names
+specified on the command line.
+It then runs the associated recipes.
+.PP
+A target is considered up to date if it has no prerequisites or
+if all its prerequisites are up to date and it is newer
+than all its prerequisites.
+Once the recipe for a target has executed, the target is
+considered up to date.
+.PP
+The date stamp
+used to determine if a target is up to date is computed
+differently for different types of targets.
+If a target is
+.I virtual
+(the target of a rule with the
+.B V
+attribute),
+its date stamp is initially zero; when the target is
+updated the date stamp is set to
+the most recent date stamp of its prerequisites.
+Otherwise, if a target does not exist as a file,
+its date stamp is set to the most recent date stamp of its prerequisites,
+or zero if it has no prerequisites.
+Otherwise, the target is the name of a file and
+the target's date stamp is always that file's modification date.
+The date stamp is computed when the target is needed in
+the execution of a rule; it is not a static value.
+.PP
+Nonexistent targets that have prerequisites
+and are themselves prerequisites are treated specially.
+Such a target
+.I t
+is given the date stamp of its most recent prerequisite
+and if this causes all the targets which have
+.I t
+as a prerequisite to be up to date,
+.I t
+is considered up to date.
+Otherwise,
+.I t
+is made in the normal fashion.
+The
+.B -i
+flag overrides this special treatment.
+.PP
+Files may be made in any order that respects
+the preceding restrictions.
+.PP
+A recipe is executed by supplying the recipe as standard input to
+the command
+.B
+        /bin/rc -e -I
+.br
+(the
+.B -e
+is omitted if the
+.B E
+attribute is set).
+The environment is augmented by the following variables:
+.TP 14
+.B $alltarget
+all the targets of this rule.
+.TP
+.B $newprereq
+the prerequisites that caused this rule to execute.
+.TP
+.B $newmember
+the prerequisites that are members of an aggregate
+that caused this rule to execute.
+When the prerequisites of a rule are members of an
+aggregate,
+.B $newprereq
+contains the name of the aggregate and out of date
+members, while
+.B $newmember
+contains only the name of the members.
+.TP
+.B $nproc
+the process slot for this recipe.
+It satisfies
+.RB 0≤ $nproc < $NPROC .
+.TP
+.B $pid
+the process id for the
+.I mk
+executing the recipe.
+.TP
+.B $prereq
+all the prerequisites for this rule.
+.TP
+.B $stem
+if this is a meta-rule,
+.B $stem
+is the string that matched
+.B %
+or
+.BR & .
+Otherwise, it is empty.
+For regular expression meta-rules (see below), the variables
+.LR stem0 ", ...,"
+.L stem9
+are set to the corresponding subexpressions.
+.TP
+.B $target
+the targets for this rule that need to be remade.
+.PP
+These variables are available only during the execution of a recipe,
+not while evaluating the
+.IR mkfile .
+.PP
+Unless the rule has the
+.B Q
+attribute,
+the recipe is printed prior to execution
+with recognizable environment variables expanded.
+Commands returning nonempty status (see
+.IR intro (1))
+cause
+.I mk
+to terminate.
+.PP
+Recipes and backquoted
+.B rc
+commands in places such as assignments
+execute in a copy of
+.I mk's
+environment; changes they make to
+environment variables are not visible from
+.IR mk .
+.PP
+Variable substitution in a rule is done when
+the rule is read; variable substitution in the recipe is done
+when the recipe is executed.  For example:
+.IP
+.EX
+bar=a.c
+foo:	$bar
+        $CC -o foo $bar
+bar=b.c
+.EE
+.PP
+will compile
+.B b.c
+into
+.BR foo ,
+if
+.B a.c
+is newer than
+.BR foo .
+.SS Aggregates
+Names of the form
+.IR a ( b )
+refer to member
+.I b
+of the aggregate
+.IR a .
+Currently, the only aggregates supported are
+.IR ar (1)
+archives.
+.SS Attributes
+The colon separating the target from the prerequisites
+may be
+immediately followed by
+.I attributes
+and another colon.
+The attributes are:
+.TP
+.B D
+If the recipe exits with a non-null status, the target is deleted.
+.TP
+.B E
+Continue execution if the recipe draws errors.
+.TP
+.B N
+If there is no recipe, the target has its time updated.
+.TP
+.B n
+The rule is a meta-rule that cannot be a target of a virtual rule.
+Only files match the pattern in the target.
+.TP
+.B P
+The characters after the
+.B P
+until the terminating
+.B :
+are taken as a program name.
+It will be invoked as
+.B "rc -c prog 'arg1' 'arg2'"
+and should return a null exit status
+if and only if arg1 is up to date with respect to arg2.
+Date stamps are still propagated in the normal way.
+.TP
+.B Q
+The recipe is not printed prior to execution.
+.TP
+.B R
+The rule is a meta-rule using regular expressions.
+In the rule,
+.B %
+has no special meaning.
+The target is interpreted as a regular expression as defined in
+.IR regexp (6).
+The prerequisites may contain references
+to subexpressions in form
+.BI \e n\f1,
+as in the substitute command of
+.IR sam (1).
+.TP
+.B U
+The targets are considered to have been updated
+even if the recipe did not do so.
+.TP
+.B V
+The targets of this rule are marked as virtual.
+They are distinct from files of the same name.
+.PD
+.SH EXAMPLES
+A simple mkfile to compile a program:
+.IP
+.EX
+.ta 8n +8n +8n +8n +8n +8n +8n
+</$objtype/mkfile
+
+prog:	a.$O b.$O c.$O
+	$LD $LDFLAGS -o $target $prereq
+
+%.$O:	%.c
+	$CC $CFLAGS $stem.c
+.EE
+.PP
+Override flag settings in the mkfile:
+.IP
+.EX
+% mk target 'CFLAGS=-S -w'
+.EE
+.PP
+Maintain a library:
+.IP
+.EX
+libc.a(%.$O):N:	%.$O
+libc.a:	libc.a(abs.$O) libc.a(access.$O) libc.a(alarm.$O) ...
+	ar r libc.a $newmember
+.EE
+.PP
+String expression variables to derive names from a master list:
+.IP
+.EX
+NAMES=alloc arc bquote builtins expand main match mk var word
+OBJ=${NAMES:%=%.$O}
+.EE
+.PP
+Regular expression meta-rules:
+.IP
+.EX
+([^/]*)/(.*)\e.$O:R:  \e1/\e2.c
+	cd $stem1; $CC $CFLAGS $stem2.c
+.EE
+.PP
+A correct way to deal with
+.IR yacc (1)
+grammars.
+The file
+.B lex.c
+includes the file
+.B x.tab.h
+rather than
+.B y.tab.h
+in order to reflect changes in content, not just modification time.
+.IP
+.EX
+lex.$O:	x.tab.h
+x.tab.h:	y.tab.h
+	cmp -s x.tab.h y.tab.h || cp y.tab.h x.tab.h
+y.tab.c y.tab.h:	gram.y
+	$YACC -d gram.y
+.EE
+.PP
+The above example could also use the
+.B P
+attribute for the
+.B x.tab.h
+rule:
+.IP
+.EX
+x.tab.h:Pcmp -s:	y.tab.h
+	cp y.tab.h x.tab.h
+.EE
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/mk
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR rc (1),
+.IR regexp (6)
+.PP
+A. Hume,
+``Mk: a Successor to Make''.
+.PP
+Andrew G. Hume and Bob Flandrena,
+``Maintaining Files on Plan 9 with Mk''.
+.SH BUGS
+Identical recipes for regular expression meta-rules only have one target.
+.PP
+Seemingly appropriate input like
+.B CFLAGS=-DHZ=60
+is parsed as an erroneous attribute; correct it by inserting
+a space after the first 
+.LR = .
+.PP
+The recipes printed by
+.I mk
+before being passed to
+.I rc
+for execution are sometimes erroneously expanded
+for printing.  Don't trust what's printed; rely
+on what
+.I rc
+does.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/mkdir b/sys/man/1/mkdir
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..bdb2953a5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/mkdir
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+.TH MKDIR 1
+.SH NAME
+mkdir \- make a directory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B mkdir
+[
+.B -p
+] [
+.B -m
+. I mode
+]
+.I dirname ...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Mkdir
+creates the specified directories.
+It
+requires write permission in the parent directory.
+.PP
+If the
+.B -p
+flag is given,
+.I mkdir
+creates any necessary parent directories
+and does not complain if the target directory already exists.
+.PP
+The
+.B -m
+flag sets the permissions to be used when creating the directory.
+The default is 0777.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR rm (1)
+.br
+.IR cd
+in
+.IR rc (1)
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/mkdir.c
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.I Mkdir
+returns null exit status if all directories were successfully made.
+Otherwise it prints a diagnostic and returns
+.B \&"error"
+status.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/mlmgr b/sys/man/1/mlmgr
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..07de95d61
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/mlmgr
@@ -0,0 +1,139 @@
+.TH MLMGR 1
+.SH NAME
+ml, mlmgr, mlowner \-  unmoderated mailing lists
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B upas/mlmgr -c
+.I listname
+.PP
+.B upas/mlmgr -ar
+.I listname
+.I address
+.PP
+.B upas/ml
+[
+.B -r 
+.I replyto-address
+]
+.I addressfile
+.I listname
+.PP
+.B upas/mlowner
+.I addressfile
+.I listname
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Mlmgr
+creates and updates unmoderated mailing lists.
+The
+.B -c
+option creates mail directories for both
+.I listname
+and
+.IB listname -owner\f1,\fP
+each containing a
+.B pipeto
+file.
+Messages mailed to
+.I listname
+are sent to all members of the mailing list.
+Any
+.B Reply-to:
+and
+.B Precedence:
+fields are
+removed from the messages and new ones are added
+directing replies to
+.I listname
+and specifying bulk precedence.  The envelope address for
+error replies is set to
+.BR /dev/null .
+.PP
+The mailing list membership is the file
+.BR /mail/box/\fIlistname\fP/address-list .
+This file is an add/remove log.  Each line
+represents a single address.  Lines beginning
+with a hash
+.RB ( # )
+are comments.
+Lines beginning with an exclamation point
+.RB ( ! )
+are removals.
+All other lines are additions.
+.PP
+Addition and removal entries can be appended using the
+.B -a
+and
+.B -r
+options to
+.IR mlmgr .
+However, they are normally appended as a consequence of
+user requests.
+.PP
+To be added or removed from the list, a user
+may send a message to
+.IB listname -owner
+containing a key word in
+the header or body.  The key words are:
+.IP
+subscribe - add my
+.B From:
+address to the list
+.IP
+remove - remove my
+.B From:
+address from the list
+.IP
+unsubscribe - remove my
+.B From:
+address from the list
+.PP
+Addition and removal events cause notification messages to
+be sent to the added/removed address.   In the case of
+addition, the message describes how to be removed.
+.PP
+.I Ml
+and
+.I mlowner
+are the programs that receive messages for
+.I listname
+and
+.IB listname -owner
+respectively.
+Appropriate calls to them are inserted in the
+.B pipeto
+files created by
+.IR mlmgr .
+.PP
+.IR Ml 's
+.B -r
+option
+sets the
+.B Reply-to:
+field in the mail sent out by
+.I ml.
+.SH FILES
+.TF /mail/box/\fI<listname>\fP/address-list
+.TP
+.B  /mail/box/\fI<listname>\fP
+list's mailbox directory
+.TP
+.B /mail/box/\fI<listname>\fP-owner
+owner's mailbox directory
+.TP
+.B  /mail/box/\fI<listname>\fP/address-list
+log of mailing list deletions and additions
+.SH SOURCE
+.TP
+.B /sys/src/cmd/upas/ml
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR aliasmail (8),
+.IR faces (1),
+.IR filter (1),
+.IR mail (1),
+.IR marshal (1),
+.IR nedmail (1),
+.IR qer (8),
+.IR rewrite (6),
+.IR send (8),
+.IR smtp (8),
+.IR upasfs (4)
+
diff --git a/sys/man/1/mp3dec b/sys/man/1/mp3dec
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..b455f54a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/mp3dec
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+.TH MP3DEC 1
+.SH NAME
+mp3dec \- decode audio MPEG files (layers 1, 2 and 3)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B mp3dec
+[
+.B -o
+.I outfile
+]
+[
+.I file
+\&...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Mp3dec
+decodes one or more MPEG audio files, writing
+16-bit stereo linear PCM sample data to
+.I outfile
+(default
+.BR /dev/audio ).
+If no files are named,
+.I mp3dec
+reads standard input.
+.PP
+In the absence of the
+.B -o
+option,
+.I mp3dec
+also opens
+.BR /dev/volume
+and sets the sample rate for playback to
+match the audio stream.
+When writing to
+.IR outfile ,
+.I mp3dec
+prints a warning to standard error
+if the stream rate is not 44100 Hz.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/games/mp3dec
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR mp3enc (1),
+.IR juke (7),
+.IR playlistfs (7)
+.br
+.B http://www.underbit.com/products/mad/
+.SH BUGS
+It's another GNU behemoth, lightly tamed.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/mp3enc b/sys/man/1/mp3enc
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..53b533bb2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/mp3enc
@@ -0,0 +1,209 @@
+.TH MP3ENC 1
+.SH NAME
+mp3enc \- create mp3 audio files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.in +0.5i
+.ti -0.5i
+.B games/mp3enc
+[
+.B -hprv
+] [
+.B -b
+.I bitrate
+] [
+.B -B
+.I bitrate
+] [
+.B -m
+.I mode
+] [
+.B -q
+q ] [
+.B -s
+.I sfreq
+] [
+.B -V
+.I q
+] [
+.I "long or silly options"
+]
+.in -0.5i
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Mp3enc
+compresses audio on standard input,
+normally PCM-encoded,
+and produces MP3-encoded audio on standard output.
+By default, the MP3 file will use `constant bit-rate' (CBR)
+encoding, but that can be changed via
+.B --abr
+(average bitrate desired, ABR)
+or
+.BR -v
+(variable bitrate, VBR).
+.SS Options
+.TF "\fB-b \fP"
+.TP
+.B -b
+set minimum allowed
+.I bitrate
+in Kb/s for VBR, default 32Kb/s.
+For CBR,
+set the exact bitrate in Kb/s, which defaults to 128Kb/s.
+.TP
+.B -B
+set maximum allowed
+.I bitrate
+in Kb/s for VBR, default 256Kb/s.
+.TP
+.BI -h
+same as
+.LR "-q 2" .
+.TP
+.B -m
+.I mode
+may be
+(s)tereo,
+(j)oint,
+(f)orce
+or
+(m)ono
+(default j).
+.B force
+forces mid/side stereo on all frames.
+.TP
+.B -p
+add CRC error protection (adds an additional 16 bits per frame to the stream).
+This seems to break playback.
+.TP
+.B -q
+sets output quality to
+.I q
+(see
+.BR -V ).
+.TP
+.B -r
+input is raw pcm
+.TP
+.B -s
+set sampling frequency of input file (in KHz) to
+.IR sfreq ,
+default is 44.1.
+.TP
+.B -v
+use variable bitrate (VBR) encoding
+.TP
+.B -V
+set quality setting for VBR to
+.IR q .
+Default
+.I q
+is 4;
+0 produces highest-quality and largest files, and
+9 produces lowest-quality and smallest files.
+.SS Long options
+.TF "\fB--resample sfreq \fP"
+.TP
+.BI --abr " bitrate"
+sets average
+.I bitrate
+desired in Kb/s, instead of setting quality,
+and generates ABR encoding.
+.TP
+.BI --resample " sfreq"
+set sampling frequency of output file (in KHz) to
+.IR sfreq ,
+default is input sfreq.
+.TP
+.BI --mp3input
+.I input
+is an MP3 file
+.
+.SS Silly options
+.TF --nohist
+.TP
+.BI -f
+same as
+.LR "-q 7" .
+Such a deal. 
+.TP
+.BI -o
+mark as non-original (i.e. do not set the original bit)
+.TP
+.BI -c
+mark as copyright
+.TP
+.BI -k
+disable sfb=21 cutoff
+.TP
+.BI -e " emp"
+de-emphasis n/5/c
+(default n)
+.TP
+.BI -d
+allow channels to have different blocktypes
+.TP
+.BI -t
+disable Xing VBR informational tag
+.TP
+.BI -a
+autoconvert from stereo to mono file for mono encoding
+.TP
+.BI -x
+force byte-swapping of input (see
+.IR dd (1)
+instead)
+.TP
+.BI -S
+don't print progress report, VBR histograms
+.TP
+.BI --athonly
+only use the ATH for masking
+.TP
+.BI --nohist
+disable VBR histogram display
+.TP
+.BI --voice
+experimental voice mode
+.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Encode a
+.L .wav
+file as highest-quality MP3.
+.IP
+.EX
+games/mp3enc -q 0 -b 320
+.EE
+.LP
+Create a fixed 128Kb/s MP3 file from a
+.L .wav
+file.
+.IP
+.EX
+games/mp3enc -h <foo.wav >foo.mp3
+.EE
+.LP
+Streaming from stereo 44.1KHz raw PCM data, encoding mono at 16KHz
+(you may not need
+.IR dd ):
+.IP
+.EX
+dd -conv swab | games/mp3enc -a -r -m m --resample 16 -b 24
+.EE
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/games/mp3enc
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR dd (1),
+.IR mp3dec (1),
+.IR audio (3),
+.IR cdfs (4),
+.IR audio (7),
+.IR juke (7),
+.IR playlistfs (7)
+.br
+.B http://www.sulaco.org/mp3
+.SH BUGS
+Quality is much better than encoders based on the ISO routines,
+but still not as good as the FhG encoder.
+.PP
+It's a GNU behemoth, lightly rehabilitated.
+There are zillions of undocumented options.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/ms2html b/sys/man/1/ms2html
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..6f4b45dd4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/ms2html
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+.TH MS2HTML 1
+.SH NAME
+ms2html, html2ms \- convert between troff's ms macros and html
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B ms2html
+[
+.B -q
+] [
+.B -b
+.I basename
+] [
+.B -d
+.I delims
+] [
+.B -t
+.I title
+]
+.br
+.B html2ms
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Ms2html
+converts the
+.IR ms (6)
+source on standard input into HTML and prints it to
+standard output.
+If the source contains
+.IR tbl (1)
+or
+.IR eqn
+input, you must first pipe the text through those
+preprocessors.
+Postscript images, equations, and tables will be
+converted to gif files.
+If the document has a
+.B .TL
+entry, its contents will be used as the title; otherwise
+.I ms2html
+will look for a
+.B ._T
+macro, unknown to
+.IR ms (6),
+and take its value.
+Options are:
+.TF q
+.IP q
+suppresses warnings about malformed input;
+.IP b
+sets the HTML base name to
+.IR basename ;
+.IP d
+sets the
+.IR eqn (1)
+delimiters to
+.IR delim ;
+.IP t
+sets the HTML title to
+.IR title .
+.PD
+.PP
+.I Html2ms
+reads HTML from standard input and converts it
+to
+.IR ms (6)
+source on standard output.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/ms2html.c
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/html2ms.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR htmlroff (1),
+.IR ms (6)
+.SH BUGS
+.PP
+Ms2html doesn't understand a number of troff
+commands.  It does handle macros and defined
+strings.
+.PP
+Html2ms doesn't understand html tables.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/mtime b/sys/man/1/mtime
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..5bfe4da32
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/mtime
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+.TH MTIME 1
+.SH NAME
+mtime \- print file modification time
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B mtime
+.I file ...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Mtime
+prints the modification time (in seconds since the epoch) and name
+of each
+.IR file .
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/mtime.c
diff --git a/sys/man/1/mug b/sys/man/1/mug
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..93815fc0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/mug
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+.TH MUG 1
+.SH NAME
+mug - convert an image to a face icon
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B mug
+[
+.I file
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Mug
+reads a Plan 9
+.IR image (6)
+from
+.I file
+(or standard input if there is no
+.IR file )
+and 
+displays a working version of the icon
+a gray ramp,
+and a larger image (the `crop box'),
+all derived from
+.IR file .
+Selecting
+.L Write
+from the button-3 menu will write the icon in
+.IR face (6)
+format to standard output.
+.LP
+Imagine a 3x3 grid on the crop box.  You can move an
+edge or corner of the box by putting the mouse in the
+corresponding section of the grid and dragging.
+Dragging in the middle box in the grid translates the
+crop box.  The mouse cursor changes to tell you where you are.
+.LP
+The bar in the gray ramp controls the map from picture
+gray levels to the output levels.  The values along the
+bar are mapped to 0 through 255 in the output.  You can
+move the bar vertically by grabbing the midsection or
+adjust the width by grabbing an endpoint.
+.LP
+The current icon is shown in the bottom left corner,
+surrounded by eight small empty boxes.  You can save the
+settings as they are by dragging the current icon into
+one of the other boxes.  You can restore the settings by
+dragging an icon from one of the periphery boxes into the middle.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Convert a JPEG image into a face icon.
+.IP
+.EX
+jpg -c plus.jpg | mug >plus.1
+.EE
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR faces (1),
+.IR jpg (1),
+.IR face (6),
+.IR image (6)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/nedmail b/sys/man/1/nedmail
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..6cf29cc39
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/nedmail
@@ -0,0 +1,340 @@
+.TH NEDMAIL 1
+.SH NAME
+nedmail \-  reading mail
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B upas/nedmail
+[
+.B -nr
+]
+[
+.B -f
+.I mailfile
+]
+[
+.B -s
+.I mailfile
+]
+.PP
+.B upas/nedmail
+.B -c
+.I dir
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Nedmail
+edits a mailbox.
+The default mailbox is
+.BI /mail/box/ username /mbox\f1.
+The
+.B -f
+command line option specifies an alternate mailbox.
+Unrooted path names are interpreted relative to
+.BI /mail/box/ username.
+If the
+.I mailfile
+argument is omitted, the name defaults to
+.BR stored .
+.PP
+The options are:
+.TF "-f mailfile"
+.TP
+.BI -c " dir
+Create a mailbox.  If
+.I dir
+is specified, the new mailbox is created in
+.BI /mail/box/ username / dir /mbox\f1.
+Otherwise, the default mailbox is created.
+.TP
+.B -r
+Reverse: show messages in first-in, first-out order; the default is last-in, first-out.
+.TP
+.B -n
+Make the message numbers the same as the file names in the mail
+box directory.  This implies the
+.B -r
+option.
+.TP
+.BI -f " mailfile"
+Read messages from the specified file (see above) instead of the default mailbox.
+.TP
+.BI -s " mailfile"
+Read a single message file
+.IR mailfile ,
+as produced by
+.IR fs ,
+and treat it as an entire mailbox.
+This is provided for
+use in plumbing rules; see
+.IR faces (1).
+.PD
+.PP
+.I Nedmail
+starts by reading the mail box, printing out the number
+of messages, and then prompting for commands from standard input.
+Commands, as in
+.IR ed (1),
+are of the form
+.RI `[ range ]
+.I command
+.RI [ arguments ]'.
+The command is applied to each message in the (optional) range.
+.PP
+The address range can be:
+.TP 1.4i
+.I address
+to indicate a single message header
+.PD 0
+.TP
+.IB address , address
+to indicate a range of contiguous message headers
+.TP
+.BI g/ expression /
+to indicate all messages whose headers match the regular
+.IR expression .
+.TP
+.BI g% expression %
+to indicate all messages whose contents match the regular
+.IR expression .
+.PD
+.PP
+The addresses can be:
+.TP 1.4i
+.I number
+to indicate a particular message
+.PD 0
+.TP
+.IB address . number
+to indicate a subpart of a particular message
+.TP
+.BI / expression /
+to indicate the next message whose header matches
+.I expression
+.TP
+.BI % expression %
+to indicate the next message whose contents match
+expression
+.TP
+.I "empty or .
+to indicate the current message
+.TP
+.BI - address
+to indicate backwards search or movement
+.PD
+.PP
+Since messages in MIME are hierarchical
+structures, in
+.I nedmail
+all the subparts are individually addressable.
+For example if message 2 contains 3 attachments,
+the attachments are numbered 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3.
+.PP
+The commands are:
+.TP 1.1i
+.BI a " args
+Reply to all addresses in the
+.BR To: ,
+.BR From: ,
+and
+.BR Cc:
+header lines.
+.I Marshal
+is used to format the reply and any arguments the
+user specifies are added to the command line to
+.I marshal
+before the recipient.
+The possibility of making a fool of yourself is very
+high with this command.
+.PD 0
+.TP
+.BI A " args
+Like 
+.B a
+but with the message
+appended to the reply.
+.TP
+.B b
+Print the headers for the next ten messages.
+.TP
+.B d
+Mark message to be deleted upon exiting
+.IR nedmail .
+.TP
+.B f
+Append the message to the file 
+.BI /mail/box/ username / sendername
+where
+.I sendername
+is the account name of the sender.
+.TP
+.B h
+Print the disposition, size in characters, reception time, sender,
+and subject of the message.
+.TP
+.B H
+Print the MIME structure of the message.
+.TP
+.B help
+Print a summary of the commands.
+.TP
+.BI m " person ...
+Forward the message as a mime attachment to the named
+.IR persons .
+.TP
+.BI M " person ...
+Like
+.B m
+but allow the user to type in text to be included
+with the forwarded message.
+.TP
+.B p
+Print message.	An interrupt stops the printing.
+.TP
+.BI r " args
+Reply to the sender of the message.
+.I Marshal
+is used to format the reply.
+If and optional
+.I Args
+are specified, they are added to the command line to
+.I marshal
+before the recipient's address.
+.TP
+.B R " args 
+Like
+.B r
+but with the original message included as an attachment.
+.TP
+.B rf
+Like
+.B r
+but append the message and the reply to the file 
+.BI /mail/box/ username / sendername
+where
+.I sendername
+is the account name of the sender.
+.TP
+.B Rf
+Like 
+.B R
+but append the message and the reply to the file 
+.BI /mail/box/ username / sendername
+where
+.I sendername
+is the account name of the sender.
+.TP
+.BI s " mfile"
+Append the message to the specified mailbox.
+If
+.I mfile
+doesn't start with a `/', it is interpreted relative to the directory in which the mailbox resides.
+If
+.I mfile
+is a directory then the destination is a file in that directry.
+If the MIME header specifies a file name, that one is used.
+Otherwise, one is generated using
+.IR mktemp (2)
+and the string
+.BR att.XXXXXXXXXXX .
+.TP
+.B q
+Put undeleted mail back in the mailbox and stop.
+.TP
+EOT (control-D)
+Same as 
+.BR q .
+.TP
+.BI w " file
+Same as
+.B s
+with the mail header line(s) stripped.  This can be used to
+save binary mail bodies.
+.TP
+.B u
+Remove mark for deletion.
+.TP
+.B x
+Exit, without changing the mailbox file.
+.TP
+.B y
+Synchronize with the mail box.  Any deleted
+messages are purged and any new messages read.
+This is equivalent to quiting nedmail and restarting.
+.TP
+.BI | command
+Run the
+.I command
+with the message body as standard input.
+.TP
+.BI || command
+Run the
+.I command
+with the whole message as standard input.
+.TP
+.BI ! command
+Escape to the shell to do
+.IR command .
+.TP
+.B \&=
+Print the number of the current message.
+.PD
+.PP
+Here's an example of a mail session that looks at a summary
+of the mail messages, saves away an html file added as an
+attachment to a message and then deletes the message:
+.LP
+.EX
+% mail
+7 messages
+: ,h
+1   H  2129	07/22 12:30  noone@madeup.net  "Add Up To 2000 free miles"
+2       504	07/22 11:43  jmk
+3   H   784	07/20 09:05  presotto
+4       822	07/11 09:23  xxx@yyy.net  "You don't call, you don't write..."
+5       193	07/06 16:55  presotto
+6       529	06/01 19:42  jmk
+7       798	09/02  2000  howard
+: 1H
+1       multipart/mixed             2129   from=noone@madeup.net
+ 1.1      text/plain                115    
+ 1.2      text/html                 1705   filename=northwest.htm
+: 1.2w /tmp/northwest.html
+!saved in /tmp/northwest.html
+1.2: d
+1: q
+!1 message deleted
+% 
+.EE
+.PP
+Notice that the delete of message 1.2 deleted the entire message and
+not just the attachment.
+.SH FILES
+.TF /mail/box/*/dead.letter
+.TP
+.B /mail/box/*
+mail directories
+.TP
+.B /mail/box/*/mbox
+mailbox files
+.TP
+.B /mail/box/*/forward
+forwarding address(es)
+.TP
+.B /mail/box/*/pipeto
+mail filter
+.TP
+.B /mail/box/*/L.reading
+mutual exclusion lock for multiple mbox readers
+.TP
+.B /mail/box/*/L.mbox
+mutual exclusion lock for altering mbox
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/upas/ned
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR mail (1),
+.IR aliasmail (8),
+.IR filter (1),
+.IR marshal (1),
+.IR mlmgr (1),
+.IR nedmail (1),
+.IR upasfs (4),
+.IR smtp (8),
+.IR faces (1),
+.IR rewrite (6)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/netstat b/sys/man/1/netstat
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..817e763f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/netstat
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+.TH NETSTAT 1
+.SH NAME
+netstat \- summarize network connections
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B netstat
+[
+.B -in
+] [
+.B -p
+.I proto
+] [
+.I netmtpt
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Netstat
+prints information about network mounted at
+.IR netmtpt ,
+default
+.BR /net .
+For
+.I IP
+connections,
+.I netstat
+reports the protocol, connection number, user,
+connection state, local port, remote port and
+remote address.
+.PP
+The options are:
+.TP
+.B -i
+Instead of the usual listing, print one line per network interface.
+Each line gives the
+device, MTU, local address, mask, remote address, packets in,
+packets out, errors in, and errors out for this interface.
+.TP
+.B -n
+By default,
+.I netstat
+looks up port numbers and addresses in the network databases
+to print symbolic names if possible.
+This option disables such translation.
+.TP
+.B -p
+Show only connections with the given protocol.
+.PD
+.SH FILES
+.B /net/*/*
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/netstat.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR ipconfig (8)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/news b/sys/man/1/news
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..f95b987f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/news
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+.TH NEWS 1
+.SH NAME
+news \- print news items
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B news
+[
+.B -a
+]
+[
+.B -n
+]
+[
+.I item ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+When invoked without options,
+this simple local news service
+prints files that have appeared in
+.BR /lib/news
+since last reading, most recent first,
+with each preceded by an appropriate header.
+The time of reading is recorded.
+The options are
+.TP
+.B -a
+Print all items, regardless of currency.
+The recorded time is not changed.
+.TP
+.B -n
+Report the names of the current items without
+printing their contents, and without changing
+the recorded time.
+.PP
+Other arguments
+select particular news items.
+.PP
+To post a news item, create a file in
+.BR  /lib/news .
+.PP
+You may arrange to receive news automatically by 
+registering your mail address in
+.BR /sys/lib/subscribers .
+A daemon mails recent news
+to all addresses on the list.
+.PP
+Empty news items, and news items named
+.B core
+or
+.B dead.letter
+are ignored.
+.SH FILES
+.TF \fL/sys/lib/subscribers
+.TP
+.B /lib/news/*
+articles
+.TP
+.B $HOME/lib/newstime
+modify time is time news was last read
+.TP
+.B /sys/lib/subscribers
+who gets news mailed to them
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/news.c
diff --git a/sys/man/1/nm b/sys/man/1/nm
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..a77480180
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/nm
@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+.TH NM 1
+.SH NAME
+nm \- name list (symbol table)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B nm
+[
+.B -aghnsTu
+]
+.I file ...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Nm
+prints the name list of each executable or object
+.I file
+in the argument list.
+If the
+.I file
+is an archive
+(see
+.IR ar (1)),
+the name list of each file in the archive is printed.
+If more than one file is given in the argument list,
+the name of each file is printed at the beginning of each line.
+.PP
+Each symbol name is preceded by its hexadecimal
+value (blanks if undefined)
+and one of the letters
+.TP
+.B T
+text segment symbol
+.PD0
+.TP
+.B t
+static text segment symbol
+.TP
+.B L
+leaf function text segment symbol
+.TP
+.B l
+static leaf function text segment symbol
+.TP
+.B D
+data segment symbol
+.TP
+.B d
+static data segment symbol
+.TP
+.B B
+bss segment symbol
+.TP
+.B b
+static bss segment symbol
+.TP
+.B a
+automatic (local) variable symbol
+.TP
+.B p
+function parameter symbol
+.TP
+.B z
+source file name
+.TP
+.B Z
+source file line offset
+.TP
+.B f
+source file name components
+.PD
+.PP
+The output is sorted alphabetically.
+.PP
+Options are:
+.TP
+.B -a
+Print all symbols; normally only user-defined text, data,
+and bss segment symbols are printed.
+.TP
+.B -g
+Print only global
+.RB ( T ,
+.BR L ,
+.BR D ,
+.BR B )
+symbols.
+.TP
+.B -h
+Do not print file name headers with output lines.
+.TP
+.B -n
+Sort according to the address of the symbols.
+.TP
+.B -s
+Don't sort; print in symbol-table order.
+.TP
+.B -T
+Prefix each line with the symbol's type signature.
+.TP
+.B -u
+Print only undefined symbols.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/nm.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR ar (1),
+.IR 2l (1), 
+.IR db (1),
+.IR acid (1),
+.IR a.out (6)
+
diff --git a/sys/man/1/ns b/sys/man/1/ns
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..b62398abc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/ns
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+.TH NS 1
+.SH NAME
+ns \- display name space
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B ns
+[
+.B -r
+] [
+.I pid
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Ns
+prints a representation of the file name space of the process with the named
+.IR pid ,
+or by default itself.
+The output is in the form of an
+.IR rc (1)
+script that could, in principle, recreate the name space.
+The output is produced by reading and reformatting the contents of
+.BI /proc/ pid /ns .
+.PP
+By default,
+.I ns
+rewrites the names of network data files to represent the network
+address that data file is connected to, for example replacing
+.B /net/tcp/82/data
+with
+.BR tcp!123.122.121.9 .
+The
+.B -r
+flag suppresses this rewriting.
+.SH FILES
+.B /proc/*/ns
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/ns.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR ps (1),
+.IR proc (3),
+.IR namespace (4),
+.IR namespace (6)
+.SH BUGS
+The names of files printed by
+.I ns
+will be inaccurate if a file or directory it includes has been renamed.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/p b/sys/man/1/p
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..d3287599b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/p
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+.TH P 1
+.SH NAME
+p \- paginate
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B p
+[
+.BI - number
+]
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I P
+copies its standard input, or the named files if given,
+to its standard output,
+stopping at the end of every 22nd line, and between files,
+to wait for a newline from the user.
+The option sets the
+.I number
+of lines on a page.
+.PP
+While waiting for a newline,
+.I p
+interprets the commands:
+.TP
+.B !
+Pass the rest of the line to the shell as a command.
+.TP
+.B q
+Quit.
+.PP
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/p.c
diff --git a/sys/man/1/page b/sys/man/1/page
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..4246080c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/page
@@ -0,0 +1,271 @@
+.TH PAGE 1
+.SH NAME
+page \- view 
+FAX, 
+image, graphic, PostScript, PDF, and
+typesetter output
+files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B page
+[
+.B -abirPRvVw
+]
+[
+.B -p
+.I ppi
+]
+[
+.IR file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Page
+is a general purpose document viewer.
+It can be used to display the individual pages
+of a
+PostScript,
+PDF,
+or 
+.IR tex (1)
+or 
+.IR troff (1)
+device independent output
+file.
+.I Tex
+or 
+.I troff
+output is simply converted to PostScript in order to be viewed.
+It can also be used to view any number of
+graphics files
+(such as a 
+FAX
+page, 
+a Plan 9
+.IR image (6)
+file, an Inferno bitmap file, or other common format).
+.I Page
+displays these
+in sequence.
+In the absence of named files,
+.I page
+reads one from standard input.
+.PP
+By default,
+.I page
+runs in the window in which it is started
+and leaves the window unchanged.
+The 
+.B -R
+option causes 
+.I page 
+to grow the window if necessary
+to display the page being viewed.
+The
+.B -w
+option causes 
+.I page 
+to create a new window for itself.
+The newly created window will grow as under the
+.B -R
+option.
+If being used to display 
+multipage documents,
+only one file may be specified on the command line.
+.PP
+The 
+.B -p 
+option sets the resolution for PostScript and PDF
+files, in pixels per inch.
+The default is 100 ppi.
+The
+.B -r
+option reverses the order in which pages are displayed.
+.PP
+When viewing a document,
+.I page
+will try to guess the true bounding box, usually rounding up from
+the file's bounding box to
+8½×11 or A4 size.
+The 
+.B -b
+option causes it to respect the bounding box given in the file.
+As a more general problem,
+some PostScript files claim to conform to Adobe's
+Document Structuring Conventions but do not.
+The 
+.B -P
+option enables a slightly slower and slightly more
+skeptical version of the PostScript processing code.
+Unfortunately, there are PostScript documents
+that can only be viewed with the
+.B -P
+option, and there are PostScript documents that
+can only be viewed without it.
+.PP
+When viewing images with 
+.IR page ,
+it listens to the 
+.B image
+plumbing channel
+(see 
+.IR plumber (4))
+for more images to display.
+The 
+.B -i
+option causes 
+.I page
+to not load any graphics files nor to read 
+from standard input but rather to listen
+for ones to load from the plumbing channel.
+.PP
+The 
+.B -v
+option turns on extra debugging output, and
+the
+.B -V
+option turns on even more debugging output.
+The 
+.B -a
+option causes 
+.I page
+to call
+.IR abort (2)
+rather than exit cleanly on errors,
+to facilitate debugging.
+.PP
+Pressing and holding button 1 permits panning about the page.
+.PP
+Button 2 raises a menu of operations on the current image or the
+entire set.  The image transformations are non-destructive and are
+valid only for the currently displayed image.  They are lost as soon
+as another image is displayed.
+The button 2 menu operations are:
+.TF Resize
+.TP
+.B Orig size
+Restores the image to the original. All modifications are lost.
+.TP
+.B Zoom
+Prompts the user to sweep a rectangle on the image which is 
+expanded proportionally to the rectangle.
+.TP
+.B Fit window
+Resizes the image so that it fits in the current window.
+.TP
+.B Rotate 90
+Rotates the image 90 degrees clockwise
+.TP
+.B Upside down
+Toggles whether images are displayed upside-down.
+.TP
+.B Next
+Displays the next page.
+.TP
+.B Prev
+Displays the previous page.
+.TP
+.B Zerox
+Displays the current image in a new page window. 
+Useful for selecting important pages from large documents.
+.TP
+.B Reverse
+Reverses the order in which pages are displayed.
+.TP
+.B Write
+Writes the image to file.
+.PD
+.PP
+Button 3 raises a menu of the
+pages
+to be selected for viewing in any order.
+.PP
+Typing a
+.B q
+or
+control-D exits the program.
+Typing a
+.B u
+toggles whether images are displayed upside-down.
+(This is useful in the common case of mistransmitted upside-down faxes).
+Typing a
+.B r
+reverses the order in which pages are displayed.
+Typing a 
+.B w
+will write the currently viewed page to a new file as a compressed
+.IR image (6)
+file.
+When possible, the filename is of the form
+.IR basename . pagenum . bit .
+Typing a 
+.B d
+removes an image from the working set.
+.PP
+To go to a specific page, one can type its number followed by enter.
+Typing left arrow, backspace, or minus displays the previous page.
+Typing right arrow, space, or enter displays the next page.
+The up and down arrow pan up and down one half screen height,
+changing pages when panning off the top or bottom of the page.
+.PP
+.I Page
+calls
+.IR gs (1)
+to draw each page of PostScript
+and
+PDF
+.IR files .
+It also calls a variety of conversion programs, such as those described in
+.IR jpg (1),
+to convert the various raster graphics formats
+into Inferno bitmap files.
+Pages are converted ``on the fly,'' as needed.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.TP
+.L
+page /sys/src/cmd/gs/examples/tiger.eps
+Display a color PostScript file.
+.TP
+.L
+page /usr/inferno/icons/*.bit
+Browse the Inferno bitmap library.
+.TP
+.L
+man -t page | page -w
+Preview this manual in a new window.
+.SH "SEE ALSO
+.IR gs (1),
+.IR jpg (1),
+.IR tex (1),
+.IR troff (1)
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/page
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+The mouse cursor changes to an arrow and ellipsis
+when
+.I page
+is reading or writing a file.
+.SH BUGS
+.I Page
+supports reading of only one document
+file at a time, and
+the user interface is clumsy when viewing very large documents.
+.PP
+When viewing multipage PostScript files that do not contain
+.RB `` %%Page ''
+comments, the button 3 menu only contains
+``this page'' and ``next page'':
+correctly determining 
+page boundaries in Postscript code is not computable
+in the general case.
+.PP
+If
+.I page
+has trouble viewing a Postscript file,
+it might not be exactly conforming: try viewing it with the 
+.B -P
+option.
+.PP
+The interface to the plumber is unsatisfactory.  In particular,
+document references cannot be sent 
+via plumbing messages.
+.PP
+There are too many keyboard commands.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/passwd b/sys/man/1/passwd
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..d15461e3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/passwd
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+.TH PASSWD 1
+.SH NAME
+passwd, netkey \- change or verify user password
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B passwd
+[
+.IR username [@ domain ]
+]
+.PP
+.B netkey
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Passwd
+changes the invoker's Plan 9 password and/or APOP secret.
+The Plan 9 password is used to login to a terminal while
+the APOP secret is used for a number of external services:
+POP3, IMAP, and VPN access.  The optional argument specifies
+the user name and authentication domain to use if different
+than the one associated with the machine
+.I passwd
+is run on.
+.PP
+The program first prompts for the old Plan 9 password in the specified
+domain to establish
+identity.
+It then prompts for changes to the password and the
+secret.
+New passwords and secrets must be typed twice, to forestall mistakes.
+New passwords must be sufficiently hard to guess.
+They may be of any length greater than seven characters.
+.PP
+.I Netkey
+prompts for a password to encrypt network challenges.
+It is a substitute for a SecureNet box.
+.PP
+These commands may be run only on a terminal, to avoid
+transmitting clear text passwords over the network.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/auth/passwd.c
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/auth/netkey.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.I readnvram
+in
+.IR authsrv (2),
+.IR encrypt (2),
+.IR cons (3),
+.IR auth (8),
+.IR securenet (8)
+.PP
+Robert Morris and Ken Thompson,
+``UNIX Password Security,''
+.I AT&T Bell Laboratories Technical Journal
+Vol 63 (1984), pp. 1649-1672
+.SH BUGS
+Now that
+.I cpu
+connections are always encrypted, the only good reason
+to require that these commands be run only on terminals
+is concern that the CPU server might be subverted.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/patch b/sys/man/1/patch
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..3fb4a490c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/patch
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+.TH PATCH 1
+.SH NAME
+patch \- simple patch creation and tracking system
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B patch/create
+.I name
+.I email
+.I files ...
+[
+.B < 
+.I description
+]
+.PP
+.B patch/list
+[
+.I name ...
+]
+.PP
+.B patch/diff
+.I name
+.PP
+.B patch/apply
+.I name
+.PP
+.B patch/undo
+.I name
+.PP
+.B patch/note
+.I name 
+[
+.B <
+.I note
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These scripts are a simple patch submission and tracking system
+used to propose additions or changes to Plan 9.
+There is no guarantee that any patch will be accepted, nor
+that it will be accepted verbatim.
+Each patch has a 
+.I name
+(lowercase letters, numbers, dash, dot, and underscore only)
+and is stored in
+.BI /n/sources/patch/ name.
+.PP
+.I Patch/create
+creates a new patch consisting of the changes to
+the listed files from the distribution, reading
+a description of the patch from standard input:
+please provide an explanation of what the change is supposed to do,
+some context, and a rationale for the change.
+Test data or pointers to same to verify that the fix works are also welcome.
+When sending a patch, follow these guidelines:
+.IP • 3
+Before preparing the patch, run
+.I replica/pull
+and base your patch on current distribution source code.
+.IP •
+If this is a bug fix, explain the bug clearly.
+Don't assume the bug is obvious from the fix.
+.IP •
+If this is a new feature, explain it clearly.
+Don't assume it is obvious from the change.
+.IP •
+Make the new code look as much like the old code as possible:
+don't make gratuitous changes, and do follow the style of the old code.
+See
+.IR style (6)
+for the canonical Plan 9 coding style.
+.IP •
+If your patch changes externally-visible behaviour,
+update the manual page.
+.PP
+The
+.I email
+address, if not
+.LR - ,
+will be sent notification messages when the patch is applied, rejected,
+or commented on.
+If rejected, the e-mail will contain a note explaining why and
+probably listing suggested changes and encouraging you to resubmit.
+.PP
+.I Patch/list
+displays information about the named patches,
+or all currently pending patches if none are specified.
+.PP
+.I Patch/diff
+shows a patch as diffs between the original
+source files and the patched source files.
+.PP
+.I Patch/apply
+applies the patch to the current source tree.
+It is intended to be run by the Plan 9 developers with
+.B pie
+as their root file system.
+If the source has changed since the patch was
+created,
+.I apply
+will report the conflict and not change any files.
+Before changing any files,
+.I patch/apply
+makes backup copies of the current source tree's
+files.  The backups are stored in the patch directory.
+.PP
+.I Patch/undo
+will copy the backups saved by
+.I patch/apply
+back into the source tree.
+It will not restore a backup if the file
+being replaced is not byte-identical to the one
+created by 
+.I patch/apply.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Propose a change to
+.IR pwd ,
+which you have modified locally:
+.IP
+.EX
+% patch/create pwd-errors user@host.dom /sys/src/cmd/pwd.c
+Fix pwd to print errors to fd 2 rather than 1.
+^D
+% 
+.EE
+.PP
+Then the developers at Bell Labs run
+.IP
+.EX
+patch/diff pwd-errors
+.EE
+.PP
+to inspect the change (possibly viewing
+.B /n/sources/patch/pwd-errors/pwd.c
+to see the larger context).
+To make the change, they run
+.IP
+.EX
+patch/apply pwd-errors
+.EE
+.LP
+Otherwise they run
+.IP
+.EX
+% patch/note pwd-errors
+Pwd should definitely print errors to fd 1 because ...
+^D
+% 
+.EE
+.PP
+to add a note to the 
+.B /n/sources/pwd-errors/notes
+file.
+.SH FILES
+.B /n/sources/patch
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /rc/bin/patch
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR diff (1)
+.br
+.B http://plan9.bell-labs.com/wiki/plan9/How_to_contribute
diff --git a/sys/man/1/pcc b/sys/man/1/pcc
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..fd7acd916
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/pcc
@@ -0,0 +1,185 @@
+.TH PCC 1 
+.SH NAME
+pcc \- APE C compiler driver
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B pcc
+[
+.I option ...
+]
+[
+.I name ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Pcc
+compiles and loads C programs,
+using APE (ANSI C/POSIX) include files and libraries.
+Named files ending with
+.B .c
+are preprocessed with
+.IR cpp (1),
+then compiled with one of the compilers described in
+.IR 2c (1),
+as specified by the environment variable
+.BR $objtype .
+The object files are then loaded using one of the loaders described in
+.IR 2l (1).
+The options are:
+.TP \w'\fL-D\ \fIname=def\ 'u
+.B "-+
+Accept C++
+.B //
+comments.
+.TP
+.BI -o " out"
+Place loader output in file
+.I out
+instead of the default
+.BR 2.out ,
+.BR v.out ,
+etc.
+.TP
+.B -P
+Omit the compilation and loading phases;
+leave the result of preprocessing
+.IB name .c
+in
+.IB name .i\f1.
+.TP
+.B -E
+Like
+.BR -P ,
+but send the result to standard output.
+.TP
+.B -c
+Omit the loading phase.
+.TP
+.B -p
+Insert profiling code into the executable output.
+.TP
+.B -w
+Print compiler warning messages.
+.TP
+.BI -l lib
+Include
+.BI / $objtype /lib/ape/lib lib .a
+as a library during the linking phase.
+.TP
+.B -B
+Don't complain about functions used without
+ANSI function prototypes.
+.TP
+.B -V
+Enable
+.B void*
+conversion warnings, as in
+.IR 2c (1).
+.TP
+.B -v
+Echo the preprocessing, compiling, and loading commands
+before they are executed.
+.TP
+.BI -D name=def
+.br
+.ns
+.TP
+.BI -D name
+Define the
+.I name
+to the preprocessor,
+as if by
+.LR #define .
+If no definition is given, the name is defined as
+.LR 1 .
+.TP
+.BI -U name
+Undefine the
+.I name
+to the preprocessor,
+as if by
+.LR #undef .
+.TP
+.BI -I dir
+.L #include
+files whose names do not begin with 
+.L /
+are always
+sought first in the directory 
+of the
+.I file
+argument,
+then in directories named in 
+.B -I
+options,
+then in
+.BR /$objtype/include/ape .
+.TP
+.B -N
+Don't optimize compiled code.
+.TP
+.B -S
+Print an assembly language version of the object code
+on standard output.
+.TP
+.B -a
+Instead of compiling, print on standard output acid functions (see
+.IR acid (1))
+for examining structures declared in the source files.
+.TP
+.B -aa
+Like
+.B -a
+except that functions for structures declared in included header files
+are omitted.
+.TP
+.B -F
+Enable vararg type checking as described in 
+.IR 2c (1).
+This is of limited use without the appropriate 
+.B #pragma 
+definitions.
+.PP
+The APE environment contains all of the include
+files and library routines specified in the ANSI C standard
+(X3.159-1989), as well as those specified in the IEEE Portable
+Operating System Interface standard (POSIX, 1003.1-1990, ISO 9945-1).
+In order to access the POSIX routines, source programs should
+define the preprocessor constant
+.BR _POSIX_SOURCE .
+.SH FILES
+.TF /$objtype/lib/ape/libap.a
+.TP
+.B /sys/include/ape
+directory for machine-independent
+.B #include
+files.
+.TP
+.B /$objtype/include/ape
+directory for machine-dependent
+.B #include
+files.
+.TP
+.B /$objtype/lib/ape/libap.a
+ANSI C/POSIX library.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR cpp (1),
+.IR 2c (1),
+.IR 2a (1),
+.IR 2l (1),
+.IR mk (1),
+.IR nm (1),
+.IR acid (1),
+.IR db (1),
+.IR prof (1)
+.PP
+Howard Trickey,
+``APE \(em The ANSI/POSIX Environment''
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/pcc.c
+.SH BUGS
+The locale manipulation functions are minimal.
+Signal functions and terminal characteristic
+handlers are only minimally implemented.
+.IR Link
+always fails, because Plan 9 doesn't support multiple links to a file.
+The functions related to setting effective user and group ids
+cannot be implemented because the concept doesn't exist in Plan 9.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/pic b/sys/man/1/pic
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..685de68fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/pic
@@ -0,0 +1,344 @@
+.TH PIC 1
+.de PS	\" start picture
+.	\" $1 is height, $2 is width, both in inches
+.if \\$1>0 .sp .35
+.ie \\$1>0 .nr $1 \\$1
+.el .nr $1 0
+.in (\\n(.lu-\\$2)/2u
+.ne \\$1
+..
+.de PE	\" end of picture
+.in
+.if \\n($1>0 .sp .65
+..
+.SH NAME
+pic, tpic \- troff and tex preprocessors for drawing pictures
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B pic
+[
+.I files
+]
+.PP
+.B tpic
+[
+.I files
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Pic
+is a
+.IR troff (1)
+preprocessor for drawing figures on a typesetter.
+.I Pic
+code is contained between
+.B .PS
+and
+.B .PE
+lines:
+.IP
+.EX
+\&.PS \f2optional-width\fP \f2optional-height\fP
+\f2element-list\fP
+\&.PE
+.EE
+.LP
+or in a file mentioned in a
+.B .PS
+line:
+.IP
+.BI .PS " " < file
+.LP
+If
+.IR optional-width
+is present, the picture is made that many inches wide,
+regardless of any dimensions used internally.
+The height is scaled in the same proportion unless
+.IR optional-height
+is present.
+If
+.B .PF
+is used instead of
+.BR .PE ,
+the typesetting position after printing is restored to what it was
+upon entry.
+.PP
+An
+.IR element-list
+is a list of elements:
+.EX
+	\f2primitive  attribute-list\fP
+	\f2placename\fP : \f2element\fP
+	\f2placename\fP : \f2position\fP
+	\f2var\fP = \f2expr\fP
+	\f2direction\fP
+	{ \f2element-list\fP }
+	[ \f2element-list\fP ]
+	for \f2var\fP = \f2expr\fP to \f2expr\fP by \f2expr\fP do { \f2anything\fP }
+	if \f2expr\fP then { \f2anything\fP } else { \f2anything\fP }
+	copy \f2file,\fP  copy thru \f2macro,\fP  copy \f2file\fP thru \fPmacro\fP
+	sh { \f2commandline\fP }
+	print \f2expr\fP
+	reset \f2optional var-list\fP
+	\f2troff-command\fP
+.EE
+.PP
+Elements are separated by newlines or semicolons;
+a long element may be continued by ending the line with a backslash.
+Comments are introduced by a
+.BI #
+and terminated by a newline.
+Variable names begin with a lower case letter;
+place names begin with upper case.
+Place and variable names retain their values
+from one picture to the next.
+.PP
+After each primitive
+the current position moves in the current direction
+.RB ( up , down ,
+.BR left , right
+(default)) by the size of the primitive.
+The current position and direction are saved upon entry
+to a
+.BR { ... }
+block and restored upon exit.
+Elements within a block enclosed in
+.BR [ ... ]
+are treated as a unit;
+the dimensions are determined by the extreme points
+of the contained objects.
+Names, variables, and direction of motion within a block are local to that block.
+.PP
+.IR Troff-command
+is any line that begins with a period.
+Such a line is assumed to make sense in the context where it appears;
+generally, this means only size and font changes.
+.PP
+The
+.I primitive
+objects are:
+.br
+.EX
+	box  circle  ellipse  arc  line  arrow  spline  move  \f2text-list\fP
+.EE
+.L arrow
+is a synonym for
+.LR "line ->" .
+.PP
+An
+.IR attribute-list
+is a sequence of zero or more attributes;
+each attribute consists of a keyword, perhaps followed by a value.
+.EX
+.ta .5i 2.5i
+	h(eigh)t \f2expr\fP	wid(th) \f2expr\fP
+	rad(ius) \f2expr\fP	diam(eter) \f2expr\fP
+	up \f2opt-expr\fP	down \f2opt-expr\fP
+	right \f2opt-expr\fP	left \f2opt-expr\fP
+	from \f2position\fP	to \f2position\fP
+	at \f2position\fP	with \f2corner\fP
+	by \f2expr, expr\fP	then
+	dotted \f2opt-expr\fP	dashed \f2opt-expr\fP
+	chop \f2opt-expr\fP	->  <-  <->
+	invis	same
+	fill \f2opt-expr\fP
+	\f2text-list\fP	\f2expr\fP
+.EE
+Missing attributes and values are filled in from defaults.
+Not all attributes make sense for all primitives;
+irrelevant ones are silently ignored.
+The attribute
+.L at
+causes the geometrical center to be put at the specified place;
+.L with
+causes the position on the object to be put at the specified place.
+For lines, splines and arcs,
+.L height
+and
+.L width
+refer to arrowhead size.
+A bare
+.I expr
+implies motion in the current direction.
+.PP
+Text is normally an attribute of some primitive;
+by default it is placed at the geometrical center of the object.
+Stand-alone text is also permitted.
+A text list
+is a list of text items:
+.EX
+\f2  text-item\fP:
+	"..." \f2positioning ...\fP
+	sprintf("\f2format\fP", \f2expr\fP, \f2...\fP) \f2positioning ...\fP
+\f2  positioning\fP:
+	center  ljust  rjust  above  below
+.EE
+If there are multiple text items for some primitive,
+they are arranged vertically and centered except as qualified.
+Positioning requests apply to each item independently.
+Text items may contain
+.I troff
+commands for size and font changes, local motions, etc.,
+but make sure that these are balanced
+so that the entering state is restored before exiting.
+.PP
+A position is ultimately an
+.I x,y
+coordinate pair, but it may be specified in other ways.
+.EX
+\f2  position\fP:
+	\f2expr, expr\fP
+	\f2place\fP ± \f2expr, expr\fP
+	\f2place\fP ± ( \f2expr, expr\fP )
+	( \f2position\fP,\f2 position\fP )	\f2x\fP\fR from one, \f2y\fP\fR the other\fP
+	\f2expr\fP [\fLof the way\fP] between \f2position\fP and \f2position\fP
+	\f2expr\fP < \f2position\fP , \f2position\fP >
+	( \f2position\fP )
+.EE
+.PP
+.EX
+\f2  place\fP:
+	\f2placename\fP \f2optional-corner\fP
+	\f2corner\fP of \f2placename\fP
+	\f2nth\fP \f2primitive\fP \f2optional-corner\fP
+	\f2corner\fP of \f2nth\fP \f2primitive\fP
+	Here
+.EE
+An
+.IR optional-corner
+is one of the eight compass points
+or the center or the start or end of a primitive.
+.EX
+\f2  optional-corner\fP:
+	.n  .e  .w  .s  .ne  .se  .nw  .sw  .c  .start  .end
+\f2  corner\fP:
+	top  bot  left  right  start  end
+.EE
+Each object in a picture has an ordinal number;
+.IR nth
+refers to this.
+.EX
+\f2  nth\fP:
+	\f2n\fPth\f2,     n\fPth last
+.EE
+.PP
+The built-in variables and their default values are:
+.EX
+.ta .5i 2.5i
+	boxwid 0.75	boxht 0.5
+	circlerad 0.25	arcrad 0.25
+	ellipsewid 0.75	ellipseht 0.5
+	linewid 0.5	lineht 0.5
+	movewid 0.5	moveht 0.5
+	textwid 0	textht 0
+	arrowwid 0.05	arrowht 0.1
+	dashwid 0.1	arrowhead 2
+	scale 1
+.EE
+These may be changed at any time,
+and the new values remain in force from picture to picture until changed again
+or reset by a
+.L reset
+statement.
+Variables changed within
+.B [
+and
+.B ]
+revert to their previous value upon exit from the block.
+Dimensions are divided by
+.B scale
+during output.
+.PP
+Expressions in
+.I pic
+are evaluated in floating point.
+All numbers representing dimensions are taken to be in inches.
+.EX
+\f2  expr\fP:
+	\f2expr\fP \f2op\fP \f2expr\fP
+	- \f2expr\fP
+	! \f2expr\fP
+	( \f2expr\fP )
+	variable
+	number
+	\f2place\fP .x  \f2place\fP .y  \f2place\fP .ht  \f2place\fP .wid  \f2place\fP .rad
+	sin(\f2expr\fP)  cos(\f2expr\fP)  atan2(\f2expr,expr\fP)  log(\f2expr\fP)  exp(\f2expr\fP)
+	sqrt(\f2expr\fP)  max(\f2expr,expr\fP)  min(\f2expr,expr\fP)  int(\f2expr\fP)  rand()
+\f2  op\fP:
+	+  -  *  /  %  <  <=  >  >=  ==  !=  &&  ||
+.EE
+.PP
+The
+.B define
+and
+.B undef
+statements are not part of the grammar.
+.EX
+	define \f2name\fP { \f2replacement text\fP }
+	undef \f2name\fP
+.EE
+Occurrences of
+.BR $1 ,
+.BR $2 ,
+etc.,
+in the replacement text
+will be replaced by the corresponding arguments if
+.I name
+is invoked as
+.EX
+	\f2name\fP(\f2arg1\fP, \f2arg2\fP, ...)
+.EE
+Non-existent arguments are replaced by null strings.
+Replacement text
+may contain newlines.
+The
+.B undef
+statement removes the definition of a macro.
+.PP
+.I Tpic
+is a
+.IR tex (1)
+preprocessor that accepts
+.IR pic
+language.
+It produces Tex commands that define a box called
+.BR \egraph ,
+which contains the picture.
+The box may be output this way:
+.IP
+.L
+\ecenterline{\ebox\egraph}
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.EX
+arrow "input" above; box "process"; arrow "output" above
+move
+A: ellipse 
+   circle rad .1 with .w at A.e
+   circle rad .05 at 0.5 <A.c, A.ne>
+   circle rad .065 at 0.5 <A.c, A.ne>
+   spline from last circle.nw left .25 then left .05 down .05
+   arc from A.c to A.se rad 0.5
+   for i = 1 to 10 do { line from A.s+.025*i,.01*i down i/50 } 
+.EE
+.PP
+.PS
+arrow "input" above; box "process"; arrow "output" above
+move
+A: ellipse 
+   circle rad .1 with .w at A.e
+   circle rad .05 at 0.5 <A.c, A.ne>
+   circle rad .065 at 0.5 <A.c, A.ne>
+   spline from last circle.nw left .25 then left .05 down .05
+   arc from A.c to A.se rad 0.5
+   for i = 1 to 10 do { line from A.s+.025*i,.01*i down i/50 } 
+.PE
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/pic
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR grap (1), 
+.IR doctype (1),
+.IR troff (1)
+.br
+B. W. Kernighan,
+``PIC\(ema Graphics Language for Typesetting'',
+.I
+Unix Research System Programmer's Manual,
+Tenth Edition, Volume 2
diff --git a/sys/man/1/pipefile b/sys/man/1/pipefile
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..19f207f31
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/pipefile
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+.TH PIPEFILE 1
+.SH NAME
+pipefile \- attach filter to file in name space
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B pipefile
+[
+.B -d
+] [
+.B -r
+.I command
+] [
+.B -w
+.I command
+]
+.I file
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Pipefile
+uses
+.IR bind (2)
+to attach a pair of pipes to
+.IR file ,
+using them to
+interpose filter
+.I commands
+between the true file and the simulated file that subsequently
+appears in the name space.
+Option
+.B -r
+interposes a filter that will affect the data delivered to programs that read from
+.IR file ;
+.B -w
+interposes a filter that will affect the data written by programs to
+.IR file .
+At least one
+.I command
+must be specified;
+.I pipefile
+will insert a
+.IR cat (1)
+process in the other direction.
+.PP
+After
+.I pipefile
+has been run, the filters are established for programs that subsequently
+open the
+.IR file ;
+programs already using the
+.I file
+are unaffected.
+.PP
+.I Pipefile
+opens the
+.I file
+twice, once for each direction.  If the
+.I file
+is a single-use device, such as
+.BR /dev/mouse ,
+use the
+.B -d
+flag to specify that the file is to be opened once, in
+.B ORDWR
+mode.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Simulate an old terminal:
+.EX
+.IP
+% pipefile -w 'tr a-z A-Z' /dev/cons
+% rc -i </dev/cons >/dev/cons >[2=1]
+% echo hello
+HELLO
+%
+.EE
+.PP
+Really simulate an old terminal:
+.EX
+.IP
+% pipefile -r 'tr A-Z a-z' -w 'tr a-z A-Z' /dev/cons
+% rc -i </dev/cons >/dev/cons >[2=1]
+% DATE
+THU OCT 12 10:13:45 EDT 2000
+%
+.EE
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/pipefile.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR mouse (8)
+.SH BUGS
+The I/O model of
+.I pipefile
+is peculiar; it doesn't work well on plain files.
+It is really intended for use with continuous devices such as
+.I /dev/cons
+and
+.IR /dev/mouse .
+.I Pipefile
+should be rewritten to be a user-level file system.
+.PP
+If the program using the file managed by
+.I pipefile
+exits, the filter will see EOF and exit, and the file will be unusable
+until the name space is repaired.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/plot b/sys/man/1/plot
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..cd1a1b816
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/plot
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+.TH PLOT 1
+.SH NAME
+plot \- graphics filter
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B plot
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Plot
+interprets plotting instructions (see
+.IR  plot (6))
+from the
+.I files
+or standard input,
+drawing the results in a newly created
+.IR rio (1)
+window.
+Plot persists until a newline is typed in the window.
+Various options may be interspersed with the
+.I file
+arguments; they take effect at the given point in processing.
+Options are:
+.TP "\w'\fL-g \fIgrade\fLXX'u"
+.B -d
+Double buffer: accumulate the plot off-screen and write to the screen all at once
+when an erase command is encountered or at end of file.
+.TP
+.B -e
+Erase the screen.
+.TP
+.BI -c " col"
+Set the foreground color (see
+.IR plot (6)
+for color names).
+.TP
+.BI -f " fill"
+Set the background color.
+.TP
+.BI -g " grade"
+Set the quality factor for arcs.
+Higher grades give better quality.
+.TP
+.BI -p " col"
+Set the pen color.
+.TP
+.BI -w
+Pause until a newline is typed on standard input.
+.TP
+.B -C
+Close the current plot.
+.TP
+.B -W " x0,y0,x1,y1"
+Specify the bounding rectangle of plot's window.
+By default it uses a 512×512 window in the
+middle of the screen.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/plot
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR rio (1),
+.IR plot (6)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/plumb b/sys/man/1/plumb
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..6c51d68bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/plumb
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+.TH PLUMB 1
+.SH NAME
+plumb \- send message to plumber
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B plumb
+[
+.B -p
+.I plumbfile
+] [
+.B -a
+.I attributes
+] [
+.B -s
+.I source
+] [
+.B -d
+.I destination
+] [
+.B -t
+.I type
+] [
+.B -w
+.I directory
+]
+.B -i
+|
+.I data...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.I plumb
+command formats and sends a plumbing message whose data
+is, by default, the concatenation of the argument strings separated by blanks.
+The options are:
+.TP
+.B -p
+write the message to
+.I plumbfile
+(default
+.BR /mnt/plumb/send ).
+.TP
+.B -a
+set the
+.B attr
+field of the message (default is empty).
+.TP
+.B -s
+set the
+.B src
+field of the message (default is
+.BR plumb ).
+.TP
+.B -d
+set the
+.B dst
+field of the message (default is empty).
+.TP
+.B -t
+set the
+.B type
+field of the message (default is
+.BR text ).
+.TP
+.B -w
+set the
+.B wdir
+field of the message (default is the current working directory of
+.IR plumb ).
+.TP
+.B -i
+take the data from standard input rather than the argument strings.
+If an
+.B action=
+attribute is not otherwise specified,
+.I plumb
+will add an
+.B action=showdata
+attribute to the message.
+.SH FILES
+.TF /usr/$user/lib/plumbing
+.TP
+.B /usr/$user/lib/plumbing
+default rules file
+.TP
+.B /mnt/plumb
+mount point for
+.IR plumber (4).
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/plumb
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR plumb (2),
+.IR plumber (4),
+.IR plumb (6)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/pr b/sys/man/1/pr
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..14da53770
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/pr
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+.TH PR 1
+.SH NAME
+pr \- print file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B pr
+[
+.I option ...
+]
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Pr
+produces a printed listing of one or more
+.I files
+on its standard output.
+The output is separated into pages headed by a date,
+the name of the file or a specified header, and the page number.
+With no file arguments,
+.I pr
+prints its standard input.
+.PP
+Options apply to all following files but may be reset
+between files:
+.TP
+.BI - n
+Produce
+.IR n -column
+output.
+.TP
+.BI + n
+Begin printing with page
+.IR  n .
+.TP
+.B -b
+Balance columns on last page, in case of multi-column output.
+.TP
+.B -d
+Double space.
+.TP
+.BI -e n
+Set the tab stops for input text every
+.I n
+spaces.
+.TP
+.B  -h
+Take the next argument as a page header 
+.RI ( file
+by default).
+.TP
+.BI -i n
+Replace sequences of blanks in the output
+by tabs, using tab stops set every
+.I n
+spaces.
+.TP
+.BI -f
+Use form feeds to separate pages.
+.TP
+.BI -l n
+Take the length of the page to be
+.I n
+lines instead of the default 66.
+.TP
+.B  -m
+Print all
+.I files
+simultaneously,
+each in one column.
+.TP
+.BI -n m
+Number the lines of each
+.IR file .
+The numeric argument
+.IR m ,
+default 5,
+sets the width of the line-number field.
+.TP
+.BI -o n
+Offset the left margin
+.I n
+character positions.
+.TP
+.BI -p
+Pad each file printed to an even number of pages, if necessary.
+For two-sided printers,
+this will ensure each file will start a new page.
+.TP
+.BI -s c
+Separate columns by the single character
+.I c
+instead of aligning them with white space.
+A missing
+.I c
+is taken to be a tab.
+.TP
+.B  -t
+Do not print the 5-line header or the
+5-line trailer normally supplied for each page.
+.TP
+.BI -w n
+For multi-column output,
+take the width of the page to be
+.I n
+characters instead of the default 72.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/pr.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR cat (1),
+.IR lp (1)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/prof b/sys/man/1/prof
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..40e4a9901
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/prof
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
+.TH PROF 1
+.SH NAME
+prof, tprof, kprof \- display profiling data
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B prof
+[
+.B -dr
+]
+[
+.I program
+]
+[
+.I profile
+]
+.PP
+.B tprof
+.I pid
+.PP
+.B kprof
+.I kernel
+.I kpdata
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Prof
+interprets files produced automatically by programs loaded using the
+.B -p
+option of
+.IR 2l (1)
+or other loader.
+The symbol table in the
+named program file
+.RL ( 2.out
+etc., according to
+.BR $objtype ,
+by default)
+is read and correlated with the
+profile file
+.RL ( prof.out
+by default).
+For each symbol, the percentage
+of time (in seconds) spent executing between that symbol
+and the next
+is printed (in decreasing order),
+together with the time spent there and
+the number of times that routine was called.
+.PP
+Under option
+.BR -d ,
+.I prof
+prints the dynamic call graph of the target program,
+annotating the calls with the time spent in each routine
+and those it calls, recursively.  The output is indented
+two spaces for each call, and is formatted as
+.IP
+.EX
+symbol:time/ncall
+.EE
+.LP
+where
+.I symbol
+is the entry point of the call,
+.I time
+is in milliseconds,
+and
+.I ncall
+is the number of times that entry point was called at that
+point in the call graph.  If
+.I ncall
+is one, the
+.B /ncall
+is elided.
+Normally recursive calls are compressed to keep the output brief;
+option
+.B -r
+prints the full call graph.
+.PP
+The size of the buffer
+in
+.I program
+used to hold the profiling
+data, by default 2000 entries,
+may be controlled by setting the environment variable
+.B profsize
+before running
+.IR program .
+If the buffer fills, subsequent function calls may not be recorded.
+.PP
+The profiling code provided by the linker initializes itself to profile the current pid,
+producing a file called
+.B prof.\f2pid\fP.
+If a process forks, only the parent will continue to be profiled.  Forked children
+can cause themselves to be profile by calling
+.IP
+.EX
+prof(fn, arg, entries, what)
+.EE
+.LP
+which causes the function \f2fn\fP(\f2arg\fP) to be profiled.  When \f2fn\fP
+returns 
+.B prof.\f2pid\fP
+is produced for the current process pid.
+.PP
+The environment variable
+.B proftype
+can be set to one of
+.BR user ,
+.BR kernel ,
+.BR elapsed ,
+or
+.BR sample ,
+to profile time measured spent in user mode, time spent in user+kernel mode, or elapsed time,
+using the cycle counter, or the time in user mode using the kernel's HZ clock.  The cycle counter
+is currently only available on modern PCs and on the PowerPC.  Default profiling measures user
+time, using the cycle counter if it is available.
+.PP
+.I Tprof
+is similar to
+.IR prof ,
+but is intended for profiling multiprocess programs.
+It uses the
+.BI /proc/ pid /profile
+file to collect instruction frequency counts for the text image associated with the process,
+for all processes that share that text.
+It must be run while the program is still active, since the data is stored with the running program.
+To enable
+.I tprof
+profiling for a given process,
+.IP
+.EX
+echo profile > /proc/\f2pid\f1/ctl
+.EE
+.LP
+and then, after the program has run for a while, execute
+.IP
+.EX
+tprof \f2pid\f1
+.EE
+.LP
+Since the data collected for
+.I tprof
+is based on interrupt-time sampling of the program counter,
+.I tprof
+has no
+.B -d
+or
+.B -r
+options.
+.PP
+.I Kprof
+is similar to
+.IR prof ,
+but presents the data accumulated by the kernel
+profiling device,
+.IR kprof (3) .
+The symbol table file, that of the operating system kernel,
+and the data file, typically
+.BR /dev/kpdata ,
+must be provided.
+.I Kprof
+has no options and cannot present dynamic data.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/prof.c
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/kprof.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR 2l (1),
+.IR exec (2),
+.IR kprof (3)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/proof b/sys/man/1/proof
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..f0c6c7f5e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/proof
@@ -0,0 +1,134 @@
+.TH PROOF 1
+.SH NAME
+proof \- troff output interpreter
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B proof
+[
+.BI -m mag
+]
+[
+.BI -/ nview
+]
+[
+.B -F
+.I dir
+]
+[
+.B -d
+]
+[
+.I file
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Proof
+reads
+.IR troff (1)
+intermediate language from
+.I file
+or standard input
+and simulates the resulting pages on the screen.
+.PP
+After a page of text is displayed,
+.I proof
+pauses for a command from the keyboard.
+The typed commands are:
+.TP \w'newline\ \ \ 'u
+newline
+Go on to next page of text.
+.TP
+.B -
+Go back to the previous page.
+.TP
+.B q
+Quit.
+.TP
+.BI p n
+Print page
+.IR n .
+An out-of-bounds page number means the end nearer to that number;
+a missing number means the current page;
+a signed number means an offset to the current page.
+.TP
+.I n
+Same as
+.BI p n\f1.
+.TP
+.B c
+Clear the screen, then wait for another command.
+.TP
+.BI m mag
+Change the magnification at which the output is printed.
+Normally it is printed with magnification .9;
+.IR mag "=.5"
+shrinks it to half size;
+.IR mag "=2"
+doubles the size.
+.TP
+.BI x val
+Move everything
+.I val
+screen pixels to the right (left, if
+.I val
+is negative).
+.TP
+.BI y val
+Move everything
+.I val
+screen pixels down (up, if
+.I val
+is negative).
+.TP
+.BI / nview
+Split the window into
+.I nview
+pieces.  The current page goes into the rightmost, bottommost piece,
+and previous pages are shown in the other pieces.
+.TP
+.BI "-F " dir
+Use
+.I dir
+for fonts instead of
+.BR /lib/font/bit .
+.TP
+.B d
+Toggle the debug flag.
+.PD
+.PP
+These commands are also available, under slightly different form,
+from a menu on button 3.  The
+.B pan
+menu item allows arbitrary positioning of the page:
+after selecting
+.BR pan ,
+press the mouse button again and hold it down while moving
+the page to the desired location.  The page will be redisplayed
+in its entirety when the button is released.
+Mouse button 1 also pans, without the need for selecting from a menu.
+.PP
+The
+.BR m ,
+.BR x ,
+.BR y ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR / ,
+and
+.B d
+commands are also available as command line options.
+.SH FILES
+.TF \fL/lib/font/bit/MAP
+.TP
+.B /lib/font/bit/*
+fonts
+.TP
+.B /lib/font/bit/MAP
+how to convert troff output fonts and character names
+into screen fonts and character numbers
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/proof
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR lp (1), 
+.IR gs (1),
+.IR page (1)
+.br
+J. F. Ossanna and B. W. Kernighan,
+``Troff User's Manual''
diff --git a/sys/man/1/ps b/sys/man/1/ps
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..3f3c9629d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/ps
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+.TH PS 1
+.SH NAME
+ps, psu \- process status
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B ps
+[
+.B -apr
+]
+.PP
+.B psu
+[
+.B -apr
+]
+[
+.I user
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Ps
+prints information about processes.
+.I Psu
+prints only information about processes started by
+.I user
+(default
+.BR $user ).
+.PP
+For each process reported,
+the user,
+process id,
+user time,
+system time,
+size,
+state,
+and command name are printed.
+State is one of the following:
+.TP \w'\fLno\ \fIresource\ \ \ 'u
+.B Moribund
+Process has exited and is about to have its
+resources reclaimed.
+.TP
+.B Ready
+on the queue of processes ready to be run.
+.TP
+.B Scheding
+about to be run.
+.TP
+.B Running
+running.
+.TP
+.B Queueing
+waiting on a queue for a resource.
+.TP
+.B Wakeme
+waiting for I/O or some other kernel event to wake it up.
+.TP
+.B Broken
+dead of unnatural causes; lingering
+so that it can be examined.
+.TP
+.B Stopped
+stopped.
+.TP
+.B Stopwait
+waiting for another process to stop.
+.TP
+.B Fault
+servicing a page fault.
+.TP
+.B Idle
+waiting for something to do (kernel processes only).
+.TP
+.B New
+being created.
+.TP
+.B Pageout
+paging out some other process.
+.TP
+.I Syscall
+performing the named system call.
+.TP
+.BI no " resource
+waiting for more of a critical
+.IR resource .
+.PD
+.PP
+The
+.B -r
+flag causes
+.I ps
+to print, before the user time, the elapsed real time for the process.
+.PP
+The
+.B -p
+flag causes
+.I ps
+to print, after the system time, the baseline and current priorities of each process.
+.PP
+The
+.B -a
+flag causes
+.I ps
+to print the arguments for the process.  Newlines in arguments will be translated to spaces for display.
+.SH FILES
+.B /proc/*/status
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/ps.c
+.br
+.B /rc/bin/psu
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR acid (1),
+.IR db (1),
+.IR kill (1), 
+.IR ns (1),
+.IR proc (3)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/ps2pdf b/sys/man/1/ps2pdf
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..a4b9a5dd1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/ps2pdf
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+.TH PS2PDF 1
+.SH NAME
+ps2pdf, pdf2ps \- convert between PostScript and PDF
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B ps2pdf
+[
+.I gs-options
+]
+[
+.I input-file
+[
+.I output-file
+]
+]
+.PP
+.B pdf2ps
+[
+.I gs-options
+]
+[
+.I input-file
+[
+.I output-file
+]
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Ps2pdf
+and
+.I pdf2ps
+convert from PostScript to PDF and back by invoking
+.IR gs (1).
+If
+.I output-file
+is not specified, they write to standard output.
+If neither
+.I input-file
+nor
+.I output-file
+is not specified, they read from standard input and write to standard output.
+.PP
+The
+.I gs-options
+are passed to Ghostscript unaltered.
+The most useful option to
+.I ps2pdf
+is
+.BR -dCompatibilityLevel=\fIlevel ,
+which sets the version of PDF to be written.
+The default is
+.BR 1.2 ;
+.B 1.3
+and
+.B 1.4
+are also possible.
+Similarly, the most useful option to
+.I pdf2ps
+is
+.BR -dLanguageLevel=\fIlevel ,
+which sets the version of PostScript to be written.
+The default is
+.BR 2 ;
+.B 1
+and
+.B 3
+are also possible.
+.PP
+.I Ps2pdf
+produces output competitive with
+Adobe Distiller in most cases, and it
+accepts all the embedded PDF-generation hints that Adobe Distiller does.
+.PP
+.I Pdf2ps
+produces a PostScript file containing one large bitmap
+per page.  For a more direct and smaller translation,
+use Adobe Acrobat's
+.B -toPostScript
+command-line option.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /rc/bin/ps2pdf
+.br
+.B /rc/bin/pdf2ps
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR gs (1)
+.SH BUGS
+.IR Gs 's
+.I pdfwrite
+sometimes emits bad PDF at the default level 1.2.
+Adding
+.BR '-dCompatibilityLevel=1.4'
+should cure it.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/pump b/sys/man/1/pump
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..d1868d023
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/pump
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+.TH PUMP 1
+.SH NAME
+pump \- copy asynchronously via a large circular buffer
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B pump
+[
+.B -b
+.I iando
+] [
+.B -d
+.I sleepms
+] [
+.B -f
+.I ofile
+] [
+.B -i
+.I ireadsize
+] [
+.B -k
+.I KB-buf
+] [
+.B -o
+.I owritesize
+] [
+.B -s
+.I start-KB
+] [
+.I file
+\&... ]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Pump
+copies
+.IR files
+(or standard input if none)
+to standard output
+by using two processes,
+one reading and one writing,
+sharing a large circular buffer,
+thus permitting the reading process to
+get ahead of the writing process if the
+output device is slow (e.g., an optical disc).
+This in turn can keep the output device busy.
+The pipeline
+.L "dd | dd"
+can approximate this, but pipe buffering is limited to 64K
+bytes, which is fairly modest.
+.PP
+Options are:
+.TF \fL-m
+.TP
+.B -b
+sets the size of
+.I read
+and
+.I write
+operations to
+.I iando
+bytes.
+The default size is 8 kilobytes.
+.TP
+.B -d
+causes the output process to sleep for
+.I sleepms
+milliseconds initially, giving the reading
+process time to accumulate data in the buffer.
+.TP
+.B -f
+writes
+.I ofile
+rather than standard output
+.TP
+.B -i
+sets the size of
+.I read
+operations to
+.I ireadsize
+bytes.
+.TP
+.B -k
+allocates a circular buffer of
+.I KB-buf
+kilobytes rather than the default
+5000 kilobytes.
+.TP
+.B -o
+sets the size of
+.I write
+operations to
+.I owritesize
+bytes.
+.TP
+.B -s
+prevents output until
+.I start-KB
+kilobytes have been read.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Append a
+.IR venti (8)
+arena to a DVD or BD quickly.
+.PD 0
+.IP
+.EX
+cdfs
+venti/rdarena arena0 arena.3 |
+	pump -b 65536 -k 51200 >/mnt/cd/wd/arena.3
+.EE
+.PD
+.\" .SH FILES
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/pump.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR cp (1),
+.IR dd (1),
+.IR ecp (1),
+.IR cdfs (4)
+.SH BUGS
+.I Pump
+processes spin while waiting for the circular buffer
+to fill or drain.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/pwd b/sys/man/1/pwd
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..f36e4fbf5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/pwd
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+.TH PWD 1
+.SH NAME
+pwd, pbd \- working directory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B pwd
+.br
+.B pbd
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Pwd
+prints the path name of the working (current) directory.
+.I Pwd
+is guaranteed to return the same path that was used to
+enter the directory.
+If, however, the name space has changed, or directory names
+have been changed, this path name may no longer be valid.
+(See
+.IR fd2path (2)
+for a description of
+.BR pwd 's
+mechanism.)
+.PP
+.I Pbd
+prints the base name of the working (current) directory.
+It prints no final newline and is intended for applications
+such as constructing shell prompts.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/pwd.c
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/pbd.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.I cd
+in
+.IR rc (1),
+.IR bind (1),
+.IR intro (2),
+.IR getwd (2),
+.IR fd2path (2)
+
diff --git a/sys/man/1/ratrace b/sys/man/1/ratrace
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..515b5214f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/ratrace
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+.TH RATRACE 1
+.SH NAME
+ratrace \- trace process system calls
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B ratrace
+[
+.I pid
+] | [
+.I -c command
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Ratrace
+shows the system calls executed by a process,
+either the one with
+.I pid
+or a fresh invocation of
+.IR command .
+.PP
+Trace output is determined by the kernel, not
+.IR ratrace .
+Certain fixed rules apply.
+The first four fields of the output are
+pid, text name, system call name, and the PC of the user program.
+Data is always printed as
+.IB pointer /\c
+"\fIstring\fP",
+where the
+.I string
+is the first 32 bytes of the data, with
+.L \&.
+replacing non-printing ASCII characters
+(printing characters are those between ASCII space (SP) and delete (DEL), exclusive).
+Return values follow an
+.LR = ,
+and include the integer return value,
+the
+.I errstr
+(with "" if there is no
+.IR errstr ),
+and
+the start and stop times for the system call in nanoseconds.
+The times are exclusive of the overhead for tracing.
+.SH FILES
+.BI /proc/ pid /syscalltrace
+.br
+.BI /proc/ pid /ctl
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/ratrace.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR acid (1),
+.IR db (1),
+.IR proc (3)
+.SH BUGS
+The printing of the data is too limited in length;
+printing
+.L \&.
+instead of something more sensible is limiting.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/rc b/sys/man/1/rc
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..2dd2a1dd3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/rc
@@ -0,0 +1,993 @@
+.TH RC 1
+.SH NAME
+rc, cd, eval, exec, exit, flag, rfork, shift, wait, whatis, ., ~ \- command language
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B rc
+[
+.B -srdiIlxepvV
+]
+[
+.B -c
+.I command
+]
+[
+.B -m
+.I initial
+]
+[
+.I file
+[
+.I arg ...
+]]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Rc
+is the Plan 9 shell.
+It executes command lines read from a terminal or a file or, with the
+.B -c
+flag, from
+.I rc's
+argument list.
+.SS Command Lines
+A command line is a sequence of commands, separated by ampersands or semicolons
+.RB ( &
+or
+.BR ; ),
+terminated by a newline.
+The commands are executed in sequence
+from left to right.
+.I Rc
+does not wait for a command followed by
+.B &
+to finish executing before starting
+the following command.
+Whenever a command followed by
+.B &
+is executed, its process id is assigned to the
+.I rc
+variable
+.BR $apid .
+Whenever a command
+.I not
+followed by
+.B &
+exits or is terminated, the
+.I rc
+variable
+.B $status
+gets the process's wait message (see
+.IR wait (2));
+it will be the null string if the command was successful.
+.PP
+A long command line may be continued on subsequent lines by typing
+a backslash
+.RB ( \e )
+followed by a newline.
+This sequence is treated as though it were a blank.
+Backslash is not otherwise a special character.
+.PP
+A number-sign
+.RB ( # )
+and any following characters up to (but not including) the next newline
+are ignored, except in quotation marks.
+.SS Simple Commands
+A simple command is a sequence of arguments interspersed with I/O redirections.
+If the first argument is the name of an
+.I rc
+function or of one of
+.I rc's
+built-in commands, it is executed by
+.IR rc .
+Otherwise if the name starts with a slash
+.RB ( / ),
+it must be the path name of the program to be executed.
+Names containing no initial slash are searched for in
+a list of directory names stored in
+.BR $path .
+The first executable file of the given name found
+in a directory in
+.B $path
+is the program to be executed.
+To be executable, the user must have execute permission (see
+.IR stat (2))
+and the file must be either an executable binary
+for the current machine's CPU type, or a shell script.
+Shell scripts begin with a line containing the full path name of a shell
+(usually
+.BR /bin/rc ),
+prefixed by
+.LR #! .
+.PP
+The first word of a simple command cannot be a keyword unless it is
+quoted or otherwise disguised.
+The keywords are
+.EX
+	for in while if not switch fn ~ ! @
+.EE
+.SS Arguments and Variables
+A number of constructions may be used where
+.I rc's
+syntax requires an argument to appear.
+In many cases a construction's
+value will be a list of arguments rather than a single string.
+.PP
+The simplest kind of argument is the unquoted word:
+a sequence of one or more characters none of which is a blank, tab,
+newline, or any of the following:
+.EX
+	# ; & | ^ $ = ` ' { } ( ) < >
+.EE
+An unquoted word that contains any of the characters
+.B *
+.B ?
+.B [
+is a pattern for matching against file names.
+The character
+.B *
+matches any sequence of characters,
+.B ?
+matches any single character, and
+.BI [ class ]
+matches any character in the
+.IR class .
+If the first character of
+.I class
+is
+.BR ~ ,
+the class is complemented.
+The
+.I class
+may also contain pairs of characters separated by
+.BR - ,
+standing for all characters lexically between the two.
+The character
+.B /
+must appear explicitly in a pattern, as must the
+first character of the path name components
+.B .
+and
+.BR .. .
+A pattern is replaced by a list of arguments, one for each path name matched,
+except that a pattern matching no names is not replaced by the empty list,
+but rather stands for itself.
+Pattern matching is done after all other
+operations.
+Thus,
+.EX
+	x=/tmp echo $x^/*.c
+.EE
+matches
+.BR /tmp/*.c ,
+rather than matching
+.B "/*.c
+and then prefixing
+.BR /tmp .
+.PP
+A quoted word is a sequence of characters surrounded by single quotes
+.RB ( ' ).
+A single quote is represented in a quoted word by a pair of quotes
+.RB ( '' ).
+.PP
+Each of the following is an argument.
+.PD 0
+.HP
+.BI ( arguments )
+.br
+The value of a sequence of arguments enclosed in parentheses is
+a list comprising the members of each element of the sequence.
+Argument lists have no recursive structure, although their syntax may
+suggest it.
+The following are entirely equivalent:
+.EX
+	echo hi there everybody
+	((echo) (hi there) everybody)
+.EE
+.HP
+.BI $ argument
+.HP
+.BI $ argument ( subscript )
+.br
+The
+.I argument
+after the
+.B $
+is the name of a variable whose value is substituted.
+Multiple levels
+of indirection are possible, but of questionable utility.
+Variable values
+are lists of strings.
+If
+.I argument
+is a number
+.IR n ,
+the value is the
+.IR n th
+element of
+.BR $* ,
+unless
+.B $*
+doesn't have
+.I n
+elements, in which case the value is empty.
+If
+.I argument
+is followed by a parenthesized list of subscripts, the
+value substituted is a list composed of the requested elements (origin 1).
+The parenthesis must follow the variable name with no spaces.
+Subscripts can also take the form
+.IB m - n
+or
+.IB m -
+to indicate a sequence of elements.
+Assignments to variables are described below.
+.HP
+.BI $# argument
+.br
+The value is the number of elements in the named variable.
+A variable
+never assigned a value has zero elements.
+.HP
+$"\c
+.I argument
+.br
+The value is a single string containing the components of the named variable
+separated by spaces.  A variable with zero elements yields the empty string.
+.HP
+.BI `{ command }
+.br
+.I rc
+executes the
+.I command
+and reads its standard output, splitting it into a list of arguments,
+using characters in
+.B $ifs
+as separators.
+If
+.B $ifs
+is not otherwise set, its value is
+.BR "'\ \et\en'" .
+.HP
+.BI <{ command }
+.HP
+.BI >{ command }
+.br
+The
+.I command
+is executed asynchronously with its standard output or standard input
+connected to a pipe.
+The value of the argument is the name of a file
+referring to the other end of the pipe.
+This allows the construction of
+non-linear pipelines.
+For example, the following runs two commands
+.B old
+and
+.B new
+and uses
+.B cmp
+to compare their outputs
+.EX
+	cmp <{old} <{new}
+.EE
+.HP
+.IB argument ^ argument
+.br
+The
+.B ^
+operator concatenates its two operands.
+If the two operands
+have the same number of components, they are concatenated pairwise.
+If not,
+then one operand must have one component, and the other must be non-empty,
+and concatenation is distributive.
+.PD
+.SS Free Carets
+In most circumstances,
+.I rc
+will insert the
+.B ^
+operator automatically between words that are not separated by white space.
+Whenever one of
+.B $
+.B '
+.B `
+follows a quoted or unquoted word or an unquoted word follows a quoted word
+with no intervening blanks or tabs,
+a
+.B ^
+is inserted between the two.
+If an unquoted word immediately follows a
+.BR $ 
+and contains a character other than an alphanumeric, underscore,
+or
+.BR * ,
+a
+.B ^
+is inserted before the first such character.
+Thus
+.IP
+.B cc -$flags $stem.c
+.LP
+is equivalent to
+.IP
+.B cc -^$flags $stem^.c
+.SS I/O Redirections
+The sequence
+.BI > file
+redirects the standard output file (file descriptor 1, normally the
+terminal) to the named
+.IR file ;
+.BI >> file
+appends standard output to the file.
+The standard input file (file descriptor 0, also normally the terminal)
+may be redirected from a file by the sequence
+.BI < file \f1,
+or from an inline `here document'
+by the sequence
+.BI << eof-marker\f1.
+The contents of a here document are lines of text taken from the command
+input stream up to a line containing nothing but the
+.IR eof-marker ,
+which may be either a quoted or unquoted word.
+If
+.I eof-marker
+is unquoted, variable names of the form
+.BI $ word
+have their values substituted from
+.I rc's
+environment.
+If
+.BI $ word
+is followed by a caret
+.RB ( ^ ),
+the caret is deleted.
+If
+.I eof-marker
+is quoted, no substitution occurs.
+The standard input file
+may also be redirected from a file by the sequence
+.BI <> file \f1,
+which opens
+.I file
+exactly once, for reading and writing.
+.PP
+Redirections may be applied to a file-descriptor other than standard input
+or output by qualifying the redirection operator
+with a number in square brackets.
+For example, the diagnostic output (file descriptor 2)
+may be redirected by writing
+.BR "cc junk.c >[2]junk" .
+.PP
+A file descriptor may be redirected to an already open descriptor by writing
+.BI >[ fd0 = fd1 ],
+.BI <>[ fd0 = fd1 ],
+or
+.BI <[ fd0 = fd1 ]\f1.
+.I Fd1
+is a previously opened file descriptor and
+.I fd0
+becomes a new copy (in the sense of 
+.IR dup (2))
+of it.
+A file descriptor may be closed by writing
+.BI >[ fd0 =]
+or
+.BI <[ fd0 =]\f1.
+.PP
+Redirections are executed from left to right.
+Therefore,
+.B cc junk.c >/dev/null >[2=1]
+and
+.B cc junk.c >[2=1] >/dev/null
+have different effects: the first puts standard output in
+.BR /dev/null
+and then puts diagnostic output in the same place, where the second
+directs diagnostic output to the terminal and sends standard output to
+.BR /dev/null .
+.PP
+.B newconn <>/net/tcp/clone >[1=0]
+opens
+.B /net/tcp/clone
+exactly once for reading and writing and puts it on standard input and output.
+.B lpd <>[3]/net/tcp/42/data
+opens
+.B /net/tcp/42/data
+exactly once for reading and writing and puts it on file descriptor 3.
+.SS Compound Commands
+A pair of commands separated by a pipe operator
+.RB ( | )
+is a command.
+The standard output of the left command is sent through a pipe
+to the standard input of the right command.
+The pipe operator may be decorated
+to use different file descriptors.
+.BI |[ fd ]
+connects the output end of the pipe to file descriptor
+.I fd
+rather than 1.
+.BI |[ fd0 = fd1 ]
+connects output to
+.I fd1
+of the left command and input to
+.I fd0
+of the right command.
+.PP
+A pair of commands separated by
+.B &&
+or
+.B ||
+is a command.
+In either case, the left command is executed and its exit status examined.
+If the operator is
+.B &&
+the right command is executed if the left command's status is null.
+.B ||
+causes the right command to be executed if the left command's status is non-null.
+.PP
+The exit status of a command may be inverted (non-null is changed to null, null
+is changed to non-null) by preceding it with a
+.BR ! .
+.PP
+The
+.B |
+operator has highest precedence, and is left-associative (i.e. binds tighter
+to the left than the right).
+.B !
+has intermediate precedence, and
+.B &&
+and
+.B ||
+have the lowest precedence.
+.PP
+The unary
+.B @
+operator, with precedence equal to
+.BR ! ,
+causes its operand to be executed in a subshell.
+.PP
+Each of the following is a command.
+.PD 0
+.HP
+.B if (
+.I list
+.B )
+.I command
+.br
+A
+.I list
+is a sequence of commands, separated by
+.BR & ,
+.BR ; ,
+or newline.
+It is executed and
+if its exit status is null, the
+.I command
+is executed.
+.HP
+.B if not
+.I command
+.br
+The immediately preceding command must have been
+.BI if( list )
+.IR command .
+If its condition was non-zero, the
+.I command
+is executed.
+.HP
+.BI for( name
+.B in
+.IB arguments )
+.I command
+.HP
+.BI for( name )
+.I command
+.br
+The
+.I command
+is executed once for each
+.IR argument 
+with that argument assigned to
+.IR name .
+If the argument list is omitted,
+.B $*
+is used.
+.HP
+.BI while( list )
+.I command
+.br
+The
+.I list
+is executed repeatedly until its exit status is non-null.
+Each time it returns null status, the
+.I command
+is executed.
+An empty
+.I list
+is taken to give null status.
+.HP
+.BI "switch(" argument "){" list }
+.br
+The
+.IR list
+is searched for simple commands beginning with the word
+.BR case .
+(The search is only at the `top level' of the
+.IR list .
+That is,
+.B cases
+in nested constructs are not found.)
+.I Argument
+is matched against each word following
+.B case
+using the pattern-matching algorithm described above, except that
+.B /
+and the first characters of
+.B .
+and
+.B ..
+need not be matched explicitly.
+When a match is found, commands in the list are executed up to the next
+following
+.B case
+command (at the top level) or the closing brace.
+.HP
+.BI { list }
+.br
+Braces serve to alter the grouping of commands implied by operator
+priorities.
+The
+.I body
+is a sequence of commands separated by
+.BR & ,
+.BR ; ,
+or newline.
+.HP
+.BI "fn " name { list }
+.HP
+.BI "fn " name
+.br
+The first form defines a function with the given
+.IR name .
+Subsequently, whenever a command whose first argument is
+.I name
+is encountered, the current value of
+the remainder of the command's argument list will be assigned to
+.BR $* ,
+after saving its current value, and
+.I rc
+will execute the
+.IR list .
+The second form removes
+.IR name 's
+function definition.
+.HP
+.BI "fn " note { list }
+.br
+.HP
+.BI "fn " note
+.br
+A function with a special name will be called when
+.I rc
+receives a corresponding note; see
+.IR notify (2).
+The valid note names (and corresponding notes) are
+.B sighup
+.RB ( hangup ),
+.B sigint
+.RB ( interrupt ),
+.BR sigalrm
+.RB ( alarm ),
+and
+.B sigfpe
+(floating point trap).
+By default
+.I rc
+exits on receiving any signal, except when run interactively,
+in which case interrupts and quits normally cause
+.I rc
+to stop whatever it's doing and start reading a new command.
+The second form causes
+.I rc
+to handle a signal in the default manner.
+.I Rc
+recognizes an artificial note,
+.BR sigexit ,
+which occurs when
+.I rc
+is about to finish executing.
+.HP
+.IB name = "argument command"
+.br
+Any command may be preceded by a sequence of assignments
+interspersed with redirections.
+The assignments remain in effect until the end of the command, unless
+the command is empty (i.e. the assignments stand alone), in which case
+they are effective until rescinded by later assignments.
+.PD
+.SS Built-in Commands
+These commands are executed internally by
+.IR rc ,
+usually because their execution changes or depends on
+.IR rc 's
+internal state.
+.PD 0
+.HP
+.BI . " file ..."
+.br
+Execute commands from
+.IR file .
+.B $*
+is set for the duration to the remainder of the argument list following
+.IR file .
+.I File
+is searched for using
+.BR $path .
+.HP
+.BI builtin " command ..."
+.br
+Execute
+.I command
+as usual except that any function named
+.I command
+is ignored in favor of the built-in meaning.
+.HP
+.BI "cd [" dir "]"
+.br
+Change the current directory to
+.IR dir .
+The default argument is
+.BR $home .
+.I dir
+is searched for in each of the directories mentioned in
+.BR $cdpath .
+.HP
+.BI "eval [" "arg ..." "]"
+.br
+The arguments are concatenated separated by spaces into a single string,
+read as input to
+.IR rc ,
+and executed.
+.HP
+.BI "exec [" "command ..." "]"
+.br
+This instance of
+.I rc
+replaces itself with the given (non-built-in)
+.IR command .
+.HP
+.BI "flag " f " [+-]"
+.br
+Either set
+.RB ( + ),
+clear
+.RB ( - ),
+or test (neither
+.B +
+nor
+.BR - )
+the flag
+.IR f ,
+where
+.I f
+is a single character, one of the command line flags (see Invocation, below).
+.HP
+.BI "exit [" status "]"
+.br
+Exit with the given exit status.
+If none is given, the current value of
+.B $status
+is used.
+.HP
+.BR "rfork " [ nNeEsfFm ]
+.br
+Become a new process group using
+.BI rfork( flags )
+where
+.I flags
+is composed of the bitwise OR of the
+.B rfork
+flags specified by the option letters
+(see
+.IR fork (2)).
+If no
+.I flags
+are given, they default to
+.BR ens .
+The
+.I flags
+and their meanings are:
+.B n
+is
+.BR RFNAMEG ;
+.B N
+is
+.BR RFCNAMEG ;
+.B e
+is
+.BR RFENVG ;
+.B E
+is
+.BR RFCENVG ;
+.B s
+is
+.BR RFNOTEG ;
+.B f
+is
+.BR RFFDG ;
+.B F
+is
+.BR RFCFDG ;
+and
+.B m
+is
+.BR RFNOMNT .
+.HP
+.BI "shift [" n "]"
+.br
+Delete the first
+.IR n
+(default 1)
+elements of
+.BR $* .
+.HP
+.BI "wait [" pid "]"
+.br
+Wait for the process with the given
+.I pid
+to exit.
+If no
+.I pid
+is given, all outstanding processes are waited for.
+.HP
+.BI whatis " name ..."
+.br
+Print the value of each
+.I name
+in a form suitable for input to
+.IR rc .
+The output is
+an assignment to any variable,
+the definition of any function,
+a call to
+.B builtin
+for any built-in command, or
+the completed pathname of any executable file.
+.HP
+.BI ~ " subject pattern ..."
+.br
+The
+.I subject
+is matched against each
+.I pattern
+in sequence.
+If it matches any pattern,
+.B $status
+is set to zero.
+Otherwise,
+.B $status
+is set to one.
+Patterns are the same as for file name matching, except that
+.B /
+and the first character of
+.B .
+and
+.B ..
+need not be matched explicitly.
+The
+.I patterns
+are not subjected to
+file name matching before the
+.B ~
+command is executed, so they need not be enclosed in quotation marks.
+.PD
+.SS Environment
+The
+.I environment
+is a list of strings made available to executing binaries by the
+.B env
+device
+(see
+.IR env (3)).
+.I Rc
+creates an environment entry for each variable whose value is non-empty,
+and for each function.
+The string for a variable entry has the variable's name followed by
+.B =
+and its value.
+If the value has more than one component, these
+are separated by ctrl-a
+.RB ( '\e001' )
+characters.
+The string for a function is just the
+.I rc
+input that defines the function.
+The name of a function in the environment is the function name
+preceded by
+.LR fn# .
+.PP
+When
+.I rc
+starts executing it reads variable and function definitions from its
+environment.
+.SS Special Variables
+The following variables are set or used by
+.IR rc .
+.PD 0
+.TP \w'\fL$promptXX'u
+.B $*
+Set to
+.IR rc 's
+argument list during initialization.
+Whenever a
+.B .
+command or a function is executed, the current value is saved and
+.B $*
+receives the new argument list.
+The saved value is restored on completion of the
+.B .
+or function.
+.TP
+.B $apid
+Whenever a process is started asynchronously with
+.BR & ,
+.B $apid
+is set to its process id.
+.TP
+.B $home
+The default directory for
+.BR cd .
+.TP
+.B $ifs
+The input field separators used in backquote substitutions.
+If
+.B $ifs
+is not set in
+.IR rc 's
+environment, it is initialized to blank, tab and newline.
+.TP
+.B $path
+The search path used to find commands and input files
+for the
+.B .
+command.
+If not set in the environment, it is initialized by
+.BR "path=(.\ /bin)" .
+Its use is discouraged; instead use
+.IR bind (1)
+to build a
+.B /bin
+containing what's needed.
+.TP
+.B $pid
+Set during initialization to
+.IR rc 's
+process id.
+.TP
+.B $prompt
+When
+.I rc
+is run interactively, the first component of
+.B $prompt
+is printed before reading each command.
+The second component is printed whenever a newline is typed and more lines
+are required to complete the command.
+If not set in the environment, it is initialized by
+.BR "prompt=('%\ '\ '\ ')" .
+.TP
+.B $status
+Set to the wait message of the last-executed program.
+(unless started with
+.BR &).
+.B !
+and
+.B ~
+also change
+.BR $status .
+Its value is used to control execution in
+.BR && ,
+.BR || ,
+.B if
+and
+.B while
+commands.
+When
+.I rc
+exits at end-of-file of its input or on executing an
+.B exit
+command with no argument,
+.B $status
+is its exit status.
+.PD
+.SS Invocation
+If
+.I rc
+is started with no arguments it reads commands from standard input.
+Otherwise its first non-flag argument is the name of a file from which
+to read commands (but see
+.B -c
+below).
+Subsequent arguments become the initial value of
+.BR $* .
+.I Rc
+accepts the following command-line flags.
+.PD 0
+.TP \w'\fL-c\ \fIstring\fLXX'u
+.BI -c " string"
+Commands are read from
+.IR string .
+.TP
+.B -s
+Print out exit status after any command where the status is non-null.
+.TP
+.B -e
+Exit if
+.B $status
+is non-null after executing a simple command.
+.TP
+.B -i
+If
+.B -i
+is present, or
+.I rc
+is given no arguments and its standard input is a terminal,
+it runs interactively.
+Commands are prompted for using
+.BR $prompt .
+.TP
+.B -I
+Makes sure
+.I rc
+is not run interactively.
+.TP
+.B -l
+If
+.B -l
+is given or the first character of argument zero is
+.BR - ,
+.I rc
+reads commands from
+.BR $home/lib/profile ,
+if it exists, before reading its normal input.
+.TP
+.B -m
+Read commands to initialize
+.I rc
+from
+.I initial
+instead of from
+.BR /rc/lib/rcmain .
+.TP
+.B -p
+A no-op.
+.TP
+.B -d
+A no-op.
+.TP
+.B -v
+Echo input on file descriptor 2 as it is read.
+.TP
+.B -x
+Print each simple command before executing it.
+.TP
+.B -r
+Print debugging information (internal form of commands
+as they are executed).
+.PD
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/rc
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+Tom Duff,
+``Rc \- The Plan 9 Shell''.
+.SH BUGS
+There should be a way to match patterns against whole lists rather than
+just single strings.
+.PP
+Using
+.B ~
+to check the value of
+.B $status
+changes
+.BR $status .
+.PP
+Functions containing here documents don't work.
+.PP
+Free carets don't get inserted next to keywords.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/replica b/sys/man/1/replica
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..2201c017a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/replica
@@ -0,0 +1,341 @@
+.TH REPLICA 1
+.SH NAME
+changes, pull, push, scan \- client-server replica management
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B replica/pull
+[
+.B -nv
+]
+[
+.B -c
+.I name
+]...
+[
+.B -s
+.I name
+]...
+.I name
+[
+.I path
+...
+]
+.br
+.B replica/push
+[
+.B -nv
+]
+.I name
+[
+.I path
+...
+]
+.br
+.B replica/changes
+.I name
+[
+.I path
+...
+]
+.br
+.B replica/scan
+.I name
+[
+.I path
+...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These shell scripts provide a simple log-based client-server replica management.
+The server keeps a log of changes made to its file system,
+and clients synchronize by reading the log and applying these changes locally.
+.PP
+These scripts are a polished interface to the low-level tools described in
+.IR replica (8).
+See
+.IR replica (8)
+for details on the inner workings of replica management.
+These tools were written primarily as the fourth
+edition Plan 9 distribution mechanism, but they
+have wider applicability.
+For example, they could be used to synchronize one's
+home directory between a laptop and a central file server.
+.PP
+Replicas are described by configuration files.
+The
+.I name
+in all the replica commands is a configuration
+file.  Paths that do not begin with
+.BR / ,
+.BR ./ ,
+or
+.B ../
+are assumed to be relative to
+.BR $home/lib/replica .
+Configuration files are described below.
+.PP
+.I Replica/scan
+is the only one of these programs that does not
+need to be run on the client.
+It scans the server file system for changes
+and appends entries for those changes into the server log.
+Typically it is run on a machine with a fast network
+connection to the server file system.
+.PP
+.I Replica/pull
+copies changes from the server to the client,
+while
+.I replica/push
+copies changes from the client to the server.
+(Both run on the client.)
+If a list of
+.I paths
+is given, only changes to those paths or their children are copied.
+The
+.B -v
+flag causes
+.I pull
+or
+.I push
+to print a summary of what it is doing.
+Each status line is of the form
+.ift .sp 0.5
+.ifn .sp
+\h'0.25i'
+.I verb
+.I path
+.I serverpath
+.I mode
+.I uid
+.I gid
+.I mtime
+.I length
+.ift .sp 0.5
+.ifn .sp
+.I Verb
+describes the event:
+addition of a file
+.RB ( a ),
+deletion of a file
+.RB ( d ),
+a change to a file's contents
+.RB ( c ),
+or a change to a file's metadata
+.RB ( m ).
+.I Path
+is the file path on the client;
+.I serverpath
+is the file path on the server.
+.IR Mode ,
+.IR uid ,
+.IR gid ,
+and
+.I mtime
+are the file's metadata as in the
+.B Dir
+structure (see
+.IR stat (5)).
+For deletion events, the metadata is that of the deleted file.
+For other events, the metadata is that after the event.
+The
+.B -n
+flag causes
+.I pull
+or
+.I push
+to print the summary but not actually carry out the actions.
+.PP
+.I Push
+and
+.I pull
+are careful to notice simultaneous changes to a file or
+its metadata on both client and server.
+Such simultaneous changes are called
+.IR conflicts .
+Here, simultaneous does not mean at the same instant
+but merely that both changes were carried out without knowledge
+of the other.
+For example, if a client and server both make changes to a file
+without an intervening
+.I push
+or
+.IR pull ,
+the next
+.I push
+or
+.I pull
+will report an update/update conflict.
+If a conflict is detected, both files are left the same.
+The
+.B -c
+flag to
+.I pull
+specifies that conflicts for paths beginning with
+.I name
+should be resolved using the client's copy,
+while
+.B -s
+specifies the server's copy.
+The 
+.B -c
+and
+.B -s
+options may be repeated.
+.PP
+.I Replica/changes
+prints a list of local changes made on the client
+that have not yet been pushed to the server.
+It is like
+.I push
+with the
+.B -n
+flag, except that it does not check for conflicts
+and thus does not require the server to be available.
+.PP
+The replica configuration file is an
+.IR rc (1)
+script that must define the following functions and variables:
+.TP
+.B servermount
+A function that mounts the server; run on both client and server.
+.TP
+.B serverupdate
+A function that rescans the server for changes.
+Typically this command dials a CPU server known
+to be close to the file server and runs
+.I replica/scan
+on that well-connected machine.
+.TP
+.B serverroot
+The path to the root of the replicated file
+system on the server, as it will be in the name space
+after running
+.BR servermount .
+.TP
+.B serverlog
+The path to the server's change log, after running
+.BR servermount .
+.TP
+.B serverproto
+The path to the proto file describing the server's files,
+after running
+.BR servermount .
+Only used by
+.IR scan .
+.TP
+.B serverdb
+The path to the server's file database, after running
+.BR servermount .
+Only used by
+.IR scan .
+.TP
+.B clientmount
+A function to mount the client file system; run only on the client.
+.TP
+.B clientroot
+The path to the root of the replicated file system on the client,
+after running
+.BR clientmount .
+.TP
+.B clientlog
+The path to the client's copy of the server log file.
+The client log is maintained by
+.IR pull .
+.TP
+.B clientproto
+The path to the proto file describing the client's files.
+Only used by
+.IR changes .
+Often just a copy of
+.BR $serverproto .
+.TP
+.B clientdb
+The path to the client's file database, after running
+.BR clientmount .
+.TP
+.B clientexclude
+A (potentially empty) list of paths to exclude from 
+synchronization.  A typical use of this is to exclude
+the client database and log files.
+These paths are relative to the root of the replicated file system.
+.PD
+.PP
+As an example, the Plan 9 distribution replica configuration looks like:
+.EX
+    fn servermount { 9fs sources; bind /n/sources/plan9 /n/dist }
+    fn serverupdate { status='' }
+    serverroot=/n/dist
+    s=/n/dist/dist/replica
+    serverlog=$s/plan9.log
+    serverproto=$s/plan9.proto
+
+    fn clientmount { 9fs kfs }
+    clientroot=/n/kfs
+    c=/n/kfs/dist/replica
+    clientlog=$c/client/plan9.log
+    clientproto=$c/plan9.proto
+    clientdb=$c/client/plan9.db
+    clientexclude=(dist/replica/client)
+.EE
+.PP
+(Since the Plan 9 developers run
+.I scan
+manually to update the log, the clients need not do anything
+to rescan the file system.
+Thus 
+.B serverupdate
+simply returns successfully.)
+.PP
+The fourth edition Plan 9 distribution uses these
+tools to synchronize installations with the central
+server at Bell Labs.
+The replica configuration files and metadata are kept
+in 
+.BR /dist/replica .
+To update your system, make sure you are connected
+to the internet and run
+.EX
+    replica/pull /dist/replica/network
+.EE
+If conflicts are reported (say you have made local changes to 
+.B /rc/bin/cpurc
+and
+.BR /rc/bin/termrc ,
+but only want to keep the
+.B cpurc
+changes),
+use
+.EX
+    replica/pull -c rc/bin/cpurc -s rc/bin/termrc /dist/replica/network
+.EE
+to instruct
+.I pull
+to ignore the server's change to 
+.BR cpurc .
+.PP
+The script
+.B /usr/glenda/bin/rc/pull
+runs 
+.I pull
+with the
+.B -v
+flag and with
+.B /dist/replica/network
+inserted at the right point on the command line.
+Logged in as glenda, one can repeat the above example with:
+.EX
+    pull -c rc/bin/cpurc -s rc/bin/termrc
+.EE
+.PP
+To see a list of changes made to the local file system
+since installation, run
+.EX
+    replica/changes /dist/replica/network
+.EE
+(Although the script is called 
+.IR network ,
+since 
+.I changes
+is a local-only operation, the network need not be configured.)
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /rc/bin/replica
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR replica (8)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/resample b/sys/man/1/resample
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..35968d054
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/resample
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+.TH RESAMPLE 1
+.SH NAME
+resample \- resample a picture
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B resample
+[
+.B -x
+.I size
+] [
+.B -y
+.I size
+] [
+.I file
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Resample
+resamples its input image (default standard input) to a new size.
+The image is decimated or interpolated using
+a Kaiser window.
+.PP
+The size of the resampled image can be specified
+with the
+.B -x
+and
+.B -y
+options.
+An unadorned value sets the number of pixels of that dimension; a suffixed percent sign specifies a percentage.
+If only one of
+.B -x
+or
+.B -y
+is given, the other dimension is scaled to preserve
+the aspect ratio of the original image.
+Thus,
+.B -x50%
+will reduce the image to half its original dimension in both
+.B x
+and
+.BR y .
+.PP
+The input should be a Plan 9 image
+as described in 
+.IR image (6),
+and the output will be a compressed 24-bit
+.B r8g8b8
+image.
+To uncompress the image or change the pixel format, use
+.I iconv
+(see
+.IR crop (1)).
+.PP
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/resample.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO
+.IR crop (1),
+.IR image (6)
+.SH BUGS
+Faster algorithms exist, but this implementation produces correct pictures.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/rio b/sys/man/1/rio
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..e0b297dcb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/rio
@@ -0,0 +1,537 @@
+.TH RIO 1
+.SH NAME
+rio, label, window, wloc \- window system
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B rio
+[
+.BI "-i '"cmd '
+]
+[
+.BI "-k '"kbdcmd '
+]
+[
+.B -s
+]
+[
+.B -f
+.I font
+]
+.PP
+.B label
+.I name
+.PP
+.B window
+[
+.B -m
+] [
+.B -r
+.I minx miny maxx maxy
+] [
+.B -dx
+.I n
+] [
+.B -dy
+.I n
+] [
+.B -minx
+.I n
+] [
+.B -miny
+.I n
+] [
+.B -maxx
+.I n
+] [
+.B -maxy
+.I n
+] [
+.B -cd
+.I dir
+] [
+.B -hide
+] [
+.B -scroll
+] [
+.B -noscroll
+] [
+.I cmd
+.I arg ...
+]
+.PP
+.B wloc
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Rio
+manages asynchronous layers of text, or windows, on a raster display.
+It also serves a variety of files for communicating with
+and controlling windows; these are discussed in section
+.IR rio (4).
+.SS Commands
+The
+.I rio
+command starts a new instance of the window system.
+Its
+.B -i
+option names a startup script, which typically contains several
+.I window
+commands generated by
+.IR wloc .
+The
+.B -k
+option causes
+.I rio
+to run the command
+.I kbdcmd
+at startup and allow it to provide characters as keyboard input; the
+.B keyboard
+program described in
+.IR bitsyload (1)
+is the usual choice.
+.PP
+The
+.B -s
+option initializes windows so that text scrolls;
+the default is not to scroll.
+The
+.I font
+argument names a font used to display text, both in
+.IR rio 's
+menus
+and as a default for any programs running in its windows; it also
+establishes the
+environment variable
+.BR $font .
+If
+.B -f
+is not given,
+.I rio
+uses the imported value of
+.BR $font
+if set; otherwise it imports the default font from the underlying graphics
+server, usually the terminal's operating system.
+.PP
+The
+.I label
+command changes a window's identifying name.
+.PP
+The
+.I window
+command creates a window.
+By default, it creates a shell window and sizes and places it automatically.
+The geometry arguments control the size
+.IB ( dx ,
+.BR dy )
+and placement
+.RB ( minx ,
+.BR miny ,
+.BR maxx ,
+.BR maxy );
+the units are pixels with the
+upper left corner of the screen at (0, 0).
+The
+.B hide
+option causes the window to be created off-screen.
+The
+.B scroll
+and
+.B noscroll
+options set the scroll mode.
+The
+.B cd
+option sets the working directory.
+The optional command and arguments 
+define which program to run in the window.
+.PP
+By default,
+.I window
+uses
+.B /dev/wctl
+(see
+.IR rio (4))
+to create the window and run the command.  Therefore, the window and command
+will be created by
+.I rio
+and run in a new file name space, just as if the window had been created using the interactive menu.
+However, the
+.B -m
+option uses the file server properties of
+.I rio
+to
+.B mount
+(see
+.IR bind (1))
+the new window's name space within the name space of the program calling
+.IR window .
+This means, for example, that running
+.B window
+in a CPU window will create another window whose command runs on the terminal, where
+.I rio
+is running; while
+.B window
+.B -m
+will create another window whose command runs on the CPU server.
+.PP
+The
+.I wloc
+command prints the coordinates and label of each window in its instance of
+.I rio
+and is used to construct arguments for
+.IR window .
+.SS Window control
+Each window behaves as a separate terminal with at least one process
+associated with it.
+When a window is created, a new process (usually a shell; see
+.IR rc (1))
+is established and bound to the window as a new process group.
+Initially, each window acts as a simple terminal that displays character text;
+the standard input and output of its processes
+are attached to
+.BR /dev/cons .
+Other special files, accessible to the processes running in a window,
+may be used to make the window a more general display.
+Some of these are mentioned here; the complete set is
+discussed in
+.IR rio (4).
+.PP
+One window is
+.IR current ,
+and is indicated with a dark border and text;
+characters typed on the keyboard are available in the
+.B /dev/cons
+file of the process in the current window.
+Characters written on
+.B /dev/cons
+appear asynchronously in the associated window whether or not the window
+is current.
+.PP
+Windows are created, deleted and rearranged using the mouse.
+Clicking (pressing and releasing) mouse button 1 in a non-current
+window makes that window current and brings it in front of
+any windows that happen to be overlapping it.
+When the mouse cursor points to the background area or is in
+a window that has not claimed the mouse for its own use,
+pressing mouse button 3 activates a
+menu of window operations provided by
+.IR rio .
+Releasing button 3 then selects an operation.
+At this point, a gunsight or cross cursor indicates that
+an operation is pending.
+The button 3 menu operations are:
+.TF Resize
+.TP
+.B New
+Create a window.
+Press button 3 where one corner of the new rectangle should
+appear (cross cursor), and move the mouse, while holding down button 3, to the
+diagonally opposite corner.
+Releasing button 3 creates the window, and makes it current.
+Very small windows may not be created.
+.TP
+.B Resize
+Change the size and location of a window.
+First click button 3 in the window to be changed
+(gunsight cursor).
+Then sweep out a window as for the
+.B New
+operation.
+The window is made current.
+.TP
+.B Move
+Move a window to another location.
+After pressing and holding button 3 over the window to be moved (gunsight cursor),
+indicate the new position by dragging the rectangle to the new location.
+The window is made current.
+Windows may be moved partially off-screen.
+.TP
+.B Delete
+Delete a window.  Click in the window to be deleted (gunsight cursor).
+Deleting a window causes a
+.L hangup
+note to be sent to all processes in the window's process group
+(see
+.IR notify (2)).
+.TP
+.B Hide
+Hide a window.  Click in the window to be hidden (gunsight cursor);
+it will be moved off-screen.
+Each hidden window is given a menu entry in the button 3 menu according to the
+value of the file
+.BR /dev/label ,
+which
+.I rio
+maintains
+(see
+.IR rio (4)).
+.TP
+.I label
+Restore a hidden window.
+.PD
+.PP
+Windows may also be arranged by dragging their borders.
+Pressing button 1 or 2 over a window's border allows one to
+move the corresponding edge or corner, while button 3
+moves the whole window.
+.PD
+.SS Text windows
+Characters typed on the keyboard or written to
+.B /dev/cons
+collect in the window to form
+a long, continuous document.
+.PP
+There is always some
+.I selected
+.IR text ,
+a contiguous string marked on the screen by reversing its color.
+If the selected text is a null string, it is indicated by a hairline cursor
+between two characters.
+The selected text
+may be edited by mousing and typing.
+Text is selected by pointing and clicking button 1
+to make a null-string selection, or by pointing,
+then sweeping with button 1 pressed.
+Text may also be selected by double-clicking:
+just inside a matched delimiter-pair
+with one of
+.B {[(<«`'"
+on the left and
+.B }])>»`'"
+on the right, it selects all text within
+the pair; at the beginning
+or end of a line, it selects the line; within or at the edge of an alphanumeric word,
+it selects the word.
+.PP
+Characters typed on the keyboard replace the selected text;
+if this text is not empty, it is placed in a
+.I snarf buffer
+common to all windows but distinct from that of
+.IR sam (1).
+.PP
+Programs access the text in the window at a single point
+maintained automatically by
+.IR rio .
+The
+.I output point
+is the location in the text where the next character written by
+a program to
+.B /dev/cons
+will appear; afterwards, the output point is the null string
+beyond the new character.
+The output point is also the location in the text of the next character
+that will be read (directly from the text in the window,
+not from an intervening buffer)
+by a program from
+.BR /dev/cons .
+When such a read will occur is, however, under control of
+.I rio
+and the user.
+.PP
+In general there is text in the window after the output point,
+usually placed there by typing but occasionally by the editing
+operations described below.
+A pending read of
+.B /dev/cons
+will block until the text after the output point contains
+a newline, whereupon the read may
+acquire the text, up to and including the newline.
+After the read, as described above, the output point will be at
+the beginning of the next line of text.
+In normal circumstances, therefore, typed text is delivered
+to programs a line at a time.
+Changes made by typing or editing before the text is read will not
+be seen by the program reading it.
+If the program in the window does not read the terminal,
+for example if it is a long-running computation, there may
+accumulate multiple lines of text after the output point;
+changes made to all this text will be seen when the text
+is eventually read.
+This means, for example, that one may edit out newlines in
+unread text to forestall the associated text being read when
+the program finishes computing.
+This behavior is very different from most systems.
+.PP
+Even when there are newlines in the output text,
+.I rio
+will not honor reads if the window is in
+.I hold
+.IR mode ,
+which is indicated by a white cursor and blue text and border.
+The ESC character toggles hold mode.
+Some programs, such as
+.IR mail (1),
+automatically turn on hold mode to simplify the editing of multi-line text;
+type ESC when done to allow
+.I mail
+to read the text.
+.PP
+An EOT character (control-D) behaves exactly like newline except
+that it is not delivered to a program when read.
+Thus on an empty line an EOT serves to deliver an end-of-file indication:
+the read will return zero characters.
+Like newlines, unread EOTs may be successfully edited out of the text.
+The BS character (control-H) erases the character before the selected text.
+The ETB character (control-W) erases any nonalphanumeric characters, then
+the alphanumeric word just before the selected text.
+`Alphanumeric' here means non-blanks and non-punctuation.
+The NAK character (control-U) erases the text after the output point,
+and not yet read by a program, but not more than one line.
+All these characters are typed on the keyboard and hence replace
+the selected text; for example, typing a BS with a word selected
+places the word in the snarf buffer, removes it from the screen,
+and erases the character before the word.
+.PP
+An ACK character (control-F) or Insert character triggers file name completion
+for the preceding string (see
+.IR complete (2)).
+.PP
+Typing a left or right arrow moves the cursor one character in that direction.
+Typing an SOH character (control-A) moves the cursor to the beginning of the
+current line; an ENQ character (control-E) moves to the end.
+.PP
+Text may be moved vertically within the window.
+A scroll bar on the left of the window shows in its clear portion what fragment of the
+total output text is visible on the screen, and in its gray part what
+is above or below view;
+it measures characters, not lines.
+Mousing inside the scroll bar moves text:
+clicking button 1 with the mouse pointing inside the scroll bar
+brings the line at the top of the
+window to the cursor's vertical location;
+button 3 takes the line at the cursor to the top of the window;
+button 2, treating the scroll bar as a ruler, jumps to the indicated portion
+of the stored text.
+Holding a button pressed in the scroll bar will cause the text
+to scroll continuously until the button is released.
+Also, a page down
+or down-arrow
+scrolls forward
+half a window, and page up or up-arrow scrolls back.
+Typing the home key scrolls to the top of the window; typing the end key scrolls
+to the bottom.
+.PP
+The DEL character sends an
+.L interrupt
+note to all processes in the window's process group.
+Unlike the other characters, the DEL, VIEW, and up- and down-arrow
+keys do not affect the selected text.
+The left (right) arrow key moves the selection to one character
+before (after) the current selection.
+.PP
+Normally, written output to a window blocks when
+the text reaches the end of the screen;
+a button 2 menu item toggles scrolling.
+.PP
+Other editing operations are selected from a menu on button 2.
+The
+.B cut
+operation deletes the selected text
+from the screen and puts it in the snarf buffer;
+.B snarf
+copies the selected text to the buffer without deleting it;
+.B paste
+replaces the selected text with the contents of the buffer;
+and
+.B send
+copies the snarf buffer to just after the output point, adding a final newline
+if missing.
+.B Paste
+will sometimes and
+.B send
+will always place text after the output point; the text so placed
+will behave exactly as described above.  Therefore when pasting
+text containing newlines after the output point, it may be prudent
+to turn on hold mode first.
+.PP
+The
+.B plumb
+menu item sends the contents of the selection (not the snarf buffer) to the
+.IR plumber (4).
+If the selection is empty, it sends the white-space-delimited text
+containing the selection (typing cursor).
+A typical use of this feature is to tell the editor to find the source of an error
+by plumbing the file and line information in a compiler's diagnostic.
+.SS Raw text windows
+Opening or manipulating certain files served by
+.IR rio
+suppresses some of the services supplied to ordinary text windows.
+While the file
+.B /dev/mouse
+is open, any mouse operations are the responsibility of another program
+running in the window.  Thus,
+.I rio
+refrains from maintaining
+the scroll bar,
+supplying text editing or menus, interpreting the
+VIEW key as a request to scroll, and also turns scrolling on.
+.PP
+The file
+.B /dev/consctl
+controls interpretation of keyboard input.
+In particular, a raw mode may be set:
+in a raw-input window, no typed keyboard characters are special,
+they are not echoed to the screen, and all are passed
+to a program immediately upon reading, instead of being gathered into
+lines.
+.SS Graphics windows
+A program that holds
+.B /dev/mouse
+and
+.B /dev/consctl
+open after putting the console in raw mode
+has complete control of the window:
+it interprets all mouse events, gets all keyboard characters,
+and determines what appears on the screen.
+.SH FILES
+.TF /srv/riowctl.\fIuser\fP.\fIpid\fP
+.TP
+.B /lib/font/bit/*
+font directories
+.TP
+.B /mnt/wsys
+Files served by
+.I rio
+(also unioned in
+.B /dev
+in a window's name space, before the terminal's real
+.B /dev
+files)
+.TP
+.B /srv/rio.\fIuser\fP.\fIpid\fP
+Server end of
+.IR rio .
+.TP
+.B /srv/riowctl.\fIuser\fP.\fIpid\fP
+Named pipe for
+.I wctl
+messages.
+.SH SOURCE
+.TF /sys/src/cmd/rio
+.TP
+.B /sys/src/cmd/rio
+.TP
+.B /rc/bin/label
+.TP
+.B /rc/bin/window
+.TP
+.B /rc/bin/wloc
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR rio (4),
+.IR rc (1),
+.IR cpu (1),
+.IR sam (1),
+.IR mail (1),
+.IR proof (1),
+.IR graphics (2),
+.IR frame (2),
+.IR window (2),
+.IR notify (2),
+.IR cons (3),
+.IR draw (3),
+.IR mouse (3),
+.IR keyboard (6)
+.SH BUGS
+The standard input of
+.I window
+is redirected to the newly created window, so there is no way to pipe the output
+of a program to the standard input of the new window.
+In some cases,
+.IR plumb (1)
+can be used to work around this limitation.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/rm b/sys/man/1/rm
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..c5786f92e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/rm
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+.TH RM 1
+.SH NAME
+rm \- remove files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B rm
+[
+.B -fr
+]
+.I file ...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Rm
+removes files or directories.
+A directory is removed only if it is empty.
+Removal of a file requires write permission in its directory,
+but neither read nor write permission on the file itself.
+The options are
+.TP
+.B -f
+Don't report files that can't be removed.
+.TP
+.B -r
+Recursively delete the
+entire contents of a directory
+and the directory itself.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/rm.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR remove (2)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/rwd b/sys/man/1/rwd
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..14e1a57ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/rwd
@@ -0,0 +1,161 @@
+.TH RWD 1
+.SH NAME
+rwd, conswdir \- maintain remote working directory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B rwd
+.I path
+.PP
+.B conswdir
+[
+.I prog
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Rwd
+and
+.I conswdir
+conspire to keep 
+.IR rio (4)
+and
+.IR acme (4)
+informed about the current directory on
+remote systems during login sessions.
+.I Rio
+and
+.I acme
+include this information in plumb messages sent to
+.IR plumber (4).
+If the remote system's name space is mounted in the
+plumber's name space,
+the end result is that file paths printed during the session
+are plumbable.
+.PP
+.I Rwd
+informs
+.IR rio
+and
+.IR acme
+of directory changes.
+The name of the remote machine is taken from
+the environment variable
+.BR $remotesys .
+.I Rwd
+writes the full path to
+.BR /dev/wdir ;
+writes the last element of the path,
+suffixed by
+.BI @ remotesys \fR,
+to
+.BR /dev/label ;
+and when run inside a 
+.I win
+(see
+.IR acme (1))
+window, changes the window title to
+.IB path /- remotesys
+using
+.BR /dev/acme/ctl .
+.PP
+.I Conswdir
+copies standard input to standard output, looking for in-band messages
+about directory changes.
+The messages are of the form:
+.IP
+.EX
+\e033];\fIpath\fP\e007
+.EE
+.LP
+where
+.B \e033
+and
+.B \e007
+are ASCII escape and bell characters.
+Such messages are removed from the stream and not printed to standard output;
+for each such message
+.I conswdir
+runs
+.I prog
+(default
+.BR /bin/rwd )
+with
+.I path
+as its only argument.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Add this plumbing rule (see
+.IR plumb (6))
+in order to run commands in the plumber's name space:
+.IP
+.EX
+# have plumber run command
+kind is text
+data matches 'Local (.*)'
+plumb to none
+plumb start rc -c $1
+.EE
+.PP
+Mount a Unix system in your name space and the plumber's:
+.IP
+.EX
+% 9fs unix
+% plumb 'Local 9fs unix'
+.EE
+.LP
+(If you're using acme, execute
+.B "Local 9fs unix
+with the middle button to mount the Unix system in acme's name space.)
+.PP
+Connect to the Unix system, processing in-band directory change messages:
+.IP
+.EX
+% ssh unix | aux/conswdir
+.EE
+.PP
+Add this shell function to your
+.B .profile
+on the Unix system
+to generate directory change messages every time a
+.B cd
+command is executed:
+.IP
+.EX
+H=`hostname | sed 's/\e..*//'`
+_cd () {
+	\ecd $* &&
+	case $- in
+	*i*)
+		_dir=`pwd`
+		echo /n/$H$_dir | awk '{printf("\e033];%s\e007", $1);}'
+	esac
+}
+alias cd=_cd
+.EE
+.PP
+The examples described so far only help for relative
+path names.  Add this plumbing rule to handle rooted names
+like
+.BR /usr/include/stdio.h :
+.IP
+.EX
+# remote rooted path names
+type is text
+wdir matches '/n/unix(/.*)?'
+data matches '/([.a-zA-Z¡-￿0-9_/\e-]*[a-zA-Z¡-￿0-9_/\e-])('$addr')?'
+arg isfile /n/unix/$1
+data set $file
+attr add addr=$3
+plumb to edit
+plumb client window $editor
+.EE
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /rc/bin/rwd
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/aux/conswdir.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR plumber (4),
+.IR plumb (6),
+.IR srv (4)
+.SH BUGS
+This mechanism is clunky, but Unix and SSH
+make it hard to build a better one.
+.PP
+The escape sequence was chosen because
+it changes the title on xterm windows.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/sam b/sys/man/1/sam
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..282448d24
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/sam
@@ -0,0 +1,891 @@
+.TH SAM 1
+.ds a \fR*\ \fP
+.SH NAME
+sam, B, sam.save, samterm \- screen editor with structural regular expressions 
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B sam
+[
+.I option ...
+] [
+.I files
+]
+.PP
+.B sam
+.B -r
+.I machine
+.PP
+.B sam.save
+.PP
+.B B
+[
+.BI -nnnn
+]
+.I file ...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Sam
+is a multi-file editor.
+It modifies a local copy of an external file.
+The copy is here called a
+.IR file .
+The files are listed in a menu available through mouse button 3
+or the
+.B n
+command.
+Each file has an associated name, usually the name of the
+external file from which it was read, and a `modified' bit that indicates whether
+the editor's file agrees with the external file.
+The external file is not read into
+the editor's file until it first becomes the current file\(emthat to
+which editing commands apply\(emwhereupon its menu entry is printed.
+The options are
+.TF -rmachine
+.TP
+.B -a
+Autoindent.  In this mode, when a newline character is typed
+in the terminal interface,
+.I samterm
+copies leading white space on the current line to the new line.
+.TP
+.B -d
+Do not `download' the terminal part of
+.IR sam .
+Editing will be done with the command language only, as in
+.IR ed (1).
+.TP
+.BI -r " machine
+Run the host part remotely
+on the specified machine, the terminal part locally.
+.TP
+.BI -s " path
+Start the host part from the specified file on the remote host.
+Only meaningful with the
+.BI -r
+option.
+.TP
+.BI -t " path
+Start the terminal part from the specified file.  Useful
+for debugging.
+.PD
+.SS Regular expressions
+Regular expressions are as in
+.IR regexp (6)
+with the addition of
+.BR \en
+to represent newlines.
+A regular expression may never contain a literal newline character.
+The empty
+regular expression stands for the last complete expression encountered.
+A regular expression in
+.I sam
+matches the longest leftmost substring formally
+matched by the expression.
+Searching in the reverse direction is equivalent
+to searching backwards with the catenation operations reversed in
+the expression.
+.SS Addresses
+An address identifies a substring in a file.
+In the following, `character
+.IR n '
+means the null string
+after the
+.IR n -th
+character in the file, with 1 the
+first character in the file.
+`Line
+.IR n '
+means the
+.IR n -th
+match,
+starting at the beginning of the file, of the regular expression
+.LR .*\en? .
+All files always have a current substring, called dot,
+that is the default address.
+.SS Simple Addresses
+.PD 0
+.TP
+.BI # n
+The empty string after character
+.IR n ;
+.B #0
+is the beginning of the file.
+.TP
+.I n
+Line
+.IR n ;
+.B 0
+is the beginning of the file.
+.TP
+.BI  / regexp /
+.PD 0
+.TP
+.BI ? regexp ?
+The substring that matches the regular expression,
+found by looking toward the end 
+.RB ( / )
+or beginning
+.RB ( ? )
+of the file,
+and if necessary continuing the search from the other end to the
+starting point of the search.
+The matched substring may straddle
+the starting point.
+When entering a pattern containing a literal question mark
+for a backward search, the question mark should be
+specified as a member of a class.
+.PD
+.TP
+.B 0
+The string before the first full line.
+This is not necessarily
+the null string; see
+.B +
+and
+.B -
+below.
+.TP
+.B $
+The null string at the end of the file.
+.TP
+.B .
+Dot.
+.TP
+.B \&'
+The mark in the file (see the
+.B k
+command below).
+.TP
+\fB"\f2regexp\fB"\f1\f1
+Preceding a simple address (default
+.BR . ),
+refers to the address evaluated in the unique file whose menu line
+matches the regular expression.
+.PD
+.SS Compound Addresses
+In the following,
+.I a1
+and
+.I a2
+are addresses.
+.TF a1+a2
+.TP
+.IB a1 + a2
+The address
+.I a2
+evaluated starting at the end of
+.IR a1 .
+.TP
+.IB a1 - a2
+The address
+.I a2
+evaluated looking in the reverse direction
+starting at the beginning of
+.IR a1 .
+.TP
+.IB a1 , a2
+The substring from the beginning of
+.I a1
+to the end of
+.IR a2 .
+If
+.I a1
+is missing,
+.B 0
+is substituted.
+If
+.I a2
+is missing,
+.B $
+is substituted.
+.TP
+.IB  a1 ; a2
+Like
+.IB a1 , a2\f1,
+but with
+.I a2
+evaluated at the end of, and dot set to,
+.IR a1 .
+.PD
+.PP
+The operators
+.B +
+and
+.B -
+are high precedence, while
+.B ,
+and
+.B ;
+are low precedence.
+.PP
+In both
+.B +
+and
+.B -
+forms, if
+.I a2
+is a line or character address with a missing
+number, the number defaults to 1.
+If
+.I a1
+is missing,
+.L .
+is substituted.
+If both
+.I a1
+and
+.I a2
+are present and distinguishable,
+.B +
+may be elided.
+.I a2
+may be a regular
+expression; if it is delimited by
+.LR ? 's,
+the effect of the
+.B +
+or
+.B -
+is reversed.
+.PP
+It is an error for a compound address to represent a malformed substring.
+Some useful idioms: 
+.IB a1 +-
+\%(\f2a1\fB-+\f1)
+selects the line containing
+the end (beginning) of a1.
+.BI 0/ regexp /
+locates the first match of the expression in the file.
+(The form
+.B 0;//
+sets dot unnecessarily.)
+.BI ./ regexp /// 
+finds the second following occurrence of the expression,
+and
+.BI .,/ regexp /
+extends dot.
+.SS Commands
+In the following, text demarcated by slashes represents text delimited
+by any printable
+character except alphanumerics.
+Any number of
+trailing delimiters may be elided, with multiple elisions then representing
+null strings, but the first delimiter must always
+be present.
+In any delimited text,
+newline may not appear literally;
+.B \en
+may be typed for newline; and
+.B \e/
+quotes the delimiter, here 
+.LR / .
+Backslash is otherwise interpreted literally, except in
+.B s
+commands.
+.PP
+Most commands may be prefixed by an address to indicate their range
+of operation.
+Those that may not are marked with a 
+.L *
+below.
+If a command takes
+an address and none is supplied, dot is used.
+The sole exception is
+the
+.B w
+command, which defaults to
+.BR 0,$ .
+In the description, `range' is used
+to represent whatever address is supplied.
+Many commands set the
+value of dot as a side effect.
+If so, it is always set to the `result'
+of the change: the empty string for a deletion, the new text for an
+insertion, etc. (but see the
+.B s
+and
+.B e
+commands).
+.br
+.ne 1.2i
+.SS Text commands
+.PD 0
+.TP
+.BI a/ text /
+.TP
+or
+.TP
+.B  a
+.TP
+.I lines of text
+.TP
+.B .
+Insert the text into the file after the range.
+Set dot.
+.PD
+.TP
+.B c\fP
+.br
+.ns
+.TP
+.B i\fP
+Same as
+.BR a ,
+but
+.B c
+replaces the text, while
+.B i
+inserts
+.I before
+the range.
+.TP
+.B d
+Delete the text in the range.
+Set dot.
+.TP
+.BI s/ regexp / text /
+Substitute
+.I text
+for the first match to the regular expression in the range.
+Set dot to the modified range.
+In 
+.I text
+the character
+.B &
+stands for the string
+that matched the expression. 
+Backslash behaves as usual unless followed by
+a digit:
+.BI \e d
+stands for the string that matched the
+subexpression begun by the
+.IR d -th
+left parenthesis.
+If
+.I s
+is followed immediately by a
+number
+.IR n ,
+as in
+.BR s2/x/y/ ,
+the
+.IR n -th
+match in the range is substituted.
+If the
+command is followed by a
+.BR g ,
+as in
+.BR s/x/y/g ,
+all matches in the range
+are substituted.
+.TP
+.BI m " a1
+.br
+.ns
+.TP
+.BI t " a1
+Move
+.RB ( m )
+or copy
+.RB ( t )
+the range to after
+.IR a1 .
+Set dot.
+.SS Display commands
+.PD 0
+.TP
+.B p
+Print the text in the range.
+Set dot.
+.TP
+.B =
+Print the line address and character address of the range.
+.TP
+.B =#
+Print just the character address of the range.
+.PD
+.SS File commands
+.PD 0
+.TP
+.BI \*ab " file-list
+Set the current file to the first file named in the list
+that
+.I sam
+also has in its menu.
+The list may be expressed
+.BI < "Plan 9 command"
+in which case the file names are taken as words (in the shell sense)
+generated by the Plan 9 command.
+.TP
+.BI \*aB " file-list
+Same as
+.BR b ,
+except that file names not in the menu are entered there,
+and all file names in the list are examined.
+.TP
+.B \*an
+Print a menu of files.
+The format is:
+.RS
+.TP 11
+.BR ' " or blank
+indicating the file is modified or clean,
+.TP 11
+.BR - " or \&" +
+indicating the file is unread or has been read
+(in the terminal,
+.B *
+means more than one window is open),
+.TP 11
+.BR . " or blank
+indicating the current file,
+.TP 11
+a blank,
+.TP 11
+and the file name.
+.RE
+.TP 0
+.BI \*aD " file-list
+Delete the named files from the menu.
+If no files are named, the current file is deleted.
+It is an error to
+.B D
+a modified file, but a subsequent
+.B D
+will delete such a file.
+.PD
+.SS I/O Commands
+.PD 0
+.TP
+.BI \*ae " filename
+Replace the file by the contents of the named external file.
+Set dot to the beginning of the file.
+.TP
+.BI r " filename
+Replace the text in the range by the contents of the named external file.
+Set dot.
+.TP
+.BI w " filename
+Write the range (default
+.BR 0,$ )
+to the named external file.
+.TP
+.BI \*af " filename
+Set the file name and print the resulting menu entry.
+.PP
+If the file name is absent from any of these, the current file name is used.
+.B e
+always sets the file name;
+.B r
+and
+.B w
+do so if the file has no name.
+.TP
+.BI < " Plan 9-command
+Replace the range by the standard output of the
+Plan 9 command.
+.TP
+.BI > " Plan 9-command
+Send the range to the standard input of the
+Plan 9 command.
+.TP
+.BI | " Plan 9-command
+Send the range to the standard input, and replace it by
+the standard output, of the
+Plan 9 command.
+.TP
+.BI \*a! " Plan 9-command
+Run the
+Plan 9 command.
+.TP
+.BI \*acd " directory
+Change working directory.
+If no directory is specified,
+.B $home
+is used.
+.PD
+.PP
+In any of
+.BR < ,
+.BR > ,
+.B |
+or
+.BR ! ,
+if the
+.I Plan 9 command
+is omitted the last
+.I Plan 9 command
+(of any type) is substituted.
+If
+.I sam
+is
+.I downloaded
+(using the mouse and raster display, i.e. not using option
+.BR -d ),
+.B !
+sets standard input to
+.BR /dev/null ,
+and otherwise
+unassigned output
+.RB ( stdout
+for
+.B !
+and
+.BR > ,
+.B stderr
+for all) is placed in
+.B /tmp/sam.err
+and the first few lines are printed.
+.SS Loops and Conditionals
+.PD 0
+.TP
+.BI x/ regexp / " command
+For each match of the regular expression in the range, run the command
+with dot set to the match.
+Set dot to the last match.
+If the regular
+expression and its slashes are omitted, 
+.L /.*\en/
+is assumed.
+Null string matches potentially occur before every character
+of the range and at the end of the range.
+.TP
+.BI y/ regexp / " command
+Like
+.BR x ,
+but run the command for each substring that lies before, between,
+or after
+the matches that would be generated by
+.BR x .
+There is no default regular expression.
+Null substrings potentially occur before every character
+in the range.
+.TP
+.BI \*aX/ regexp / " command
+For each file whose menu entry matches the regular expression,
+make that the current file and
+run the command.
+If the expression is omitted, the command is run
+in every file.
+.TP
+.BI \*aY/ regexp / " command
+Same as
+.BR X ,
+but for files that do not match the regular expression,
+and the expression is required.
+.TP
+.BI g/ regexp / " command
+.br
+.ns
+.TP
+.BI v/ regexp / " command
+If the range contains
+.RB ( g )
+or does not contain
+.RB ( v )
+a match for the expression,
+set dot to the range and run the command.
+.PP
+These may be nested arbitrarily deeply, but only one instance of either
+.B X
+or
+.B Y
+may appear in a \%single command.
+An empty command in an
+.B x
+or
+.B y
+defaults to
+.BR p ;
+an empty command in
+.B X
+or
+.B Y
+defaults to
+.BR f .
+.B g
+and
+.B v
+do not have defaults.
+.PD
+.SS Miscellany
+.TF (empty)
+.TP
+.B k
+Set the current file's mark to the range.  Does not set dot.
+.TP
+.B \*aq
+Quit.
+It is an error to quit with modified files, but a second
+.B q
+will succeed.
+.TP
+.BI \*au " n
+Undo the last
+.I n
+(default 1)
+top-level commands that changed the contents or name of the
+current file, and any other file whose most recent change was simultaneous
+with the current file's change.
+Successive
+.BR u 's
+move further back in time.
+The only commands for which u is ineffective are
+.BR cd ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR q ,
+.B w
+and
+.BR D .
+If
+.I n
+is negative,
+.B u
+`redoes,' undoing the undo, going forwards in time again.
+.TP
+(empty)
+If the range is explicit, set dot to the range.
+If
+.I sam
+is downloaded, the resulting dot is selected on the screen;
+otherwise it is printed.
+If no address is specified (the
+command is a newline) dot is extended in either direction to
+line boundaries and printed.
+If dot is thereby unchanged, it is set to
+.B .+1 
+and printed.
+.PD
+.SS Grouping and multiple changes
+Commands may be grouped by enclosing them in braces
+.BR {} .
+Commands within the braces must appear on separate lines (no backslashes are
+required between commands).
+Semantically, an opening brace is like a command:
+it takes an (optional) address and sets dot for each sub-command.
+Commands within the braces are executed sequentially, but changes made
+by one command are not visible to other commands (see the next
+paragraph).
+Braces may be nested arbitrarily.
+.PP
+When a command makes a number of changes to a file, as in
+.BR x/re/c/text/ ,
+the addresses of all changes to the file are computed in the original file.
+If the changes are in sequence,
+they are applied to the file.
+Successive insertions at the same address are catenated into a single
+insertion composed of the several insertions in the order applied.
+.SS The terminal
+What follows refers to behavior of
+.I sam
+when downloaded, that is, when
+operating as a display editor on a raster display.
+This is the default
+behavior; invoking
+.I sam
+with the
+.B -d
+(no download) option provides access
+to the command language only.
+.PP
+Each file may have zero or more windows open.
+Each window is equivalent
+and is updated simultaneously with changes in other windows on the same file.
+Each window has an independent value of dot, indicated by a highlighted
+substring on the display.
+Dot may be in a region not within
+the window.
+There is usually a `current window',
+marked with a dark border, to which typed text and editing
+commands apply.
+Text may be typed and edited as in
+.IR rio (1);
+also the escape key (ESC) selects (sets dot to) text typed
+since the last mouse button hit.
+.PP
+The button 3 menu controls window operations.
+The top of the menu
+provides the following operators, each of which uses one or
+more
+.IR rio -like
+cursors to prompt for selection of a window or sweeping
+of a rectangle.
+`Sweeping' a null rectangle gets a large window, disjoint
+from the command window or the whole screen, depending on
+where the null rectangle is.
+.TF resize
+.TP 
+.B new
+Create a new, empty file.
+.TP
+.B zerox
+Create a copy of an existing window.
+.TP
+.B resize
+As in
+.IR rio .
+.TP
+.B close
+Delete the window.
+In the last window of a file,
+.B close
+is equivalent to a
+.B D
+for the file.
+.TP
+.B write
+Equivalent to a
+.B w
+for the file.
+.PD
+.PP
+Below these operators is a list of available files, starting with
+.BR ~~sam~~ ,
+the command window.
+Selecting a file from the list makes the most recently
+used window on that file current, unless it is already current, in which
+case selections cycle through the open windows.
+If no windows are open
+on the file, the user is prompted to open one.
+Files other than
+.B ~~sam~~
+are marked with one of the characters
+.B -+*
+according as zero, one, or more windows
+are open on the file.
+A further mark
+.L .
+appears on the file in the current window and
+a single quote,
+.BR ' ,
+on a file modified since last write.
+.PP
+The command window, created automatically when
+.B sam
+starts, is an ordinary window except that text typed to it
+is interpreted as commands for the editor rather than passive text,
+and text printed by editor commands appears in it.
+The behavior is like
+.IR rio ,
+with an `output point' that separates commands being typed from
+previous output.
+Commands typed in the command window apply to the
+current open file\(emthe file in the most recently
+current window.
+.SS Manipulating text
+Button 1 changes selection, much like
+.IR rio .
+Pointing to a non-current window with button 1 makes it current;
+within the current window, button 1 selects text, thus setting dot.
+Double-clicking selects text to the boundaries of words, lines,
+quoted strings or bracketed strings, depending on the text at the click.
+.PP
+Button 2 provides a menu of editing commands:
+.TF /regexp
+.TP
+.B cut
+Delete dot and save the deleted text in the snarf buffer.
+.TP
+.B paste
+Replace the text in dot by the contents of the snarf buffer.
+.TP
+.B snarf
+Save the text in dot in the snarf buffer.
+.TP
+.B plumb
+Send the text in the selection as a plumb
+message.  If the selection is empty,
+the white-space-delimited block of text is sent as a plumb message
+with a
+.B click
+attribute defining where the selection lies (see
+.IR plumb (6)).
+.TP
+.B look
+Search forward for the next occurrence of the literal text in dot.
+If dot is the null string, the text in the snarf buffer is
+used.
+The snarf buffer is unaffected.
+.TP
+.B <rio>
+Exchange snarf buffers with
+.IR rio .
+.TP
+.BI / regexp
+Search forward for the next match of the last regular expression
+typed in a command.
+(Not in command window.)
+.TP
+.B send
+Send the text in dot, or the snarf buffer if
+dot is the null string, as if it were typed to the command window.
+Saves the sent text in the snarf buffer.
+(Command window only.) 
+.PD
+.SS External communication
+.I Sam
+listens to the
+.B edit
+plumb port.
+If plumbing is not active,
+on invocation
+.I sam
+creates a named pipe
+.BI /srv/sam. user
+which acts as an additional source of commands.  Characters written to
+the named pipe are treated as if they had been typed in the command window.
+.PP
+.I B
+is a shell-level command that causes an instance of
+.I sam
+running on the same terminal to load the named
+.IR files .
+.I B
+uses either plumbing or the named pipe, whichever service is available.
+If plumbing is not enabled,
+the option allows a line number to be specified for
+the initial position to display in the last named file
+(plumbing provides a more general mechanism for this ability).
+.SS Abnormal termination
+If
+.I sam
+terminates other than by a
+.B q
+command (by hangup, deleting its window, etc.), modified
+files are saved in an
+executable file,
+.BR $home/sam.save .
+This program, when executed, asks whether to write
+each file back to a external file.
+The answer
+.L y
+causes writing; anything else skips the file.
+.SH FILES
+.TF /sys/src/cmd/samterm
+.TP
+.B $home/sam.save
+.TP
+.B $home/sam.err
+.TP
+.B /sys/lib/samsave
+the program called to unpack
+.BR $home/sam.save .
+.SH SOURCE
+.TF /sys/src/cmd/samterm
+.TP
+.B /sys/src/cmd/sam
+source for
+.I sam
+itself
+.TP
+.B /sys/src/cmd/samterm
+source for the separate terminal part
+.TP
+.B /rc/bin/B
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR ed (1),
+.IR sed (1),
+.IR grep (1),
+.IR rio (1),
+.IR regexp (6).
+.PP
+Rob Pike,
+``The text editor sam''.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/secstore b/sys/man/1/secstore
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..113db5a92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/secstore
@@ -0,0 +1,225 @@
+.TH SECSTORE 1
+.SH NAME
+aescbc, ipso, secstore \- secstore commands
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B auth/secstore
+[
+.B -cinv
+] [
+.B -(g|G)
+.I getfile
+] [
+.B -p
+.I putfile
+] [
+.B -r
+.I rmfile
+] [
+.B -s
+.I server
+] [
+.B -u
+.I user
+]
+.PP
+.B auth/aescbc
+-e
+[ -in ]
+.I <cleartext
+.I >ciphertext
+.br
+.B auth/aescbc
+-d
+[ -in ]
+.I <ciphertext
+.I >cleartext
+.PP
+.B ipso
+[
+.B -a -e -l -f -s
+] [
+.I file
+\&...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Secstore
+authenticates to a secure-store server
+using a password and optionally a hardware token,
+then saves or retrieves a file.
+This is intended to be a credentials store (public/private keypairs,
+passwords, and other secrets) for a factotum.
+.PP
+Option
+.B -c
+prompts for a password change.
+.PP
+Option
+.B -g
+retrieves a file to the local directory;
+option
+.B -G
+writes it to standard output instead.
+Specifying
+.I getfile
+of
+.L \&.
+will send to standard output
+a list of remote files with dates, lengths and SHA1 hashes.
+.PP
+Option
+.B -i
+says that the password should be read from standard input
+instead of from
+.BR /dev/cons .
+.PP
+Option
+.B -n
+says that the password should be read from NVRAM
+(see
+.IR authsrv (2))
+instead of from
+.BR /dev/cons .
+.PP
+Option
+.B -p
+stores a file on the secstore.
+.PP
+Option
+.B -r
+removes a file from the secstore.
+.PP
+The server is
+.BR tcp!$auth!secstore  ,
+or the server specified by option
+.BR -s .
+.PP
+Option
+.B -u
+access the secure-store files belonging to
+.IR user .
+.PP
+Option
+.B -v
+produces more verbose output, in particular providing a few
+bits of feedback to help the user detect mistyping.
+.PP
+For example, to add a secret to the file read by
+.IR factotum (4)
+at startup, open a new window, type
+.LP
+.EX
+  % ramfs -p; cd /tmp
+  % auth/secstore -g factotum
+  secstore password:
+  % echo 'key proto=apop dom=x.com user=ehg !password=hi' >> factotum
+  % auth/secstore -p factotum
+  secstore password:
+  % read -m factotum > /mnt/factotum/ctl
+.EE
+.LP
+and delete the window.
+The first line creates an ephemeral memory-resident workspace,
+invisible to others and automatically removed when the window is deleted.
+The next three commands fetch the persistent copy of the secrets,
+append a new secret,
+and save the updated file back to secstore.
+The final command loads the new secret into the running factotum.
+.PP
+The
+.I ipso
+command packages this sequence into a convenient script to simplify editing of
+.I files
+stored on a secure store.
+It copies the named
+.I files
+into a local
+.IR ramfs (4)
+and invokes
+.IR acme (1)
+on them.  When the editor exits,
+.I ipso
+prompts the user to confirm copying modifed or newly created files back to
+.I secstore.
+If no
+.I file
+is mentioned,
+.I ipso
+grabs all the user's files from
+.I secstore
+for editing.
+.PP
+By default,
+.I ipso
+will edit the
+.I secstore
+files and, if
+one of them is named
+.BR factotum ,
+flush current keys from factotum and load
+the new ones from the file.
+If the
+.BR -e ,
+.BR -f ,
+or
+.BR -l
+options are given,
+.I ipso
+will just perform only the requested operations, i.e.,
+edit, flush, and/or load.
+.PP
+The
+.B -s
+option of
+.I ipso
+invokes
+.IR sam (1)
+as the editor insted of
+.BR acme ;
+the
+.B -a
+option provides a similar service for files encrypted by
+.I aescbc
+.RI ( q.v. ).
+With the
+.B -a
+option, the full rooted pathname of the
+.I file
+must be specified and all
+.I files
+must be encrypted with the same key.
+Also with
+.BR -a ,
+newly created files are ignored.
+.PP
+.I Aescbc
+encrypts (under
+.LR -e )
+and decrypts (under
+.LR -d )
+using AES (Rijndael) in cipher block chaining (CBC) mode.
+Options
+.L i
+and
+.L n
+are as per
+.IR secstore ,
+except that
+.L i
+reads from file descriptor 3.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /rc/bin/ipso
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/auth/secstore
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR factotum (4),
+.IR secstore (8)
+.SH BUGS
+There is deliberately no backup of files on the secstore, so
+.B -r
+(or a disk crash) is irrevocable.  You are advised to store
+important secrets in a second location.
+.PP
+When using
+.IR ipso ,
+secrets will appear as plain text in the editor window,
+so use the command in private.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/sed b/sys/man/1/sed
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..6bb2e6123
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/sed
@@ -0,0 +1,389 @@
+.TH SED 1
+.SH NAME
+sed \- stream editor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B sed
+[
+.B -n
+]
+[
+.B -g
+]
+[
+.B -e
+.I script
+]
+[
+.B -f
+.I sfile
+]
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Sed
+copies the named
+.I files
+(standard input default) to the standard output,
+edited according to a script of commands.
+The
+.B -f
+option causes the script to be taken from file
+.IR sfile ;
+these options accumulate.
+If there is just one
+.B -e
+option and no
+.BR -f 's,
+the option
+.B -e
+may be omitted.
+The
+.B -n
+option suppresses the default output;
+.B -g
+causes all substitutions to be global, as if suffixed
+.BR g .
+.PP
+A script consists of editing commands, one per line,
+of the following form:
+.IP
+[\fIaddress\fR [\fL,\fI address\fR] ] \fIfunction\fR [\fIargument\fR ...] [\fL;\fP]
+.PP
+In normal operation
+.I sed
+cyclically copies a line of input into a
+.I pattern space
+(unless there is something left after
+a
+.L D
+command),
+applies in sequence
+all commands whose
+.I addresses
+select that pattern space,
+and at the end of the script copies the pattern space
+to the standard output (except under
+.BR -n )
+and deletes the pattern space.
+.PP
+An
+.I address
+is either a decimal number that counts
+input lines cumulatively across files, a
+.L $
+that
+addresses the last line of input, or a context address,
+.BI / regular-expression / \f1,
+in the style of
+.IR regexp (6),
+with the added convention that
+.L \en
+matches a
+newline embedded in the pattern space.
+.PP
+A command line with no addresses selects every pattern space.
+.PP
+A command line with
+one address selects each pattern space that matches the address.
+.PP
+A command line with
+two addresses selects the inclusive range from the first
+pattern space that matches the first address through
+the next pattern space that matches
+the second.
+(If the second address is a number less than or equal
+to the line number first selected, only one
+line is selected.)
+Thereafter the process is repeated, looking again for the
+first address.
+.PP
+Editing commands can be applied to non-selected pattern
+spaces by use of the negation function
+.L !
+(below).
+.PP
+An argument denoted
+.I text
+consists of one or more lines,
+all but the last of which end with
+.L \e
+to hide the
+newline.
+Backslashes in text are treated like backslashes
+in the replacement string of an
+.L s
+command,
+and may be used to protect initial blanks and tabs
+against the stripping that is done on
+every script line.
+.PP
+An argument denoted
+.I rfile
+or
+.I wfile
+must terminate the command
+line and must be preceded by exactly one blank.
+Each
+.I wfile
+is created before processing begins.
+There can be at most 120 distinct
+.I wfile
+arguments.
+.TP \w'\fL!\ \fIfunction\fLXXX'u
+.B a\e
+.br
+.ns
+.TP
+.I text
+Append.
+Place
+.I text
+on the output before
+reading the next input line.
+.TP
+.BI b " label"
+Branch to the
+.B :
+command bearing the
+.IR label .
+If
+.I label
+is empty, branch to the end of the script.
+.TP
+.B c\e
+.br
+.ns
+.TP
+.I text
+Change.
+Delete the pattern space.
+With 0 or 1 address or at the end of a 2-address range, place
+.I text
+on the output.
+Start the next cycle.
+.TP
+.B d
+Delete the pattern space.
+Start the next cycle.
+.TP
+.B D
+Delete the initial segment of the
+pattern space through the first newline.
+Start the next cycle.
+.TP
+.B g
+Replace the contents of the pattern space
+by the contents of the hold space.
+.TP
+.B G
+Append the contents of the hold space to the pattern space.
+.TP
+.B h
+Replace the contents of the hold space by the contents of the pattern space.
+.TP
+.B H
+Append the contents of the pattern space to the hold space.
+.ne 3
+.TP
+.B i\e
+.br
+.ns
+.TP
+.I text
+Insert.
+Place
+.I text
+on the standard output.
+.TP
+.B n
+Copy the pattern space to the standard output.
+Replace the pattern space with the next line of input.
+.TP
+.B N
+Append the next line of input to the pattern space
+with an embedded newline.
+(The current line number changes.)
+.TP
+.B p
+Print.
+Copy the pattern space to the standard output.
+.TP
+.B P
+Copy the initial segment of the pattern space through
+the first newline to the standard output.
+.TP
+.B q
+Quit.
+Branch to the end of the script.
+Do not start a new cycle.
+.TP
+.BI r " rfile"
+Read the contents of
+.IR rfile .
+Place them on the output before reading
+the next input line.
+.TP
+.B s/\fIregular-expression\fP/\fIreplacement\fP/\fIflags
+Substitute the
+.I replacement
+string for instances of the
+.I regular-expression
+in the pattern space.
+Any character may be used instead of
+.LR / .
+For a fuller description see
+.IR regexp (6).
+.I Flags
+is zero or more of
+.RS
+.TP
+.B g
+Global.
+Substitute for all non-overlapping instances of the
+.I regular expression
+rather than just the
+first one.
+.TP
+.B p
+Print the pattern space if a replacement was made.
+.TP
+.BI w " wfile"
+Write.
+Append the pattern space to
+.I wfile
+if a replacement
+was made.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BI t " label"
+Test.
+Branch to the
+.L :
+command bearing the
+.I label
+if any
+substitutions have been made since the most recent
+reading of an input line or execution of a
+.LR t .
+If
+.I label
+is empty, branch to the end of the script.
+.TP
+.B w
+.I wfile
+.br
+Write.
+Append the pattern space to
+.IR wfile .
+.TP
+.B x
+Exchange the contents of the pattern and hold spaces.
+.TP
+.B y/\fIstring1\fP/\fIstring2\fP/
+Transform.
+Replace all occurrences of characters in
+.I string1
+with the corresponding character in
+.IR string2 .
+The lengths of
+.I
+string1
+and
+.I string2
+must be equal.
+.TP
+.BI ! "function"
+Don't.
+Apply the
+.I function
+(or group, if
+.I function
+is
+.LR { )
+only to lines
+.I not
+selected by the address(es).
+.TP
+.B #
+Comment.
+Ignore the rest of the line.
+.TP
+.BI : " label"
+This command does nothing; it bears a
+.I label
+for
+.B b
+and
+.B t
+commands to branch to.
+.TP
+.B =
+Place the current line number on the standard output as a line.
+.TP
+.B {
+Execute the following commands through a matching
+.L }
+only when the pattern space is selected.
+.TP
+.B " "
+An empty command is ignored.
+.ne 4
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.TP
+.B sed 10q file
+Print the first 10 lines of the file.
+.TP
+.B sed '/^$/d'
+Delete empty lines from standard input.
+.TP
+.B sed 's/UNIX/& system/g'
+Replace every instance of
+.L UNIX
+by
+.LR "UNIX system" .
+.PP
+.EX
+sed 's/ *$//	\fRdrop trailing blanks\fP
+/^$/d		\fRdrop empty lines\fP
+s/  */\e		\fRreplace blanks by newlines\fP
+/g
+/^$/d' chapter*
+.EE
+.ns
+.IP
+Print the files
+.BR chapter1 ,
+.BR chapter2 ,
+etc. one word to a line.
+.PP
+.EX
+nroff -ms manuscript | sed '
+${
+	/^$/p	\fRif last line of file is empty, print it\fP
+}
+//N			\fRif current line is empty, append next line\fP
+/^\en$/D'		\fRif two lines are empty, delete the first\fP
+.EE
+.ns
+.IP
+Delete all but one of each group of empty lines from a
+formatted manuscript.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/sed.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR ed (1),
+.IR grep (1),
+.IR awk (1),
+.IR lex (1),
+.IR sam (1),
+.IR regexp (6)
+.br
+L. E. McMahon,
+`SED \(em A Non-interactive Text Editor',
+Unix Research System Programmer's Manual, Volume 2.
+.SH BUGS
+If input is from a pipe, buffering may consume
+characters beyond a line on which a
+.L q
+command is executed.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/seq b/sys/man/1/seq
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..60d1f12a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/seq
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+.TH SEQ 1
+.SH NAME
+seq \- print sequences of numbers
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B seq
+[
+.B -w
+]
+[
+.BI -f format
+]
+[
+.I first
+[
+.I incr
+]
+]
+.I last
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Seq
+prints a sequence of numbers, one per line, from
+.I first
+(default 1) to as near 
+.I last
+as possible, in increments of
+.I incr
+(default 1).
+The loop is:
+.sp
+.EX
+  for(val = min; val <= max; val += incr) print val;
+.EE
+.sp
+The numbers are interpreted as floating point.
+.PP
+Normally integer values are printed as decimal integers.
+The options are
+.TP "\w'\fL-f \fIformat\fLXX'u"
+.BI -f format
+Use the 
+.IR print (2)-style
+.I format
+.IR print
+for printing each (floating point) number.
+The default is 
+.LR %g .
+.TP
+.B -w
+Equalize the widths of all numbers by padding with
+leading zeros as necessary.
+Not effective with option
+.BR -f ,
+nor with numbers in exponential notation.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.TP
+.L
+seq 0 .05 .1
+Print
+.BR "0 0.05 0.1" 
+(on separate lines).
+.TP
+.L
+seq -w 0 .05 .1
+Print
+.BR "0.00 0.05 0.10" .
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/seq.c
+.SH BUGS
+Option
+.B -w
+always surveys every value in advance.
+Thus
+.L
+seq -w 1000000000
+is a painful way to get an `infinite' sequence.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/size b/sys/man/1/size
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..cd7ba9b84
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/size
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+.TH SIZE 1 
+.SH NAME
+size  \- print size of executable files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B size
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Size
+prints the size of the segments for each of the argument executable files
+(default
+.BR v.out ).
+The format is
+.IP
+.IB textsize t
++
+.IB datasize d
++
+.IB bsssize b
+=
+.I total
+.PP
+where the numbers are in bytes.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/size.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO
+.IR a.out (6)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/sleep b/sys/man/1/sleep
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..cc7d49218
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/sleep
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+.TH SLEEP 1
+.SH NAME
+sleep \- suspend execution for an interval
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B sleep
+.I time
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Sleep
+suspends execution for
+.I time
+seconds.
+.I Time
+may be floating-point.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Execute a command
+100 seconds hence.
+.IP
+.EX
+{sleep 100; command}&
+.EE
+.PP
+Repeat a command every 30 seconds.
+.IP
+.EX
+while (){
+	command
+	sleep 30
+}
+.EE
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/sleep.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR sleep (2)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/sort b/sys/man/1/sort
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..168e4dd19
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/sort
@@ -0,0 +1,262 @@
+.TH SORT 1 
+.SH NAME
+sort \- sort and/or merge files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B sort
+[
+.BI -cmuMbdf\&inrwt x
+]
+[
+.BI + pos1
+[
+.BI - pos2
+] ...
+] ...
+[
+.B -k
+.I pos1
+[
+.I ,pos2
+]
+] ...
+.br
+\h'0.5in
+[
+.B -o
+.I output
+]
+[
+.B -T
+.I dir
+\&...
+]
+[
+.I option
+\&...
+]
+[
+.I file
+\&...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Sort\^
+sorts
+lines of all the
+.I files
+together and writes the result on
+the standard output.
+If no input files are named, the standard input is sorted.
+.PP
+The default sort key is an entire line.
+Default ordering is
+lexicographic by runes.
+The ordering is affected globally by the following options,
+one or more of which may appear.
+.TP
+.B -M
+Compare as months.
+The first three
+non-white space characters
+of the field
+are folded
+to upper case
+and compared
+so that
+.L JAN
+precedes
+.LR FEB ,
+etc.
+Invalid fields
+compare low to
+.LR JAN .
+.TP
+.B -b
+Ignore leading white space (spaces and tabs) in field comparisons.
+.TP
+.B -d
+`Phone directory' order:
+only letters,
+accented letters,
+digits and white space
+are significant in comparisons.
+.TP
+.B -f
+Fold lower case
+letters onto upper case.
+Accented characters are folded to their
+non-accented upper case form.
+.TP
+.B -i
+Ignore characters outside the
+.SM ASCII
+range 040-0176
+in non-numeric comparisons.
+.TP
+.B -w
+Like
+.BR -i ,
+but ignore only tabs and spaces.
+.TP
+.B -n
+An initial numeric string,
+consisting of optional white space,
+optional plus or minus sign,
+and zero or more digits with optional decimal point,
+is sorted by arithmetic value.
+.TP
+.B -g
+Numbers, like
+.B -n 
+but with optional 
+.BR e -style
+exponents, are sorted by value.
+.TP
+.B -r
+Reverse the sense of comparisons.
+.TP
+.BI -t x\^
+`Tab character' separating fields is
+.IR x .
+.PP
+The notation
+.BI + "pos1\| " - pos2\^
+restricts a sort key to a field beginning at
+.I pos1\^
+and ending just before
+.IR pos2 .
+.I Pos1\^
+and
+.I pos2\^
+each have the form
+.IB m . n\f1,
+optionally followed by one or more of the flags
+.BR Mbdfginr ,
+where
+.I m\^
+tells a number of fields to skip from the beginning of the line and
+.I n\^
+tells a number of characters to skip further.
+If any flags are present they override all the global
+ordering options for this key.
+A missing
+.BI \&. n\^
+means
+.BR \&.0 ;
+a missing
+.BI - pos2\^
+means the end of the line.
+Under the
+.BI -t x\^
+option, fields are strings separated by
+.IR x ;
+otherwise fields are
+non-empty strings separated by white space.
+White space before a field
+is part of the field, except under option
+.BR -b .
+A
+.B b
+flag may be attached independently to
+.IR pos1
+and
+.IR pos2.
+.PP
+The notation
+.B -k
+.IR pos1 [, pos2 ]
+is how POSIX
+.I sort
+defines fields:
+.I pos1
+and
+.I pos2
+have the same format but different meanings.
+The value of
+.I  m\^
+is origin 1 instead of origin 0
+and a missing
+.BI \&. n\^
+in
+.I pos2
+is the end of the field.
+.PP
+When there are multiple sort keys, later keys
+are compared only after all earlier keys
+compare equal.
+Lines that otherwise compare equal are ordered
+with all bytes significant.
+.PP
+These option arguments are also understood:
+.TP \w'\fL-z\fIrecsize\fLXX'u
+.B -c
+Check that the single input file is sorted according to the ordering rules;
+give no output unless the file is out of sort.
+.TP
+.B -m
+Merge; assume the input files are already sorted.
+.TP
+.B -u
+Suppress all but one in each
+set of equal lines.
+Ignored bytes
+and bytes outside keys
+do not participate in
+this comparison.
+.TP
+.B -o
+The next argument is the name of an output file
+to use instead of the standard output.
+This file may be the same as one of the inputs.
+.TP
+.BI -T dir
+Put temporary files in
+.I dir
+rather than in
+.BR /tmp .
+.ne 4
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.TP
+.L sort -u +0f +0 list
+Print in alphabetical order all the unique spellings
+in a list of words
+where capitalized words differ from uncapitalized.
+.TP
+.L sort -t: +1 /adm/users
+Print the users file
+sorted by user name
+(the second colon-separated field).
+.TP
+.L sort -umM dates
+Print the first instance of each month in an already sorted file.
+Options
+.B -um
+with just one input file make the choice of a
+unique representative from a set of equal lines predictable.
+.TP
+.L
+grep -n '^' input | sort -t: +1f +0n | sed 's/[0-9]*://'
+A stable sort: input lines that compare equal will 
+come out in their original order.
+.SH FILES
+.BI /tmp/sort. <pid>.<ordinal>
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/sort.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR uniq (1),
+.IR look (1)
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.I Sort
+comments and exits with non-null status for various trouble
+conditions and for disorder discovered under option
+.BR -c .
+.SH BUGS
+An external null character can be confused
+with an internally generated end-of-field character.
+The result can make a sub-field not sort
+less than a longer field.
+.PP
+Some of the options, e.g.
+.B -i
+and
+.BR -M ,
+are hopelessly provincial.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/spell b/sys/man/1/spell
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..62f621a8b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/spell
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+.TH SPELL 1
+.SH NAME
+spell, sprog \- find spelling errors
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B spell
+[
+.I options
+]
+\&...
+[
+.I file
+]
+\&...
+.PP
+.B aux/sprog
+[
+.I options
+]
+[
+.B -f
+.I file
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Spell
+looks up words from the named
+.I files
+(standard input default)
+in a spelling list and places
+possible misspellings\(emwords 
+not sanctioned there\(emon the standard output.
+.PP
+.I Spell
+ignores constructs of
+.IR troff (1)
+and its standard preprocessors.
+It understands these options:
+.TP
+.B -b
+Check British spelling.
+.TP
+.B -v
+Print all words not literally in the spelling list, with
+derivations.
+.TP
+.B -x
+Print on standard error, marked with
+.LR = ,
+every stem as it is looked up in the spelling list,
+along with its affix classes.
+.PP
+As a matter of policy, 
+.I spell
+does not admit multiple spellings of the same word.
+Variants that follow general rules are preferred
+over those that don't, even when the unruly spelling is
+more common.
+Thus, in American usage, `modelled', `sizeable', and `judgment' are
+rejected in favor of `modeled', `sizable', and `judgement'.
+Agglutinated variants are shunned: `crewmember' and `backyard'
+cede to `crew member' and  `back yard' (noun) or `back-yard' 
+(adjective).
+.SH FILES
+.TF \fL/sys/lib/brspell
+.TP
+.B /sys/lib/amspell
+American spelling list
+.TP
+.B /sys/lib/brspell
+British spelling list
+.TP
+.B /bin/aux/sprog
+The actual spelling checker.
+It expects one word per line on standard input,
+and takes the same arguments as
+.IR spell .
+.SH SOURCE
+.TF /sys/src/cmd/spell
+.TP
+.B /rc/bin/spell
+the script
+.TP
+.B /sys/src/cmd/spell
+source for
+.I sprog
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR deroff (1)
+.SH BUGS
+The heuristics of
+.IR deroff (1)
+used to excise formatting information are imperfect.
+.PP
+The spelling list's coverage is uneven;
+in particular biology, medicine, and chemistry, and
+perforce proper names,
+not to mention languages other than English,
+are covered very lightly.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/spin b/sys/man/1/spin
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..fd30b024b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/spin
@@ -0,0 +1,331 @@
+.TH SPIN 1
+.SH NAME
+spin - verification tool for models of concurrent systems
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B spin
+.B -a
+[
+.B -m
+]
+[
+.BI -P cpp
+]
+.I file
+.PP
+.B spin
+[
+.B -bglmprsv
+]
+[
+.BI -n N
+]
+[
+.BI -P cpp
+]
+.I file
+.PP
+.B spin
+.B -c
+[
+.B -t
+]
+[
+.BI -P cpp
+]
+.I file
+.PP
+.B spin
+.B -d
+[
+.BI -P cpp
+]
+.I file
+.PP
+.B spin
+.B -f
+.I ltl
+.PP
+.B spin
+.B -F
+.I file
+.PP
+.B spin
+.B -i
+[
+.B -bglmprsv
+]
+[
+.BI -n N
+]
+[
+.BI -P cpp
+]
+.I file
+.PP
+.B spin
+.B -M
+[
+.B -t
+]
+[
+.BI -P cpp
+]
+.I file
+.PP
+.B spin
+.BR -t [ \fIN ]
+[
+.B -bglmprsv
+]
+[
+.BI -j N
+]
+[
+.BI -P cpp
+]
+.I file
+.PP
+.B spin
+.B -V
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Spin
+is a tool for analyzing the logical consistency of
+asynchronous systems, specifically distributed software
+amd communication protocols.
+A verification model of the system is first specified
+in a guarded command language called
+.IR Promela .
+This specification language, described in the reference,
+allows for the modeling of dynamic creation of
+asynchronous processes,
+nondeterministic case selection, loops, gotos, local and
+global variables.
+It also allows for a concise specification of logical
+correctness requirements, including, but not restricted
+to requirements expressed in linear temporal logic.
+.PP
+Given a Promela model stored in
+.IR file ,
+.I spin
+can perform interactive, guided, or random simulations
+of the system's execution.
+It can also generate a C program that performs an exhaustive
+or approximate verification of the correctness requirements
+for the system.
+.
+.TP
+.B -a
+Generate a verifier (model checker) for the specification.
+The output is written into a set of C files, named
+.BR pan.[cbhmt] ,
+that can be compiled
+.RB ( "pcc pan.c" )
+to produce an executable verifier.
+The online
+.I spin
+manuals (see below) contain
+the details on compilation and use of the verifiers.
+.
+.TP
+.B -c
+Produce an ASCII approximation of a message sequence
+chart for a random or guided (when combined with
+.BR -t )
+simulation run. See also option
+.BR -M .
+.
+.TP
+.B -d
+Produce symbol table information for the model specified in
+.IR file .
+For each Promela object this information includes the type, name and
+number of elements (if declared as an array), the initial
+value (if a data object) or size (if a message channel), the
+scope (global or local), and whether the object is declared as
+a variable or as a parameter.  For message channels, the data types
+of the message fields are listed.
+For structure variables, the third field defines the
+name of the structure declaration that contains the variable.
+.
+.TP
+.BI -f " ltl"
+Translate the LTL formula
+.I ltl
+into a
+.I never
+claim.
+.br
+This option reads a formula in LTL syntax from the second argument
+and translates it into Promela syntax (a
+.I never
+claim, which is Promela's
+equivalent of a Büchi Automaton).
+The LTL operators are written:
+.B []
+(always),
+.B <>
+(eventually),
+and
+.B U
+(strong until).  There is no
+.B X
+(next) operator, to secure
+compatibility with the partial order reduction rules that are
+applied during the verification process.
+If the formula contains spaces, it should be quoted to form a
+single argument to the
+.I spin
+command.
+.
+.TP
+.BI -F " file"
+Translate the LTL formula stored in
+.I file
+into a
+.I never
+claim.
+.br
+This behaves identically to option
+.B -f
+but will read the formula from the
+.I file
+instead of from the command line.
+The file should contain the formula as the first line.  Any text
+that follows this first line is ignored, so it can be used to
+store comments or annotation on the formula.
+(On some systems the quoting conventions of the shell complicate
+the use of option
+.BR -f .
+Option
+.B -F
+is meant to solve those problems.)
+.
+.TP
+.B -i
+Perform an interactive simulation, prompting the user at
+every execution step that requires a nondeterministic choice
+to be made.  The simulation proceeds without user intervention
+when execution is deterministic.
+.
+.TP
+.B -M
+Produce a message sequence chart in Postscript form for a
+random simulation or a guided simulation
+(when combined with
+.BR -t ),
+for the model in
+.IR file ,
+and write the result into
+.IR file.ps .
+See also option
+.BR -c .
+.
+.TP
+.B -m
+Changes the semantics of send events.
+Ordinarily, a send action will be (blocked) if the
+target message buffer is full.
+With this option a message sent to a full buffer is lost.
+.
+.TP
+.BI -n N
+Set the seed for a random simulation to the integer value
+.IR N .
+There is no space between the
+.B -n
+and the integer
+.IR N .
+.
+.TP
+.B -t
+Perform a guided simulation, following the error trail that
+was produces by an earlier verification run, see the online manuals
+for the details on verification.
+.
+.TP
+.B -V
+Prints the
+.I spin
+version number and exits.
+.
+.PP
+With only a filename as an argument and no options,
+.I spin
+performs a random simulation of the model specified in
+the file (standard input is the default if the filename is omitted).
+If option
+.B -i
+is added, the simulation is
+.IR interactive ,
+or if option
+.B -t
+is added, the simulation is
+.IR guided .
+.PP
+The simulation normally does not generate output, except what is generated
+explicitly by the user within the model with
+.I printf
+statements, and some details about the final state that is
+reached after the simulation completes.
+The group of options
+.B -bglmprsv
+sets the desired level of information that the user wants
+about a random, guided, or interactive simulation run.
+Every line of output normally contains a reference to the source
+line in the specification that generated it.
+.
+.TP
+.B -b
+Suppress the execution of
+.I printf
+statements within the model.
+.TP
+.B -g
+Show at each time step the current value of global variables.
+.TP
+.B -l
+In combination with option
+.BR -p ,
+show the current value of local variables of the process.
+.TP
+.B -p
+Show at each simulation step which process changed state,
+and what source statement was executed.
+.TP
+.B -r
+Show all message-receive events, giving
+the name and number of the receiving process
+and the corresponding the source line number.
+For each message parameter, show
+the message type and the message channel number and name.
+.TP
+.B -s
+Show all message-send events.
+.TP
+.B -v
+Verbose mode, add some more detail, and generate more
+hints and warnings about the model.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/spin
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.in +4
+.ti -4
+.BR http://spinroot.com :
+.BR GettingStarted.pdf ,
+.BR Roadmap.pdf ,
+.BR Manual.pdf ,
+.BR WhatsNew.pdf ,
+.B Exercises.pdf
+.br
+.in -4
+G.J. Holzmann,
+.IR "Design and Validation of Computer Protocols" ,
+Prentice Hall, 1991.
+.br
+—, `Design and validation of protocols: a tutorial,'
+.IR "Computer Networks and ISDN Systems" ,
+Vol. 25, No. 9, 1993, pp. 981-1017.
+.br
+—, `The model checker Spin,'
+.IR "IEEE Trans. on SE" ,
+Vol, 23, No. 5, May 1997.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/split b/sys/man/1/split
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..ffb012d79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/split
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+.TH SPLIT 1
+.CT 1 files
+.SH NAME
+split \- split a file into pieces
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B split
+[
+.I option ...
+]
+[
+.I file
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Split
+reads
+.I file
+(standard input by default)
+and writes it in pieces of 1000
+lines per output file.
+The names of the
+output files are
+.BR xaa ,
+.BR xab ,
+and so on to
+.BR xzz .
+The options are
+.TP
+.BI -n " n"
+Split into
+.IR n -line
+pieces.
+.TP
+.BI -l " n"
+Synonym for
+.B -n
+.IR n ,
+a nod to Unix's syntax.
+.TP
+.BI -e " expression"
+File divisions occur at each line
+that matches a regular
+.IR expression ;
+see 
+.IR regexp (6).
+Multiple
+.B -e
+options may appear.
+If a subexpression of
+.I expression
+is contained in parentheses
+.BR ( ... ) ,
+the output file name is the portion of the
+line which matches the subexpression.
+.TP
+.BI -f " stem
+Use
+.I stem
+instead of
+.B x
+in output file names.
+.TP
+.BI -s " suffix
+Append
+.I suffix
+to names identified under
+.BR -e .
+.TP
+.B -x
+Exclude the matched input line from the output file.
+.TP
+.B -i
+Ignore case in option
+.BR -e ;
+force output file names (excluding the suffix)
+to lower case.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/split.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR sed (1), 
+.IR awk (1),
+.IR grep (1),
+.IR regexp (6)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/src b/sys/man/1/src
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..f6e22ce91
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/src
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+.TH SRC 1 
+.SH NAME
+src  \- find source code for executable
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B src
+[
+.B -n
+]
+[
+.B -s
+.I symbol
+]
+.I file
+.B ...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Src
+examines the named
+.I files
+to find the corresponding source code, which is then sent to the editor using
+.B B
+(see
+.IR sam (1)).
+If
+.I file
+is an
+.IR rc (1)
+script, the source is the file itself.
+If
+.I file
+is an executable, the source is defined to be the single file containing the
+definition of
+.B main
+and
+.I src
+will point the editor at the line that begins the definition.
+.I Src
+uses
+.IR db (1)
+to extract the symbol table information that identifies the source.
+.PP
+.I Src
+looks for each
+.I file
+in the current directory, in
+.BR /bin ,
+and in the subdirectories of
+.BR /bin ,
+in that order.
+.PP
+The
+.B -n
+flag causes
+.B src
+to print the file name but not send it to the editor.
+The
+.B -s
+flag identifies a
+.I symbol
+other than
+.B main
+to locate.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Find the source to the
+.B main
+routine in
+.BR /bin/ed :
+.IP
+.EX
+src ed
+.EE
+.PP
+Find the source for
+.BR strcmp :
+.IP
+.EX
+src -s strcmp rc
+.EE
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /rc/bin/src
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR db (1),
+.IR plumb (1),
+.IR sam (1).
diff --git a/sys/man/1/ssh b/sys/man/1/ssh
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..b43f3152a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/ssh
@@ -0,0 +1,346 @@
+.TH SSH 1
+.SH NAME
+ssh, sshnet, scp, sshserve \- secure login and file copy from/to Unix or Plan 9
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B ssh
+[
+.B -CfiImPpRrw
+]
+[
+.B -A
+.I authlist
+]
+[
+.B -c
+.I cipherlist
+]
+[
+.B -[lu]
+.I user
+]
+.RI [ user\fB@ ] host
+[
+.I cmd
+[
+.I args
+\&... ]]
+.PP
+.B sshnet
+[
+.B -A
+.I authlist
+]
+[
+.B -c
+.I cipherlist
+]
+[
+.B -m
+.I mtpt
+]
+[
+.B -s
+.I service
+]
+.RI [ user\fB@ ] host
+.PP
+.B scp
+[host:]file [host:]file
+.br
+.B scp
+[host:]file ... [host:]dir
+.PP
+.B aux/sshserve
+[
+.B -p
+]
+.I address
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Ssh
+allows authenticated login over an encrypted channel to hosts that
+support the ssh protocol (see the RFCs listed below for encryption and
+authentication details).
+.LP
+.I Ssh
+takes the host name of the machine to connect to as its mandatory argument.
+It may be specified as a domain name or an IP address.
+Normally, login is attempted using the user name from /dev/user.
+.PP
+Command-line options are:
+.TP
+.B -C
+force input to be read in cooked mode:
+``line at a time'' with local echo.
+.TP
+.B -f
+enable agent forwarding.
+With this flag,
+.I ssh
+uses SSH's agent forwarding protocol to allow
+programs running on the remote server to
+interact with
+.IR factotum (4)
+to perform RSA authentication.
+.TP
+.B -i
+force interactive mode.
+In interactive mode, 
+.I ssh
+prompts for passwords and confirmations of
+new host keys when necessary.
+(In non-interactive mode, password requests
+are rejected and unrecognized host keys are 
+cause for disconnecting.)
+By default, 
+.I ssh 
+runs in interactive mode only when its 
+input file descriptor is 
+.BR /dev/cons .
+.TP
+.B -I
+force non-interactive mode.
+.TP
+.B -m
+disable the 
+.RB control- \e
+menu, described below.
+.TP
+.B -p
+force pseudoterminal request.
+The
+.I ssh
+protocol, grounded in Unix tradition,
+differentiates between connections
+that request controlling pseudoterminals
+and those that do not.
+By default, 
+.I ssh
+requests a pseudoterminal only when no
+.I command
+is given.
+.TP
+.B -P
+force no pseudoterminal request.
+.TP
+.B -r
+strip carriage returns.
+.TP
+.B -R
+put the allocated pseudoterminal, if any, in raw mode.
+.TP
+.B -w
+notify the remote side whenever the window changes size.
+.TP
+.BR - [ lu ] "\fI user
+specify user name.
+This option is deprecated in favor of the
+.IB user @ hostname
+syntax.
+.TP
+.B "-A\fI authlist
+specify an ordered space-separated list of authentication protocols to try.
+The full set of authentication protocols is
+.B rsa
+(RSA using
+.IR factotum (4)
+to moderate key usage),
+.B password
+(use a password gathered from factotum),
+and
+.B tis
+(challenge-response).
+The default list is all three in that order.
+.TP
+.B "-c\fI cipherlist
+specify an ordered space-separated list of allowed ciphers to use when encrypting the channel.
+The full set of ciphers is
+.B des
+(standard DES),
+.B 3des
+(a somewhat doubtful variation on triple DES),
+.B blowfish
+(Bruce Schneier's Blowfish),
+.B rc4
+(RC4),
+and
+.B none
+(no encryption).
+The default cipher list is 
+.B blowfish
+.B rc4
+.BR 3des .
+.PD
+.PP
+The
+.RB control\- \e
+character is a local escape, as in
+.IR con (1).
+It prompts with
+.BR >>> .
+Legitimate responses to the prompt are
+.TP
+.B q
+Exit.
+.TP
+.B .
+Return from the escape.
+.TP
+.B !cmd
+Run the command with the network connection as its
+standard input and standard output.
+Standard error will go to the screen.
+.TP
+.B r
+Toggle printing of carriage returns.
+.PD
+.LP
+If no command is specified,
+a login session is started on the remote
+host.
+Otherwise, the command is executed with its arguments.
+.LP
+.I Ssh
+establishes a connection with an ssh daemon on the remote host.
+The daemon sends to 
+.I ssh
+its RSA public host key and session key.
+Using these,
+.I ssh
+sends a session key which, presumably, only the
+daemon can decipher.  After this, both sides start encrypting their
+data with this session key.
+.LP
+When the daemon's host key has been received,
+.I ssh
+looks it up in 
+.B $home/lib/keyring
+and in 
+.BR /sys/lib/ssh/keyring .
+If
+the key is found there, and it matches the received key,
+.I ssh
+is satisfied.  If not,
+.I ssh
+reports this and offers to add the key to
+.BR $home/lib/keyring .
+.LP
+Over the encrypted channel,
+.I ssh
+attempts to convince the daemon to accept the call
+using the listed authentication protocols
+(see the
+.B -A
+option above).
+.LP
+The preferred way to authenticate is a
+.IR netkey -style
+challenge/response or via a SecurID token.
+.I Ssh
+users on other systems than Plan 9 should enable \s-2TIS_A\s0uthentication.
+.LP
+When the connection is authenticated, the given command line,
+(by default, a login shell) is executed on the remote host.
+.sp 1
+The SSH protocol allows clients to make outgoing TCP calls via the server.
+.I Sshnet
+establishes an SSH connection and, rather than execute a remote command,
+presents the remote server's TCP stack as a network stack
+(see the discussion of TCP in
+.IR ip (3))
+mounted at
+.I mtpt
+(default
+.BR /net ),
+optionally posting a 9P service
+descriptor for the new file system as
+.IB /srv/ service \fR.
+The
+.B -A
+and
+.B -c
+arguments are as in
+.IR ssh .
+.sp 1
+.I Scp
+uses
+.I ssh
+to copy files from one host to another.  A remote file is identified by
+a host name, a colon and a file name (no spaces).
+.I Scp
+can copy files from remote hosts and to remote hosts.
+.sp 1
+.I Sshserve
+is the server that services
+.I ssh
+calls from remote hosts. 
+The 
+.B -A
+and
+.B -c
+options set valid authentication methods and ciphers
+as in
+.IR ssh ,
+except that there is no
+.B rsa
+authentication method.
+Unlike in
+.IR ssh ,
+the list is not ordered: the server presents a set and the client makes the choice.
+The default sets are
+.B tis
+and
+.B blowfish
+.B rc4
+.BR 3des .
+By default, users start with the namespace defined in
+.BR /lib/namespace .
+Users in group
+.B noworld
+in
+.B /adm/users
+start with the namespace defined in
+.BR /lib/namespace.noworld .
+.I Sshserve
+does not provide the TCP forwarding functionality used
+by
+.IR sshnet ,
+because many Unix clients present
+this capability in an insecure manner.
+.PP
+.I Sshserve
+requires that
+.IR factotum (4)
+hold the host key,
+identified by having attributes
+.B proto=rsa
+.BR service=sshserve .
+To generate a host key:
+.IP
+.EX
+auth/rsagen -t 'service=sshserve' >/mnt/factotum/ctl
+.EE
+.LP
+To extract the public part of the host key in the form
+used by SSH key rings:
+.IP
+.EX
+grep 'service=sshserve' /mnt/factotum/ctl | auth/rsa2ssh
+.EE
+.SH FILES
+.TP
+.B /sys/lib/ssh/keyring
+System key ring file containing public keys for remote ssh clients and servers.
+.TP
+.B /usr/\fIuser\fP/lib/keyring
+Personal key ring file containing public keys for remote ssh clients and
+servers.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/ssh
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.B /lib/rfc/rfc425[0-6]
+.br
+.IR factotum (4),
+.IR authsrv (6),
+.IR rsa (8)
+.SH BUGS
+Only version 1 of the SSH protocol is implemented.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/stop b/sys/man/1/stop
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..46e88772c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/stop
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+.TH STOP 1
+.SH NAME
+stop, start \- print commands to stop and start processes
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B stop
+.I name
+.PP
+.B start
+.I name
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Stop
+prints commands that will cause all processes called
+.I name
+and owned by the current user to be stopped.
+The processes can then be debugged when they are in a consistent state.
+.PP
+.I Start
+prints commands that will cause all stopped processes called
+.I name
+and owned by the current user to be started again.
+.PP
+Use the
+.B send
+command of
+.IR rio (1),
+or pipe into
+.IR rc (1)
+to execute the commands.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /rc/bin/stop
+.br
+.B /rc/bin/start
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR ps (1),
+.IR kill (1),
+.IR proc (3)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/strings b/sys/man/1/strings
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..9164194bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/strings
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+.TH STRINGS 1
+.SH NAME
+strings \- extract printable strings
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B strings
+[
+.B -m
+.I min
+] [
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Strings
+finds and prints strings containing
+.I min
+(default 6)
+or more
+consecutive printable
+.SM UTF\c
+-encoded characters
+in a (typically) binary file, default
+standard input.
+Printable characters are taken to be
+.SM ASCII
+characters from blank through tilde (hexadecimal 20 through 7E), inclusive,
+and
+all other characters from value 00A0 to FFFF.
+Strings reports
+the decimal offset within the file at which the string starts and the text
+of the string. If the string is longer than 70 runes the line is
+terminated by three dots and the printing is resumed on the next
+line with the offset of the continuation line.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/strings.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR nm (1)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/strip b/sys/man/1/strip
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..20de5f2da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/strip
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+.TH STRIP 1
+.SH NAME
+strip \- remove symbols from binary files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B strip
+.I file ...
+.PP
+.B strip
+.B -o
+.I ofile
+.I file
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Strip
+removes symbol table segments from executable files,
+rewriting the files in place.
+Stripping a file requires write permission of the file
+and the directory it is in.
+.PP
+If the
+.B -o
+flag is given, 
+the single input file
+.I file
+is stripped and the result written to
+.IR ofile .
+.I File
+is unchanged.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/strip.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR a.out (6)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/sum b/sys/man/1/sum
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..0a6084fba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/sum
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+.TH SUM 1
+.SH NAME
+sum, md5sum, sha1sum \- sum and count blocks in a file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B sum
+[
+.B -5r
+]
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.PP
+.B md5sum
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.PP
+.B sha1sum
+[
+.B -2
+.I bits
+] [
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+By default,
+.I sum
+calculates and prints a 32-bit hexadecimal checksum,
+a byte count,
+and the name of
+each
+.IR file .
+The checksum is also a function of the input length.
+If no
+.IR file s
+are given,
+the standard input is
+summed.
+Other summing algorithms are available.
+The options are
+.TF -r
+.PD
+.TP
+.B -r
+Sum with the algorithm of System V's
+.B "sum -r"
+and print the length (in 1K blocks) of the input.
+.TP
+.B -5
+Sum with System V's default algorithm
+and print the length (in 512-byte blocks) of the input.
+.PP
+.I Sum
+is typically used to look for bad spots,
+to validate a file communicated over
+some transmission line or
+as a quick way to determine if two files on different machines might be the same.
+.PP
+.I Md5sum
+computes the 32 hex digit RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm
+described in RFC1321.
+.PP
+.I Sha1sum
+computes the 40 hex digit National Institute of Standards and Technology
+(NIST)
+SHA1 secure hash algorithm
+described in FIPS PUB 180-1,
+by default.
+Given the
+.L 2
+option,
+it instead computes the
+.IR bits -bit
+NIST SHA2 secure hash algorithm
+described in FIPS PUB 180-2
+and prints the hash in hex.
+Currently supported values of
+.I bits
+are
+224,
+256,
+384,
+and
+512.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/sum.c
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/md5sum.c
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/sha1sum.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR cmp (1),
+.IR wc (1),
+.IR sechash (2)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/syscall b/sys/man/1/syscall
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..54cf5516d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/syscall
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+.TH SYSCALL 1 
+.SH NAME
+syscall \- test a system call
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B syscall
+[
+.B -osx
+]
+.I entry
+[
+.I arg ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Syscall
+invokes the system call
+.I entry
+with the given arguments.
+(Some functions, such as
+.I write
+and
+.IR read (2),
+although not strictly system calls, are valid
+.IR entries .)
+It prints the return value and the error string, if there was an error.
+An argument is either an integer constant as in C (its value is passed),
+a string (its address is passed),
+or the literal
+.B buf
+(a pointer to a 1MB buffer is passed).
+.PP
+If
+.B -o
+is given, the contents of the 1MB buffer are printed as a zero-terminated string
+after the system call is done.
+The
+.B -x
+and
+.B -s
+options are similar, but
+.B -x
+formats the data as hexadecimal bytes, while
+.B -s
+interprets the data as a
+.IR stat (5)
+message and formats it similar to the style of
+.B ls
+.B -lqm
+(see
+.IR ls (1)),
+with extra detail about the modify and access times.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Write a string to standard output:
+.IP
+.EX
+syscall write 1 hello 5
+.EE
+.PP
+Print information about the file connected to standard input:
+.IP
+.EX
+syscall -s fstat 0 buf 1024
+.EE
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/syscall
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+Section 2 of this manual.
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+If
+.I entry
+is not known to
+.IR syscall ,
+the exit status is
+.LR unknown .
+If the system call succeeds, the exit status is null;
+otherwise the exit status is the string that
+.IR errstr (2)
+returns.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/tail b/sys/man/1/tail
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..3a4f3c692
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/tail
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+.TH TAIL 1
+.SH NAME
+tail \- deliver the last part of a file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B tail
+[
+.BR +- \fInumber\fP[ lbc ][ rf ]
+]
+[
+.I file
+]
+.PP
+.B tail
+[
+.B -fr
+]
+[
+.B -n
+.I nlines
+]
+[
+.B -c
+.I nbytes
+]
+[
+.I file
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Tail
+copies the named file to the standard output beginning
+at a designated place.
+If no file is named, the standard input is copied.
+.PP
+Copying begins at position
+.BI + number
+measured from the beginning, or
+.BI - number
+from the end of the input.
+.I Number
+is counted in lines, 1K blocks or bytes,
+according to the appended flag
+.LR l ,
+.LR b ,
+or
+.LR c .
+Default is
+.B -10l
+(ten ell).
+.PP
+The further flag
+.L r
+causes tail to print lines from the end of the file in reverse order;
+.L f
+(follow) causes
+.IR tail ,
+after printing to the end, to keep watch and
+print further data as it appears.
+.PP
+The second syntax is that promulgated by POSIX, where
+the
+.I numbers
+rather than the options are signed.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.TP
+.B tail file
+Print the last 10 lines of a file.
+.TP
+.B tail +0f file
+Print a file, and continue to watch
+data accumulate as it grows.
+.TP
+.B sed 10q file
+Print the first 10 lines of a file.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/tail.c
+.SH BUGS
+Tails relative to the end of the file
+are treasured up in a buffer, and thus
+are limited in length.
+.PP
+According to custom, option
+.BI + number
+counts lines from 1, and counts
+blocks and bytes from 0.
+.PP
+.I Tail
+is ignorant of UTF.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/tar b/sys/man/1/tar
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..da79167dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/tar
@@ -0,0 +1,202 @@
+.TH TAR 1
+.SH NAME
+tar, dircp \- archiver
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B tar
+.I key
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.PP
+.B dircp
+.I fromdir
+.I todir
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Tar
+saves and restores file trees.
+It is most often used to transport a tree of files from one
+system to another.
+The
+.I key
+is a string that contains
+at most one function letter plus optional modifiers.
+Other arguments to the command are names of
+files or directories to be dumped or restored.
+A directory name implies all the contained
+files and subdirectories (recursively).
+.PP
+The function is one of the following letters:
+.TP
+.B  c
+Create a new archive with the given files as contents.
+.TP
+.B  r
+The named files
+are appended to the archive.
+.TP
+.B  t
+List all occurrences of each 
+.I file
+in the archive, or of all files if there are no
+.I file
+arguments.
+.TP
+.B  x
+Extract the named files from the archive.
+If a file is a directory, the directory is extracted recursively.
+Modes are restored if possible.
+If no file argument is given, extract the entire archive.
+If the archive contains multiple entries for a file,
+the latest one wins.
+.PP
+The modifiers are:
+.TP
+.B f
+Use the next argument as the name of the archive instead of
+the default standard input (for keys
+.B x
+and
+.BR t )
+or standard output (for keys
+.B c
+and
+.BR r ).
+.TP
+.B g
+Use the next (numeric) argument as the group id for files in
+the output archive.
+.TP
+.B i
+Ignore errors encountered when reading.
+Errors writing either produce a corrupt archive
+or indicate deeper file system problems.
+.TP
+.B k
+(keep)
+Modifies the behavior of
+.B x
+not to extract files which already exist.
+.TP
+.B m
+Do not set the modification time on extracted files.
+This is the default behavior; the flag exists only for compatibility with other tars.
+.TP
+.B p
+Create archive in POSIX ustar format,
+which raises the maximum pathname length from 100 to 256 bytes.
+Ustar archives are recognised automatically by
+.I tar
+when reading archives.
+This is the default behavior; the flag exists only for backwards compatibility
+with older versions of tar.
+.TP
+.B P
+Do not generate the POSIX ustar format.
+.TP
+.B R
+When extracting, respect leading slash on file names.
+By default, files are always extracted relative to the current directory.
+.TP
+.B s
+When extracting, attempt to resynchronise after not finding a tape header
+block where expected.
+.TP
+.B T
+Modifies the behavior of
+.B x
+to set the modified time,
+mode and, for POSIX archives and filesystem permitting,
+the user and group
+of each file to that specified in the archive.
+.TP
+.B u
+Use the next (numeric) argument as the user id for files in
+the output archive.  This is only useful when moving files to
+a non-Plan 9 system.
+.TP
+.B v
+(verbose)
+Print the name of each file as it is processed.
+With
+.BR t ,
+give more details about the
+archive entries.
+.TP
+.B z
+Operate on compressed
+.I tar
+archives.
+The type of compression is inferred from the file name extension:
+.IR gzip (1)
+for
+.B .tar.gz
+and
+.BR .tgz ;
+.I bzip2
+(see
+.IR gzip (1))
+for
+.BR .tar.bz ,
+.BR .tbz ,
+.BR .tar.bz2 ,
+and
+.BR .tbz2 ;
+.I compress
+for
+.B .tar.Z
+and
+.BR .tz .
+If no extension matches,
+.I gzip
+is used.
+The
+.B z
+flag is unnecessary (but allowed) when using the
+.B t
+and
+.B x
+verbs on archives with recognized extensions.
+.br
+.ne 6
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.I Tar
+can be used to copy hierarchies thus:
+.IP
+.EX
+@{cd fromdir && tar c .} | @{cd todir && tar xT}
+.EE
+.PP
+.I Dircp
+does this.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/tar.c
+.br
+.B /rc/bin/dircp
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR ar (1),
+.IR bundle (1),
+.IR tapefs (4),
+.IR mkfs (8)
+.SH BUGS
+There is no way to ask for any but the last
+occurrence of a file.
+.PP
+File path names are limited to
+100 characters
+(256 when using ustar format).
+.PP
+The
+.I tar
+format allows specification of links and symbolic links,
+concepts foreign to Plan 9: they are ignored.
+.PP
+The
+.B r
+key (append)
+cannot be used on compressed archives.
+.PP
+.IR Tar ,
+thus
+.IR dircp ,
+doesn't record Plan-9-specific metadata
+such as append-only and exclusive-open permission bits, so they aren't copied.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/tbl b/sys/man/1/tbl
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..921e9e85e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/tbl
@@ -0,0 +1,285 @@
+.TH TBL 1
+.SH NAME
+tbl \- format tables for nroff or troff
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B tbl
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Tbl
+is a preprocessor for formatting tables for
+.I nroff
+or
+.IR troff (1).
+The input
+.I files
+are copied to the standard output,
+except for segments of the form
+.IP
+.nf
+.B .TS
+.IB options " ;
+.IB format " .
+.I data
+.B .T&
+.IB format " .
+.I data
+\&. . .
+.B .TE
+.fi
+.LP
+which describe tables
+and are replaced by
+.I troff 
+requests to lay out the tables.
+If no arguments are given,
+.I tbl
+reads the standard input.
+.PP
+The (optional)
+.I options
+line is terminated by a semicolon and contains one or more
+of
+.RS
+.TF linesize(n)
+.TP
+.B center
+center the table; default is left-adjust
+.TP
+.B expand
+make table as wide as current line length
+.TP
+.B box
+.TP
+.B doublebox
+enclose the table in a box or double box
+.TP
+.B allbox
+enclose every item in a box
+.TP
+.BI tab( x )
+use 
+.I x
+to separate input items; default is tab
+.TP
+.BI linesize( n )
+set rules in
+.IR n -point
+type
+.TP
+.BI delim( xy )
+recognize
+.I x
+and
+.I y
+as
+.IR eqn (1)
+delimiters
+.PD
+.RE
+.PP
+Each line, except the last, of the obligatory
+.I format
+describes one row of the table.
+The last line describes all rows until the next
+.BR .T& ,
+where the format changes,
+or the end of the table at
+.BR .TE .
+A format is specified by key letters, one per column, either upper or lower case:
+.RS
+.TP 0
+.B L
+Left justify: the default for
+columns without format keys.
+.PD0
+.TP
+.B R
+Right justify.
+.TP
+.B C
+Center.
+.TP
+.B N
+Numeric: align at decimal point (inferred for integers) or at
+.LR \e& .
+.TP
+.B S
+Span: extend previous column across this one.
+.TP
+.B A
+Alphabetic: left-aligned within column, widest item centered, indented relative to 
+.B L
+rows.
+.TP
+.B ^
+Vertical span: continue item from previous row into this row.
+.TP
+.B -
+Draw a horizontal rule in this column.
+.TP
+.B =
+Draw a double horizontal rule in this column.
+.PD
+.RE
+.PP
+Key letters may be followed by modifiers, also either case:
+.RS
+.TP \w'\fLF\fIfont\fLXX'u
+.B |
+Draw vertical rule between columns.
+.PD0
+.TP
+.B ||
+Draw a double vertical rule between columns.
+.TP
+.I n
+Gap between column is
+.I n
+ens wide.
+Default is 3.
+.TP
+.BI F font
+Use specified
+.IR font .
+.B B
+and
+.B I
+mean
+.B FB
+and
+.BR FI .
+.TP
+.B T
+Begin vertically-spanned item at top row of range; default is 
+vertical centering (with
+.LR ^ ).
+.TP
+.BI P n
+Use point size
+.IR n .
+.TP
+.BI V n
+Use
+.IR n -point
+vertical spacing in text block; signed
+.I n
+means relative change.
+.TP
+.BI W( n )
+Column width as a
+.I troff
+width specification.
+Parens are optional if
+.I n
+is a simple integer.
+.TP
+.B E
+Equalize the widths of all columns marked
+.BR E .
+.PD
+.RE
+.PP
+Each line of
+.I data
+becomes one row of the table; tabs separate items.
+Lines beginning with
+.L .
+are 
+.I troff 
+requests.
+Certain special data items are recognized:
+.RS
+.TP 0
+.B _
+Draw a horizontal rule in this column.
+.PD0
+.TP
+.B =
+Draw a double horizontal rule in this column.
+A data line consisting of a single
+.L _
+or
+.L =
+draws the rule across the whole table.
+.TP
+.B \e_
+Draw a rule only as wide as the contents of the column.
+.TP
+.BI \eR x
+Repeat character
+.I x
+across the column.
+.TP
+.B \e^
+Span the previous item in this column down into this row.
+.TP
+.B T{
+The item is a text block to be separately formatted
+by
+.I troff 
+and placed in the table.
+The block continues to the next line beginning with
+.BR T} .
+The remainder of the data line follows at that point.
+.PD
+.RE
+.PP
+When it is used in a pipeline with
+.IR eqn ,
+the
+.I tbl
+command should be first, to minimize the volume
+of data passed through
+pipes.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.ds tb \fR<tab>\fP
+Let \*(tb
+represent a tab (which should
+be typed as a genuine tab).
+.if t .2C
+.EX
+\&.TS
+c s s
+c c s
+c c c
+l n n.
+Household Population
+Town\*(tbHouseholds
+\*(tbNumber\*(tbSize
+Bedminster\*(tb789\*(tb3.26
+Bernards Twp.\*(tb3087\*(tb3.74
+Bernardsville\*(tb2018\*(tb3.30
+\&.TE
+.if t \{\0 
+\0 
+\0\}
+.if n .PP
+.TS
+c s s
+c c s
+c c c
+l n n.
+Household Population
+Town	Households
+	Number	Size
+Bedminster	789	3.26
+Bernards Twp.	3087	3.74
+Bernardsville	2018	3.30
+.TE
+.EE
+.if t \{.sp3
+.1C\}
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/tbl
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR troff (1), 
+.IR eqn (1),
+.IR doctype (1)
+.br
+M. E. Lesk and L. L. Cherry,
+``TBL\(ema Program to Format Tables'',
+.I
+Unix Research System Programmer's Manual,
+Tenth Edition, Volume 2.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/tcs b/sys/man/1/tcs
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..664073d36
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/tcs
@@ -0,0 +1,172 @@
+.TH TCS 1
+.SH NAME
+tcs \- translate character sets
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B tcs
+[
+.B -slcv
+]
+[
+.B -f
+.I ics
+]
+[
+.B -t
+.I ocs
+]
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Tcs
+interprets the named
+.I file(s)
+(standard input default) as a stream of characters from the
+.I ics
+character set or format, converts them to runes,
+and then converts them into a stream of characters from the
+.I ocs
+character set or format on the standard output.
+The default value for
+.I ics
+and
+.I ocs
+is
+.BR utf ,
+the
+.SM UTF
+encoding described in
+.IR utf (6).
+The
+.B -l
+option lists the character sets known to
+.IR tcs .
+Processing continues in the face of conversion errors (the
+.B -s
+option prevents reporting of these errors).
+The
+.B -c
+option forces the output to contain only correctly converted characters;
+otherwise,
+.B Runeerror
+(0xFFFD)
+characters will be substituted for
+.SM UTF
+encoding errors and unknown characters.
+.PP
+The
+.B -v
+option generates various diagnostic and summary information on standard error,
+or makes the
+.B -l
+output more verbose.
+.PP
+.I Tcs
+recognizes an ever changing list of character sets.
+In particular, it supports a variety of Russian and Japanese encodings.
+Some of the supported encodings are
+.TF jis-kanji
+.TP
+.B utf
+The Plan 9
+.SM UTF
+encoding, known by ISO as UTF-8
+.TP
+.B utf1
+The deprecated original
+.SM UTF
+encoding from ISO 10646
+.TP
+.B ascii
+7-bit ASCII
+.TP
+.B 8859-1
+Latin-1 (Central European)
+.TP
+.B 8859-2
+Latin-2 (Czech .. Slovak)
+.TP
+.B 8859-3
+Latin-3 (Dutch .. Turkish)
+.TP
+.B 8859-4
+Latin-4 (Scandinavian)
+.TP
+.B 8859-5
+Part 5 (Cyrillic)
+.TP
+.B 8859-6
+Part 6 (Arabic)
+.TP
+.B 8859-7
+Part 7 (Greek)
+.TP
+.B 8859-8
+Part 8 (Hebrew)
+.TP
+.B 8859-9
+Latin-5 (Finnish .. Portuguese)
+.TP
+.B html
+Unicode as encoded by HTML
+.TP
+.B koi8
+KOI-8 (GOST 19769-74)
+.TP
+.B jis-kanji
+ISO 2022-JP
+.TP
+.B ujis
+EUC-JX: JIS 0208
+.TP
+.B ms-kanji
+Microsoft, or Shift-JIS
+.TP
+.B jis
+(from only) guesses between ISO 2022-JP, EUC or Shift-Jis
+.TP
+.B gb
+Chinese national standard (GB2312-80)
+.TP
+.B big5
+Big 5 (HKU version)
+.TP
+.B unicode
+Unicode Standard 1.0
+.TP
+.B tis
+Thai character set plus
+.SM ASCII
+(TIS 620-1986)
+.TP
+.B msdos
+IBM PC: CP 437
+.TP
+.B atari
+Atari-ST character set
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.TP
+.B tcs -f 8859-1
+Convert 8859-1 (Latin-1) characters into
+.SM UTF
+format.
+.TP
+.B tcs -s -f jis
+Convert characters encoded in one of several shift JIS encodings into
+.SM UTF
+format.
+Unknown Kanji will be converted into
+.B 0xFFFD
+characters.
+.TP
+.B tcs -t html
+Convert UTF into character set-independent HTML.
+.TP
+.B tcs -lv
+Print an up to date list of the supported character sets.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/tcs
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR ascii (1), 
+.IR rune (2), 
+.IR utf (6).
diff --git a/sys/man/1/tee b/sys/man/1/tee
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..d237fb7fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/tee
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+.TH TEE 1
+.SH NAME
+tee \- pipe fitting
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B tee
+[
+.B -i
+]
+[
+.B -a
+]
+.I files
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Tee
+transcribes the standard input to the standard
+output and makes copies in the
+.IR files .
+The options are
+.TP
+.B -i
+Ignore interrupts.
+.TP
+.B -a
+Append the output to the
+.I files
+rather than rewriting them.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/tee.c
diff --git a/sys/man/1/tel b/sys/man/1/tel
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..69bc37331
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/tel
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+.TH TEL 1
+.SH NAME
+tel, iwhois \- look in phone book
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B tel
+.I key ...
+.PP
+.B iwhois
+.IR name [ \fL@\f2domain ]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Tel
+looks up
+.I key
+in a private telephone book,
+.BR $home/lib/tel ,
+and in the public telephone book,
+.BR /lib/tel .
+It uses
+.IR grep
+(with the
+.B -i
+option to ignore case differences), so the key may be any part of a
+name or number.  Customarily, the telephone book contains names,
+userids, home numbers, and office numbers of users.  It also contains
+a directory of area codes and miscellaneous people of general
+interest.
+.PP
+.I Iwhois
+looks up names in the Internet NIC's personnel database.
+.I Name
+should be a surname optionally followed by a comma and given name.
+A different server can be chosen by appending to the name an
+.B @
+followed by the server's domain name.
+.SH FILES
+.TF /lib/areacodes
+.TP
+.B /lib/areacodes
+Telephone area codes database.
+.TP
+.B /lib/tel
+Public telephone number database.
+.TP
+.B $home/lib/tel
+Personal telephone number database.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /rc/bin/tel
+.br
+.B /rc/bin/iwhois
diff --git a/sys/man/1/test b/sys/man/1/test
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..8feabf19a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/test
@@ -0,0 +1,218 @@
+.TH TEST 1
+.SH NAME
+test \- set status according to condition
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B test
+.I expr
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Test
+evaluates the expression
+.IR expr .
+If the value is true the exit status is null; otherwise the
+exit status is non-null.
+If there are no arguments the exit status is non-null.
+.PP
+The following primitives are used to construct
+.IR expr .
+.TP "\w'\fIn1 \fL-eq \fIn2\fLXX'u"
+.BI -r " file"
+True if the file exists (is accessible) and is readable.
+.PD0
+.TP
+.BI -w " file"
+True if the file exists and is writable.
+.TP
+.BI -x " file"
+True if the file exists and has execute permission.
+.TP
+.BI -e " file
+True if the file exists.
+.TP
+.BI -f " file"
+True if the file exists and is a plain file.
+.TP
+.BI -d " file"
+True if the file exists and is a directory.
+.TP
+.BI -s " file"
+True if the file exists and has a size greater than zero.
+.TP
+.BI -t " fildes
+True if the open file whose file descriptor number is
+.I fildes
+(1 by default)
+is the same file as
+.BR /dev/cons .
+.TP
+.BI -A " file"
+True if the file exists and is append-only.
+.TP
+.BI -L " file"
+True if the file exists and is exclusive-use.
+.TP
+.BI -T "file"
+True if the file exists and is temporary.
+.TP
+.IB s1 " = " s2
+True
+if the strings
+.I s1
+and
+.I s2
+are identical.
+.TP
+.IB s1 " != " s2
+True
+if the strings
+.I s1
+and
+.I s2
+are not identical.
+.TP
+s1
+True if
+.I s1
+is not the null string.
+(Deprecated.)
+.TP
+.BI -n " s1"
+True if the length of string
+.I s1
+is non-zero.
+.TP
+.BI -z " s1"
+True if the length of string
+.I s1
+is zero.
+.TP
+.IB n1 " -eq " n2
+True if the integers
+.I n1
+and
+.I n2
+are arithmetically equal.
+Any of the comparisons
+.BR -ne ,
+.BR -gt ,
+.BR -ge ,
+.BR -lt ,
+or
+.BR -le
+may be used in place of
+.BR -eq .
+The (nonstandard) construct
+.BI -l " string\f1,
+meaning the length of
+.IR string ,
+may be used in place of an integer.
+.TP
+.IB a " -nt " b
+True if file
+.I a
+is newer than (modified after) file
+.IR b .
+.TP
+.IB a " -ot " b
+True if file
+.I a
+is older than (modified before) file
+.IR b .
+.TP
+.IB f " -older " t
+True if file
+.I f
+is older than (modified before) time
+.IR t .
+If
+.I t
+is a integer followed by the letters
+.BR y (years),
+.BR M (months),
+.BR d (days),
+.BR h (hours),
+.BR m (minutes),
+or
+.BR s (seconds),
+it represents current time minus the specified time.
+If there is no letter, it represents seconds since
+epoch.
+You can also concatenate mixed units.  For example,
+.B 3d12h
+means three days and twelve hours ago.
+.PD
+.PP
+These primaries may be combined with the
+following operators:
+.TP "\w'\fL( \fIexpr\fL )XX'u"
+.B  !
+unary negation operator
+.PD0
+.TP
+.B  -o
+binary
+.I or
+operator
+.TP
+.B  -a
+binary
+.I and
+operator; higher precedence than
+.BR -o
+.TP
+.BI "( " expr " )"
+parentheses for grouping.
+.PD
+.PP
+The primitives
+.BR -b ,
+.BR -u ,
+.BR -g ,
+and
+.BR -s
+return false; they are recognized for compatibility with POSIX.
+.PP
+Notice that all the operators and flags are separate
+arguments to
+.IR test .
+Notice also that parentheses and equal signs are meaningful
+to
+.I rc
+and must be enclosed in quotes.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.I Test
+is a dubious way to check for specific character strings:
+it uses a process to do what an
+.IR rc (1)
+match or switch statement can do.
+The first example is not only inefficient but wrong, because
+.I test
+understands the purported string
+.B  \&"-c"
+as an option.
+.IP
+.EX
+if (test $1 '=' "-c") echo OK	# wrong!
+.EE
+.LP
+A better way is
+.IP
+.EX
+if (~ $1 -c) echo OK
+.EE
+.PP
+Test whether 
+.L abc
+is in the current directory.
+.IP
+.B test -f abc -o -d abc
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/test.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR rc (1) 
+.SH BUGS
+Won't complain about extraneous arguments
+since there may be arguments left unprocessed by
+short-circuit evaluation of
+.B -a
+or
+.BR -o .
diff --git a/sys/man/1/thesaurus b/sys/man/1/thesaurus
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..c605e635c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/thesaurus
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+.TH THESAURUS 1
+.SH NAME
+thesaurus \- search online thesaurus
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B thesaurus
+.BI word
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I thesaurus
+searches the online thesaurus at http://thesaurus.reference.com
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /rc/bin/thesaurus
diff --git a/sys/man/1/time b/sys/man/1/time
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..2c6b834b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/time
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+.TH TIME 1
+.SH NAME
+time \- time a command
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B time
+.I command
+[
+.I arg ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.I command
+is executed with the given arguments; after it is complete,
+.I time
+reports on standard error the program's elapsed user time,
+system time, and real time, in seconds,
+followed by the command line.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/time.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR prof (1)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/touch b/sys/man/1/touch
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..ac5937ec1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/touch
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+.TH TOUCH 1
+.SH NAME
+touch \- set modification date of a file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B touch
+[
+.B -c
+]
+[
+.B -t
+.I time
+]
+.I file ...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Touch
+attempts to set the modification time of the
+.I files
+to 
+.I time
+(by default, the current time).
+If a
+.I file
+does not exist,
+it will be created unless option
+.B -c
+is present.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/touch.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR ls (1),
+.IR stat (2),
+.IR chmod (1)
+.SH BUGS
+.I Touch
+will not touch directories.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/tr b/sys/man/1/tr
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..0e11f5b96
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/tr
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+.TH TR 1
+.SH NAME
+tr \- translate characters
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B tr
+[
+.B -cds
+]
+[
+.I string1
+[
+.I string2
+]
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Tr
+copies the standard input to the standard output with
+substitution or deletion of selected characters (runes).
+Input characters found in
+.I string1
+are mapped into the corresponding characters of
+.IR string2 .
+When
+.I string2
+is short it is padded to the length of
+.I string1
+by duplicating its last character.
+Any combination of the options
+.B -cds
+may be used:
+.TP
+.B -c
+Complement
+.IR string1 :
+replace it with a lexicographically ordered
+list of all other characters.
+.TP
+.B -d
+Delete from input all characters in
+.IR string1 .
+.TP
+.B -s
+Squeeze repeated output characters that occur in
+.I string2
+to single characters.
+.PP
+In either string a noninitial sequence
+.BI - x\f1,
+where 
+.I x
+is any character (possibly quoted), stands for
+a range of characters:
+a possibly empty sequence of codes running from
+the successor of the previous code up through
+the code for
+.IR x .
+The character
+.L \e
+followed by 1, 2 or 3 octal digits stands for the
+character whose
+16-bit
+value is given by those digits.
+The character sequence
+.L \ex
+followed by 1, 2, 3, or 4 hexadecimal digits stands
+for the character whose
+16-bit value is given by those digits.
+A 
+.L \e
+followed by any other character stands
+for that character.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Replace all upper-case
+.SM ASCII
+letters by lower-case.
+.IP
+.EX
+tr A-Z a-z <mixed >lower
+.EE
+.PP
+Create a list of all
+the words in
+.L file1
+one per line in
+.LR file2 ,
+where a word is taken to be a maximal string of alphabetics.
+.I String2
+is given as a quoted newline.
+.IP
+.EX
+tr -cs A-Za-z '
+\&' <file1 >file2
+.EE
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/tr.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR sed (1)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/trace b/sys/man/1/trace
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..6acabe11d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/trace
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+.TH TRACE 1
+.SH NAME
+trace \- show (real-time) process behavior
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B trace
+[
+.B -d
+.I file
+]
+[
+.B -v
+]
+[
+.B -w
+]
+[
+.I pid
+\&...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Trace
+displays the behavior of processes running on the machine.  In its
+window it shows a time line for each traced process.  Running
+processes appear as colored blocks, with arrows marking important
+events in real-time processes
+(see
+.IR proc (3)).
+Black up arrows mark process releases,
+black down arrows mark process deadlines,
+green down arrows mark times when a process yielded the processor
+before its deadline,
+red down arrows mark times when the process overran its allotted time.
+.PP
+.I Trace
+reads
+.B /proc/trace
+to retrieve trace events from the kernel
+scheduler.  Trace events are binary data structures generated by
+the kernel scheduler.
+It is assumed that the reader of
+.B /proc/trace
+and the kernel providing it have the same byte order.
+.PP
+The options are:
+.TP
+.B -d
+specify an alternate trace event file
+.TP
+.B -v
+print events as they are read from the trace event file
+.TP
+.B -w
+run in a new window rather than using the current one
+.PD
+.PP
+.I Trace
+recognizes these keystroke commands while it is running:
+.TP
+.B +
+zoom in by a factor of two
+.TP
+.B -
+zoom out by a factor of two
+.TP
+.B p
+pause or resume
+.TP
+.B q
+quit
+.PD
+.PP
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR proc (3)
+.SH FILES
+.TF /sys/include/trace.h
+.TP
+.B /proc/trace
+trace event file
+.TP
+.B /sys/include/trace.h
+trace event data structures
+.PD
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/trace.c
diff --git a/sys/man/1/troff b/sys/man/1/troff
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..2838fcd26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/troff
@@ -0,0 +1,237 @@
+.TH TROFF 1
+.SH NAME
+troff, nroff, dpost \- text formatting and typesetting
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B troff
+[
+.I option ...
+]
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.PP
+.B dpost
+[
+.B -f
+] [
+.I file ...
+]
+.PP
+.B nroff
+[
+.I option ...
+]
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Troff
+formats text in the named
+.I files
+for
+printing on a typesetter,
+emitting a textual intermediate format called
+`typesetter-independent
+.I troff
+output',
+understood by programs such as
+.IR proof (1)
+and
+.IR lp (1),
+but also by a
+.I troff
+post-processor named
+.IR dpost ,
+which emits corresponding Postscript.
+Under
+.BR -f ,
+.I dpost
+also emits Postscript font definitions as needed.
+.I Nroff
+does the same as
+.IR troff ,
+but produces output suitable
+for typewriter-like devices,
+usually without further post-processing,
+but see
+.IR col (1).
+.PP
+If no
+.I file
+argument is present, the standard input is read.
+An argument consisting of a single minus
+.RB ( - )
+is taken to be
+a file name corresponding to the standard input.
+The options are:
+.nr xx \w'\fL-m\f2name\ \ '
+.TP \n(xxu
+.BI -o list
+Print pages in the comma-separated
+.I list
+of numbers and ranges.
+A range
+.IB N - M
+means
+.I N
+through
+.IR M ;
+initial
+.BI - M
+means up to
+.IR M ;
+final
+.IB N -
+means from
+.I N
+to the end.
+.TP
+.BI -n N
+Number first generated page
+.IR N .
+.TP
+.BI -m name
+Process the macro file
+.BI /sys/lib/tmac/tmac. name
+before the input
+.IR files .
+.TP
+.BI -r aN
+Set register
+.I a
+(one character name) to
+.IR N .
+.TP
+.B -i
+Read standard input after the input files are exhausted.
+.TP
+.B -q
+Invoke the simultaneous input-output mode of the
+.B rd
+request.
+.TP
+.B -N
+Produce output suitable for typewriter-like devices.
+.SS Typesetter devices (not \fL-N\fP) only
+.TP \n(xxu
+.B -a
+Send a printable
+textual
+approximation
+of the results to the standard output.
+.TP
+.BI -T dest
+Prepare output for typesetter
+.IR dest :
+.br
+.ns
+.RS
+.TP \w'\fL-TLatin1\ 'u
+.B -Tutf
+(The default.) PostScript printers with
+preprocessing to handle Unicode
+characters encoded in
+.SM UTF
+.PD0
+.TP
+.B -Tpost
+Regular PostScript printers
+.PD0
+.TP
+.B -T202
+Mergenthaler Linotron 202
+.RE
+.PD
+.TP "\w'\fL-m\f2name 'u"
+.BI -F dir
+Take font information from directory
+.IR dir .
+.SS Typewriter (\fL-N\fP) output only
+.TP \n(xxu
+.BI -s N
+Halt prior to every
+.I N
+pages (default
+.IR N =1)
+to allow paper loading or changing.
+.TP
+.BI -T name
+Prepare output for specified terminal.
+Known
+.I names
+include
+.B utf
+for the normal Plan 9
+.SM UTF
+encoding of the Unicode Standard character set (default),
+.B 37
+for the
+Teletype model 37,
+.B lp
+(`line-printer')
+for any terminal without half-line capability,
+.B 450
+for the \s-1DASI\s+1-450
+(Diablo Hyterm),
+and
+.B think
+(HP ThinkJet).
+.TP
+.B -e
+Produce equally-spaced words in adjusted
+lines, using full terminal resolution.
+.TP
+.B -h
+Use output tabs during horizontal spacing
+to speed output and reduce output character count.
+Tab settings are assumed to be every
+8 nominal character widths.
+.SH FILES
+.TF /sys/lib/troff/term/*
+.TP
+.B /tmp/trtmp*
+temporary file
+.TP
+.B /sys/lib/tmac/tmac.*
+standard macro files
+.TP
+.B /sys/lib/troff/term/*
+terminal driving tables for
+.I nroff
+.TP
+.B /sys/lib/troff/font/*
+font width tables for
+.I troff
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/troff
+.br
+.B /rc/bin/dpost
+.br
+.ne 3
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR lp (1),
+.IR proof (1),
+.IR page (1),
+.IR eqn (1),
+.IR tbl (1),
+.IR pic (1),
+.IR grap (1),
+.IR doctype (1),
+.IR ms (6),
+.IR image (6),
+.IR tex (1),
+.IR deroff (1),
+.IR col (1)
+.br
+J. F. Ossanna and B. W. Kernighan,
+``Troff User's Manual''
+.br
+B. W. Kernighan,
+``A Typesetter-Independent TROFF'',
+CSTR #97
+.br
+B. W. Kernighan,
+``A TROFF Tutorial'',
+.I
+Unix Research System Programmer's Manual,
+Tenth Edition, Volume 2.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/troff2html b/sys/man/1/troff2html
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..7f777a766
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/troff2html
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+.TH TROFF2HTML 1
+.SH NAME
+troff2html \- convert troff output into HTML
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B troff2html
+[
+.B -t
+.I title
+] [
+.I file
+\ ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Troff2html
+reads the
+.IR troff (1)
+output in the named
+.IR files ,
+default standard input,
+and converts them into HTML.
+.PP
+.I Troff2html
+does a tolerable job with straight
+.B troff
+output, but it is helped by annotations, described below.
+Its main use is for
+.B man2html
+(see
+.IR httpd (8)),
+which converts
+.IR man (1)
+pages into HTML
+and depends on a specially annotated set of
+.IR man (6)
+macros, invoked by
+.B troff
+.BR -manhtml .
+.PP
+.B Troff
+output lines beginning
+.IP
+.EX
+x X html \f1...
+.EE
+.LP
+which are introduced by placing
+.B \eX'html\ \f1...\fP'
+in the
+.IR input ,
+cause the rest of the line to be interpolated into the HTML produced.
+Several such lines are recognized specially by
+.IR troff2html .
+The most important are the pair
+.IP
+.EX
+x X html manref start cp 1
+x X html manref end cp 1
+.EE
+.PP
+which are used to create HTML hyperlinks around text of the form
+.IR cp (1)
+pointing to
+.BR /magic/man2html/1/cp .
+.PP
+.I Troff2html
+is new and experimental; in time, it may improve and subsume
+.IR ms2html (1).
+On the one hand, because it uses the input,
+.B ms2html
+can handle
+.IR pic (1),
+.IR eqn (1),
+etc., which
+.I troff2html
+does not handle at all; on the other hand,
+.B ms2html
+understands only
+.IR ms (6)
+documents and is easily confused by complex
+.B troff
+constructions.
+.I Troff2html
+has the reverse properties: it does not handle the preprocessors but its output
+is reliable and (modulo helper annotations) is independent of macro package.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/troff2html
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR troff (1),
+.IR ms2html (1),
+.B man2html
+in
+.IR httpd (8).
+.SH BUGS
+.B Troff
+and HTML have different models, and they don't mesh well in all cases.
+.BR Troff 's
+indented paragraphs are not well served in HTML, and the output of
+.I troff2html
+shows this.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/tweak b/sys/man/1/tweak
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..e3f195038
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/tweak
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
+.TH TWEAK 1
+.CT 1 graphics
+.SH NAME
+tweak \- edit image files, subfont files, face files, etc.
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B tweak
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Tweak
+edits existing files holding various forms of images.
+To create original images, start from an existing image, subfont, etc.
+.PP
+.I Tweak
+reads its argument
+.I files
+and displays the resulting images in a vertical column.
+If the image is too wide to fit across the display, it
+is folded much like a long line of text in an
+.IR rio
+window.
+Under each image is displayed one or two lines of text
+presenting its parameters.
+The first line shows the image's
+.BR depth ,
+the number
+of bits per pixel;
+.BR r ,
+the rectangle covered by the image;
+and the name of the
+.B file
+from which it was read.
+If the file is a subfont, a second line presents a hexadecimal 16-bit
+.B offset
+to be applied to character values from the subfont
+(typically as stored in a font file; see
+.IR font (6));
+and the subfont's
+.BR n ,
+.BR height ,
+and
+.B ascent
+as defined in
+.IR cachechars (2).
+.PP
+By means described below, magnified views of portions of the images
+may be displayed.
+The text associated with such a view includes
+.BR mag ,
+the magnification.
+If the view is of a single character from a subfont, the second
+line of text shows the character's value (including the subfont's offset)
+in hexadecimal and as a character in
+.I tweak's
+default font; the character's
+.BR x ,
+.BR top ,
+.BR bottom ,
+.BR left ,
+and
+.BR width
+as defined in
+.IR cachechars (2);
+and
+.BR iwidth ,
+the physical width of the image in the subfont's image.
+.PP
+There are two methods to obtain a magnified view of a character from a
+subfont.
+The first is to click mouse button 1 over the image of the character in
+the subfont.  The second is to select the
+.B char
+entry on the button 3 menu,
+point the resulting gunsight cursor at the desired subfont and click button 3,
+and then type at the text prompt at the bottom of the screen the
+character value, either as a multi-digit hexadecimal number or as a single
+rune representing the character.
+.PP
+To magnify a portion of other types of image files,
+click button 1 over the unmagnified file.
+The cursor will switch to a cross.
+Still with button 1, sweep a rectangle, as in
+.BR rio ,
+that encloses the portion of the image to be magnified.
+(If the file is 16×16 or smaller,
+.I tweak
+will just magnify the entire file; no sweeping is necessary.)
+.PP
+Pressing buttons 1 and 2 within magnified images changes pixel values.
+By default, button 1 sets the pixel to all zeros and button 2 sets the pixel
+to all ones.
+.PP
+Across the top of the screen is a textual display of global parameters.
+These values, as well as many of the textual values associated with
+the images, may be edited by clicking button 1 on the displayed
+value and typing a new value.
+The values along the top of the screen are:
+.TP
+.B mag
+Default magnification.
+.TP
+.B val(hex)
+The value used to modify pixels within magnified images.
+The value must be in hexadecimal, optionally preceded by a
+tilde for bitwise negation.
+.TP
+.B but1
+.TP
+.B but2
+The pixel value written when the corresponding button is pressed over a pixel.
+.TP
+.B invert-on-copy
+Whether the pixel values are inverted when a
+.B copy
+operation is performed.
+.PP
+Under button 3 is a menu holding a variety of functions.
+Many of these functions prompt for the image upon which to act
+by switching to a gunsight cursor; click button 3 over the
+selection, or click a different button to cancel the action.
+.TP
+.B open
+Read and display a file.  The name of the file is typed to the prompt
+on the bottom line.
+.TP
+.B read
+Reread a file.
+.TP
+.B write
+Write a file.
+.TP
+.B copy
+Use the copy function, default
+.BR S ,
+to transfer a rectangle of pixels from one image to another.
+The program prompts with a cross cursor; sweep out a rectangle in
+one image or just click button 3 to select the whole image.
+The program will leave that rectangle in place and
+attach another one to the cursor.  Move that rectangle to the desired
+place in any image and click button 3, or another button to cancel the action.
+.TP
+.B char
+As described above, open a magnified view of a character image in a subfont.
+.TP
+.B pixels
+Report the coordinate and value of individual pixels indicated by pressing button 3.
+This is a mode of operation canceled by pressing button 1 or 2.
+.TP
+.B close
+Close the specified image.
+If the image is the unmagnified file, also close any magnified views of that file.
+.TP
+.B exit
+Quit
+.IR tweak .
+The program will complain once about modified but unwritten files.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/tweak.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR cachechars (2),
+.IR image (6),
+.IR font (6)
+.SH BUGS
+For a program written to adjust width tables in fonts,
+.I tweak
+has been pushed unreasonably far.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/uniq b/sys/man/1/uniq
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..65fcd49fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/uniq
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+.TH UNIQ 1
+.SH NAME
+uniq \- report repeated lines in a file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B uniq
+[
+.B -udc
+[
+.BI +- num
+]
+]
+[
+.I file
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Uniq
+copies the input
+.IR file ,
+or the standard input, to the
+standard output, comparing adjacent lines.
+In the normal case, the second and succeeding copies
+of repeated lines are
+removed.
+Repeated lines must be adjacent
+in order to be found.
+.TP
+.B -u
+Print unique lines.
+.TP
+.B -d
+Print (one copy of) duplicated lines.
+.TP
+.B -c
+Prefix a repetition count and a tab to each output line.
+Implies
+.B -u
+and
+.BR -d .
+.TP
+.BI - num
+The first
+.IR num
+fields
+together with any blanks before each are ignored.
+A field is defined as a string of non-space, non-tab characters
+separated by tabs and spaces from its neighbors.
+.TP
+.BI + num
+The first
+.IR num
+characters are ignored.
+Fields are skipped before characters.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/uniq.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR sort (1) 
+.SH BUGS
+Field selection and comparison should be compatible with 
+.IR sort (1).
diff --git a/sys/man/1/units b/sys/man/1/units
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..504c26f2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/units
@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+.TH UNITS 1
+.if n .ds / /
+.SH NAME
+units \- conversion program
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B units
+[
+.B -v
+]
+[
+.I file
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Units
+converts quantities expressed
+in various standard scales to
+their equivalents in other scales.
+It works interactively in this fashion:
+.IP
+.EX
+you have: inch
+you want: cm
+    * 2.54
+    / 0.393701
+.EE
+.PP
+A quantity is specified as a multiplicative combination
+of units and floating point numbers.
+Operators have the following precedence:
+.IP
+.EX
+.ta \w'\fLXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX'u
+\fL+\fP \fL-\fP	\f1add and subtract
+\fL*\fP \fL/\fP \fL×\fP \fL÷\fP	\f1multiply and divide
+catenation	multiply
+\fL²\fP \fL³\fP \fL^\fP	\f1exponentiation
+\fL|\fP	\f1divide
+\fL(\fP ... \fL)\fP	\f1grouping
+.EE
+.PP
+Most familiar units,
+abbreviations, and metric prefixes are recognized,
+together with a generous leavening of exotica
+and a few constants of nature including:
+.IP
+.de fq
+\fL\\$1\\fP	\\$2 \\$3 \\$4 \\$5 \\$6
+..
+.ta \w'\fLwaterXXX'u
+.nf
+.fq pi,\f1π\fP ratio of circumference to diameter
+.fq c speed of light
+.fq e charge on an electron
+.fq g acceleration of gravity
+.fq force same as \fLg\fP
+.fq mole Avogadro's number
+.fq water "pressure head per unit height of water"
+.fq au astronomical unit
+.fi
+.PP
+The
+.L pound
+is a unit of
+mass.
+Compound names are run together, e.g.
+.LR lightyear .
+British units that differ from their US counterparts
+are prefixed thus:
+.LR brgallon .
+Currency is denoted
+.LR belgiumfranc ,
+.LR britainpound ,
+etc.
+.PP
+The complete list of units can be found in
+.BR /lib/units .
+A
+.I file
+argument to
+.I units
+specifies a file to be used instead of
+.BR /lib/units.
+The
+.B -v
+flag causes
+.I units
+to print its entire database.
+.SH EXAMPLE
+.EX
+you have: 15 pounds force/in²
+you want: atm
+    * 1.02069
+    / .97973
+.EE
+.SH FILES
+.B /lib/units
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/units.y
+.SH BUGS
+Since
+.I units
+does only multiplicative scale changes,
+it can convert Kelvin to Rankine but not Centigrade to
+Fahrenheit.
+.PP
+Currency conversions are only as accurate as the last time someone
+updated the database.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/uptime b/sys/man/1/uptime
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..75470077b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/uptime
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+.TH UPTIME 1
+.SH NAME
+uptime \- show how long the system has been running
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B uptime
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Uptime
+shows how long the system has been running. It uses the following format:
+.PP
+.B
+	sysname up 33 days, 17:56:42
+.PP
+The time given accounts for the timezone.
+
+..SH FILES
+.TF /dev/time
+.TF /dev/sysname
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /rc/bin/uptime
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR date (1)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/vac b/sys/man/1/vac
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..0cf30b01d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/vac
@@ -0,0 +1,176 @@
+.TH VAC 1
+.SH NAME
+vac, unvac \- create, extract a vac archive on Venti
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B vac
+[
+.B -mqsv
+] [
+.B -b
+.I blocksize
+] [
+.B -d
+.I oldvacfile
+] [
+.B -e
+.I exclude
+] [
+.B -f
+.I vacfile
+] [
+.B -i
+.I name
+] [
+.B -h
+.I host
+]
+.I file ...
+.PP
+.B unvac
+[
+.B -Tctv
+] [
+.B -h
+.I host
+]
+.I vacfile
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Vac
+creates an archival copy of Plan 9 file trees on Venti. It can be used
+to build a simple backup system. One of the unusual properties of Venti is
+that duplicate blocks are detected and coalesced.  When
+.I vac
+is used on a file tree that shares data with an existing archive, the consumption of
+storage will be approximately equal to an incremental backup.
+This reduction in storage consumption occurs transparently to the user.
+.PP
+As an optimization, the 
+.B -d
+and
+.B -q
+options, described below, can be used to explicitly create an archive relative to an existing archive.
+These options do not change the resulting archive generated by
+.IR vac ,
+but simply reduce the number of write operations to Venti.
+.PP
+The output of
+.I vac
+is the hexadecimal representation of the SHA1 fingerprint of the root of the archive, in this format:
+.IP
+.EX
+vac:64daefaecc4df4b5cb48a368b361ef56012a4f46
+.EE
+.PP
+The options to 
+.I vac
+are:
+.TF "-d\fI oldvacfile"
+.PD
+.TP
+.BI -b " blocksize
+Specifies the block size that data will be broken into.
+The units for the size can be specified by appending
+.L k
+to indicate kilobytes.
+The default is 8k.
+The size must be in the range
+of 512 bytes to 52k.
+.TP
+.BI -d " oldvacfile
+Reduce the number of blocks written to Venti by comparing the files to be stored with
+the contents of an existing
+.I vac
+file tree whose score is stored in
+.IR oldvacfile .
+.TP
+.BI -e " exclude
+Do not include the file or directory specified by
+.IR exclude .
+This option may be repeated multiple times.
+.TP
+.BI -f " vacfile
+The results of 
+.I vac
+are placed in
+.IR vacfile ,
+or the standard output if no file is given.
+.TP
+.BI -i " name
+Include standard input as one of the input files, storing it in the archive
+with the specified
+.IR name .
+.TP
+.BI -h " host
+The network address of the Venti server.
+The default is taken from the environment variable
+.BR venti .
+If this variable does not exist, then the default is the
+metaname 
+.BR $venti ,
+which can be configured via
+.IR ndb (6).
+.TP
+.B -m
+Expand and merge any
+.I vac
+archives that are found while reading the input files.  This option is
+useful for building an archive from a collection of existing archives.  Each archive is inserted
+into the new archive as if it had been unpacked in the directory in which it was found.  Multiple
+archives can be unpacked in a single directory and the contents will be merged.  To be detected, the
+archives must end in
+.LR .vac .
+Note, an archive is inserted by simply copying the root fingerprint and does not require
+the archive to be unpacked.
+.TP
+.B -q
+Increase the performance of the
+.B -d
+option by detecting unchanged files based on a match of the files name and other meta data,
+rather than examining the contents of the files.
+.TP
+.B -s
+Print out various statistics on standard error.
+.TP
+.B -v
+Produce more verbose output on standard error, including the name of the files added to the archive
+and the vac archives that are expanded and merged.
+.PP
+.I Unvac
+lists or extracts files stored in the vac archive
+.IR vacfile ,
+which can be either a vac archive string in the format
+given above or the name of a file containing one.
+If
+.I file
+arguments are given, only those files or directories
+will be extracted.
+The options are:
+.TP
+.B -T
+Set the modification time on extracted files
+to the time listed in the archive.
+.TP
+.B -c
+Write extracted files to standard output instead of creating a file.
+.TP
+.B -h
+as per
+.IR vac .
+.TP
+.B -t
+Print a list of the files to standard output rather than extracting them.
+.TP
+.B -v
+If extracting files, print the name of each file and directory
+to standard error.
+If listing files, print metadata in addition to the names.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/vac
+.br
+.B /sys/src/cmd/unvac
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR vacfs (4),
+.IR venti (8)
diff --git a/sys/man/1/venti b/sys/man/1/venti
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..4b9510338
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/venti
@@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
+.TH VENTI 1
+.SH NAME
+read, write, copy \- simple Venti clients
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B venti/read
+[
+.B -h
+.I host
+]
+[
+.B -t
+.I type
+]
+.I score
+.br
+.B venti/write
+[
+.B -z
+]
+[
+.B -h
+.I host
+]
+[
+.B -t
+.I type
+]
+.br
+.B venti/copy
+[
+.B -fir
+]
+[
+.B -t
+.I type
+]
+.I srchost
+.I dsthost
+.I score
+[
+.I type
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Venti is a SHA1-addressed block storage server.
+See 
+.IR venti (6)
+for a full introduction.
+.PP
+.I Read
+reads a block with the given
+.I score
+and numeric
+.I type 
+from the server
+.I host
+and prints the block to standard output.
+If the
+.B -h
+option is omitted,
+.I read
+consults the environment variable
+.B $venti
+for the name of the Venti server.
+If the
+.B -t
+option is omitted,
+.I read
+will try each type, one at a time, until it finds
+one that works.
+It prints the corresponding
+.B read
+.B -t
+command to standard error
+to indicate the type of the block.
+.PP
+.I Write
+writes at most 56 kilobytes of data from standard input 
+to the server
+.I host
+and prints the resulting score to standard output.
+If the
+.B -t
+option is omitted,
+.I write
+uses type 0,
+denoting a data block.
+If the
+.B -z
+option is given,
+.I write
+zero truncates the block before writing it to the server.
+.PP
+.I Copy
+expects
+.I score
+to be the score of a 
+.B VtRoot
+block.
+It copies the entire tree of blocks reachable from
+the root block from the server
+.I srchost
+to the server
+.IR dsthost .
+.PP
+The
+.B -f
+option causes
+.I copy
+to run in `fast' mode,
+assuming that if a block already exists on the
+destination Venti server, all its children also
+exist and need not be checked.
+.PP
+The
+.B -i
+and
+.B -r
+options control
+.IR copy 's
+reaction to errors reading
+from
+.IR srchost .
+.I Copy
+always prints information to standard error
+about each read error.
+By default,
+.I copy
+exits after printing the first error.
+If the
+.B -i
+option is given, read errors are ignored.
+This is dangerous behavior because it breaks the 
+assumption made by `fast' mode.
+If the
+.B -r
+option is given, 
+.I copy
+replaces pointers to unreadable blocks with
+pointers to the zero block.
+It writes the new root score to standard output.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/venti
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR vac (1),
+.IR venti (2),
+.IR vacfs (4),
+.IR venti (6),
+.IR venti (8),
+.IR venti-backup (8),
+.IR venti-fmt (8)
+.SH BUGS
+There should be programs to read and write
+venti files and directories.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/vi b/sys/man/1/vi
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..1adf8d209
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/vi
@@ -0,0 +1,170 @@
+.TH VI 1
+.SH NAME
+5i, ki, vi, qi \- instruction simulators
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B vi
+[
+.I textfile
+]
+.br
+.B vi
+.I pid
+.br
+.B 5i
+[
+.I textfile
+]
+.br
+.B 5i
+.I pid
+.br
+.B ki
+[
+.I textfile
+]
+.br
+.B ki
+.I pid
+.br
+.B qi
+[
+.I textfile
+]
+.br
+.B qi
+.I pid
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Vi
+simulates the execution of a MIPS binary in
+a Plan 9 environment.
+It has two main uses: as
+a debugger and as a statistics gatherer.
+Programs running under
+.I vi
+execute about two hundred times
+slower than normal\(embut faster than
+single stepping under
+.IR db .
+.IR 5i ,
+.IR ki ,
+and
+.IR qi
+are similar to
+.I vi
+but interpret ARM, SPARC, and PowerPC binaries.
+The following discussion refers to
+.I vi
+but applies to the others
+as well.
+.PP
+.I Vi
+will simulate the execution of a named
+.IR textfile .
+It will also make a copy of an existing process with process id
+.I pid
+and simulate its continuation.
+.PP
+As a debugger
+.I vi
+offers more complete information
+than
+.IR db (1).
+Tracing can be performed at the level of instructions,
+system calls, or function calls.
+.I Vi
+allows breakpoints to be triggered when specified addresses
+in memory are accessed.
+A report of instruction counts,
+load delay fills and distribution is produced for
+each run.
+.I Vi
+simulates the CPU's caches and MMU
+to assist the optimization of compilers and programs.
+.PP
+The command interface mirrors the interface to
+.IR db ;
+see
+.IR db (1)
+for a detailed description.
+Data formats and addressing are compatible with
+.I db
+except
+for disassembly: 
+.I vi
+offers only MIPS
+.RB ( db
+.BR -mmipsco )
+mnemonics for
+machine instructions.
+.I Ki
+offers both Plan 9 and Sun SPARC formats.
+.PP
+Several extra commands allow
+extended tracing and printing of statistics:
+.TP
+.BR $t [ 0ics ]
+The
+.I t
+command controls tracing. Zero cancels all tracing
+options.
+.RS
+.TP
+.B i
+Enable instruction tracing
+.TP
+.B c
+Enable call tracing
+.TP
+.B s
+Enable system call tracing
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR $i [ itsp ]
+The
+.B i
+command prints statistics accumulated by
+all code run in this session.
+.RS
+.TP
+.B i
+Print instruction counts and frequency.
+.TP
+.B p
+Print cycle profile.
+.TP
+.B t
+.RI ( Vi
+only) Print TLB and cache statistics.
+.TP
+.B s
+Print memory reference, working set and size statistics.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR :b [ arwe ]
+.I Vi
+allows breakpoints to be set on any memory location.
+These breakpoints monitor when a location is
+accessed, read, written, or equals a certain value.
+For equality the compared value is the
+.I count
+(see
+.IR db (1))
+supplied to the command.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/vi
+etc.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR nm (1),
+.IR db (1)
+.SH BUGS
+The code generated by
+the compilers
+is well supported, but some unusual instructions are unimplemented.
+Some Plan 9 system calls such as
+.I rfork
+cause simulated traps.
+The floating point simulation makes assumptions about the interpreting
+machine's floating point support. The floating point conversions performed
+by
+.I vi
+may cause a loss of precision.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/vnc b/sys/man/1/vnc
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..41f7ffd2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/vnc
@@ -0,0 +1,237 @@
+.TH VNC 1
+.SH NAME
+vncs, vncv \- remote frame buffer server and viewer for Virtual Network Computing (VNC)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B vncs
+[
+.B -v
+]
+[
+.B -c
+.I cert
+]
+[
+.B -d
+.BI : display
+]
+[
+.B -g
+.IB width x height
+]
+[
+.B -p
+.I pixfmt
+]
+[
+.B -x
+.I net
+]
+[
+.I cmd
+[
+.I args
+...
+]
+]
+.PP
+.B vncs
+.B -k
+.BI : display
+[
+.B -x
+.I net
+]
+.PP
+.B vncv
+[
+.B -cstv
+]
+[
+.B -e
+.I encodings
+]
+[
+.B -k
+.I keypattern
+]
+.IR host [\fL: n ]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+VNC is a lightweight protocol
+for accessing graphical applications
+remotely.  The protocol allows one or more
+clients to connect to a server.
+While connected, clients display the frame buffer
+presented by the server and can send mouse events,
+keyboard events, and exchange snarf buffers.
+The server persists across viewer sessions, so that
+the virtual application can be accessed from various locations
+as its owner moves around.
+.PP
+VNC displays have names of the form
+.IB host : n \fR,
+where
+.I host
+is the machine's network name and
+.I n
+is a small integer identifier; display
+.I n
+is served on TCP port
+.RI 5900+ n .
+.PP
+.I Vncs
+starts a new virtual frame buffer in memory, simulating
+a Plan 9 terminal running
+.I cmd
+.IR args ,
+by default an interactive shell.
+As viewers connect, each is authenticated using a 
+(rather breakable) challenge-response protocol using
+the user's Inferno/POP password.
+.PP
+The options are:
+.TF "\fL-p \fIpixfmt"
+.PD
+.TP
+.B -c \fIcert
+start TLS on each viewer connection using the certificate
+in the file
+.IR cert .
+The corresponding private key must be loaded into
+the server's
+.IR factotum (4).
+When serving TLS connections, the base port is
+35729 rather than 5900.
+.TP
+.B -d :\fIn
+run on display
+.I n ;
+without this option, the server searches
+for an unused display.
+.TP
+.B -g \fIwidth\fBx\fIheight\fR
+set the virtual frame buffer to be
+.IB width x height
+(default
+1024x768)
+pixels.
+.TP
+.B -p \fIpixfmt
+set the virtual frame buffer's internal pixel format to
+.I pixfmt
+(default
+.BR r5g6b5 ).
+.TP
+.B -v
+print verbose output to standard error.
+.TP
+.B -x \fInet
+announce on an alternate network interface.
+Because of the weak authentication protocol and
+default lack of encryption, this option must
+be accompanied by
+.BR -c .
+.PD
+.PP
+The command
+.B vncs
+.B -k
+.BI : n
+kills the VNC server running on display
+.IR n .
+.PP
+.I Vncv
+provides access to remote display
+.IB host : n \fR.
+It resizes its window to be the smaller of the
+remote frame buffer size and the local screen.
+.PP
+The options are:
+.TP
+.B -c
+when connecting to 8-bit displays, request
+.B r4g4b4
+pixels rather than 
+.B r3g3b2
+pixels.
+This takes up more bandwidth but usually gives
+significantly better matching to the Plan 9 color map.
+.TP
+.B -e \fIencodings
+set the ordered list of allowed frame buffer update encodings.
+The default (and full) set is
+.B copyrect
+.B corre
+.B hextile
+.B rre
+.BR raw .
+The encodings should be given as a single space-separated argument
+(quoted when using the shell).
+.TP
+.B -k \fIkeypattern
+add 
+.I keypattern
+to the pattern used to select a key from 
+.IR factotum (4).
+.TP
+.B -s
+share the display with extant viewers;
+by default extant viewers are closed
+when a new viewer connects.
+.TP
+.B -t
+start TLS on the connection.
+.TP
+.B -v
+print verbose output to standard error.
+.PD
+.PP
+The VNC protocol represents keyboard input as
+key up/down events.
+Plan 9 does not expose the state of the
+Ctl and Shift keys except as it can be inferred
+from receipt of control or shifted characters.
+It does not expose the state of the Alt key at all,
+since the Alt key is used to compose Unicode characters
+(see
+.IR keyboard (6)).
+.I Vncv
+correctly handles the sending of control and shifted
+characters.
+To support systems that use key sequences like Alt-X
+(or worse, Alt-mouse-click), typing the Plan 9 compose
+sequences
+.B Alt
+.B Z
+.B A
+(for Alt), 
+.B Alt
+.B Z
+.B C
+(for Ctrl),
+and
+.B Alt
+.B Z
+.B S
+(for Shift)
+will send a ``key down'' message for
+the given key.
+A corresponding ``key up'' message
+will be sent after the next key is pressed,
+or when the sequence is retyped,
+whichever happens first.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/vnc
+.SH "SEE ALSO
+.IR drawterm (8)
+.br
+.B http://www.uk.research.att.com/vnc
+.SH BUGS
+If the remote frame buffer is larger than the local screen,
+only the upper left corner can be accessed.
+.PP
+.I Vncv
+does no verification of the TLS certificate presented
+by the server.
+.PP
+.I Vncv
+supports only version 3.3 of the RFB protocol.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/vt b/sys/man/1/vt
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..fefd7b8c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/vt
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+.TH VT 1 
+.SH NAME
+vt \- emulate a VT-100 or VT-220 terminal
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B vt
+[
+.B -2abcx
+]
+[
+.B -f
+.I font
+] [
+.B -l
+.I log
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Vt
+replaces a
+.I rio
+window with a fresh instance of the shell,
+.IR rc (1),
+running within an emulation of a DEC VT-100 terminal.
+To exit
+.IR vt ,
+exit the
+.B rc
+it starts.
+.SS Options
+.TF m
+.TP
+.B 2
+.TP
+.B a
+.TP
+.B x
+change
+.I vt
+to emulate a VT-220, ANSI, or XTerm terminal respectively.
+.TP
+.B b
+changes the color scheme to white text on a black background,
+but potentially with colors from escape sequences.
+.TP
+.B c
+changes the color scheme to monochrome (no colors).
+.TP
+.B f
+sets the
+.IR font .
+.TP
+.B l
+names a
+.I log
+file for the session.
+.SS Menus
+The right button has a menu with the following entries to provide
+the sort of character processing expected by non-Plan 9 systems:
+.TF cooked
+.TP
+.B 24x80
+Resize the
+.I vt
+window to hold 24 rows of 80 columns.
+.TP
+.B crnl
+Print a newline (linefeed) character after receiving a carriage return from the host.
+.TP
+.B cr
+Do not print a newline after carriage return.
+.TP
+.B nlcr
+Print a carriage return after receiving a newline from the host.
+.TP
+.B nl
+Do not print a carriage return after newline.
+.TP
+.B raw
+Enter raw (no echo, no interpretation) character mode for input.
+.TP
+.B cooked
+Leave raw mode.
+.TP
+.B exit
+Exit
+.IR vt .
+.PD
+.PP
+The middle button has a menu with the following entries:
+.TF right_key
+.TP
+.B backup
+Move the display back one screenful.
+.TP
+.B forward
+Move the display forward one screenful.
+(These are a poor substitute for a scroll bar.)
+.TP
+.B reset
+Display the last screenful; the same as going
+.B forward
+to the end.
+.TP
+.B clear
+Clear the screen.  Previous contents can be recovered using
+.BR backup .
+.TP
+.B send
+Send the contents of the
+.B rio
+snarf buffer, just as
+.B send
+in the
+.B rio
+menu.
+.TP
+.B scroll
+Make new lines visible as they appear at the bottom.
+.TP
+.B page
+When the page fills, pause and wait for a character to be typed before proceeding.
+The down arrow key advances a page without sending the character to the host.
+.PD
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/vt
+.SH BUGS
+This program is used only for communicating with foreign systems,
+so it is not
+as rich an emulation as its equivalent in other environments.
+.PP
+Use care in setting raw and newline modes when connecting to Unix systems
+via
+.IR con (1)
+or
+.IR ssh (1).
+It may also be necessary to set the emulator into raw mode.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/wc b/sys/man/1/wc
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..fe2b80340
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/wc
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+.TH WC 1
+.SH NAME
+wc \- word count
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B wc
+[
+.B -lwrbc
+]
+[
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Wc
+counts lines, words, runes, syntactically-invalid
+.SM UTF
+codes and bytes in the named
+.IR files ,
+or in the standard input if no file is named.
+A word is a maximal string of characters
+delimited by spaces, tabs or newlines.
+The count of runes includes invalid codes.
+.PP
+If the optional argument is present,
+just the specified counts (lines, words, runes, broken
+.SM UTF
+codes or bytes)
+are selected by the letters
+.BR l ,
+.BR w ,
+.BR r ,
+.BR b ,
+or
+.BR c .
+Otherwise, lines, words and bytes
+.RB ( -lwc )
+are reported.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/wc.c
+.SH BUGS
+The Unicode Standard has many blank characters scattered through it,
+but
+.I wc
+looks for only
+.SM ASCII
+space, tab and newline.
+.PP
+.I Wc
+should have options to count suboptimal
+.SM UTF
+codes
+and bytes that cannot occur in any
+.SM UTF
+code.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/weather b/sys/man/1/weather
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..a4ccbd88c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/weather
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+.TH WEATHER 1
+.SH NAME
+weather \- print weather report
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B weather
+[
+.I air
+]  [
+.I st
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Weather
+prints the local conditions and seven-day forecast most recently reported at the
+.SM US
+airport with the three-letter location identifier
+.IR air .
+Given a two-letter
+.SM US
+state abbreviation
+.I st
+instead,
+.I weather
+prints a table of
+.I air
+location identifiers known for
+.IR st .
+.PP
+The arguments are mutually exclusive and case-insensitive.
+If neither is given,
+.I air
+defaults to location identifier
+.BR ewr ,
+designating the Newark, NJ, airport near Bell Labs, Murray Hill.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /rc/bin/weather
diff --git a/sys/man/1/who b/sys/man/1/who
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..1a13c3af0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/who
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+.TH WHO 1 
+.SH NAME
+who, whois \- who is using the machine
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B who
+.PP
+.B whois
+.I person
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Who
+prints the name of everyone with a non-Exiting process
+on the current machine.
+.PP
+.I Whois
+looks in
+.B /adm/whois
+and
+.B /adm/users
+to find out more information about
+.IR person .
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /rc/bin/who
diff --git a/sys/man/1/winwatch b/sys/man/1/winwatch
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..46183dcc3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/winwatch
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+.TH WINWATCH 1
+.SH NAME
+winwatch \- monitor rio windows
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B winwatch
+[
+.B -e
+.I exclude
+] [
+.B -f
+.I font
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Winwatch
+displays the labels of all current
+.IR rio (4)
+windows, refreshing the display every five seconds.
+Right clicking a window's label unhides, raises and gives focus to that window.
+Typing
+.B q
+or
+DEL
+quits
+.IR winwatch .
+.PP
+If the
+.B -e
+flag
+is given,
+windows matching the regular expression
+.I exclude
+are not shown.
+.SH EXAMPLE
+Excluding winwatch, stats and faces from being showed.
+.IP
+.EX
+% winwatch -e '^(winwatch|stats|faces)'
+.EE
+.SH FILES
+.B /dev/wsys/*/label
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/winwatch.c
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR rio (1),
+.IR rio (4),
+.IR regexp (6).
diff --git a/sys/man/1/xd b/sys/man/1/xd
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..cc2d394f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/xd
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+.TH XD 1
+.SH NAME
+xd \- hex, octal, decimal, or ASCII dump
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B xd
+[
+.I option ...
+]
+[
+.BI - "format ...
+] [
+.I file ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Xd
+concatenates and dumps the
+.I files
+(standard input by default)
+in one or more formats.
+Groups of 16 bytes are printed in each of the named formats, one
+format per line.
+Each line of output is prefixed by its address (byte offset)
+in the input file.
+The first line of output for each group is zero-padded; subsequent are blank-padded.
+.PP
+Formats other than
+.B -c
+are specified by pairs of characters telling size and style,
+.L 4x
+by default.
+The sizes are
+.TP \w'2\ or\ w\ \ \ 'u
+.BR 1 " or " b
+1-byte units.
+.PD0
+.TP
+.BR 2 " or " w
+2-byte big-endian units.
+.TP
+.BR 4 " or " l
+4-byte big-endian units.
+.TP
+.BR 8 " or " v
+8-byte big-endian units.
+.PD
+.PP
+The styles are
+.TP 0
+.B o
+Octal.
+.PD0
+.TP
+.B x
+Hexadecimal.
+.TP
+.B d
+Decimal.
+.PD
+.PP
+Other options are
+.TP \w'\fL-a\fIstyle\fLXX'u
+.B -c
+Format as
+.B 1x
+but print
+.SM ASCII
+representations or C escape sequences where possible.
+.TP
+.BI -a style
+Print file addresses in the given style (and size 4).
+.TP
+.B -u
+(Unbuffered) Flush the output buffer after each 16-byte sequence.
+.TP
+.B -s
+Reverse (swab) the order of bytes in each group of 4 before printing.
+.TP
+.B -r
+Print repeating groups of identical 16-byte sequences as the first group
+followed by an asterisk.
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/xd.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR db (1)
+.SH BUGS
+The various output formats don't line up properly in the output of
+.IR xd .
diff --git a/sys/man/1/yacc b/sys/man/1/yacc
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..a965f9537
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/yacc
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
+.TH YACC 1
+.SH NAME
+yacc \- yet another compiler-compiler
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B yacc
+[
+.I option ...
+]
+.I grammar
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Yacc
+converts a context-free grammar and translation code
+into a set of
+tables for an LR(1) parser and translator.
+The grammar may be ambiguous;
+specified precedence rules are used to break ambiguities.
+.PP
+The output file,
+.BR y.tab.c ,
+must be compiled by the C compiler
+to produce a program
+.LR yyparse .
+This program must be loaded with a lexical analyzer function,
+.B yylex(void)
+(often generated by
+.IR lex (1)),
+with a
+.B main(int argc, char *argv[])
+program, and with an error handling routine,
+.BR yyerror(char*) .
+.PP
+The options are
+.TP "\w'\fL-o \fIoutput\fLXX'u"
+.BI -o " output
+Direct output to the specified file instead of
+.BR y.tab.c .
+.TP
+.BI -D n
+Create file
+.BR y.debug ,
+containing diagnostic messages.
+To incorporate them in the parser, compile it with preprocessor symbol
+.B yydebug
+defined.
+The amount of 
+diagnostic output from the parser is regulated by
+value
+.IR n .
+The value 0 reports errors; 1 reports reductions;
+higher values (up to 4) include more information about
+state transitions.
+.TP
+.B -v
+Create file
+.BR y.output ,
+containing a description of the parsing tables and of
+conflicts arising from ambiguities in the grammar.
+.TP
+.B -d
+Create file
+.BR y.tab.h ,
+containing
+.B #define
+statements that associate
+.IR yacc -assigned
+`token codes' with user-declared `token names'.
+Include it in source files other than
+.B y.tab.c
+to give access to the token codes.
+.TP
+.BI -s " stem
+Change the prefix
+.L y 
+of the file names
+.BR y.tab.c ,
+.BR y.tab.h ,
+.BR y.debug ,
+and
+.B y.output
+to
+.IR stem .
+.TP
+.B -S
+Write a parser that uses
+Stdio
+instead of the
+.B print
+routines in libc.
+.PP
+The specification of
+.I yacc
+itself is essentially the same as the UNIX version
+described in the references mentioned below.
+Besides the
+.B -D
+option, the main relevant differences are:
+.IP
+The interface to the C environment is by default through
+.B <libc.h>
+rather than
+.BR <stdio.h> ;
+the
+.B -S
+option reverses this.
+.IP
+The parser accepts
+.SM UTF
+input text (see
+.IR utf (6)),
+which has a couple of effects.
+First, the return value of
+.B yylex()
+no longer fits in a
+.BR short ;
+second, the starting value for non-terminals is now 0xE000 rather than 257.
+.IP
+The generated parser can be recursive: actions can call
+.IR yyparse ,
+for example to implement a sort of
+.B #include
+statement in an interpreter.
+.IP
+Finally, some undocumented inner workings of the parser have been
+changed, which may affect programs that know too much about its structure.
+.SH FILES
+.TF /sys/lib/yaccpars
+.TP
+.B y.output
+.TP
+.B y.tab.c
+.TP
+.B y.tab.h
+.TP
+.B y.debug
+.TP
+.B y.tmp.*
+temporary file
+.TP
+.B y.acts.*
+temporary file
+.TP
+.B /sys/lib/yaccpar
+parser prototype
+.TP
+.B /sys/lib/yaccpars
+parser prototype using stdio
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /sys/src/cmd/yacc.c
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR lex (1)
+.br
+S. C. Johnson and R. Sethi,
+``Yacc: A parser generator'',
+.I
+Unix Research System Programmer's Manual,
+Tenth Edition, Volume 2
+.br
+B. W. Kernighan and Rob Pike,
+.I
+The UNIX Programming Environment,
+Prentice Hall, 1984
+.SH BUGS
+The parser may not have full information when it writes to
+.B y.debug
+so that the names of the tokens returned by
+.L yylex
+may be missing.
diff --git a/sys/man/1/yesterday b/sys/man/1/yesterday
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..7d924ce47
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sys/man/1/yesterday
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+.TH YESTERDAY 1
+.SH NAME
+yesterday, diffy \- print file names from the dump
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B yesterday
+[
+.B -abcCdDs
+] [
+.B -n
+.I daysago
+] [
+.I \-date
+]
+.I files ...
+.PP
+.B diffy
+[
+.B -abcefmnrw
+]
+.I files ...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Yesterday
+prints the names of the
+.I files
+from the most recent dump.
+Since dumps are done early in the morning,
+yesterday's files are really in today's dump.
+For example, if today is March 17, 1992,
+.IP
+.EX
+yesterday /adm/users
+.EE
+.PP
+prints
+.IP
+.EX
+/n/dump/1992/0317/adm/users
+.EE
+.PP
+In fact, the implementation is to select the most recent dump in
+the current year, so the dump selected may not be from today.
+.PP
+When presented with a path of the form
+.BI /n/ fs / path \fR,
+.I yesterday
+will look for
+dump files of the form
+\fL/n/\fIfs\fLdump/\fIyyyy\fL/\fIhhmm\fL/\fIpath\fR.
+.PP
+By default, 
+.I yesterday
+prints the names of the dump files corresponding to the named files.
+The first set of options changes this behavior.
+.TP
+.B -a
+Run
+.IR acme (1)'s
+.I adiff
+to compare the dump files with the named files.
+.TP
+.B -b
+Bind the dump files over the named files.
+.TP
+.B -c
+Copy the dump files over the named files.
+.TP
+.B -C
+Copy the dump files over the named files only when
+they differ.
+.TP
+.B -d
+Run 
+.B diff
+to compare the dump files with the named files.
+.TP
+.B -D
+Run 
+.B diff
+.B -n
+to compare the dump files with the named files.
+.PP
+The
+.I date
+option selects other day's dumps, with a format of
+1, 2, 4, 6, or 8 digits of the form
+.IR d,
+.IR dd ,
+.IR mmdd ,
+.IR yymmdd ,
+or
+.IR yyyymmdd .
+.PP
+The
+.B -n
+option selects the dump
+.I daysago
+prior to the current day.
+.PP
+The
+.B -s
+option selects the most recent snapshot instead of the most
+recent archived dump.  Snapshots may occur more frequently
+than dumps.
+.PP
+.I Yesterday
+does not guarantee that the string it prints represents an existing file.
+.PP
+.I Diffy
+runs
+.IR diff (1)
+with the given options
+to compare yesterday's version of each of the named files
+with today's.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.PP
+Back up to yesterday's MIPS binary of
+.BR vc :
+.IP
+.EX
+yesterday -c /mips/bin/vc
+.EE
+.PP
+Temporarily back up to March 1's MIPS C library to see if a program
+runs correctly when loaded with it:
+.IP
+.EX
+yesterday -b -0301 /mips/lib/libc.a
+rm v.out
+mk
+v.out
+.EE
+.PP
+Find what has changed in the C library since March 1:
+.IP
+.EX
+yesterday -d -0301 /sys/src/libc/port/*.c
+.EE
+.PP
+Find what has changed in the source tree today:
+.IP
+.EX
+diffy -r /sys/src
+.EE
+.SH FILES
+.B /n/dump
+.SH SOURCE
+.B /rc/bin/yesterday
+.br
+.B /rc/bin/diffy
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.IR history (1),
+.IR bind (1),
+.IR diff (1),
+.IR fs (4).
+.SH BUGS
+It's hard to use this command without singing.